Bizhub C500FieldService

SERVICE MANUAL
FIELD SERVICE
8050/CF5001 C500 8150

Confidential for internal use only, do not distribute
2004. 12 Ver. 3.0
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Read carefully the Safety and Important Warning Items described below to understand them before doing service work.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this copier as well as the risk of damage to the copier, Konica Minolta Business Technologies, INC. (hereafter called the KMBT) strongly recommends that all servicing be performed only by KMBT-trained service technicians. Changes may have been made to this copier to improve its performance after this Service Manual was printed. Accordingly, KMBT does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that the information contained in this Service Manual is complete and accurate. The user of this Service Manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to the copier while servicing the copier for which this Service Manual is intended. Therefore, this Service Manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the course of technical training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of the copier properly. Keep this Service Manual also for future service.
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION

In this Service Manual, each of three expressions DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION is defined as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited meaning. When servicing the copier, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment, repair, maintenance, etc.) need to be conducted with utmost care.
DANGER :Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury WARNING:Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury CAUTION :Action having a possibility of suffering a slight wound, medium trouble, and
property damage
Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:
:Precaution when using the copier. :Prohibition when using the copier. :Direction when using the copier.
General precaution
Electric hazard
High temperature
General prohibition
Do not touch with wet hand
Do not disassemble
General instruction
Unplug
Ground/Earth
S-1
SAFETY WARNINGS
1. MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Konica Minolta brand copiers are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is achieved through high-quality design and a solid service network. Copier design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical, physical, and electrical aspects have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving at proper tolerances and safety factors. For this reason, unauthorized modifications involve a high risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such modifications are therefore strictly prohibited. the points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the reasoning behind this policy.
PROHIBITED ACTIONS DANGER

Using any cables or power cord not specified by KMBT.
Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by KMBT. Safety will not be assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury.
Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with wire, metal clips, solder or similar object.
Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between relay contacts)
Disabling safety functions (interlocks, safety circuits, etc.) Safety will not be assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury.
Making any modification to the copier unless instructed by KMBT
Using parts not specified by KMBT
S-2
2.
CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE
Konica Minolta brand copiers are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all applicable safety standards are met, in order to protect the customer and customer engineer (hereafter called the CE) from the risk of injury. However, in daily use, any electrical equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure. In order to maintain safety and reliability, the CE must perform regular safety checks. 2.1 Power Supply
Connection to Power Supply WARNING

Check that mains voltage is as specified. Plug the power cord into the dedicated wall outlet with a capacity greater than the maximum power consumption. If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result. If two or more power cords can be plugged into the wall outlet, the total load must not exceed the rating of the wall outlet. If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result.
kw
Connect power plug directly into wall outlet having same configuration as the plug. Use of an adapter leads to the product connecting to inadequate power supply (voltage, current capacity, grounding), and may result in fire or electric shock. If proper wall outlet is not available, advice the customer to contact qualified electrician for the installation.
Make sure the power cord is plugged in the wall outlet securely. Contact problems may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and the risk of fire.
Ground Lead WARNING

Check whether the copier is grounded properly. If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded copier, you may suffer electric shock while operating the copier. Connect the ground lead to one of the following points: a. Ground terminal of wall outlet b. Ground terminal for which Class D work has been done
S-3
Ground Lead WARNING

Pay attention to the point to which the ground lead is connected. Connecting the ground lead to an improper point such as the points listed below results in a risk of explosion and electric shock: a. Gas pipe (A risk of explosion or fire exists.) b. Lightning rod (A risk of electric shock or fire exists.) c. Telephone line ground (A risk of electric shock or fire exists in the case of lightning.) d. Water pipe or faucet (It may include a plastic portion.)
Power Plug and Cord WARNING

For the products that use the power cord set (inlet type), be sure to follow the directions given below. When securing measure is provided, secure the cord with the fixture properly. a. Be sure to check to see if the power cord is securely inserted into the main body side inlet. b. When the fixing of the cord is indicated in the installation instructions, be sure to fix it securely by using the fixing materials provided in the same package. c. When the power cord is damaged with its sheath broken, be sure to replace it with the specified power cord set. When the power cord is not securely inserted, an abnormal heat may generates due to a poor contact of the cord, thus resulting in a fire. Check whether the power cord is not stepped on or pinched by a table and so on. Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire. Check whether the power cord is damaged. Check whether the sheath is damaged. If the power plug, cord, or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power cord (with plugs on both ends) specified by KMBT. Using the damaged power cord may result in fire or electric shock.
Do not bundle or tie the power cord. Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.
S-4
Power Plug and Cord WARNING

Check whether dust is collected around the power plug and wall outlet. Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing dust may result in fire. Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet hand. The risk of electric shock exists.
When unplugging the power cord, grasp the plug, not the cable. The cable may be broken, leading to a risk of fire and electric shock.
Wiring WARNING
Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power cords in the same outlet. If used, the risk of fire exists. When an extension cord is required, use a specified one. Current that can flow in the extension cord is limited, so using a too long extension cord may result in fire. Do not use an extension cable reel with the cable taken up. Fire may result. 2.2. Installation Requirements
Prohibited Installation Place WARNING

Do not place the copier near flammable materials such as curtains or volatile materials that may catch fire. A risk of fire exists. Do not place the copier in a place exposed to water such as rain water. A risk of fire and electric shock exists.
S-5
When not using product for a long time WARNING

When the copier is not used over an extended period of time (holidays, etc.), switch it off and unplug the power cord. Dust collected around the power plug and outlet may cause fire.
Ventilation CAUTION
The copier generates ozone gas during operation, but it is not sufficient to be harmful to the human body. If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases, ventilate the room. a. When the copier is used in a poorly ventilated room b. When taking a lot of copies c. When using multiple copiers at the same time
Fixing CAUTION
Be sure to lock the caster stoppers. In the case of an earthquake and so on, the copier may slide, leading to a injury.
Inspection before Servicing CAUTION

Before conducting an inspection, read all relevant documentation (service manual, technical notices, etc.) and proceed with the inspection following the prescribed procedure in safety clothes, using only the prescribed tools. Do not make any adjustment not described in the documentation. If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used, the copier may break and a risk of injury or fire exists. Before conducting an inspection, be sure to disconnect the power plugs from the copier and options. When the power plug is inserted in the wall outlet, some units are still powered even if the POWER switch is turned OFF. A risk of electric shock exists.
S-6
Inspection before Servicing CAUTION

The area around the fixing unit is hot. You may get burnt.
Work Performed with the Copier Powered WARNING

Take every care when making adjustments or performing an operation check with the copier powered. If you make adjustments or perform an operation check with the external cover detached, you may touch live or high-voltage parts or you may be caught in moving gears or the timing belt, leading to a risk of injury.
Take every care when servicing with the external cover detached. High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A risk of electric shock exists.
Safety Checkpoints WARNING

Check the exterior and frame for edges, burrs, and other damages. The user or CE may be injured. Be careful not to drop metal chips such as a clip, staple and/or a screw into the inside of the product or its gaps. A short circuit may occurs inside the product, thus resulting in an electric shock and/or a fire. Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage. Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire. Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electrical parts and electrode units such as a charging corona unit. Current can leak, leading to a risk of copier trouble or fire.
Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for any damage. Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.
Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for deterioration and sign of leakage. Current can leak, leading to a risk of trouble or fire. S-7
2
Safety Checkpoints WARNING

Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit incorporating a laser, make sure that the power cord has been disconnected. The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight. Do not remove the cover of the write unit. Do not supply power with the write unit shifted from the specified mounting position. The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight. When replacing a lithium battery, replace it with a new lithium battery specified in the Parts Guide Manual. Dispose of the used lithium battery using the method specified by local authority. Improper replacement can cause explosion. After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied (e.g., optical lamp and fixing lamp), be sure to check the installation state. A risk of fire exists. Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and check whether the interlock functions properly. If the interlock does not function, you may receive an electric shock or be injured when you insert your hand in the copier (e.g., for clearing paper jam).
Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp edges, burrs, or other pointed parts. Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.
Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connectors, etc. that were removed for safety check and maintenance have been reinstalled in the original location. (Pay special attention to forgotten connectors, pinched cables, forgotten screws, etc.) A risk of copier trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.
S-8
Consumables WARNING
Toner and developer are not harmful substances, but care must be taken not to breathe excessive amounts or let the substances come into contact with eyes, etc. It may be stimulative. If the substances get in the eye, rinse with plenty of water immediately. When symptoms are noticeable, consult a physician.
Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire. You may be burned due to dust explosion.
HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS DANGER : HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS

When solution is used for cleaning, be sure to unplug the power cord from the power outlet. Drum cleaner (isopropyl alcohol) and roller cleaner (acetone-based) are highly flammable and must be handled with care. A risk of fire exists. Do not replace the cover or turn the copier ON before any solvent remnants on the cleaned parts have fully evaporated. A risk of fire exists. Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take care not to spill any liquid. If this happens, immediately wipe it off. A risk of fire exists.
When using any solvent, ventilate the room well. Breathing large quantities of organic solvents can lead to discomfort.
S-9
SAFETY INFORMATION
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. This copier is certified as a Class 1 laser product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside this copier is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation.
S-10
SAFETY CIRCUITS
This machine is provided with the following safety circuits to prevent machine faults from resulting in serious accidents. Overall protection circuit Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2), Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3), Fixing lower lamp (L4) overheating prevention circuit
These safety circuits are described below to provide the service engineer with a renewed awareness of them in order to prevent servicing errors that may impair their functions.
1.
Overall protection circuit

CBR1
NF CBR2 8050sf001
1.1 Protection by circuit breaker /1 (CBR1) and circuit breaker /2 (CBR2) CBR1 and CBR2 interrupt the AC line instantaneously when an excessive current flows due to a short in the AC line. CAUTION: The CBR1 and CBR2 functions must not be deactivated under any circumstances.
S-11
2.
Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2), Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3), Fixing lower lamp (L4) overheating prevention circuit
PRCB TH1 TH3 Control section AC driver section ACDB L2 L3 TS1
FHCB
TH2 TH4
TS2 L4 RL1
RL1
8050sf002e
2.1 Protection by software The output voltage from fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) and fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) is read by the CPU. If this voltage is abnormal, L2, L3, and L4 are turned OFF by opening main relay (RL1). CAUTION: The clearance between the fixing upper roller and TH1 and the clearance between the fixing lower roller and TH2 must not be changed. When replacing them, make sure to comply with the specified clearances. The RL1 function must not be deactivated under any circumstances.
2.2 Protection by the hardware circuit The output voltages from fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1), fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2), fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3), and fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4) are compared with the abnormality judgment reference value in the comparator circuit. If the output voltage from TH1, TH2, TH3, or TH4 exceeds the reference value, L2, L3, and L4 are turned OFF by opening RL1. CAUTION: The clearance between the fixing upper roller and TH1 and the clearance between the fixing lower roller and TH2 must not be changed. When replacing them, make sure to comply with the specified clearances. Periodically check the contact between the fixing upper roller and TH3 and the contact between the fixing lower roller and TH4, and replace them if any abnormality is detected. The RL1 function must not be deactivated under any circumstances.
2.3 Protection by thermostat /1 (TS1) and thermostat /2 (TS2) When the temperature of the fixing upper roller exceeds the specified value, TS1 is turned OFF, thus interrupting the power to L2 and L3 directly. When the temperature of the fixing lower roller exceeds the specified value, TS2 is turned OFF, thus interrupting the power to L4 directly. CAUTION: Do not use any other electrical conductor in place of TS1 and TS2.
S-12
INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE

Caution labels shown below are attached in some areas on/in the machine. When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should be taken to avoid burns and electric shock.
8050sf003e
CAUTION You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep yourself away from. Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot be read, contact our Service Office.
S-13
8050sf004e
S-14
8050sf005e
S-15
8050sf006e
S-16
8050sf007e
PS
Unplug the machine before removing platen glass. Debrancher le copieur avant de retirer la vitre d'exposition. Desenchufe la maquina antes de quitar el vidrio.
~ Desconecte a unidade da tomada antes de remover o vidro de exposicao.
8050sf008e
S-17
8050sf009
S-18
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1 IMPORTANT NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1 DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1 SAFETY WARNINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-2 SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-10
SAFETY CIRCUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-11 INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-13 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii Revision history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii Composition of the service manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii Notation of the service manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ix List of major differences between the old type and the new type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii Measures to take in case of an accident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xi
ADJUSTMENT
1.1 Composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1. HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 2. ADJUSTMENTS WHEN REPLACING PARTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 4. MODE CHANGE MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 4.1 5.1 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 Setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Checking method of the P function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 List of adjustment items for 25 mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Setting software DIPSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Paper size setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3 6.5 6.5.1 6.5.2 6.6 6.7 Standard size setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 Non-standard size setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 Wide paper setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 Count reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Change setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 5. CHECKING BY THE P FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 6. 25 MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
PM count setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Data collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 6.7.1 6.7.2 Count of special parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40 Count of each parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47
6.8
Password setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49
i
VI DIAGRAMS
Parts counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
V ERROR CODE LIST
IV JAM CODE LIST
III SERVICE
II SERVICE TOOL
IMPORTANT INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-10
I ADJUSTMENT
CONTENTS 6.9
Telephone number setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49
I ADJUSTMENT
6.10 M/C serial number setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50 6.11 Indication of ROM version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50 6.12 KRDS setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50 6.13 ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50 6.14 Setting date input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51 6.15 Board change mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51 7. 36 MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52 7.1 Setting method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52 Process adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3 7.2.4 7.2.5 7.3 7.3.1 7.3.2 7.3.3 7.3.4 7.3.5 7.3.6 7.4 7.4.1 7.4.2 7.4.3 High voltage adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53 Drum peculiarity adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53 Sensor output check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-59 Exclusive paper setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-59 Recall standard data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-61 Magnification adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-62 Timing adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68 RADF adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-76 Centring adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-78 Non-image area erase check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-80 Recall standard data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-81 Scanner gamma adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82 Printer gamma adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-83 Sharpness adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-88 Contrast adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-89 Image judge adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-89 ACS adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-91 Density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-92 Tone adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-94 Recall standard data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-95 Setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-96 7.2
II SERVICE TOOL
Image adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-62
III SERVICE
Image quality adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82
IV JAM CODE LIST
7.4.4 7.4.5 7.4.6 7.4.7 7.4.8 7.4.9 7.5 7.5.1
Running test mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-96 Test pattern output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-97 Test pattern density setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-106 Finisher adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-106 7.8.1 7.8.2 7.8.3 7.8.4 7.8.5 7.8.6 Stitch and fold stopper adjustment (FS-215/FN-9/FS-606 only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-107 Fold stopper adjustment (FS-215/FN-9/FS-606 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-107 Cover sheet tray size adjustment (PI-110 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-108 Trimming stopper adjustment (TU-109/TMG-3 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-108 Punch adjustment (PK-120/PK-5/PK-507 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-109 Three-folding adjustment (FS-215/FN-9/FS-606 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-111 2 positions staple pitch adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-112
V ERROR CODE LIST
7.6 7.7 7.8
VI DIAGRAMS
7.8.7 7.9 8.1
List output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-112 47 mode/multi mode setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-113 ii

8. 47 MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-113
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7 9.8 9.9
CONTENTS
Adjustment data display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-114 Input check list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-116 Output check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-127 Paper feed roller/BP pressure adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-139 Paper feed height (upper limit) adjustment (bypass) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-140 Pick-up movement amount adjustment (bypass) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-142 Paper feed tray /1 to /3 mis-centering adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-143 FNS adjustment of the bypass conveyance guide plate magnet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-146 FNS adjustment of the bypass gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-147 FNS adjustment of the shift position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-149 FNS adjustment of the paper exit opening solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-150 Paper feed tray/1 to /3 sheet feed pressure adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-144
9. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-139
9.10 FNS adjustment of the position of paper exit arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-152 9.11 FNS adjustment of the position of alignment plate /U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-154 9.12 FNS adjustment of the position of alignment plate /L (only for FS-215/FN-9/FS-606) . . . . . . . 1-156 9.13 FNS adjustment of the stapling position (flat stapling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-158 9.15 FNS adjustment of the stapling position (flat stapling) (only for FS-215/FN-9/FS-606). . . . . . . 1-168 9.16 FNS adjustment of the angle of the folding stopper (only for FS-215/FN-9/FS-606). . . . . . . . . 1-170 9.17 FNS adjustment of the folding force (only for FS-215/FN-9/FS-606) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-172 9.18 FNS adjustment of the three-holding position (only for FS-215/FN-9/FS-606) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-173 9.19 FNS adjustment of the stapler drive belt position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-174 9.20 TU adjustment of the sheet cutting parallelism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-178 9.21 LCT tray mis-centering adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-179 9.22 LCT skew adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-181 9.23 LCT paper feed roller pressure adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-183 9.24 LCT up/down plate horizontal adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-184 9.25 LCT sheet feed pressure adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-185 9.26 LCT paper feed height (upper limit) adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-186 9.27 LCT pick-up release amount adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-188 9.14 FNS adjustment of the stapling position in a vertical direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-160
II
SERVICE TOOL
1.1 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.1.3 1.1.4 1.1.5 2.1 3.1 3.2 3.3 Board used for the ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Data flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 ISW transfer type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Instances of ISW transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Setup procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
1. Description of the ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2. USB ISW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 What is the USB ISW? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 What is the Internet ISW? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Main features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 iii
2
3. INTERNET ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
VI DIAGRAMS
V ERROR CODE LIST
IV JAM CODE LIST
III SERVICE
II SERVICE TOOL
I ADJUSTMENT
Hard disk check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-114
CONTENTS 3.4
Initial setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 3.4.1 3.4.2 Setting on Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Setting on Web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Transmitting E-Mail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 How to use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 Prior announcement to administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 If power failure occurs during data rewriting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 ISW of multiple programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 If ISW fails in low power mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 What is a proxy server? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 Authentication of proxy server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 Type and command list for authentication on proxy server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
I ADJUSTMENT
3.5
Internet ISW using E-Mail remote notification system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 3.5.1 3.5.2
3.6
Internet ISW using Web utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 3.6.1 3.6.2
II SERVICE TOOL
3.7
Precautions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 3.7.1 3.7.2 3.7.3 3.7.4
3.8
Proxy server authentication in Internet ISW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 3.8.1 3.8.2 3.8.3 3.8.4
III SERVICE
4. MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 What is the Mail remote notification system?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 Operation environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 Initial setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 How to use the Mail remote notification system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 Disabling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
IV JAM CODE LIST
III SERVICE
1. SERVICE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 Service schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Maintenance items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Periodic check items (main body) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Periodic check items (DF-319/AFR-20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Periodic check items (LT-211/C-208) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Periodic check items (FS-115/215/FN-120/9/FS-513/606) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Periodic check items (PI-110) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Periodic check items (TU-109/TMG-3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Replacement parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
V ERROR CODE LIST
1.10 Important maintenance parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 2. COPY MATERIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 2.1 2.2 2.3 Product. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 PM parts kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
3. SERVICE MATERIAL LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
VI DIAGRAMS
4. CE TOOLS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
iv
CONTENTS
IV JAM CODE LIST

1. JAM CODE LIST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
ERROR CODE LIST
1. ERROR CODE LIST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 2. ABOUT ABNORMAL UNIT ISOLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
VI DIAGRAMS
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 2.1 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 DF-319/AFR-20 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22 LT-211/C-208 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23 FS-115/FS-215/FN-120/FN-9/FS-513/FS-606 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24 TU-109/TMG-3 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28 PK-120/PK-5/PK-507 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31 2.1.2 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 Connector in the board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
2. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
DF-319/AFR-20 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49 LT-211/C-208 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50 FS-115/FS-215/FN-120/FN-9/FS-513/FS-606 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51 TU-109/TMG-3 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52 PK-120/PK-5/PK-507 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 timing chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53 DF-319/AFR-20 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54 LT-211/C-208 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61 FS-115/215/FN-120/9/FS-513/606 timing chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62 TU-109/TMG-3 timing chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66 PK-120/PK-5/PK-507 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68 DF-319/AFR-20 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69 LT-211/C-208 Overall Wiring Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71 FS-115/215/FN-120/9/FS-513/606 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73 TU-109/TMG-3 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75 PK-120/PK-5/PK-507 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Overall Wiring Diagram (1/8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-1 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Overall Wiring Diagram (2/8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-3 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Overall Wiring Diagram (3/8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-5 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Overall Wiring Diagram (4/8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-7 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Overall Wiring Diagram (5/8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-9 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Overall Wiring Diagram (6/8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-11 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Overall Wiring Diagram (7/8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-13 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Overall Wiring Diagram (8/8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-15 v
2
4. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69
5. APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-1
VI DIAGRAMS
V ERROR CODE LIST
IV JAM CODE LIST
3. TIMING CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
III SERVICE
2.1.1
Relay connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
II SERVICE TOOL
1. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
I ADJUSTMENT
CONTENTS
III SERVICE
II SERVICE TOOL
I ADJUSTMENT
Blank page
VI DIAGRAMS
V ERROR CODE LIST
IV JAM CODE LIST
vi
Introduction
Introduction
Revision history
After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance. Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark: To indicate clearly a section revised, show A number within to the left of the revised section. represents the number of times the revision has been made.
1
To indicate clearly a section revised, show A number within

1
in the lower outside section of the corresponding page.
represents the number of times the revision has been made.
Note: Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted. When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0: The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted. When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0: The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
2004/12 2004/04 2003/08 Date
3.0 2.0 1.0 Service manual Ver. Revision mark
Change of design and correction of errors in writing Change of design and correction of errors in writing Issue of the first edition Descriptions of revision vii
Introduction
Composition of the service manual

This service manual consists of the following sections and chapters: <Theory of Operation section> I OUTLINE: II UNIT EXPLANATION: III DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY: System configuration, product specifications, unit configuration, paper path, drive system, and image creation process * Configuration of each unit, explanation of the operating system, and explanation of the control system Removal/reinstallation method of periodically replaced parts and major parts. As information for the CE to have a better understanding of the product, this part outlines the object of each functions, its role, the relationship between the electrical system and the mechanical system, and the timing of the operations of each part, and then explains the removal and reinstallation procedure of the periodically replaced parts and the major parts. The contents of * are described only in the service manual of the main body. <Field service section> I ADJUSTMENT: II SERVICE TOOL: III SERVICE: IV JAM CODE LIST: V ERROR CODE LIST: VI DIAGRAMS: General description of items to be adjusted, 25 mode, 36 mode, 47 mode, and other adjustments (mechanical adjustments) Various types of ISW *, and mail remote notification system Service schedule, copy materials, service materials, and CE tools * List of jam codes, causes, operations when a jam occurs, and removal methods List of error codes, causes, operations when a warning is issued, and expected defective parts Parts layout drawing, connector layout drawing, timing chart, and overall wiring diagram As information that the CE requires at the job site (customer's premise), this part explains the service schedule and its contents, the object and role of each adjustment, error codes and supplementary information.
viii
Introduction
Notation of the service manual

1. Product name In this manual, each of the products is described as follows: (1) IC board: Standard printer Main body or this machine (3) Microsoft Windows 95: Microsoft Windows 98: Microsoft Windows Me: Microsoft Windows NT 4.0: Microsoft Windows 2000: Microsoft Windows XP: Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT 4.0 or Windows NT Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows 95/98/Me Windows NT 4.0/2000 Windows NT/2000/XP Windows 95/98/Me/ NT/2000/XP 2. Brand name The company names and product names mentioned in this manual are the brand name or the registered trademark of each company. 3. Electrical parts and signals Those listed by way of example below are not exhaustive, but only some instances among many. Classification Load symbol IN PS Sensor PS Door PS1 SIG 102 PS 24V Solenoid SD DRV SOL 24V Clutch CL DRV SOL 24V CONT Motor M DRV1 DRV2 D1 D2 Drive signals of two kinds Power to drive the solenoid Drive signal Power to drive the clutch Drive signal Power to drive the motor Drive signal Sensor detection signal Ex. of signal name Description (2) KonicaMinolta 8050/CF5001/bizhub PROC500/8150:
When the description is made in combination of the OS's mentioned above:
ix
Introduction Classification Load symbol
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Ex. of signal name _U _V _W DRV1 DRV2 DRV3 D1 D2 D3 D4 DRV A DRV A DRV B DRV B A /A B /B AB BB CLK, PLL LCK, Lock, LD FR EM, Lock, LCK, LD BLK P/S S/S SS CW/CCW, F/R ENB TEMP_ER PLL control signal PLL lock signal Forward/reverse rotation signal Motor lock abnormality Drive brake signal Power/stop Operating load start/stop signal Rotational direction switching signal Effective signal Motor temperature abnormality detection signal Analog signal Signal ground Power ground Data carrier detection Serial input Serial output Data terminal operation available Signal ground (earth) Data set ready Transmission request signal Consent transmission signal Ring indicator Serial transmission data Serial reception data x
Description
Drive signals (control signals) of three kinds
Drive signals (control signals) of four kinds Motor, phases A and B control signals
Motor
Others Ground
TH1.S, ANG SG, S.GND, S_GND PG, P.GND DCD SIN SOUT DTR GND DSR, DSET RTS CTS RI TXD RXD
Serial communication
Measures to take in case of an accident
Measures to take in case of an accident

1. If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately take emergency measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage. 2. If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer, an on-site evaluation must be carried out quickly and KMBT must be notified. 3. To determine the cause of the accident, conditions and materials must be recorded through direct onsite checks, in accordance with instructions issued by KMBT. 4. For reports and measures concerning serious accidents, follow the regulations given in "Serious Accident Report/Follow-up Procedures."
xi
List of major differences
List of major differences between the old type and the new type
Classification Material Developer (each color) Toner (each color) Drum Registration/ ADU/Reverse/ Paper exit Reverse/exit roller /2 Paper exit roller Periodic replacement cycle of paper exit roller Exit paper upper face cooling fan Secondary transfer Control Secondary transfer pressure cam Printer control board Printer control program Image control program Fixing Paper exit roller /Up Paper exit roller / Up replacement cycle *1 For the old type, the paper exit roller is replaced only when it is provided with a kit against uneven wax. Resin roller Ceramic coated roller Every 200,000 copies/prints Used exclusively by the old type Used exclusively by the new type Used exclusively by the old type Used exclusively by the new type White Cam distance: Small Spring pressure: Large Black Cam distance: Large Spring pressure: Small Not provided Provided *1 Registration roller ADU reverse roller Used exclusively by the old type Used exclusively by the new type Common to Old type/New type Torque limiter not provided Rubber roller (Driven roller is of resin) Rubber roller (Driven roller is of resin) Normal Every 1,000,000 copies/prints Torque limiter provided Spike roller (metal) (Driven roller is of rubber) Spike roller (metal) (Driven roller is of rubber) Surface fluorine-treated Every 200,000 copies/prints Old type New type
Used exclusively by the old type Used exclusively by the new type
Used exclusively by the old type Used exclusively by the new type
The discrimination of the old type from the new type is made according to the list of product numbers as shown below. The judgement is made based on the upper 4-digit alphanumeric characters of the serial number. And also in this manual the model name is not given, but only "Old type" and "New type" given. Model name 8050 CF5001 C500 8150 Product number Old type 65AE, 65AJ, 65AF, 65AN, 65AK, 65AT, 65AP 65BE, 65BF 65LT, 65LU 65LQ 65LE, 65LF, 65LJ, 65LN, 65LG 65LK, 65LP New type
xii
HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT SECTION is shut off. So, be sure to unplug the power cord machine with the power supplied, be careful of
ADJUSTMENT
1. HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT SECTION

1.1 Composition
the scan of the exposure unit and be sure not to get caught by the gear. 2. The fixing section may be very hot. Be careful not to get burnt when handling it. 3. The developing unit is strongly magnetized. Be careful not to bring a watch and instrument near to the unit. 4. Be careful not to damage the drum with a tool. 5. Be careful not to touch IC directly with bare hands.
This part "Adjustment" describes items to be adjusted and their method of adjustment that are required by this machine and gives detailed explanations. A. Checking before starting work When conducting claims in the field, it is necessary to check in advance the following: 1. Are the power source and voltage secured in accordance with the specifications? 2. Is the power source properly grounded? 3. Is any equipment that consumes repeatedly a lot of electricity connected to the same power source? (e.g.: Electric noise sources such as elevator and air conditioner) 4. Are environmental conditions suitable for the machine? High temperature and high humidity, direct sunlight, ventilation, etc. Levelness of the location on which the machine is installed. 5. Does the cause of poor images lie in the original itself? 6. Is density selected properly? 7. Is the original glass stained? 8. Is proper paper used for copy? 9. Are copy materials replaced with new ones at their life? (e.g.: Developer, drum, cleaning blade, etc.) 10. Is toner filled? B. Checkpoints when conducting on-site service Due attention should be paid to the following when repairing the machine. 1. In this machine, when the main power switch (SW1) is turned off, only one side of the AC line 1-1
2. ADJUSTMENTS WHEN REPLACING PARTS

Adjustments and setting are required when there occurs a claim for poor image quality. However, these adjustments (including checking) and setting are also required when a part is replaced with a new one. [How to use the tables] Each item represents the following: 1. Mode Shows which mode is used for adjustments. "25": 25 mode "36": 36 mode "47": 47 mode 2. A circle " " in the table , ................. : Shows that the order of priority has been specified for adjustments (including checking) and setting. (Empty circle) : Shows that adjustments (including checking) and setting can be done independently.
I ADJUSTMENT
from the power outlet. Also, when operating the
LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS
3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

I ADJUSTMENT
This table shows the list of adjustment items when replacing a part. Items are numbered in " ority if there is any.
Drum cartridge (drum) /Y, M, C, K Replacement parts
" by the pri-
Adjustment items
PM count Parts counter
PM counter resetting PM cycle set Count of special parts
25 1st transfer roller /Y, M, C, K Fixing cleaning unit Developer /Y, M, C, K Decurler roller
ISW Board change mode Process adjustment
Drum peculiarity adjustment
Image adjustment
Magnification adjustment
Timing adjustment
Blade setting mode LD bias adjustment Automatic gamma adjustment (0) Automatic developer charge L detection initial auto. adjustment Initial drum rotation Printer vertical mag. adjustment Printer horizontal mag. adjustment Belt line speed adjustment Fixing line speed adjustment Printer lead edge timing adj. Auto. color registration adj. Color registration manual adjustment Printer gamma offset adj. Printer gamma sensor adj. Printer screen gradation adj. Dot detect adjustment Color text adjustment
36 5 3 1 2
2 7
3*3 4 3 4 5 6
Image quality adjustment
Scanner gamma adjustment Printer gamma adjustment
Sharpness adjustment Image judge adjustment ACS adjustment FNS stapler position adjustment Setting powder application Mirror unit positioning (require the jig)
Other adjustment
1 1 1
*1 *2 *3
After replacing the developer, be sure that you do not make any copies until you have first performed the L detection adjustment. When replacing memory board (MB), be sure to replace the developer, 1st transfer roller /Y, M, C, K, and fixing cleaning unit. When adjust the belt line speed adjustment, be sure to adjust the fixing line speed adjustment and auto color registration adj.
When replacing the overall control board (OACB) due to the OACB being damaged, the memory board (MB) that was installed on the damaged OACB should be used on the new OACB. Contact the service manager of the authorized distributor if it is considered that the MB is also damaged. Never perform the 47 mode - 92 (output).
1-2
Belt cleaning blade
Developer *1
Transfer belt
Mode
8*3 9
1 7 2 3 4 0 2 1 1st transfer roller /Y, M, C, K Image correction unit Charging corona /Y, M, C, K Fixing roller /U, L Fixing cleaning unit Decurler roller 5 6 1 7 Write unit /K Write unit /Y, M, C Dust-proof glass /Y, M, C, K 2 3 7 6 5 1 4 CCD unit Each scanner mirror Exposure lamp (L1) Original glass 1 2 Overall control board (OACB) 1 2 Printer control board (PRCB) Image processing board (IPB) 1 2 Operation board /1 (OB1) 1 Memory board (MB) *2 1 Registration roller RADF control board (DFCB) FNS control board (FNSCB) Stapler unit 4 3 2 3*3 2*3 4 3 1 6 4 5 1 2
5 6
Drum cartridge (drum) /Y, M, C, K Developer, Transfer belt, Belt cleaning blade
1-3
2 3 7 6 5 4 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 2 3
LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS
I ADJUSTMENT
MODE CHANGE MENU
4. MODE CHANGE MENU

I ADJUSTMENT
4.1
Setting method
5. CHECKING BY THE P FUNCTION

The P function is a function that allows you to confirm the following various numeric values by using the P button. [1] Total counter [2] Full color counter [3] Mono color counter [4] Monochrome counter [5] Copier counter [6] Printer counter
From this screen, the following modes can be selected without turning off/on the power. "1 Basic screen" "2 36 mode" "3 25 mode" "4 Key operator mode" "5 47 mode" A. Procedure 1. Turn ON the main power switch (SW1) and the sub power switch (SW2). 2. Press the P button and wait until "Enter 4-digit password to change mode" appears. 3. Input 9272 as the password and press the START button. (The password is fixed and cannot be changed.) "Mode changing menu screen" is displayed. 4. Press any desired key. 5. To return to the "Mode changing menu screen," press the P button and wait until the "Mode changing menu screen" appears. 6. After completion of adjustment, press the [Exit] key to return to the basic screen.
5.1
Checking method of the P function
A. Procedure 1. Turn ON the main power switch (SW1) and the sub power switch (SW2). 2. Press the P button. 3. "Counter list screen" appears. 4. Press the ! button in "Counter list screen," and the PM counter is displayed. 5. To output the counter value list, press the [Counter list output] key. 6. Pressing the [Exit] key, or the stop or clear button returns to the basic screen.
1-4
25 MODE
6. 25 MODE
6.1 List of adjustment items for 25 mode
Adjustment item menu 1. Software SW setting 2. Paper size setting 3. PM count 4. Data collection 1. Count reset 2. Change setting 1. Total count of each paper setting 2. Copy count of each paper size 3. Print count of each paper size 4. RADF count 5. Page fill of each section 6. JAM data of time series 7. JAM count 8. Count of each copy mode 9. SC count 10. JAM count of each section 11. SC count of each section 5. Parts counter 6. Password setting 1. Count of special parts 2. Count of each parts 1. Key operator password 2. EKC master key code 3. Weekly timer password 7. Telephone number setting 8. M/C serial number setting 1. Service centre Telephone number 2. Service centre FAX number 1. Main body 2. Option tray 3. RADF 4. Finisher 9. Indication of ROM version 10. KRDS setting 11. ISW 12. Setting date input 13. Board change mode See the KRDS manual provided separately 4 digits 8 digits 4 digits 16 digits 16 digits Remarks See the "List of software DIPSW". LCT paper size setting
1-5
I ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE
6.2
I ADJUSTMENT
Setting method
6.3
Setting software DIPSW
This machine is provided with the 25 mode as an adjustment method. This mode is used when the memory board (MB) is rewritten or various settings are made.
A. Setting method The software DIPSW is set on "Software SW setting screen." Note:
A. Procedure 1. Turn OFF the sub power switch (SW2) with the main power switch (SW1) left ON. 2. While pressing the numeric keys 2 and 5 at the same time, turn on the SW2. the "25 mode menu screen" appears. At this point, the machine enters the 25 mode with normal copy operations unavailable. 3. Press the item keys on the liquid crystal display (LCD). A setting screen corresponding to each item appears. 4. Confirm the input data on the setting screen of each item. 5. Turn off the SW2 to release the 25 mode. 6. New data will be effective after restarting.
Please note that DIPSW bits are written into the memory board (MB) each time a change is made. B. Meaning of the values displayed on the screen
[1]
[1] [2] [3] [4]
[2]
[3]
[4]
8050fs1026e
DIPSW number Bit number (0 to 7) Bit data : 1:ON, 0:OFF 8-bit switch values in indicated in hexadecimals from 00 to FF.
C. Procedure 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [1. Software SW setting] key. 3. "Software SW setting screen" Select a DIPSW number by using the arrow key on the left. 4. Select a bit number of the DIPSW by using the arrow key on the right. 5. Select the ON (1) or OFF (0) of the DIPSW by using the [ON] or [OFF] key. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "25 mode menu screen". For each function of the DIPSW, see "List of software DIPSW."
1
1-6
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 List of software DIPSW Note: Be sure not to change bits data with no particular reference made of the function. Bit number of the default values in parentheses is the default value for the new type.
25 MODE
DIPSW No. Bit DIPSW1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DIPSW2 0 1 2
Functions
0 *1 *1 Not prohibited *2 *2 *2 Disconnected
1 *1 *1 Prohibited *2 *2 *2 Connected
Default values Japan 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Inch 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Metric 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Print stop method after toner supply or waste toner full display Prohibition of printing when the PM count is reached Print number setting until printing is prohibited after PM is displayed Hard disk connection Switchover of the main body paper exit speed (measures against uneven wax)
For machines with For machines with measures not taken measures taken Speed increased while Speed not increased in the paper exit while in the paper exit For machines with measures taken Reflective type *4 *4 Latched Requested Enabled For machines with measures not taken Photo interrupter type *4 *4 Unlatched Not requested Disabled
Paper exit full sensor (PS12) type (Measure against uneven wax)
4 5 6 7 DIPSW3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Switchover of the rotational speed of the polygon motor SC latch (SC34/35/36) Password request for 25, 36, 47 mode (password: 9272) 47 mode 15-01, 02 counter clear
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1-7
I ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE DIPSW No. Bit Functions
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 0 Disabled Enabled Enabled Count as 1 1 Enabled Disabled Disabled Count as 2 Default values Japan Inch 0 (1) 0 1 0 1 1 0 * Metric 0 (1) 0 0 1 0 0 0 * 0 (1) 0 0 0 0 0 1 *
I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW4
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Recovery from removal of the key counter APS when change magnification Change of fixed magnifications setting in key operator mode Large size paper counting method (Other than PM counter)
DIPSW5
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Image background restraint (toner density) Y Image background restraint (toner density) M Image background restraint (toner density) C Image background restraint (toner density) K Change of the size of the large size paper
*27 Standard *27 Standard *27 Standard *27 Standard B4, 8.5 x 14 or larger
*27 Restrained *27 Restrained *27 Restrained *27 Restrained A3, 11 x 17 or larger
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
DIPSW6
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1-8
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 DIPSW No. Bit DIPSW7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DIPSW8 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DIPSW9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DIPSW10 0 Page memory reservation at power on 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Change of the size of the large size paper (Other than PM counter) Black characters for printer output (IP) B4 / 8 / x 14 or larger *28
12
25 MODE 1 *33 Restrained *33 Restrained *33 Restrained *33 Restrained Count as 2 Immediate stop jam Same as DIPSW9-0 *5 *5 *6 *6 *6 *6 94MB (177MB when MU-412 is installed) A3 / 11X17 or larger *28 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 * 0 0 * 0 0 * 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Default values 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
Functions Image background restraint (potential difference) Y Image background restraint (potential difference) M Image background restraint (potential difference) C Image background restraint (potential difference) K Large size paper PM counting method Operation when the key counter is removed (copier) Operation when the key counter is removed (IP) Message switchover Copy quantity limit selection
0 *33 Standard *33 Standard *33 Standard *33 Standard Count as 1 Same as the stop button Ignored *5 *5 *6 *6 *6 *6 No reservation
* Refer to attached page
1-9
I ADJUSTMENT
Japan
Inch
Metric
Destination
Counter PM counter
Mode Color B/W Color B/W Color B/W Color B/W Color B/W Color B/W Color B/W Color B/W
Japan Other than PM counter PM counter Europe Other than PM counter PM counter U.S.A Other than PM counter PM counter Others Other than PM counter
Number of large size count A3/11x17 B4/8.5x14 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Default value of DIPSW 5-5-0 8-6-1 4-7-0 10-3-0 5-5-0 8-6-1 4-7-0 10-3-0 5-5-0 8-6-1 4-7-1 10-3-1 5-5-0 8-6-1 4-7-1 10-3-0
25 MODE DIPSW No. Bit Functions Filter for jagged edges on slanting lines 5 6 7 DIPSW12 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DIPSW13 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DIPSW14 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 F4 size setting Jam code display
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 0 Disabled Disabled Disabled *7 Screen A5, A4R A6R 8.5 x 14 *8 *8 *9 *9 8.5 x 11 / B5R 8.5 x 11 / B5R B4, 11 x 17 / B5, 8K / 16K / 16KR 8.5 x 11/B5R B4, 11 x 17 / B5, 8K/16K / 16KR 8.5 x 11 / B5R B4, 11 x 17 / B5, 8K / 16K / 16KR 8.5 x 11 / B5R 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Size detection switchover 5 (main body) Size detection switchover 5 (bypass) Size detection switchover 5 (platen) Size detection switchover 5 (ADF) Size detection switchover 5 (PI) 1 Enabled Enabled Enabled *7 Error diffusion 5.5 x 8.5, 8.5x11R Post card F4 *8 *8 *9 *9 Default values Japan Inch 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 Metric 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW11
0 1 2 3 4
Adjustment of the image quality in the key operator mode Black text screen with overlay function Size detection switchover 1 Size detection switchover 2 Size detection switchover 3 Size detection switchover 4
B4, 11 x 17 / B5, 8K / 16K / 16KR
B4, 11 x 17 / B5, 8K / 16K / 16KR
1-10
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 DIPSW No. Bit DIPSW15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DIPSW16 0 1 KRDS connection Remote diagnostic system selection Recognizing the copy reservation function/coin vendor 2 3 4 5 6 7 DIPSW17 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DIPSW18 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Tray 1 faulty part isolation Tray 2 faulty part isolation Tray 3 faulty part isolation Tray 4 (LCT) faulty part isolation Folding, stitch & folding, tri-fold, trimmer faulty part isolation PI faulty part isolation HDD faulty part isolation Normal Normal Unavailable Unavailable 0 0 0 0 Density selection at scanning the tabed paper Coin vendor type Counting of the key counter in the printer mode (IP) Display of the total count start date (P function) NIC selection for E-Mail KRDS Summer time setting *11 *11 *11 *11 *12 *12 *12 Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal *11 *11 *11 *11 *12 *12 *12 Unavailable Unavailable Unavailable Unavailable Unavailable 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 IP NIC Copier NIC 0 0 0 0 0 0 Displayed Not displayed 0 0 Copy reservation Copy reservation function enabled function prohibited Coin vendor disabled Coin vendor enabled Parallel Not counted Serial Counted 0 0 0 0 0 0 Functions Selection of the KRDS type FNS alarm stop method 0 Telephone line *10 *10 Disconnected KRDS 1 E-mail *10 *10 Connected RD mode
25 MODE Default values 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
communication communication
1-11
I ADJUSTMENT
Japan
Inch
Metric
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 0 *13 *13 *13 PK faulty part isolation Default resolution of the IP scanner Group stapling mode Image scanning area with shift function 2 3 4 5 Selection of the stamped page number Keyboard layout Periodical black toner band creation on the transfer belt Switchover of the fixing control table (Old type only) 6 7 the tray *30 Measures Based on original ABC layout *29 Normal Based on transfer paper QWERTY layout *29 Increased at the edges *30 Measures 1 1 1 against uneven against uneven wax not provided wax provided *31 Provided Provided Enabled Not displayed Enabled 6 not applicable 0 0 0 1 0 0 (1) 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 (1) 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 (1) 1 0 0 0 0 0 Front and back registration of *31 Not provided Paper exit cooling fan (M61, 62, 63) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 LCT size setting in the key operator mode Display of the original count 210 to 256 g/m paper exit with its face up Type of paper selection with APS not applicable
2
1 *13 *13 *13 Unavailable *14 *14 Enabled * 15 Original priority
Default values Japan Inch 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Metric 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW19
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Fixing upper and lower roller temperature selection
Normal *14 *14 Disabled *15 Normal
DIPSW20
0 1
DIPSW21
Not provided Disabled Displayed Disabled
*34 Special paper *34 Paper weight
1-12
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 DIPSW No. Bit DIPSW22 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Image reference position for the non-standard size original Function of the power save button Operation when FNS runs out of staple 7 DIPSW23 0 1 2 3 4 IP gamma correction when machine is powered ON Output when EKC (ECM) user ID is unmatched (IP) Precision of the color registration automatic correction (periodical correction) Control of the color registration automatic correction (periodical correction) Main scan correction of the color registration automatic correction (periodic correction) 5 6 7 DIPSW24 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DIPSW25 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 IP gamma correction Job memory registration of the special paper setting on the bypass tray Vs/Vp switch control Image stabilization control timing Color registration correction control Color registration fine correction De-humid heater *21 Disabled *22 *22 *23 *23 Yes ON *21 Enabled *22 *22 *23 *23 No OFF 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 *20 Enabled Disabled *20 Disabled Enabled 0 0 0 0 *19 Enabled *19 Disabled 0 0 *18 Enabled *18 Disabled 0 0 Enabled (counted as the other user) *17 Normal Disabled (registered in JOB list) *17 Fine 0 0 0 0 0 0 Staple supply request Not requested Selecting between staple supply or staple release Requested 0 0 0 0 0 0 Functions IP address setting Number of punch holes 0 Disabled *16 *16 selection Enabled 1 Enabled *16 *16 ADF Disabled 0 0
25 MODE Default values 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0
Based on user Based on APS at
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1-13
I ADJUSTMENT
Japan
Inch
Metric
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 0 *24 Disabled *24 Disabled 1 *24 Enabled *24 Enabled Default values Japan Inch 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 Metric 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Not correspond Not included Restricted Included Not restricted 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 Correspond 1
I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW26
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DIPSW27
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DIPSW28
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Toner refresh mode (at job end) Toner refresh mode (periodical) Printer gamma offset adjustment PK punch mode restriction Toner refresh mode cycle (periodical) Increase transfer current against white spots image (Old type only) Include of proof copy to the set copy quantity Restriction of the display of the 25 mode data correction
*25 Only high light *25 Whole area Enabled *24 Disabled *24
DIPSW29
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DIPSW30
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1-14
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 DIPSW No. Bit DIPSW31 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DIPSW32 0 1 Reset condition for the special paper setting of the bypass tray 2 3 Measures against paper reverse/exit jam 4 5 6 7 Functions 0 Auto reset, reset button, tray selection, power OFF 0 1 0 1 1 Power OFF
25 MODE Default values 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 1
For machines with For machines with measures not taken measures taken Rubber roller Spike roller
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
1-15
I ADJUSTMENT
Japan
Inch
Metric
25 MODE *1
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 *6 Copy quantity limit selection Mode 1-3 0 0 1 1 1-2 0 1 0 1 No limit 1 sheet 3 sheets 5 sheets 9 sheets 10 sheets 20 sheets 30 sheets 50 sheets 99 sheets 9-7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9-6 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 9-5 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 9-4 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1
Print stop method after toner supply or waste toner full display Mode
I ADJUSTMENT
Stops after ejecting paper in the machine Stops at a break between copy set Stops at the end of the current job Does not stop
*2
Print number setting until printing is prohibited after PM is displayed Mode 1-7 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1-6 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1-5 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1
No limit No limit No limit No limit No limit
1,000 prints 2,000 prints 3,000 prints 4,000 prints 5,000 prints 1,000 prints 1,000 prints 1,000 prints
*7
Black text screen with overlay function When using the overlay of the applied function, the image creation method of black characters is switched between the error diffusion and the screen. Mode 12-6 0 1
Screen Error diffusion *4 Switchover of the rotational speed of the polygon motor Mode 1/1 speed 1/1 speed 2/3 speed 1/2 speed 2-7 0 0 1 1 2-6 0 1 0 1 A5R B6R 5.5 x 8.5R *5 Message switchover Mode Please insert key counter Please insert copy card Please insert coin Please insert key counter 0 1 1 1 0 1 9-3 0 9-2 0 8 x 13 8.25 x 13 8.125 x 13.25 8.5 x 13 *9 F4 size setting Mode 13-6 0 0 1 1 *8 Size detection switchover 4 Mode 13-4 0 0 1 1
13-3 0 1 0 1
13-5 0 1 0 1
1-16
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 *10 FNS alarm stop method This setting is used to determine when to stop if a FNS full alarm is detected. Functions detected are; Lower limit of the FNS tray, the number of the FNS trays, FNS booklet tray, PK punch scraps, TU scraps and TU stacker Mode Stops immediately after detection Stops at a break between copy set after detection Does not stop while in printing Does not stop while in printing 1 1 1 0 *13 0 1 15-4 0 15-3 0 80 40 (most lighter) 60 100 120 160 200 255 (most darker) *12
25 MODE Density selection when scanning the tabed
Mode
17-6 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
17-5 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
17-4 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Fixing upper and lower roller temperature selection Temperature up: Decrease a insufficient fixing or fixing winding jam Temperature down: Decrease paper exit curl-
*11
Summer time setting Mode 17-3 17-2 17-1 17-0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 *14 Mode -30C (-15C) -20C (-10C) -10C (-5C) Standard Upper roller: standard (+5C) Lower roller: +10C (+5C) Standard (+10C) Standard (-25C) Standard (-20C) Note:
ing or waving
0 minute 10 minutes 20 minutes 30 minutes 40 minutes 50 minutes 60 minutes 70 minutes 80 minutes 90 minutes 100 minutes 110 minutes 120 minutes 130 minutes 140 minutes 150 minutes
Parentheses are setting value for the new type.
19-3 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
19-2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
19-1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Default resolution of the IP scanner Mode 19-7 0 0 1 1 19-6 0 1 0 1
400dpi 600 dpi 200 dpi 300 dpi
1-17
I ADJUSTMENT
paper
25 MODE *15 Image scanning area with shift function
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 *19 Main scan correction of the color registration auto correction (periodical correction) The color registration corrections, in the main scanning direction that are periodically performed can be omitted. This is used temporarily when there is a registration error along the main scan as a result of a trouble around 20-1 0 1 Enabled Disabled the transfer belt unit, or when separating faulty points. Mode 23-4 0 1
I ADJUSTMENT
Normal: Compare the original size and the transfer paper size and the smaller one is to be the image area. Original priority: Original size is to be the image area. Mode Normal Original priority
*16 Number of punch holes Mode 2 holes (for Japan) 3 holes (for inch area) 4 holes (for metric area) 22-2 0 0 1 1 22-1 0 1 0 1 *20 IP gamma correction In order to separate defective items when there is poor images sent from IP. The gamma correction can be omitted. The gamma correction table is stored in the printer controller. *17 Precision of the color registration automatic correction (periodical correction) "Fine" is used when the precision of the color registration correction that is periodically conducted is increased with the amount of error reduced. However, it takes about 2 minutes longer for correction. Mode Normal Fine 23-2 0 1 *21 Vs/Vp switch control This Vs/Vp switch control is used when there is an image erasure around a solid image in *18 Color registration auto correction control (periodical correction) Down time while in the continuous printing is reduced with the color registration correction omitted that is periodically performed (color registration correction at power ON is not omitted). Mode Enabled Disabled 23-3 0 1 Disabled Enabled the half-tone section in early stage after the change of developer. Mode 24-1 0 1 Enabled Disabled Mode 23-5 0 1 Note: When installing the printer controller, be sure that the setting is made to "1."
1-18
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 *22 Image stabilization control timing Correction made: Correction is performed by suspending print at specified print. No correction made: Correction is omitted temporarily to reduce down time when the machine cannot be used with SC due to the malfunction of the drum potential sensor or gamma sensor. No correction while in printing: Correction that is performed by suspending print at every specified print is performed after the print job to reduce down time. Mode Correction made Correction not made No correction while in printing 1 1 24-3 0 0 1 24-2 0 1 0 DIPSW 28-3 Toner refresh mode (periodical) Disabled Enabled *24 Toner refresh mode
25 MODE
each color), rough image, white spot or toner spillage tend to occur due to toner deterioration. The effective measure against these are as follows. DIPSW 28-2 Toner refresh mode (at Job end) For the colors of which print coverage of the previous job is 5% or less (convert into A4), solid toner of the difference amount from the 5% is developed to consume toner. Mode 28-2 0 1
Check the average print coverage for each color at prescribed distance of developing sleeve drive develops the toner amount
*23
Color registration correction control Correction made: Correction is performed by suspending print at specified print. No correction made: Correction is omitted temporarily to reduce down time when the machine cannot be used with SC due to malfunctions around the color registration sensor. No correction while in printing: Correction that is performed by suspending print at every specified print is performed after the print job to reduce down time. Mode 25-4 0 0 1 1 25-3 0 1 0 1
equivalent of 8-sheet A3 solid for the color of which the average print coverage is 5% or less (convert into A4). Mode Disabled Enabled DIPSW29-0,1 Toner refresh mode cycle (periodical) Effective only when the DIPSW 28-3 is set to "1". The execution cycle of the toner refresh mode is changed. The cycle varies according to the developer drive distance and the temperature. Mode Equivalent to every 1,000 prints Equivalent to every 500 prints Equivalent to every 330 prints 1 1 1 0 0 1 29-1 0 29-0 0 28-3 0 1
Correction made Correction not made No correction while in printing
1-19
I ADJUSTMENT
When printing coverage is low (5% or less of
25 MODE *25 Printer gamma offset adjustment
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 *28 Black characters for printer output (IP) Change the black laser PWM for printing from PC. However, if the black laser is set thinner, the gradation changed. Check the gradation after 28-4 0 1 Standard Make black characters thin. (Mild) Make black characters thin. changing the setting. Mode 10-7 0 0 1 1 10-6 0 1 0 1
I ADJUSTMENT
Change the area in which the printer gamma offset of the 36 mode can be adjusted. 0: 1: High light area only Possible in whole area Mode High light area only Possible in whole area
*27 Image background restraint (toner density) Y, M, C, K Restrain image background by reducing the toner density of the developer (toner and carrier ratio) by about 0.2%. This setting changes the toner density of the developer so that image density does not change at once. After changing the DIPSW, set the test pattern density of the color changed to 128 (with the density of other colors set to 0), and output 10 sheets of the test pattern No. 1 to check image background. And also, after changing the DIPSW, be sure to conduct the automatic gamma adjustment (0) of the process adjustment. There are two DIPSW that restrain image background: toner density (DIPSW 5-0 to 3) and a potential difference (DIPSW 7-0 to 3). Image background can be restrained more effectively with the DIPSW 7-0 to 3. When image background occurs, be sure to use the DIPSW 7-0 to 3 for the first priority. If it is not sufficiently effective, use the DIPSW 5-0 to 3 at the same time. Note: Since the DIPSW 7-0 to 3 changes the potential, the carrier may stick to the drum and damage the drum and the cleaning blade. Therefore, use this DIPSW only when necessary.
(Medium) Make black characters thin. (Intense)
*29 Periodical black toner band creation on the transfer belt When set to "1," the black toner band periodically created on the transfer belt, more toner is supplied to the both edges of the belt cleaning blade to prevent the occurrence of white stripes on the image and the flipping of the both edges of the belt cleaning blade. Mode Normal Increased at the edges 20-4 0 1
*30 Switchover of the fixing control table (Old type only) When set to "1", the fixing temperature in the slower line speed mode is controlled low to improve uneven wax. However, when tray switches to a tray in which paper of different fixing temperature control is loaded (temperature is lowered), it takes long waiting time. Max. approx. 150 seconds. (It takes long only when the memory switch "No.52 Time lag to switch tray" is set to "Standard" in the key operator mode.) Mode Measures against uneven wax not provided Measures against uneven wax pro1 20-5 0
Mode Standard Restrained

2
5-3 K 0 1
5-2 C 0 1
5-1 M 0 1
5-0 Y 0 1 1-20
vided
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 *31 Front and back registration of the tray The image timing and the magnification for each tray and paper type can be adjusted. (user mode) Mode Not provided Provided 20-7 0 1 *34 Type of paper selection with APS the APS. Special paper not applicable:
25 MODE
Coated, tab and exclusive paper are not applicable. All types of paper from paper weight 4 (106 to 162 g/m2) to 6 (210 to 256 g/m2) are not applicable. Paper weight 6 not applicable: All types of paper in paper weight 6 (210 to 256 g/m2) are not applicable.
*33
Image background restraint (potential difference) Increase the potential difference between the charging potential and the developing bias to restrain image background. After changing the DIPSW, be sure to conduct the automatic gamma adjustment (0) of the process adjustment. There are two DIPSW that restrain image background: toner density (DIPSW 5-0 to 3) and a potential difference (DIPSW 7-0 to 3). Image background can be restrained more effectively with the DIPSW 7-0 to 3. When image background occurs, be sure to use the DIPSW 7-0 to 3 for the first priority. If it is not sufficiently effective, use the DIPSW 5-0 to 3 at the same time.
Mode Special paper not applicable Paper weight 6 not applicable
21-6 0 1
Note: Since the DIPSW 7-0 to 3 changes the potential, the carrier may stick to the drum and damage the drum and the cleaning blade. Therefore, use this DIPSW only when necessary.
Mode Standard Restrained
7-3 K 0 1
7-2 C 0 1
7-1 M 0 1
7-0 Y 0 1
1-21
I ADJUSTMENT
Select a type of paper that can be selected for
25 MODE
6.4
I ADJUSTMENT
Paper size setting
6.4.3 Wide paper setting A. Procedure 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Paper size setting] key.
Conduct this setting when changing the paper size of the LCT. The paper size is available in the standard size, non-standard size and wide paper. 6.4.1 Standard size setting
3. "Paper size setting screen" A. Procedure 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Paper size setting] key. 3. "Paper size setting screen" Press the [Standard size] key. 4. Press the arrow key to select the paper size. 5. Press the [OK] key to return to "25 Mode menu screen." To invalidate the setting that you have changed, press the [Cancel] key and return to "25 mode menu screen." 8. Press the [OK] key to return to "25 Mode menu screen." 6.4.2 Non-standard size setting A. Procedure 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Paper size setting] key. 3. "Paper size setting screen" Press the [Non-standard size] key. 4. Press the main scan direction key and enter the paper size using the arrow keys or numeric keys. 5. Press the sub-scan direction key and enter the paper size using the arrow keys or numeric keys. 6. Press the [OK] key to return to "25 Mode menu screen." To invalidate the setting that you have changed, press the [CANCEL] key and return to "25 mode menu screen." To invalidate the setting that you have changed, press the [CANCEL] key and return to "25 mode menu screen." Press the [Wide paper] key. 4. Press the arrow keys and select the standard size of the wide paper. 5. Press the [Enter size] key. 6. Press the main scan direction key and enter the paper size using the arrow keys or numeric keys. 7. Press the sub-scan direction key and enter the paper size using the arrow keys or numeric keys.
1-22
25 MODE
6.5
PM count setting
6.5.2 Change setting A. Procedure 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [3. PM count] key. 3. "PM count/cycle screen" Press the [Page] or [Distance] key.
Reset the PM count after implementation of the PM and set and/or change the PM cycle. The selection of the PM cycle is available in the total count and the distance in operation of the developing unit /K. In default, the total count is set. 6.5.1 Count reset A. Procedure 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [3. PM count] key. 3. "PM count/cycle screen" Press the [Count reset] key. 4. "PM count reset confirmation screen" Press the [YES] key when resetting the PM count. The PM count is reset and the starting date of the PM count is automatically entered. When the [NO] key is pressed, the PM count is not reset and return to "PM count/cycle screen."
4. Enter a cycle value through the numeric keys. Only the upper three digits can be entered. 5. Press the [OK] key to return to "25 Mode menu screen." To invalidate the setting that you have changed, press the [CANCEL] key and return to "25 mode menu screen."
1-23
I ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE
6.6
I ADJUSTMENT
Data collection
B. Data collection confirmation method (1) Procedure
It is possible to confirm various data held in the machine. It is also possible to confirm collected data by the KRDS, list output and the mail remote notification system. A. Data that can be confirmed 1. Total count of each paper size 2. Copy count of each paper size 3. Print count of each paper size 4. RADF count 5. Page fill of each section 6. JAM data of time series 7. JAM count 8. Count of each copy mode Count of each copy mode (1) Count of each copy mode (2)
1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [4. Data collection] key. 3. "Data collection menu screen" Press the key of a data collection item that you want to confirm. To select any succeeding key to the key 11, press the arrow key. 4. "Individual data confirmation screen" Press the arrow key to scroll the screen. 5. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to "25 mode menu screen."
9. SC count 10. JAM count of each section 11. SC count of each section Note: When setting DIPSW30-1 to 1, 6 to 11 can be confirmed. Note: The [Count reset] key is shown in the individual data confirmation screen of the [10. JAM count of each section] and the [11. SC count of each section]. When pressing the [COUNT RESET] key, "Count reset confirmation screen" is shown, and when pressing the [YES] key, the section data is reset. Pressing the [NO] key returns to "Individual data confirmation screen" with the interval data not reset. Reset these data while in the PM implementation to confirm the jam or SC occurrence count after it was visited last time.
1-24
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 C. Details of the data collection printer counts of each paper size NO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 KRDS parameter (B1, B6, B8, BD, BE, BF) 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 Japan A2 A3 B4 A4 B5 A5 B6 8.5 x 14 8.5 x 11 Special For Inch 17 x 22 11 x 17 8.5 x 14 8.5 x 11 5.5 x 8.5 A4 Special Metric A2 A3 B4 (8K) A4 B5 (16K) A5 F4 Special
25 MODE
Remark Not used
Maximum count: 99,999,999 1 count is made for paper of All types regardless of the paper size. All sheets of paper that do not come under the size of No. 1 to No. 9 are counted as special. However, SEL and LEF are counted as the same size. The non-standard and the wide paper are counted as special.
1-25
I ADJUSTMENT
(1) Data collection No. 1 to 3: Total, copy and
25 MODE (2) Data collection No. 4: RADF count
I ADJUSTMENT
NO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
KRDS parameter (F0) 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D
Item No. of originals fed in ADF mode No. of originals fed in RADF mode No. of originals fed in RDH mode No. of originals fed in RRDH mode No. of originals fed in LDH mode No. of originals fed in CFF mode No. of 1 sided SDF original fed No. of mix originals fed in ADF mode No. of mix originals fed in RADF mode No. of originals fed in 2 in 1 mode No. of 1 sided z-folded original fed No. of 2 sided z-folded original fed No. of 2 sided SDF original fed
Remark
Not used
Not used
Not used
Maximum count: 99,999,999 (3) Data collection No. 5: Page fill of each section It is possible to confirm the average pixel ratio of 5,000 print sheets of the latest 30 data for each of Y, M, C and K. This pixel ratio is a calculated value based on the dot area of pixels and the transfer paper area, and is different from the print ratio when actually printed. (4) Data collection No. 6: JAM date of time series With respect to the latest 100 jam data, it is possible to confirm originating jam code, total count, date of occurrence, time of occurrence, tray, paper size and magnification.
1-26
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 (5) Data collection No. 7: Jam count / No. 10. JAM count of each section NO KRDS Parameter (J0) 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F Jam code is shown on the LCD display when DIPSW11-7 is set to 1 J10-01 J10-02 J10-03 J11-01 J12-01 J13-01 J14-01 J17-01 J17-02 J17-03 J17-04 J17-05 J17-06 J17-07 J17-08 J17-09 J31-02 J32-08 J32-04 J32-01 J32-05 J32-07 J32-02 J32-03 J92-01 J93-01 J94-02 J19-01 J19-02 J51-01 J71-01 J71-02 Vertical conveyance LCT Main body FNS TU ADU Reversed paper exit Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 LCT Paper feed Section 33 34 Bypass 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 NO KRDS Parameter (J0) 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 Jam code is shown on the LCD display when DIPSW11-7 is set to 1 J72-16 J72-17 J72-18 J72-19 J72-20 J72-21 J72-22 J72-23 J72-24 J72-25 J72-26 J72-28 J72-29 J72-30 J72-32 J72-33 J72-34 J72-35 J72-38 J72-39 J72-40 J72-41 J72-42 J72-43 J72-44 J72-45 J72-46 J72-47 J72-48 J72-49 J72-50 J72-51 J72-60 J72-61 J72-62 J72-63 J72-64 J72-80 J72-81 J72-82 J72-83 J72-90
25 MODE Section
FNS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
TU
PI Not used
PK Not used
FNS PI
Not used
PK FNS
1-27
I ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE NO KRDS Parameter (J0) 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 Jam code is shown on the LCD display when DIPSW11-7 is set to 1 J61-01 J61-02 J61-03 J62-01 J62-02 J62-03 J62-04 J62-05 J62-06 J62-07 J17-10 LCT
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Section
I ADJUSTMENT
75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90
DF
Not used
Maximum count: 99,999,999
1-28
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 (6) Data collection No. 8-1: Count of each copy mode (1) NO KRDS Parameter (F1) 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 1-1 mode 1-2 mode 2-1 mode 2-2 mode ADF 1-1 mode ADF 1-2 mode Mixed original mode Tab original mode Z-folded original mode LEF: Portrait/SEF: Landscape (Reg.) LEF: Landscape/SEF: Portrait (Reg.) LEF: Portrait/SEF: Landscape (Rev.) LEF: Landscape/SEF: Portrait (Rev.) Enhance Mode: text/photo Enhance Mode: Text Enhance Mode: Photo Enhance Mode: Map Non STD size 1 oblique staple (Upper left) 1 oblique staple (Upper right) 2 parallel staples (Left binding) 2 parallel staples (Upper binding) Left binding Right binding Upper binding Three-Folding Stapling & Folding Folding Main tray: Group Main tray: Sort Main tray: Non sort Subtray: Group (FACE DOWN) Subtray: Group (FACE UP) Subtray: Sort (FACE DOWN) Subtray: Sort (FACE UP) Subtray: Non sort (FACE DOWN) Subtray: Non sort (FACE UP) Cover sheet Trimmer Real size copy Preset magnification E4 Preset magnification E3 Preset magnification E2 Item Count conditions
25 MODE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
1-29
I ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE NO KRDS Parameter (F1) 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Item Count conditions
I ADJUSTMENT
44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87
Preset magnification E1 Preset magnification R4 Preset magnification R3 Preset magnification R2 Preset magnification R1 User lens mode 1 User lens mode 2 User lens mode 3 Zoom Vertical/Horizontal zoom Maximum zoom Minimum zoom APS AMS AE (AES) User density level 1 (Not used) User density level 2 (Not used) Interrupted copy Auto image rotation cancellation Sheet insertion Chapter control Combination Booklet copy OHP interleave (copy) (Not used) OHP interleave (blank) (Not used) Image insert Book copy Program job Non-image area erase Reverse image Auto repeat Manual repeat STD size repeat Frame erasure Fold erasure Auto layout All-image area (Not used) Image Shift Reduction shift Overlay Water mark Stamp Date/Time Page
1-30
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 NO KRDS Parameter (F1) 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 Numbering Set quantity 1 Set quantity 2-5 Set quantity 6-10 Set quantity 11 or more Time while power remote 1 is ON Time while power remote 2 is ON Time while power remote 3 is ON Time while power remote 4 is ON Time during Low Power mode Time during warm up time Time during front door open Ope. Time in 1side straight exit Ope. Time in 1side reverse exit Operation time in 2 side print Operation time in ADF mode Morning Correction count (Not used) Time during APS sensor ON N of main tray used jobs N of subtray used jobs N of stapling & folding used jobs N of folding used jobs N of ADF NF occurred N of ADF special error1 occurred N of ADF special error2 occurred N of ADF special error3 occurred N of scanner scanned N of electrode cleaned (Not used) N of memory overflow N of fixing alarm occurred (Not used) N of no toner stop occurred (Not used) N of AGC retry (Not used) N of sub scan beam correct error (Not used) N of mis-centering correct error (Not used) Wrong detection of original size Next original information error Item Count conditions
25 MODE
88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121
Accumulation of time during which the overall control board is powered Accumulation of time during which the remote power 1 is on (in minutes) Accumulation of time during which the remote power 2 is on (in minutes) Accumulation of time during which the built-in controller operates (in minutes) Accumulation of time in the low power mode (1 count for each minute) Accumulation of warm-up time (in minutes) Accumulation of time during which the front door is open (in minutes) Accumulation of time from the start of print to the end of print (in minutes) Down time due to jam omitted Accumulation of time during which ADF operates (in minutes) Accumulation of time during which the APS sensor is on (in minutes)
Error in size for which mixed paper is not allowed No. of scans in platen mode
1-31
I ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE NO KRDS Parameter (F1) 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 8A 8B 8C 8D 8E 8F 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 9A 9B 9C 9D 9E 9F
I ADJUSTMENT
122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160
N of distortion adjust error (Not used) N of ADF distortion data error (Not used) Compression memory overflow Page memory overflow (scan) Page memory overflow (print) FNS alarm (tray/trimming) FNS alarm (staple) Scanner count N of ADF special error4 occurred (Not used) Store for HDD (Sync. With Copying) (Not used) Store for HDD (SRVmode Scan HDD) (Not used) Store for PC (SRVmode Scan PC) (Not used) Store for PC (SRVmode HDD PC) (Not used) Recall from HDD (SRVmode HDD) (Not used) Recall from PC (SRVmode PC) (Not used) Image edit count by SRV Wide paper count (A3W) or (11 x 17R) Wide paper count (A4W) or (8.5 x 11W) Wide paper count (A4WR) or (8.5 x 11RW) Wide paper count (A5W) or (5.5 x 8.5W) Wide paper count (Others) Punch Z-Folding (Not used) MixPlex (1 side) MixPlex (2 side) ADF original-thin
Maximum count: 99,999,999 1-32

KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 (7) Data collection No. 8-2: Count of each copy mode (2) NO KRDS Parameter (F1) 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A ACS Full color Monochrome Mono color (Y) Mono color (M) Mono color (C) Mono color (R) Mono color (G) Mono color (B) DF thick paper DF thin paper Original type: Printed paper Original type: Photo paper Original type: Copied paper Original type: Inkjet paper Original type: Pencil Original type: Newspaper Screen: Line screen/Smooth tone Screen: Line screen/High resolution Screen: Dot screen/Smooth tone Screen: Dot screen/High resolution Screen: High compression Gloss mode Density shift Background adjustment Red adjust Green adjust Blue adjust Hue adjustment Saturation adjustment Brightness adjustment Color balance adjustment Sharpness adjustment Contrast adjustment Image judge adjustment Paper Type: Normal paper Paper Type: Recycle paper Paper Type: Color paper Paper Type: High quality paper Paper Type: Coated paper Paper Type: Tab paper Paper Type: Color specific paper Paper Type: Exclusive paper A Item Count conditions
25 MODE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
1-33
I ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE NO KRDS Parameter (F1) 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E
I ADJUSTMENT
44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79
Paper Type: Exclusive paper B Paper Type: Exclusive paper C Paper Type: Exclusive paper D Paper Weight: 1 Paper Weight: 2 Paper Weight: 3 Paper Weight: 4 Paper Weight: 5 Paper Weight: 6 Multi page enlargement Main Tray: Face up N of no toner stop occurred (Y) N of no toner stop occurred (M) N of no toner stop occurred (C) N of no toner stop occurred (K) N of toner recovery box is full N of color regist. auto. adj. N of auto stability control OFF mode time ON time of heater (Main body) ON time of heater (tray 4) Polygon motor operation time Develop motor ope. time (color) Develop motor ope. time (black) ON time of PCL (color) ON time of PCL (black) Operation time in Scanner motor Time while power (ADF) Number of the executions of the toner refresh Y (auto) Number of the executions of the toner refresh M (auto) 1 count for each execution 1 count for each execution Sum of the OFF mode time (unit: minute) Sum of the time the heater is on (unit: minute) Sum of the time the LCT heater is on (unit: minute) Sum of the time the polygon motor is on (unit: minute) Sum of the time the developing motor (color) operates (unit: minute) Sum of the time the developing motor (black) operates (unit: minute) Sum of the time the PCL (color) is on (unit: minute) Sum of the time the PCL (black) is on (unit: minute) Sum of the time the scanner motor operates (unit: minute) Sum of the time the 24V is applied to the ADF (unit: minute) Counts 1 per every correction operation Counts 1 per every correction operation
1-34
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 NO KRDS Parameter (F1) 4F 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 refresh C (auto) 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 Number of the executions of the toner refresh K (auto) Number of the manual executions of the toner refresh Number of the executions of the filming recovery mode Paper type selection: Exclusive paper E Paper type selection: Exclusive paper F Paper type selection: Exclusive paper G Paper type selection: Exclusive paper H Paper type selection: Exclusive paper I Paper type selection: Exclusive paper J 1 count for each execution 1 count for each execution 1 count for each execution Item Count conditions
25 MODE
80
Number of the executions of the toner
1 count for each execution
1-35
I ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 NO KRDS Parameter (E0) 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 SC code Section
(8) Data collection No. 9: SC occurrence count/
I ADJUSTMENT
No. 11: Sectional SC occurrence count NO KRDS Parameter (E0) 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 SC code Section 36 37 SC10-10 SC13-01 SC13-02 SC18-01 SC18-02 SC18-03 SC18-04 SC18-50 SC18-51 SC18-60 SC18-61 SC18-70 SC18-71 SC20-10 SC20-11 SC20-12 SC21-01 SC21-02 SC21-03 SC21-04 SC23-01 SC23-02 SC23-03 SC23-04 SC23-05 SC23-06 SC23-07 SC23-08 SC23-09 SC23-10 SC23-11 SC27-01 SC27-02 SC27-03 SC27-04 Transfer belt section abnormality Toner supply abnormality L-detection abnormality L-detection abnormality 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 Drum motor abnormality Developing motor abnormality PCL abnormality Communication abnormality LT abnormality Communication abnormality Paper feed motor abnormality Paper feed tray abnormality 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
SC28-01 SC28-02 SC28-03 SC28-04 SC29-01 SC29-02 SC29-03 SC29-04 SC29-06 SC29-07 SC29-08 SC29-09 SC29-10 SC29-11 SC29-12 SC29-13 SC29-14 SC29-15 SC29-16 SC29-17 SC29-18 SC29-19 SC29-20 SC29-21 SC29-22 SC29-23 SC30-01 SC30-02 SC30-10 SC32-01 SC32-02 SC32-03 SC32-04 SC32-05 SC32-06 SC33-01 SC33-02 SC33-03 SC33-04
High voltage abnormality
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
Process abnormality
Communication abnormality Fan abnormality
Motor abnormality
1-36
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 NO KRDS Parameter (E0) 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 70 71 SC code Section NO KRDS Parameter (E0) 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 8A 8B 8C 8D 8E 8F 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 9A 9B 9C 9D SC code
25 MODE Section
75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114
SC34-01 SC34-02 SC34-03 SC34-04 SC34-05 SC34-06 SC34-07 SC34-08 SC35-01 SC35-02 SC35-03 SC35-04 SC35-05 SC35-06 SC36-02 SC36-04 SC36-05 SC36-06 SC36-07 SC36-08 SC36-09 SC36-10 SC36-11 SC36-12 SC38-02 SC38-03 SC39-01 SC41-01 SC41-02 SC41-03 SC41-04 SC41-05 SC41-06 SC41-07 SC41-08 SC41-09 SC41-10 SC41-11 SC42-01 SC42-02
High fixing temperature abnormality
115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122
SC45-01 SC45-03 SC45-07 SC45-08 SC45-09 SC45-10 SC45-11 SC45-12 SC45-20 SC46-01 SC46-02 SC46-03 SC46-05 SC46-06 SC46-07 SC46-08 SC46-09 SC46-11 SC46-12 SC46-13 SC46-14 SC46-15 SC46-16 SC46-17 SC46-18 SC46-19 SC46-21 SC46-23 SC46-24 SC46-25 SC46-26 SC46-31 SC46-32 SC46-35 SC46-40 SC46-41 SC46-42 SC46-43 SC46-58 SC46-59 SC46-62 SC46-63 SC46-64 SC46-66
Color registration abnormality
Low fixing temperature abnormality
123 124 125 126 127 128
Image processing abnormality
Fixing sensor abnormality
129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141
Scanner abnormality Write abnormality
142 143 144 145 146 147
Scanner abnormality Write abnormality
148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158
Fan abnormality
1-37
I ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE NO KRDS Parameter (E0) 9E 9F A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 AA AB AC AD AE AF B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 BA BB BC BD BE BF C0 C1 C2 C3 SC code
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Section NO KRDS Parameter (E0) C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 CA CB CC CD CE CF D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 DA DB DC DD DE E0 E0 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 EA EB EC ED SC77-43 SC77-44 SC77-45 SC77-46 SC77-47 SC77-52 SC77-53 SC77-54 SC77-55 SC77-56 SC77-57 SC77-81 SC77-91 SC77-92 SC77-98 SC77-99 FNS abnormality PK abnormality Not used PK abnormality Not used PK abnormality Not used SC77-06 SC77-07 SC77-08 SC77-11 SC77-12 SC77-13 SC77-14 SC77-21 SC77-22 SC77-25 SC77-26 SC77-31 SC77-32 SC77-33 SC77-34 SC77-35 SC77-36 SC37-37 SC77-41 SC77-42 PI abnormality TU abnormality SC code Section
I ADJUSTMENT
159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196
SC46-80 SC46-81 SC46-82 SC46-83 SC46-90 SC46-91 SC46-98 SC46-99 SC49-00 SC49-01 SC49-02 SC50-01 SC50-02 SC50-03 SC50-04 SC50-05 SC50-10 SC50-11 SC52-01 SC52-02 SC52-03 SC56-02 SC56-11 SC56-12 SC56-13 SC60-01 SC61-01 SC61-02 SC61-03 SC61-04 SC61-05 SC61-06 SC61-07 SC61-08 SC61-09 SC61-10 SC70-01 SC77-01
197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204
SC77-02 SC77-03 SC77-04 SC77-05
FNS abnormality
Communication abnormality
205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214
Fan abnormality
215 216 217
Operation board abnormality
218 219 220 221
DF abnormality
222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238
1-38
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 NO KRDS Parameter (E0) EE EF F0 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 FA FB FC FD FE FF G0 G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 G8 G9 GA GB GC GD GE SC code Section
25 MODE
239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272
SC80-01 SC80-02 SC80-03 SC80-11 SC80-21 SC80-30 SC80-31 SC80-32 SC80-40 SC89-01 SC89-02 SC89-03 SC89-04 SC32-07
Communication abnormality ISW abnormality
Main body abnormality
Fan abnormality
1-39
I ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE
6.7
I ADJUSTMENT
Parts counter
The following are conducted with respect to each replacement part: display of copy count used, resetting of count, setting of limit value, and new registration of replacement parts. The copy count by parts that need to be replaced includes the following: Count of special parts Count of each parts 6.7.1 Count of special parts When a periodically replaced part is replaced, reset the counter of the part that has been replaced. Display the name, part number and the copy count of a replacement part that has been registered, and reset the count. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [5. Parts counter] key. 3. "Parts counter menu screen" Press the [1. Count of special parts] key. 4. "Parts counter (fixed) screen" Press the arrow key to select a part that you want to reset. 5. Press the [Count reset] key. 6. "Parts count reset screen" Press the [YES] key when resetting the part count. The part count is reset. Pressing the [NO] key returns to "Parts counter menu screen" with the part count not reset.
1-40
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 B. Count of special parts list NO KRDS Parameter (F1) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Toner collection box Ozone filter /1 (Right side) Deodorant filter (Rear side) Dust-proof filter /1 (Right side) Dust-proof filter /2 (Rear side) Charging dust proof filter Drum cartridge /Y Drum /Y Drum cleaning blade /Y Lubricant applying unit /Y Drum cartridge /M Drum /M Drum cleaning blade /M Lubricant applying unit /M Drum cartridge /C Drum /C Drum cleaning blade /C Lubricant applying unit /C Drum cartridge /K Drum /K Drum cleaning blade /K Lubricant applying unit /K Charging corona /Y Charging wire assy /Y Charging grid plate /Y Charging corona /M Charging wire assy /M Charging grid plate /M Charging corona /C Charging wire assy /C Charging grid plate /C Charging corona /K Charging wire assy /K Charging grid plate /K Transfer belt unit 65AA-245 65AA1043 65AA1137 65AA1044 65AA-142 65AA-387 65AA-200 65AA-219 65AA2003 65AA-202 65AA-200 65AA-219 65AA2003 65AA-202 65AA-200 65AA-219 65AA2003 65AA-202 65AA-200 65AA-219 65AA2003 65AA-202 65AA-250 65AA-252 65AA2507 65AA-250 65AA-252 65AA2507 65AA-250 65AA-252 65AA2507 65AA-250 65AA-252 65AA2507 Old type: 65AA-260 New type: 65LA-260 40 27 Transfer belt 65AA2642 1-41
25 MODE
Parts name
P/N (Parts No.) *1
Count conditions
*2
*2
*1
*2
*1
I ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE NO KRDS Parameter (F1) 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 1st transfer roller /Y 1st transfer roller /M 1st transfer roller /C 1st transfer roller /K 2nd transfer roller /U Parts name
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 P/N (Parts No.) 65AA2612 65AA2612 65AA2612 65AA2604 65AA2611 65AA-287 Old type: 65AA-275 New type: 65LA-275 *1 *2 Count conditions
I ADJUSTMENT
Transfer belt separation claw Transfer belt cleaning unit
48
2F
Belt cleaning brush unit
Old type: 65AA-288 New type: 65LA-288
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
Toner collection sheet /1 Belt cleaning blade 2nd transfer roller /L Separation discharging unit Fixing cleaning unit Fixing roller /U Fixing roller /L Developer /Y (Page)
65AA-293 65AA2630 65AA4501 65AA-452 65AA-573 65AA5301 65AA5302 Old type: 65AA3079 New type: 65LA (/LK/LQ) 3079 *2
57
38
Developer /M (Page)
6Old type: 65AA3080 New type: 65LA (/LK/LQ) 3080
58
39
Developer /C (Page)
Old type: 65AA3081 New type: 65LA (/LK/LQ) 3081
59
3A
Developer /K (Page)
Old type: 65AA3082 New type: 65LA (/LK/LQ) 3082
*1
60 61 62 63
3B 3C 3D 3E
Developing unit /Y Developing unit /M Developing unit /C Developing unit /K
65AA-300 65AA-300 65AA-300 65AA-300
*2
*1
1-42
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 NO KRDS Parameter (F1) 64 3F Developer /Y (Distance) Old type: 65AA3079 New type: 65LA (/LK/LQ) 3079 65 40 Developer /M (Distance) Old type: 65AA3080 New type: 65LA (/LK/LQ) 3080 66 41 Developer /C (Distance) Old type: 65AA3081 New type: 65LA (/LK/LQ) 3081 67 42 Developer /K (Distance) Old type: 65AA3082 New type: 65LA (/LK/LQ) 3082 68 69 70 43 44 45 FNS tray up/down motor FNS stapler /F 13QE-115 20AK4241 Parts name P/N (Parts No.) Count conditions
25 MODE
Displays developing sleeve travel distance (in meters)
1 count for each FNS main tray paper exit 1 count for each 1 paper exit in staple mode 1 count for each paper exit in each of the 1-staple at front, 2-staple and the stitch-and-fold modes
71
46
FNS stapler /R
20AK4241
1 count for each paper exit in each of the 1-staple at front, 2-staple and the stitch-and-fold modes
72 73
47 48
FNS shift motor FNS exit opening motor
12QR-361 12QR-361
1 count for each paper exit at even number of copies in the sort mode 1 count for starting the job of "large size" (A4R/8.5 x 11R or larger) in the staple mode, and 1 count for each paper exit 1 count for starting each of the stitchand-fold and folding jobs
74
49
FNS folding knife motor
13QJ-502
1 count for each copy exit in each of the stitch-and-fold and folding and the threefolding modes
75 76 77 78 79 80 81
4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50
Bypass gate solenoid Tri-folding gate SD Pl conveyance clutch /U Pl feed roller /A /U Pl feed roller /B /U Pl reverse roller /U Pl torque limiter /U
12QR-263 12QR-263 13QN8201 50BA-574 50BA-575 13QN-443 13QN4073 1-43
1 count for each A4 / B5 / 8.5 x 11 / 16K copy exit in the staple mode 1 count for each copy exit in the threefolding mode 1 count for each paper feed in PI upper stand 1 count for each paper feed in PI upper stand
2
I ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE NO KRDS Parameter (F1) 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F Parts name
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 P/N (Parts No.) Pl conveyance clutch /L Pl feed roller /A /L Pl feed roller /B /L Pl reverse roller /L Pl torque limiter /L Trimmer blade PK punching unit (2 hole) PK punching unit (3 hole) PK punching unit (4 hole) ADF paper feed roller ADF feed roller ADF Dfeed prevention roller ADF exit solenoid 20AJ8251 1 count for each original passage in the double side copy mode and the mixing original mode 13QN8201 50BA-574 50BA-575 13QN-443 13QN4073 13LHK001/002 1 count for each cutter operation 14EA/14EF 14EB 14EE/14EG 13YH4064 13YH4039 20AJ4015 Original passage count in all modes Original passage count in all modes 1 count for each punch operation 1 count for each paper feed in PI lower stand Count conditions
I ADJUSTMENT
97
60
ADF feed clutch
13YH8059
Single side copy mode: 1 count for each original Double side copy mode: 3 counts for each original
98
61
ADF reversal solenoid
20AJ8251
1 count for each original passage in the double side copy mode and the mixing original mode
99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112
2
62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F
Exposure ON time Sub power switch Door SW Toner supply door switch Main power SW Pl regist clutch Punch motor Paper exit roller /A Intermediate conveyance roller Stacking assist roller Fixing torque limiter
65AA8301 65AA8603 40AA8501 13GG-802 55GA8601 13QN8202 54008004 122H4825 13QE4531 20AK4210 65AA5365 1-44
Accumulation of on-time (in: minute) 1 count each time the sub power switch turns off the power 1 count each time the front door is opened 1 count each time the toner supply door is opened 1 count each time the main power switch turns off the power 1 count each time PI feeds a sheet 1 count for each punch operation 1 count for each FNS main tray paper exit 1 count for each sheet in each of the FNS flat stapling, stitch-and-fold, folding and three-folding modes *1
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 NO KRDS Parameter (F1) 113 70 Registration cleaning sheet 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 8A 8B Ball bearing /U Heat insulating sleeve /U Intermediate convey. clutch /1 Intermediate convey. clutch /2 Intermediate convey. clutch /3 Feed/Dfeed rubber (Tray-1) Feed/Dfeed rubber (Tray-2) Feed/Dfeed rubber (Tray-3) Feed/Dfeed rubber (Bypass) Registration roller Separation claw solenoid Fixing upper lamp /1 Fixing upper lamp /2 Fixing lower lamp Fixing temp. sensor /3 Fixing temp. sensor /4 Paper feed roller (Tray-1) Paper feed roller (Tray-2) Paper feed roller (Tray-3) Paper feed roller (Bypass) ADU conveyance clutch /1 ADU conveyance clutch /2 ADU pre-registration clutch Ball bearing /L Heat insulating sleeve /L Fixing drive gear Decurler roller 45407504 45405339 56AA8201 56AA8201 56AA8201 25SA4096 25SA4096 25SA4096 25SA4096 65AA4601 26NA8251 65AA8303/ 65AF8303 65AA8304/ 65AF8304 65AA8305/ 65AF8305 65AA-553 65AA-554 56AA-458 56AA-458 56AA-458 65AA-520 56AA8201 56AA8201 56AA8201 26NA5371 65AA5341 65AA7727 65AA4905 65AA462 Parts name P/N (Parts No.) Count conditions
25 MODE
1 count for each paper exit in the single side copy mode 2 counts in the double side copy mode *1 1 count for each paper exit in the single side copy mode 1 counts in the double side copy mode 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 1 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 2 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 3 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the bypass tray 1 count for each paper exit in the single side copy mode 2 counts in the double side copy mode 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 1 *1 65AA: For Japan and inch area 65EA: For metric area
1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 1 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 2 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 3 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the bypass tray 1 count for each paper exit in the double side copy mode (no count is made in the single side copy mode) *1
1 count for each paper exit in the single side copy mode 2 counts in the double side copy mode
1-45
I ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE NO KRDS Parameter (F1) 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 8C 8D 8E 8F 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 LCT paper feed roller LCT feed/Dfeed roller LCT feed clutch Parts name
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 P/N (Parts No.) 55VA-484 55VA-483 56AA8201 56AA8201 56AA8201 56AA8201 56AA8201 56AA8201 56AA8201 56AA8201 56AA8202 65AA-456 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 1 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 2 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 3 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the bypass tray 1 count for each paper exit in the single side copy mode 2 counts in the double side copy mode 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the LCT Count conditions
I ADJUSTMENT
LCT pre-registration clutch Paper feed clutch (Tray-1) Pre-regist. clutch (Tray-1) Paper feed clutch (Tray-2) Pre-regist. clutch (Tray-2) Paper feed clutch (Tray-3) Pre-regist. clutch (Tray-3) Paper feed clutch (Bypass) Transfer earth plate unit
153 154 155 156 157
98 99 100 101 102
Center fixing temp. sensor /U Center fixing temp. sensor /L Paper exit guide roller /2 (New type only) Paper exit roller (New type only) Paper exit roller /U (New type only)
65AA8801 65AA8802 65AA4818 65LA4808 65LA5343
*1
Maximum count: 99,999,999 *1 Count in all color modes 25DIPSW8-6 = 0: 1 count for each paper exit in the single side copy mode, and 2 counts in the double side copy mode = 1: 2 counts for each large size paper exit in the single side copy mode, and 4 counts in the double side copy mode *2 Count only in full color or single color mode 25DIPSW8-6 = 0: 1 count for each paper exit in the single side copy mode, and 2 counts in the double side copy mode = 1: 2 counts for each large size paper exit in the single side copy mode, and 4 counts in the double side copy mode
1-46
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 6.7.2 Count of each parts This is used when you want to control the part counter. Set the part name, part number and the limit value, and display and reset the copy count. Up to 30 data from No. 01 to No. 30 can be set. A count is taken for each passage of paper, regardless of the paper size. Reference: When the copy count is in excess of a limit value, an asterisk [*] is shown to the left of No. A. Setting of each replacement part and display of the copy count (1) Procedure 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [5. Parts counter] key. 3. "Parts counter menu screen" Press the [2. Count of each parts] key. 4. "Copy count of each part screen" Press the arrow key to select a number you want to set or change. 5. Press one of the [Parts name setting], [P/N setting] and [Limit setting] key. 6. Press an item you want to set or change out of the [Parts name setting], [P/N setting] and [Limit setting] key, and enter it with the alphanumeric keys. [Part name setting]: Enter a part name (8 digits in alphanumeric) [P/N setting]: Enter a part number (9 digits in alphanumeric) [Limit setting]: Limit value (8 digits in numeric) 7. Press the [OK] key to update the data. To invalidate the setting that you have changed, press the [CANCEL] key. 3. "Parts counter menu screen"
25 MODE
B. Resetting of each replacement part
1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [5. Parts counter] key.
Press the [2. Count of each parts] key. 4. "Count of each part screen" Press the arrow key to select a number you want to set or change. 5. Press the [COUNT RESET] key. 6. "Parts count reset screen" Press the [YES] key when resetting a part count. This resets the part counter. Pressing the [NO] key returns to "Count of each part" with the part count not reset.
1-47
I ADJUSTMENT
(1) Procedure
25 MODE
C. Relationship between each data No. and
I ADJUSTMENT
KRDS parameter NO PARTS NAME 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Z4:00 Z4:01 Z4:02 Z4:03 Z4:04 Z4:05 Z4:06 Z4:07 Z4:08 Z4:09 Z4:0A Z4:0B Z4:0C Z4:0D Z4:0E Z4:0F Z4:10 Z4:11 Z4:12 Z4:13 Z4:14 Z4:15 Z4:16 Z4:17 Z4:18 Z4:19 Z4:1A Z4:1B Z4:1C Z4:1D P/N Z3:00 Z3:01 Z3:02 Z3:03 Z3:04 Z3:05 Z3:06 Z3:07 Z3:08 Z3:09 Z3:0A Z3:0B Z3:0C Z3:0D Z3:0E Z3:0F Z3:10 Z3:11 Z3:12 Z3:13 Z3:14 Z3:15 Z3:16 Z3:17 Z3:18 Z3:19 Z3:1A Z3:1B Z3:1C Z3:1D COUNT G0:00 G0:01 G0:02 G0:03 G0:04 G0:05 G0:06 G0:07 G0:08 G0:09 G0:0A G0:0B G0:0C G0:0D G0:0E G0:0F G0:10 G0:11 G0:12 G0:13 G0:14 G0:15 G0:16 G0:17 G0:18 G0:19 G0:1A G0:1B G0:1C G0:1D LIMIT H0:00 H0:01 H0:02 H0:03 H0:04 H0:05 H0:06 H0:07 H0:08 H0:09 H0:0A H0:0B H0:0C H0:0D H0:0E H0:0F H0:10 H0:11 H0:12 H0:13 H0:14 H0:15 H0:16 H0:17 H0:18 H0:19 H0:1A H0:1B H0:1C H0:1D
1-48
25 MODE
6.8
Password setting
6.9
Telephone number setting

I ADJUSTMENT
Set the following passwords. Key operator password (4 digits): Password used to enter the key operator mode. EKC master key code (8 digits): Password required when entering various EKC setting modes. Weekly timer password (4 digits): Password required when entering various weekly timer setting modes. Note: A password can be set only when the setting for use of the weekly timer is set to "Use" in the key operator mode. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [6. Password setting] key. 3. "Password setting mode screen" Press the key of an item you want to set. Key operator password (4 digits) EKC master key code (8 digits) Weekly timer password (4 digits) 4. Enter a new password through the numeric keys. 5. Press the [OK] key to update the data. To invalidate the setting that you have changed, press the [CANCEL] key.
Set the customer support center telephone and FAX numbers that are used in an emergency for a service call and shown on the basic screen for help. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [7. Telephone number setting] key. 3. "Customer support TEL/FAX setting screen" Press either of the [Service centre Telephone number (16 digits)] and [Service centre FAX number (16)] keys that you want to set. 4. Enter a TEL or FAX number through the numeric keys. 5. Press the [OK] key to update the data. To invalidate the setting that you have changed, press the [CANCEL] key.
Note: When a number is less than 16 digits, be sure to use hyphens to fill up the blanks.
Note: Setting "0000" for the key operator password and the weekly timer password allows you to use each mode with no password.
1-49
25 MODE
6.10 M/C serial number setting

I ADJUSTMENT
Display and set the serial numbers of the main body and options. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [8. M/C serial number setting] key. 3. "Serial number setting mode screen" Press the key of an item you want to set and enter a serial number through the alphanumeric keys. 4. Press the [OK] key to update the data. 5. To invalidate the setting that you have changed, press the [CANCEL] key.
6.11 Indication of ROM version

Display the ROM versions of the main body and the option and a product number that discriminates a new ROM from an old ROM. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [9. Indication of ROM version] key. 3. "Indication of ROM version screen" Each ROM version and product number are displayed. Old type Image control I Printer control C Operation O Finisher N 65AA 65AA 65A* 20AK New type 65LA 65LA 65L* 20GA
Note: The serial number of the main body cannot be changed.
Note: * varies according to the destination. 4. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to "25 mode menu screen."
6.12 KRDS setting

See the "KRDS manual."
6.13 ISW
See chapter "Service tools."
1-50
25 MODE
6.14 Setting date input

Set the starting date of the total counter that is displayed on the LCD in the P function. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [12.Setting date input] key.
6.15 Board change mode

When changing any of the following four types of boards, be sure to set the serial number of the main body in this setting. OPERATION (operation board /1) OVERALL CB (overall control board) NVRAM (memory board) PRINTER (printer control board) Note:
3. "Setting date input screen" Enter an installation date through the numeric keys. 4. Press the [OK] key to update the data. 5. To invalidate the setting that you have changed, press the [CANCEL] key.
The number of boards that can be replaced at the same time is restricted only to two boards. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [13. Board change mode] key. 3. "Board change mode screen" Select a key of the board that you have replaced a part. 4. "Serial number input screen" Enter the serial number of the main body through the alphanumeric keys. 5. Press the [OK] key to update the data. To invalidate the setting that you have changed, press the [CANCEL] key.
1-51
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
7. 36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
7.2
Process adjustment
7.1
Setting method
Make various adjustments around the process. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [1. Process adjustment] key. 3. "Process adjustment mode menu screen" For the process adjustment, there are the following items provided: [1. High voltage adjustment] [2. Drum peculiarity adjustment] [3. Sensor output adjustment] [4. Exclusive paper setting] [5. Recall standard data] 4. Press the key of an item you want to adjust. 5. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return from each of the adjustment screen to the "Process adjustment menu screen."
This machine is provided with the 36 mode to make various adjustment in this mode. A. Procedure 1. With the main power switch (SW1) left ON, turn OFF the sub power switch (SW2). 2. Turn ON the SW2 while pressing the numeric buttons 3 and 6 at the same time. The "36 mode menu screen" is shown. At this point, the machine enters the 36 mode with the normal copy operation unavailable. 3. Press the item key on the liquid crystal display (LCD) to show a setting screen of each item. 4. Confirm the details of input in the setting screen of each item. 5. Turn OFF the SW2 to release the 36 mode. 6. New data will be effective after restarting.
1-52
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 7.2.1 High voltage adjustment For the high voltage adjustment, the following items are provided. However, be sure not to conduct a high voltage adjustment in the field. [1. 1st transfer manual adj.] [2. 2nd transfer manual adj.] [3. HV adjustment (Separation AC)] [4. HV adjustment (Separation DC)] [5. Pre-transfer guide HV check] 7.2.2 Drum peculiarity adjustment Conduct the blade setting, charging potential correction, gamma, developer charge, L-detection adjustment and the initial drum rotation. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [1. Process adjustment] key. 3. "Process adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Drum peculiarity adjustment] key. 4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen" For the drum peculiarity adjustment, the following items are provided: [1. Blade setting mode] [2. Automatic drum potential adj.] [3. Automatic gamma adjustment] [4. LD bias adjustment] [5. Automatic developer charge] [6. L-detect initial auto. adj.] [7. Initial drum rotation] 5. Press the key of an item you want to adjust. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return from each of the adjustment screens to the "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen. a. Procedure (1) Blade setting mode
36 MODE
cleaning blade or the transfer belt. In this mode, apply toner onto the transfer belt then clean with the belt cleaning blade. This prevents the damages of the transfer belt and the belt cleaning blade.
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [1. Process adjustment] key. 3. "Process adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Drum peculiarity adjustment] key. 4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen" Press [1. Blade setting mode] key. 5. "Blade setting mode screen" Press the [Start] key. This process completes in about 15 seconds and complete message is shown on the screen. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen."
1-53
I ADJUSTMENT
Perform this adjustment when changing the belt
36 MODE (2) Automatic drum potential adjustment
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [1. Process adjustment] key. 3. "Process adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Drum peculiarity adjustment] key. 4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen" Press the [3. Automatic gamma adjustment] key. 5. "Automatic gamma adjustment 0 screen" There are 8 kinds of the gamma adjustment (0 to 7). However, conduct "Gamma auto adjustment 0" in the field. "Automatic gamma adjustment 0": Perform the Dmax density adjustment, dot diameter adjustment, automatic drum potential adjustment, and the gamma adjustment. The developing bias value is shown for each line speed (1/1 speed, 1/2 speed and 1/3 speed) and for each color (Y, M, C and K) with a complete message. Press the [Start] key. This process completes in about 2.5 minutes and the developing bias value is displayed for each line speed (1/1 speed, 1/ 2 speed and 1/3 speed) and for each color (Y, M, C and K) on the screen with a complete message. Note: When an abnormality occurs, an error code is displayed. Correct the error referring to the following. Error 1: The gamma correction is unavailable due to the abnormal gamma sensor output. When an error occurs, machine is controlled by using a correction value previously used. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
I ADJUSTMENT
Measure the charging potential of each drum of Y, M, C and K to adjust automatically the developing bias value and the charging voltage. This adjustment is not necessary because of the automatic gamma adjustment contain this adjustment. a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [1. Process adjustment] key. 3. "Process adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Drum peculiarity adjustment] key. 4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen" Press [2. Automatic drum potential adjustment] key. 5. "Automatic drum potential adjustment screen" Press the [Start] key. This process completes in about 20 seconds and the charging potential is displayed for each line speed (1/1 speed, 1/ 2 speed and 1/3 speed) and for each color (Y, M, C and K) on the screen, with an exit message shown. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen."
(3) Automatic gamma adjustment The gamma adjustment is performed automatically. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator mode by setting DIPSW12-1 to 1. a. Procedure
to the "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode.
1-54
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 (4) LD bias adjustment Perform this adjustment when replacing the write unit. Note: Do not perform this adjustment except when replacing the write unit. a. Procedure
36 MODE
6. "LD bias adjustment Y (LS 1/1) screen" For the LD bias adjustment, the following items are provided. Press the arrow key to select the color of the write unit you just replaced. "LD bias adjustment Y (LS 1/1)" "LD bias adjustment Y (LS 1/2)" "LD bias adjustment Y (LS 1/3)" "LD bias adjustment M (LS 1/1)" "LD bias adjustment M (LS 1/2)" "LD bias adjustment M (LS 1/3)" "LD bias adjustment C (LS 1/1)" "LD bias adjustment C (LS 1/2)" "LD bias adjustment C (LS 1/3)" "LD bias adjustment K (LS 1/1)" "LD bias adjustment K (LS 1/2)" "LD bias adjustment K (LS 1/3)" 7. Enter the numeric value on the bar code labeled on the replacing write unit through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Note: Be sure to enter the same numeric value in LS 1/1, LS 1/2, and LS 1/3.
1. Read the numeric value on the bar code labeled [1] on the replacing write unit.
[1]
2. Enter the 36 mode. 3. "36 mode menu screen"
8050fs1025
8. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen."
Press the [1. Process adjustment] key. 4. "Process adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Drum peculiarity adjustment] key. 5. "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen" Press the [4. LD bias adjustment] key.
1-55
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE (5) Automatic developer charge
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 3. Set the developer charging plate /L [2] to the shoulder screws [1] provided above the developing unit of a color the developer of which is changed.
I ADJUSTMENT
In this mode, after discharging developer from the developing unit manually, a new developer is automatically charged. Note: Do not open the upper cover of the developing unit. Otherwise, dust gets in the unit causing image failure. a. Procedure
[2]
[1]
1. Open the toner supply section. 2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the developer charging plate [3] provided inside the toner supply section [2]. Remove 2 screws [4] and then remove the developer charging funnel /L [5].
[2]
[1]
[4] [2]
[3]
[5]
8050fs1002
[1]
8050fs1003
1-56
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 4. Set the developer charging funnel /L [2] to the developer charging plate [1]. Note: Be sure to attach the tip of the developer charging funnel /L [2] securely to the toner supply opening [3]. 7. "36 mode menu screen"
36 MODE
Press the [1. Process adjustment] key. 8. "Process adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Drum peculiarity adjustment] key. 9. "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen" Press the [5. Automatic developer charge] key.
[1]
10. "Automatic developer charge Y screen" Press the arrow key to select the color of developer you want to charge. For the automatic developer charge, the following items are provided: Automatic developer charge Y Automatic developer charge M Automatic developer charge C Automatic developer charge K 11. Press the [Start] key to introduce a new developer into the developer charging funnel /U.
[3]
[2]
8050fs1004
12. Make sure that the developer has been charged successfully before pressing the [CANCEL] key. 13. When charging another developer, repeat steps 3 to 11. 14. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen." 15. Return the installed parts back to their original positions. Note: After completion of this adjustment, be sure to perform the L-detect initial auto. adjustment. If printing is started without performing the L-detect initial auto. adjustment, a proper image density cannot be obtained, thus resulting in the change of developer again.
5. Set the developer charging funnel /U [2] packaged together with developer to the developer charging funnel /L [1]. Note: The developer charge funnel /U [2] is packaged together with each developer. So, be sure to avoid its reuse.
[1]
[2]
8050fs1005
1-57
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE (6) L-detect initial automatic adjustment
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 (7) Initial drum rotation When remove the drum cartridge, be sure to conduct this operation to securely set the drum coupling.
I ADJUSTMENT
Be sure to conduct this adjustment after a new developer is charged. Note: Do not print without conducting the L-detect initial auto. adjustment. Otherwise, a proper image density cannot be obtained, thus resulting in the change of developer again. a. Procedure
a.
Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [1. Process adjustment] key.
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [1. Process adjustment] key. 3. "Process adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Drum peculiarity adjustment] key. 4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen" Press the [6. L-detect initial auto. adjustment] key. 5. "L-detect initial auto. adj. ALL screen" Press the arrow key to select the color of a developer that has been newly charged, and then press the [Start] key. For the L-detect initial auto. adj., the following items are provided: L-detect initial auto. adj. All: Conduct all colors of Y, M,C and K. L-detect initial auto. adj. YMC: Conduct Y, M and C only. L-detect initial auto. adj. K: Conduct K only. L-detect initial auto. adj. Y: Conduct Y only. L-detect initial auto. adj. M: Conduct M only. L-detect initial auto. adj. C: Conduct C only. 6. A message "Completed" is displayed. 7. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen."
3. "Process adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Drum peculiarity adjustment] key. 4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen" Press the [7. Initial drum rotation] key. 5. "Initial drum rotation screen" Press the [Start] key. This process completes in about 10 seconds and complete message is shown on the screen. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen."
1-58
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 7.2.3 Sensor output check For the sensor output check, the following items are provided; however, do not conduct them in the field: [1. Surface potential sensor output] [2. Max. density sensor output] [3. Gamma sensor output] 7.2.4 Exclusive paper setting
36 MODE
This setting is used when the user cannot obtain the satisfactory results of transfer, separation or fixing with the standard setting due to a special paper being used. This setting is applicable when [Exclusive paper A to J] is selected in the key operator mode [Paper type/ Special paper size set]. In default, the following paper data is entered for each destination area. For Japan: 80 g/m2 color specified paper For inch area: 105 g/m2 color specified paper For metric area: 90 g/m2 color specified paper Note: When setting data, be sure to follow the instructions given by Konica Minolta Technology Support Section. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [1. Process adjustment] key. 3. "Process adjustment menu screen" Press the [4. Exclusive paper setting] key. 4. "User paper setting menu screen" For the user paper setting menu, the following items are provided which correspond to the setting key of the same name in the key operator mode. [1. Exclusive paper A setting] [2. Exclusive paper B setting] [3. Exclusive paper C setting] [4. Exclusive paper D setting] [5. Exclusive paper E setting] [6. Exclusive paper F setting] [7. Exclusive paper G setting] [8. Exclusive paper H setting] [9. Exclusive paper I setting] [10. Exclusive paper J setting]
1-59
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Fixing (L) roller temp (print) *1 Change the fixing lower roller control temperature while in the printing. Setting range: 0 to 255 (unit: C) Fixing (U and L) roller temp. difference Change the control temperature difference between fixing upper and lower rollers from print start to 20th print. Setting range: 0 (1C) to 255 (256C) Compulsion off (upper heater) paper width < 261 mm Temperature to turn off the fixing upper roller edge heater when printing paper less than 261 mm width (main scan direction). If it is lowered, the paper edge crease is improved, however, do not lower more than 10C from the default (215C). Fixing related SC may occur. Setting range: 0 to 255 (unit: C) Compulsion off (upper heater) paper width >= 261 mm Temperature to turn off the fixing upper roller edge heater when printing paper 261 mm or more width (main scan direction). If it is lowered, the paper edge crease is improved, however, do not lower more than 10C from the default (235C). Fixing related SC may occur. Setting range: 0 to 255 (unit: C) Line speed Select from 1/1, 1/2 and 1/3. CPM down Widen paper intervals without changing the line speed and make the print speed 1/2 to prevent tacking. LCT fan ON/OFF setting of LCT paper feed assist fan. *1 For safety reasons, there is a temperature limit. The temperature limit changes according to other setting values. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "User paper setting menu screen."
5. For setting, press the key of an item you want
I ADJUSTMENT
to set. Set the following 12 types of setting for each exclusive paper A to J. 2nd transfer offset Side 1 Change the 2nd transfer current for 1-sided mode. + direction: decrease current value - direction: increase current value 2nd transfer offset Side 2 Change the 2nd transfer current for 2-sided mode. + direction: decrease current value - direction: increase current value Separation AC offset Side 1 Change the separation AC current for 1-sided mode. + direction: increase current value up - direction: decrease current value down Separation AC offset Side 2 Change the separation AC current for 2-sided copy mode. + direction: increase current value up - direction: decrease current value down Separation DC offset Side 1 Change the separation DC current for 1-sided copy mode. + direction: increase current value up - direction: decrease current value down Separation DC offset Side 2 Change the separation DC current for 2-sided copy mode. + direction: increase current value up - direction: decrease current value down Fixing (U) roller temp (idle) *1 Change the fixing upper roller control temperature while in the idling. Setting range: 0 to 255 (unit: C) Fixing (U) roller temp (print) *1 Change the fixing upper roller control temperature while in the printing. Setting range: 0 to 255 (unit: C) Fixing (L) roller temp (idle) *1 Change the fixing lower roller control temperature while in the idling. Setting range: 0 to 255 (unit: C)
1-60
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 7.2.5 Recall standard data Reset the adjusted set values of process adjustment to the standard data. (factory default data) Note: Data for automatic drum potential, automatic gamma, L-detect initial auto. and exclusive paper setting adjustment cannot be reset to the standard data. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [1. Process adjustment] key. 3. "Process adjustment menu screen" Press the [5. Recall standard data] key. 4. "Recall standard data: Process adjustment screen" Press the [YES] key when recalling the standard data. Pressing the [NO] key or the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key returns to the "Process adjustment menu screen" without recalling the standard data.
36 MODE
1-61
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
7.3
I ADJUSTMENT
Image adjustment
7.3.1 Magnification adjustment Adjust various magnifications. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [1. Magnification adjustment] key. 4. "Magnification adjustment menu screen" For the magnification adjustment, the following items are provided: [1. Printer vertical mag.adj.] [2. Printer horizontal mag.adj.] [3. Scanner vertical mag.adj.] [4. Belt line speed adjustment] [5. Fixing line speed adjustment] 5. Press the key of an item you want to adjust. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return from each of the adjustment screens to the "Magnification adjustment menu screen."
Conduct various image adjustments. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" For the image adjustment, the following items are provided: [1. Magnification adjustment] [2. Timing adjustment] [3. RADF adjustment] [4. Centring adjustment] [5. Non-image area erase check] [6. Recall standard data] 4. Press the key of an item you want to adjust. 5. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return from each of the adjustment screens to the "Image adjustment menu screen."
1-62
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 (1) Printer vertical magnification adjustment Adjust the vertical magnification of the printer system. This adjustment changes the line speed of the registration roller, drum, transfer belt and the fixing. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1. Note: For the printer vertical magnification adjustment, the following two methods are available. Be sure to take care when an adjustment is made. (1) Printer vertical magnification adjustment Used when the vertical magnification has been changed due to the wear of the registration roller or the heat shrinkage of paper. (2) Belt line speed adjustment Used when the vertical magnification has been changed due to causes other than the above. In default, the printer vertical magnification adjustment on side 2 is not reflected to the image. When adjusting the vertical magnification on side 2, use the memory switch in the key operator mode to turn ON side 2 drum clock adjustment mode. However, since the line speed is switched for each image creation process on side 1 and side 2, the print speed is reduced to about 1/4. a. Procedure
36 MODE
6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button to output a test pattern (No. 16). 7. Measure the vertical magnification with a scale. Standard value: 0.5% or less (when in life-size) Within 1 mm against 205.7 mm
205.7 1
8050fs1006
8. When the value is not within the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button. 9. "Printer screen" For the printer vertical magnification adjustment, the following items are provided. Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select an item you want to adjust. "Printer vertical mag. adjustment": Side 1 and side 2 are adjusted at the same time. Setting range: -300 to +300, 1 step = 0.01% "Tray 1 offset (ADU)": Tray 1 side 2 adjustment Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01% "Tray 2 offset (ADU)": Tray 2 side 2 adjustment Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01% "Tray 3 offset (ADU)": Tray 3 side 2 adjustment Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01% "Bypass tray offset (ADU)": Bypass tray side 2 adjustment Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01% "Back tray 4 offset": LCT side 2 adjustment Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01% 10. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. 11. Repeat steps 5 to 10 until the standard value can be obtained. vertical magnification adjustment
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [1. Magnification adjustment] key. 4. "Magnification adjustment menu screen" Press the [1. Printer vertical mag. adj.] key. 5. "Printer vertical mag. adjustment screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
1-63
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 8. When the value is not within the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button. 9. "Printer horizontal magnification adjustment screen" For the printer horizontal magnification adjustment, the following items are provided. Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select an item you want to adjust. "Printer horizontal magnification adjustment": Side 1 and side 2 are adjusted at the same time. Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01% "Tray 1 offset (ADU)": Tray 1 side 2 adjustment Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01% "Tray 2 offset (ADU)": Tray 2 side 2 adjustment Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01% "Tray 3 offset (ADU)": Tray 3 side 2 adjustment Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01% "Bypass tray offset (ADU)": Bypass tray side 2 adjustment Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01% "Tray 4 offset (ADU)": LCT side 2 adjustment Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01% 10. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. 11. Repeat steps 5 to 10 until the standard value can be obtained. 12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Magnification adjustment menu screen."
12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
I ADJUSTMENT
to
the
"Magnification
adjustment
menu
screen."
(2) Printer horizontal magnification adjustment Adjust the horizontal magnification of the printer system. This adjustment changes the horizontal magnification in image processing prior to the laser exposure. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1. a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [1. Magnification adjustment] key. 4. "Magnification adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Printer horizontal magnification adjustment] key. 5. "Printer horizontal magnification adjustment screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button to output a test pattern (No. 16). 7. Measure the horizontal magnification with a scale. Standard value: 0.5% or less (when in life-size) Within 1 mm against 190 mm
190
8050fs1007
1-64
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 (3) Scanner vertical magnification adjustment Adjust the vertical magnification of the scanner system. This adjustment changes the scan speed. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1. a. Procedure (4) Belt line speed adjustment
36 MODE
11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Magnification adjustment menu screen."
Adjust the vertical magnification of the printer system. This adjustment charges line speed of the transfer belt. Note: For the printer vertical magnification adjust3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [1. Magnification adjustment] key. 4. "Magnification adjustment menu screen" Press the [3. Scanner vertical mag. adj.] key. 5. "Scanner vertical mag. adjustment screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button with a test chart set to the original glass. 7. Measure the vertical magnification with a scale. Standard value: 0.5% or less (when in life-size) Within 1 mm against 200 mm a. ment, the following two methods are available. Be sure to take care when an adjustment is made. (1) Printer vertical magnification adjustment Used when the vertical magnification has been changed due to the wear of the registration roller or the heat shrinkage of paper. (2) Belt line speed adjustment Used when the vertical magnification has been changed due to causes other than the above. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key.
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [1. Magnification adjustment] key.
200
8050fs1008
4. "Magnification adjustment menu screen" Press the [4. Belt line speed adjustment] key.
8. When the value is not within to the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button. 9. "Scanner vertical mag. adjustment screen" Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -40 to +40, 1 step = 0.05% 10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the standard value can be obtained.
5. "Belt line speed adjustment screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button to output a test pattern (No. 16).
1-65
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 (5) Fixing line speed adjustment When replacing the fixing roller /U, /L and transfer belt, use this adjustment method to adjust the fixing roller line speed. These parts are made from rubber. Accordingly, every parts has different diameter and thickness, they must be adjusted for each one. When the fixing line speed is faster than the transfer
205.7 1
7. Measure the vertical magnification with a
I ADJUSTMENT
scale. Standard value: 0.5% or less (when in life-size) Within 1 mm against 205.7 mm
belt, the vertical magnification gets large, thus resulting in a transfer jitter. When it is slower than the transfer belt, the trailing edge of the image gets soiled or the toner scattering occurs. Note: When adjusting it, be sure to use the "paper for fixing speed adjustment" (P/N 65AA-991*). Otherwise, the fixing line speed cannot be accurately adjusted. Be sure to conduct this adjustment after checking to see if the key operator mode memory switch [No. 52: Time lag to switch tray] is set to "Short." When the switch is set to "Standard," change it to "Short" before conducting this adjustment. After completion of the adjustment, be sure to bring it back to "Standard." When conducting this adjustment with the switch set to "Standard," 8 sheets of test pattern may not be output. a. Procedure
8050fs1006
8. If the specification is not satisfied, press the C button while pressing the P button. 9. "Belt line speed adjustment screen" Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01% 10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the standard value can be obtained. 11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Magnification adjustment menu screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [1. Magnification adjustment] key. 4. "Magnification adjustment menu screen" Press the [5. Fixing line speed adjustment] key. 5. "Set the cyan density screen" Press the [DENSITY] key.
1-66
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 6. With the fixing adjustment paper set to the bypass tray, press the START button to output a test pattern. Based on a cyan half-tone, a test pattern is output. Note: When adjusting it, be sure to use the "paper for fixing speed adjustment." Otherwise, it cannot be accurately adjusted. 7. Compare the fixing adjustment density patches (upper and lower limit samples of density that are packed with the "paper for fixing speed adjustment") with the cyan density of the outputted paper, and check to see if the cyan density of the output paper is within the limit of the fixing density standard patches. Note: An accurate adjustment is available only when the density is correctly set. 8. When it is not within the limit, press the C button while pressing the P button. 9. "Set the cyan density screen" Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: 0 to 255 10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the density ges inside the limit. 11. "Set the cyan density screen" Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key. 12. "Push [Sample] and print 8 sheets screen" Press the [8 SAMPLES] key. 13. With 8 sheets of the fixing adjustment paper set to the bypass tray, press the START button to output a test pattern. Note: Be sure to conduct this operation with the copy count set to 1. Note:
36 MODE
14. The fixing roller line speed varies automatically at intervals of about 25 seconds to output 8 sheets of test pattern based on a cyanic half tone. 15. With a pen, write serial numbers from 1 to 8 on the output sheets in order of the paper exit (bottom to top). 16. Comparing the output image on the first sheet with the remaining 7 output sheets, find the next greatest number in which the distance between the magenta line at the lead edge and the first black line at the trail edge (10 lines at intervals of 1 mm) becomes greater than 1 mm longer.
8050fs1009
The image does not stretch gradually for each output sheet. It suddenly stretches at a certain sheet. Therefore, be sure to measure each sheet in order of output. 17. Press the C button while pressing the P button. 18. "Set the cyan density screen" Enter the number of the output sheet that stretches 1 mm through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. 19. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Magnification adjustment menu screen."
1-67
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE 7.3.2 Timing adjustment
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 (1) Printer lead edge timing adjustment Adjust the lead edge timing. This adjustment changes the paper restart timing from the registration roller. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator mode by setting DIPSW12-1 to 1. Note: Be sure the printer vertical magnification has been adjusted.
I ADJUSTMENT
Adjust various timings. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key. 4. "Timing adjustment menu screen" For the timing adjustment, the following items are provided: [1. Printer lead edge timing adj.] [2. Printer registration loop adj.] [3. Printer pre-registration adj.] [4. Printer erasure amount adj.] [5. Scanner re-start timing adj.] [6. RADF registration loop adj.] [7. Writing unit skew initial adj.] [8. Auto. color registration adj.] [9. Color registration manual adj.] 5. Press the key of an item you want to adjust. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return from each of the adjustment screens to the "Timing adjustment menu screen."
a.
Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key. 4. "Timing adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [1. Printer lead edge timing adj.] key.
1-68
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 5. "Lead edge timing (Tray 1) screen" For the printer lead edge timing adjustment, the following items are provided. Press the ADJUSTMENT] key to select an item you want to adjust. "Lead edge timing (Tray 1)" "Lead edge timing (Tray 2)" "Lead edge timing (Tray 3)" "Lead edge timing (Bypass)" "Lead edge timing (Tray 4)" "Lead edge timing (ADU)" "Tray large size normal paper offset" "Tray large size thick paper offset" "Tray small size normal paper offset" "Tray small size thick paper offset" "Bypass large size normal paper offset" "Bypass large size thick paper offset" "Bypass small size normal paper offset" "Bypass small size thick paper offset" "Large size normal paper offset (ADU)" "Large size thick paper offset (ADU)" "Small size normal paper offset (ADU)" "Small size thick paper offset (ADU)" Note: Large size: 300 mm or more in length in the paper feed direction Small size: 300 mm or less in length in the paper feed direction Thick Paper: 106 g/m2 or more 6. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. 7. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 8. Set the copy setting according to the item adjusted and press the START button to output a test pattern (No. 16).
20
36 MODE
9. Measure the lead edge timing with a scale. Standard value: 20 mm 0.5 mm
[NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS
8050fs1010
10. When the value is not within the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button. 11. "Printer lead edge timing screen" Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -60 to +60, 1 step = 0.1 mm 12. Repeat steps 6 to 10 until the standard value is obtained. 13. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen."
(2) Printer registration loop adjustment Adjust the paper loop amount in the registration roller section to remove paper skew and wrinkle, or paper jamming in the registration section. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1. a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key. 4. "Timing adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [2. Printer registration loop adj.] key.
1-69
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen."
5. "Printer registration loop adjustment screen
I ADJUSTMENT
(Tray 1)" For the printer registration loop adjustment, the following items are provided. Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select an item you want to adjust. "Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 1 L)" "Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 1 S)" "Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 2 L)" "Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 2 S)" "Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 3 L)" "Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 3 S)" "Printer registration loop adjustment (Bypass L)" "Printer registration loop adjustment (Bypass S)" "Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 4 L)" "Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 4 S)" "Printer registration loop adjustment (ADU L)" "Printer registration loop adjustment (ADU S)" "Printer registration loop adjustment (Thick)" Note: Large size: 300 mm or more in length in the paper feed direction Small size: 300 mm or less in length in the paper feed direction Thick Paper: 106 g/m2 or more a.
(3) Printer pre-registration adjustment Adjust the paper loop amount in each tray and the ADU pre-registration roller section to remove paper skew and wrinkle, or paper jamming in the pre-registration section. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key. 4. "Timing adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [3. Printer pre-registration adj.] key. 5. "Printer pre-registration adj. screen (Tray 1)" For the printer pre-registration adjustment, the following items are provided. Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select an item you want to adjust. "Printer pre-registration adj. (Tray 1)" "Printer pre-registration adj. (Tray 2)" "Printer pre-registration adj. (Tray 3)" "Printer pre-registration adj. (Tray 4)" "Printer pre-registration adj. (ADU)" 6. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. 7. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 8. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button to output a test pattern (No. 16). 9. When the printer pre-registration amount is not appropriate, press the C button while pressing the P button.
6. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. 7. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 8. Set the copy according to the item that has been adjusted and press the START button to output a test pattern (No. 16). 9. If the printer registration loop amount is not appropriate, press the C button while pressing the P button. 10. "Printer registration loop adj. screen" Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -99 to +99, 1 step = 0.1 mm 11. Repeat steps 6 to 10 until the standard value is obtained.
1-70
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 10. "Printer pre-registration adj. screen" Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -99 (large) to +99 (small), 1 step = 0.1 mm 11. Repeat steps 6 to 10 until the standard value is obtained. Note: 12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen." a. (5) Scanner re-start timing adjustment
36 MODE
In this adjustment, the starting position for reading while in the original scanning mode is adjusted. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1.
Make sure that the printer timing adjustment has been completed. Procedure
(4) Printer erasure amount adjustment Conduct an erasure amount adjustment. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1. a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key. 4. "Timing adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [5. Scanner re-start timing adj.] key. 5. "Scanner re-start timing adjustment screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button with a test chart set to the original glass.
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key. 4. "Timing adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [4. Printer erasure amount adj.] key. 5. "Printer erasure amount adjustment screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button with a test chart set to the original glass. 7. Check the printer erasure amount. Standard value: 3 mm or less 8. When the value is not within the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button. 9. "Printer erasure amount adjustment screen" Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -20 to +40, 1 step = 0.1 mm 10. Repeat steps 6 to 9 until the standard value is obtained. 11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen."
7. Check the scanner re-start timing. Standard value: 3 mm or less 8. When the value is not within the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button. 9. "Scanner re-start timing adjustment screen" Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -10 to +20, 1 step = 0.1 mm 10. Repeat steps 6 to 9 until the standard value is obtained. 11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen."
1-71
I ADJUSTMENT
Adjust re-start timing of original scanning.
36 MODE (6) RADF registration loop adjustment
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 (7) Writing unit skew initial adjustment Note: This adjustment is inhibited in the field.
I ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the original loop amount in the RADF registration roller section to remove paper skew and wrinkle, or paper jamming in the registration section. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1. a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key. 4. "Timing adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [6. RADF registration loop adj.] key. 5. "RADF registration loop adjustment screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 6. Select the A3 paper and press the START button with a test chart set to the original glass. 7. If the RADF registration loop amount is not appropriate, press the C button while pressing the P button. 8. "RADF registration loop adjustment screen" Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -7 to +7, 1 step = 0.5 mm 9. Repeat steps 5 to 8 until the standard value is obtained. 10. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen."
1-72
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 (8) Auto. color registration adjustment Make this adjustment when there is a color registration error. The main scan, sub-scan, horizontal magnification and the skew of color registration error are automatically adjusted. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1. Note: This auto. color registration adjustment has a larger correction area than that of the color registration auto correction in the user mode. So, be sure to perform this adjustment when a SC45-20 occurs. a. Procedure 7. "Color registration adj. screen"
36 MODE
When pressing the [LIST] key, the main scan, sub-scan, horizontal magnification and the skew of Y, M and C compared based on K after adjustment are shown. 8. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen."
(9) Color registration manual adjustment (partial horizontal adjustment) With respect to the main scan, entire horizontal magnification, partial horizontal magnification, subscan, inclination and the scan inclination, the registration error amount of Y, M and C compared based on K is shown on the operation panel. The partial horizontal magnification that cannot be corrected automatically is manually adjusted. Note: Be sure that the printer vertical and horizontal magnifications have been complete. Make sure that the auto. color registration adjustment has been completed. a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key. 4. "Timing adjustment menu screen" Press the [8. Auto. color registration adj.] key. 5. "Color registration adj. screen" Press the [Start] key. 6. The color registration adjustment starts and a message "Complete" is shown in about 2 minutes. When the error message appears, perform an error correction referring to the below. Error 1: It does not converge within the standard value. The patch density may be too light. Check around the drum unit and perform the gamma automatic adjustment (0). Then perform this adjustment. Error 2: The difference of the color registration is too much. Error 3: The other error SC other than the color registration automatic adjustment may occur. Restart the main body in the normal mode to check for SC code. 1-73
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key. 4. "Timing adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [9. Color registration manual adj.] key. 5. "Color registration manual adj. screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 9. The amount of error of the "MainScan" (main scan), "Mag(ALL)" (entire horizontal magnification), "Mag(PART)" (partial horizontal magnification), "SubScan" (sub-scan), "Incline" (inclination) and the "ScanBend" (scan incline) of Y, M and C are compared based on K and result are shown at "Rest" section on the operation panel (unit is pixel).
6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the
I ADJUSTMENT
START button to output a test pattern. Place the test pattern [1] outputted securely against the original positioning plate /L [2] and the original positioning plate /R [3] to set it to the original glass, and close the DF or platen cover. Note: When setting the test pattern to the original glass, be sure to take check of the setting direction (with printing face down) and position. Check that the settings for all colors (Y, M, C, K) in the [Test pattern density setting] of 36 mode is set to 255. If not, it results in an error.
10. Make sure that "OK" is displayed for all the items. When any item is not within the standard, an error code is displayed for each cause together with an NG. Make an error correction referring to the below: When a "NG" occurs in the "MainScan", "Mag(ALL)", "SubScan" or "Incline," perform the auto. color registration adjustment again. Error 1: A chart pattern cannot be detected. Improper positioning of the chart.
[3] [2]
Error 2: The setting direction of a chart is upside down. Improper positioning of the chart. Error 3: A chart pattern cannot be detected. A different type of chart. Error 4: Adjustment is impossible. Software bugged. Error 5: Not within the standard value. Re-adjust it. Error 6: Nonvolatile data abnormality. Check the installation of memory board.
[1]
Error 7: Memory other than those specified is accessed. Software bugged. Error 8: Memory related error. Software bugged. Error 9: Program error. Software bugged. Error 10: The chart is skew. Improper positioning of the chart.
8050fs1011
Error 11: Image header information read error. Software bugged. Error 12: An argument set error. Software bugged. Error 13: A measurement error. Improper positioning of the chart, or a defective chart.
7. Press the C button while pressing the P button. 8. "Color registration manual adj. screen" Press the [SCAN] key to scan the test pattern.
1-74
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 11. When a "NG" occurs in the "MainScan", "Mag(ALL)" or "Mag(PART)," open the toner supply section and loosen 2 screws [1] provided near the developing unit of a color from which an "NG" is displayed. Then, slide the adjustment plate [2] up and down to adjust the partial horizontal magnification. Moving the adjustment plate [2] upward reduces the partial horizontal magnification data (minus) and moving the plate downward increases it (plus). Adjustment target Move the adjustment plate [2] by referring to the "Rest" of "Mag(PART)" (partial horizontal magnification) (unit: pixel) displayed at the operation panel. The scale of the adjustment plate [2] changes about 0.5 pixel per notch.
36 MODE
15. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen."
[2]
[1]
8050fs1012
12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Timing adjustment menu screen." 13. Conduct the color registration adjustment referring to (8) Auto. color registration adjustment. 14. Repeat steps 4 to 13 until "OK" is displayed.
1-75
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE 7.3.3 RADF adjustment
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 5. "RADF original size adjustment (A4) or (8.5 x 11) screen" With the A4 (for metric machine) or 8.5 x 11 (for inch machine) paper set to the RADF, press the [Start] key. 6. After confirmation of a message "Complete," press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key. 7. "RADF original size adjustment (A5R) or (5.5 x 8.5R) screen" With the A5R (for metric machine) or 5.5 x 8.5R (for inch machine) paper set to the RADF, press the [Start] key. 8. After confirmation of a message "Complete," press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key. 9. "RADF original size adjustment (A4R) or (8.5 x 11R) screen" With the A4R (for metric machine) or 8.5 x 11R (for inch machine) paper set to the RADF, press the [Start] key. 10. After confirmation of a message "Complete," press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 11. Make sure that the RADF original size is properly detected.
I ADJUSTMENT
Conduct the original size adjustment, original stop position adjustment and the sensor adjustment of the RADF. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [3. RADF adjustment] key. 4. "RADF adjustment menu screen" For the RADF adjustment, the following items are provided: [1. RADF original size adjustment] [2. RADF orig. stop position adj.] [3. RADF sensor adjustment] 5. Press the key of an item you want to adjust. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return from each of the adjustment screens to the "RADF adjustment menu screen."
(1) RADF original size adjustment Conduct this adjustment when the RADF original size is not properly detected. a. Procedure
12. Press the C button while pressing P button. 13. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "RADF adjustment menu screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [3. RADF adjustment] key. 4. "RADF adjustment menu screen" Press the [1. RADF original size adjustment] key.
1-76
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 (2) RADF original stop position adjustment Conduct the original stop position leading edge timing (leading edge timing) adjustment of the RADF. Note: Make sure that the printer lead edge timing adjustment and the scanner re-start timing adjustment have been completed. a. Procedure (3) RADF sensor adjustment
36 MODE
11. Repeat steps 6 to 10 until the standard value can be obtained. 12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "RADF adjustment mode menu screen."
Conduct this adjustment when malfunction occurs in the reflective type sensors. a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [3. RADF adjustment] key. 4. "RADF adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. RADF orig. stop position] key. 5. "Front plain paper/thick paper screen" For the RADF orig. stop position adj., the following items are provided. Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select an item you want to adjust. [Normal & Thick paper (Front side)] [Thin paper (Front side)] [Normal & Thick paper (Back side)] [Thin paper (Back side)] 6. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 7. With the original setting set to the copy mode according to an item you want to adjust, set the test chart to the RADF. And select the A3 paper and press the START button. 8. Check the RADF leading edge timing. Standard value: 3 mm or less 9. When the value is not within the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button. 10. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -14 to +14, 1 step = 0.5 mm
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [3. RADF adjustment] key. 4. "RADF adjustment menu screen" Press the [3. RADF sensor adjustment] key. 5. "RADF sensor adjustment screen" Close the RADF and press the [Start] key. The sensitivity of the RADF sensors are automatically adjusted. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "RADF adjustment mode menu screen."
1-77
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE 7.3.4 Centring adjustment
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 4. "Centring adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [1. Printer centring adjustment] key. 5. "Printer centring adj. (Tray 1) screen" For the printer centering adjustment, the following items are provided. Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select an item you want to adjust. "Printer centring adj. (Tray 1)" "Printer centring adj. (Tray 2)" "Printer centring adj. (Tray 3)" "Printer centring adj. (Bypass)" "Printer centring adj. (Tray 4)" "Printer centring adj. (ADU)" "Large size offset (Tray 1)" "Small size offset (Tray 1)" "8.5 x 5.5 offset (Tray 1)" "Large size offset (Tray 2)" "Small size offset (Tray 2)" "8.5 x 5.5 offset (Tray 2)" "Large size offset (Tray 3)" "Small size offset (Tray 3)" "8.5 x 5.5 offset (Tray 3)" "Large size offset (Bypass)" "Small size offset (Bypass)" "8.5 x 5.5 offset (Bypass)"
I ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the mis-centering of images vertical to the paper feed direction. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [4. Centring adjustment] key. 4. "Centring adjustment mode menu screen" For the centering adjustment, the following items are provided: [1. Printer centring adjustment] [2. Scanner centring adjustment] [3. RADF centring adjustment] 5. Press the key of an item you want to adjust. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return from each of the adjustment screens to the "Centring adjustment mode menu screen."
(1) Printer centring adjustment This adjustment changes the laser writing start timing. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1. Note: Be sure that the printer horizontal magnification has been completed.
"Large size offset (Tray 4)" "Small size offset (Tray 4)" "Large size normal paper offset (ADU)" "Large size thick paper offset (ADU)" "Small size normal paper offset (ADU)" "Small size thick paper offset (ADU)" "8.5 x 5.5 normal paper offset (ADU)" "8.5 x 5.5 thick paper offset (ADU)" Note:
a.
Procedure
Large size: 300 mm or more in length in the paper feed direction Small size: 300 mm or less in length in the paper feed direction Thick Paper: 106 g/m2 or more 6. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [4. Centring adjustment] key.
1-78
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 7. Select the paper size and the type of paper according to an item you want to adjust, and press the START button to output a test pattern (No. 16). 8. Fold the outputted paper in the paper feed direction and check the amount of error of the lines on both sides. Standard value: Within 2 mm 9. When the value is not within the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button. 10. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -40 to +40, 1 step = 0.1 mm 11. Repeat steps 6 to 10 until the standard value can be obtained. 12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Centring adjustment mode menu screen."
36 MODE
5. "Scanner (platen) centring adjustment screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button with a test chart set to the original glass. 7. Fold the outputted paper in the paper feed direction and check the amount of error of the lines on both sides. Standard value: Within 2 mm 8. When the value is not within the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button. 9. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -30 to +30, 1 step = 0.1 mm 10. Repeat steps 6 to 9 until the standard value is obtained. 11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Centring adjustment mode menu screen."
(2) Scanner centring adjustment Adjust the centring when scanning the platen original. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator Note: Make sure that the printer centering adjustment has been completed. a. Procedure a. Note: Make sure that the printer centering and scanner centring adjustment has been completed. Procedure mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1. (3) RADF centring adjustment Adjusts the centring when scanning the RADF original.
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [4. Centring adjustment] key. 4. "Centring adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [2. Scanner centring adjustment] key.
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [4. Centring adjustment] key. 4. "Centring adjustment menu screen" Press the [3. RADF centring adjustment] key.
1-79
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 7.3.5 Non-image area erase check When installing this machine or when moving the installation site, check to see if the erasure function on the outside of the original of the copy-applied functions operates correctly at this installation site. Preparations made in advance: Open fully the RADF or platen cover. There should not be anything on the original glass. Clean the original glass. A. Procedure
5. "RADF centring adjustment (Front) screen"
I ADJUSTMENT
For the RADF centering adjustment, the following items are provided. Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select an item you want to adjust. "RADF centring adjustment (Front)" "RADF centring adjustment (Back)" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button with a test chart set to the original glass. 7. Fold the outputted paper in the paper feed direction and check the amount of error of the lines on both sides. Standard value: Within 2 mm 8. When the value is not within the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button. 9. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -30 to +30, 1 step = 0.1 mm 10. Repeat steps 6 to 9 until the standard value is obtained. 11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Centring adjustment mode menu screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [5. Non-image area erase check] key. 4. "Non-image area erase check screen" Press the [Start] key. 5. Make sure that a message "Normal adjustment selected..." is shown on the operation panel. When a message "Does not function satisfactorily..." is shown, refer to "B. Error message and Handling," to conduct the non-image area erase check again. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Image adjustment menu screen."
1-80
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 B. Error message and Handling If the error is detected while perform the "non-image area erase check" mode, following error message will be displayed on the operation panel. Note: (1) Error message 1 Adjust for Moderate Brightness. The Non-image area erase function may not operate correctly with dark (density) originals. Please confirm "adjustment" - "36 MODE", columns of Service Manual. Handling 1 When the "non-image area erase" function is not used very frequently, or when copy originals that have a dark background are not copied very frequently in the "non-image area erase," the copier can be used in the current installation location. However, when copy originals that have a dark background are frequently copied, install the copier in a location or in a direction where less external light get in (darker) than the present installation location, and check the "non-image area erase check mode" again. (2) Error message 2 Adjust for Extreme Brightness. In many case, the non-image area erase function will not operate correctly. Please confirm "adjustment" - "36 MODE", columns of Service Manual. Handling 2 When the "non-image area erase" function is not used very frequently, the copier can be used in the current installation location. However, the outsideoriginal erasure function is frequently used, install the copier in a location or in a direction where less external light get in (darker) than the present installation location, and check the "non-image area erase check mode" again. At this time, when there is a bright light source such as a fluorescent light installed directly above this machine, reconsider the installation location or direction, or take some measures to shield the light source and check the "nonimage area erase check mode" again. 1-81
36 MODE
7.3.6 Recall standard data Reset the adjustment values of image adjustment to the standard data. (factory default data)
Data for the printer vertical magnification, RADF registration loop, auto. color registration, color registration manual, RADF original size, RADF original stop position and RADF sensor adjustment cannot be reset to standard data. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [5. Recall standard data] key. 4. "Recall standard data (image adjustment data) screen" Press the [YES] key when recalling the standard data. Pressing the [NO] key or [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key returns to the "Image adjustment menu screen" without recalling the standard data.
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
7.4
I ADJUSTMENT
Image quality adjustment
7.4.1 Scanner gamma adjustment Conduct the gradation correction of the scanner. When color reproduction is a poor condition, usually conduct the printer gamma correction of the process adjustment. When changing the CCD unit, exposure lamp (L1), original glass or each scanner mirror, conduct this adjustment. Note: Scanner gamma has been adjusted for each machine. Please be noted that the scanner gamma data is rewritten to the mean value if the [Adj. data reset] key in the "Scanner gamma adjustment screen" is pressed. A. Procedure 1. After replacing a part, place a test chart on the original glass, select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and press the START button. Note: For the start button, be sure to press the hard button, not the soft key on the LCD. 2. Check for the foggy background or color balance. 3. If there is abnormality, enter the 36 mode. 4. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 5. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [1. Scanner gamma adjustment] key. 6. "Scanner gamma adjustment screen" Press the [Adj. data reset] key. Press the [YES] key when rewriting the scanner gamma mean value. Press the [NO] to return to the "Scanner gamma adjustment screen" without rewriting. 7. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Image quality mode menu screen."
Conduct various image quality adjustments. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" For the image quality adjustment, the following items are provided: [1. Scanner gamma adjustment] [2. Printer gamma adjustment] [3. Sharpness adjustment] [4. Contrast adjustment] [5. Image judge adjustment] [6. ACS adjustment] [7. Density adjustment] [8. Tone adjustment] [9. Recall standard data] 4. Press the key of an item you want to adjust. 5. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return from each of the adjustment screen to the "Image quality mode menu screen."
1-82
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 7.4.2 Printer gamma adjustment When the color reproduction is in poor condition, conduct this adjustment to correct the gradation. This adjustment is not reflected on the output from the IP. Note: A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [2. Printer gamma adjustment] key. 4. For the printer gamma adjustment, the following items are provided: [1. Printer gamma offset adj.] [2. Printer gamma sensor adj.] [3. Printer screen gradation adj.] 5. Press the key of an item you want to adjust. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return from each of adjustment screen to the "Printer gamma adjustment menu screen." 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" a. Procedure (1) Printer gamma offset adjustment
36 MODE
tion varies with copy modes to correct the gradation in a high light density section and adjust the density in the background.
For the printer gamma offset adjustment, adjustment methods of 0 to 5 are available for each screen type. It is possible to divide the gradation in 256 into 6 parts of 0 to 5 and adjust the entire ranges from "0: Low density section" to "5: High density section." In default, adjustment is limited only to "0 (low density section)." When setting DIPSW 28-4 to 1, adjustment can be made on the entire ranges of 0 to 5. Be sure not make the adjustment of "Printer gamma offset adjustment (ED-8) (0 to 5)."
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key.
Press the [2. Printer gamma adjustment] key. 4. "Printer gamma adjustment menu screen" Press the [1. Printer gamma offset adj.] key.
1-83
I ADJUSTMENT
Conduct this adjustment when the color reproduc-
36 MODE
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 10. "Printer gamma offset adjustment screen" Press the key of a color (C or K) you want to adjust, enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -128 (lighter) to +127 (darker) Note: There are three keys: [1/1], [1/2] and [1/3] provided for each line speed. Be sure to use the key [1/1] for adjustment. A value entered by the key [1/1] is automatically inputted into keys [1/2] and [1/3]. 11. Repeat steps 6 to 10 until the standard value is obtained. 12. Take notice of the gray gradation pattern [1] created in C, M and Y, make sure that the gray balance at the square marks line [2] and [3] is the same.
5. "Printer gamma offset adj. (LS200) (0) screen"
I ADJUSTMENT
For the printer gamma offset adjustment, the following items are provided. Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select an item you want to adjust. "Printer gamma offset adj. (LS200) (0 to 5)" "Printer gamma offset adj. (LS150) (0 to 5)" "Printer gamma offset adj. (DS200) (0 to 5)" "Printer gamma offset adj. (DS150) (0 to 5)" "Printer gamma offset adj. (ED-8) (0 to 5)" "Printer gamma offset adj. (ED-2) (0 to 5)" The following shows the copy mode to which each adjustment is reflected. (LS200): Line screen/High resolution (LS150): Line screen/Smooth tone (DS200): Dot screen/High resolution (DS150): Dot screen/Smooth tone (ED-8): Text section to be used together with the screens above. (ED-2): High compression 6. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 7. Set A4 or 8.5 x 11 paper in the bypass tray and press the START button to print a test pattern. 8. Check the test pattern that has been outputted. Make sure that the high light density starting section of C and K is uniform, and even between the gray reference lines [1].
Y M C K
[1]
Y M C K
[6]
[5]
[4] [2]
[3]
[1]
8050fs1016
8050fs1015
9. When they are not even, press the C button while pressing the P button.
1-84
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 13. When the gray balance is not the same, press the key of a color (Y or M) you want to adjust, enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -128 (lighter) to +127 (darker) Note: There are three keys: [1/1], [1/2] and [1/3] provided for each line speed. Be sure to use the key [1/1] for adjustment. A value entered by the key [1/1] is automatically inputted into keys [1/2] and [1/3]. How to match the gray balance Take notice of the gray patches [4] made up of 49 colors of C, M and Y. In the 49 patches, M gets darker as going right to left. And Y gets darker as going down from up. However, C is fixed. The patch [5] at the center is the same color as the gray [2]. The patches [6] positioned at the four corners of the patch [5] is the same color as the gray [3]. Out of the 49 patches, select a gray of the same gray balance as the gray [6]. e.g.) When a patch on the lower right side is more suitable than the patch [5] at the center: Adjust M and Y in the positive direction. When a patch on the upper left side is more suitable than the patch [5] at the center: Adjust M and Y in the negative direction. 14. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 15. Set A4 or 8.5 x 11 paper in the bypass tray and press the START button to print a test pattern. 16. Repeat steps 13 to 15 until you can get a satisfactory result. 17. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Printer gamma adjustment menu screen." 2. "36 mode menu screen" (2) Printer gamma sensor adjustment
36 MODE
the automatic gamma adjustment of the process adjustment, conduct this adjustment to correct gradation. The printer gamma correction that is carried out automatically and periodically uses a gamma sensor to read patterns on the transfer belt. So, there is a possibility of the gamma sensor not being accurately adjusted due to the change in characteristic of the gamma sensor. This adjustment use the scanner to correct the gamma sensor for accurate printer gamma adjustment. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1. a. Procedure
Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [2. Printer gamma adjustment] key. 4. "Printer gamma adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Printer gamma sensor adj.] key.
1-85
I ADJUSTMENT
When a poor color reproduction results even after
36 MODE
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 8. "Please load output paper... screen" After completion of the test pattern output, the display returns automatically to the adjustment screen. The outputted test pattern [1] pressed securely against the original positioning plate /L [3] and the original positioning plate /R [4], set it to the original glass. Note: Make sure to set it with the green triangular mark [2] on the left side. (with printing face down)
5. "Printer gamma sensor adj. (LS200) screen"
I ADJUSTMENT
For the printer gamma sensor adjustment, the following items are provided. Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select an item you want to adjust. "Printer gamma sensor adjustment (LS200)" "Printer gamma sensor adjustment (LS150)" "Printer gamma sensor adjustment (DS200)" "Printer gamma sensor adjustment (DS150)" "Printer gamma sensor adjustment (CONTONE)" "Printer gamma sensor adjustment (ED)" The following shows the copy mode to which each adjustment is reflected: (LS200): Line screen/High resolution (LS150): Line screen/Smooth tone (DS200): Dot screen/High resolution (DS150): Dot screen/Smooth tone (CONTONE): Text section with to the be used together above. (ED): High compression Note: A screen in which the screen selection is turned off by the key operator mode-memory switch is not displayed. When any one of the screen adjustments is made, be sure to conduct the CONTONE adjustment at the same time. 6. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 7. With the A4 (for metric machine) or 8.5 x 11 (for inch machine) paper set in the bypass tray, press the START button to output a test pattern. screens
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
8050fs1017
9. With 10 sheets of copy paper (white) placed on the test chart, close the RADF or platen cover. Note: Be sure to use white copy paper. Otherwise, the printer gradation cannot be corrected properly. 10. Press the [Start] key. Note: Start cannot be made when paper is not set in the bypass tray. 11. When the chart is scanned with no problem found, the gamma sensor is adjusted, the printer gamma correction is made and a message "Complete" is displayed.
1-86
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 12. If any trouble should be found, an error code is displayed for each cause. Repair the error referring to the below. Error 1: Improper positioning of the chart. Error 2: The setting direction of a chart is upside down. Improper positioning of the chart. Error 3: A chart pattern cannot be detected. A different type of chart. Error 4: Adjustment is impossible. Software bugged. Error 5: Not within the standard value. Re-adjust it. Error 6: Nonvolatile data abnormality. Check the installation of memory board. Error 7: Memory other than those specified is accessed. Software bugged. Error 8: Memory related error. Software bugged. Error 9: Program errorSoftware bugged. Error 10: The chart is skew. Improper positioning of the chart. Error 11: Image header information read error. Software bugged. Error 12: RGB data abnormality. Chart is wrong, or software is bugged. Error 13: Argument set error. Software bugged. Error 31: Sensor value abnormality - Re-adjust it. Error 51: Regression calculation abnormality Re-adjust it. Error 52: Array number overflow - Software bugged. Error 53: Regression order abnormality - Software bugged. Error 54: Selected screen information abnormality - Software bugged. Error 55: Color information abnormality - Software bugged. 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" a. Procedure 13. "Printer gamma sensor adj. screen"
36 MODE
Press the [Adj. data reset] key if you want to return to the factory default data. Press the [YES] key to reset the adjusted printer gamma sensor data and return to the factory default data. Press the [NO] key to return to the "Printer gamma sensor adj. screen" without data reset. 14. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Printer gamma adjustment menu screen."
(3) Printer screen gradation adjustment Adjust a tone jump (in which gradation is not continuous).
Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Printer gamma adjustment] key. 4. "Printer gamma adjustment menu screen" Press the [3. Printer screen gradation adj.] key. 5. "Printer screen gradation adj. (Y) screen" For the printer screen gradation adjustment, the following items are provided. "Printer screen gradation adj. (Y)" "Printer screen gradation adj. (M)" "Printer screen gradation adj. (C)" "Printer screen gradation adj. (K)" 6. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 7. Set the A4 or 8.5 x 11 paper in the bypass tray and press the START button to output a test pattern. 8. Five sheets of test pattern are automatically outputted. Check them to see if there is a tone jump found in them.
1-87
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 7.4.3 Sharpness adjustment Conduct the sharpness adjustment or, this is carried out when moire reproduced. Use this adjustment for changing the center value for the sharpness adjustment in the user mode. A. Procedure
9. When a tone jump is found in them, press the
I ADJUSTMENT
C button while pressing the P button. 10. "Printer screen gradation adj." Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a color in which a tone jump has occurred. 11. Enter one less numeric value than the current and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -3 to +1 12. Repeat steps 6 to 11 until the tone jump disappears. 13. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Printer gamma adjustment menu screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [3. Sharpness adjustment] key. 4. "Sharpness adjustment menu screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 5. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button with a test chart set to the original glass. 6. Press the C button while pressing the P button. 7. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -5 (soft/less moire) to +5 (sharp/ more moire) 8. Repeat steps 4 to 7 until it becomes suitable. 9. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Image quality mode menu screen."
1-88
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 7.4.4 Contrast adjustment Adjust the contrast. Use this adjustment for changing the center value for the contrast adjustment in the user mode. A. Procedure A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [4. Contrast adjustment] key. 4. "Contrast adjustment menu screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 5. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button with a test chart set to the original glass. 6. Press the C button while pressing the P button. 7. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -5 (contrast increased) to +5 (contrast reduced) 8. Repeat steps 4 to 7 until it becomes suitable. 9. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Image quality mode menu screen." a. Procedure (1) Dot detect adjustment 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" 7.4.5 Image judge adjustment
36 MODE
Adjust the threshold value of the original image judgement.
Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [5. Image judge adjustment] key. 4. "Image judge adjustment mode menu screen" For the image judge adjustment, the following items are provided: [1. Dot detect adjustment] [2. Color text adjustment] [3. Dot/Text area adjustment] 5. Press the key of an item you want to adjust. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return from each of the adjustment screens to the "Image judge adjustment mode menu screen."
Adjust the dot discrimination threshold value of the original image.
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [5. Image judge adjustment] key. 4. "Image judge adjustment menu screen" Press the [1. Dot detect adjustment] key. 5. "Dot detect adjustment R screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
1-89
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 (2) Color text adjustment Adjust the color text discrimination threshold value of the original image. Use this adjustment for changing the center value for the color text adjustment in the user mode. a. Procedure
6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the
I ADJUSTMENT
START button with a test chart set to the original glass. 7. A dot detection pattern is outputted. This output pattern shows how the original image is discriminated as an image. Cyan section: Discriminated as a dot. White section: Discriminated as a picture. Black section: Discriminated as a black text. Magenta section: Discriminated as a color text. 8. Press the C button while pressing the P button. 9. "Dot detect adjustment R screen" For the dot detection adjustment, the following items are provided: [Dot detect adjustment R] [Dot detect adjustment G] [Dot detect adjustment B] 10. Select a color you want to adjust as necessary, enter a numeric value through the numeric keys, and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -5 (dot area reduced) to +5 (dot area increased) 11. Repeat steps 5 to 10 until it becomes suitable. 12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Image judge adjustment mode menu screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [5. Image judge adjustment] key. 4. "Image judge adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Color text adjustment] key. 5. "Color text screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button with a test chart set to the original glass. 7. A color text detection pattern is outputted. This output pattern shows how the original image is discriminated as an image. Black section: Discriminated as a black text. Magenta section: Discriminated as a color text. 8. Press the C button while pressing the P button. 9. "Color text screen" Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -5 (color text area reduced) to +5 (color text area increased) 10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until it becomes suitable. 11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Image judge adjustment menu screen."
1-90
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 (3) Dot/Text area adjustment Adjust the dot discrimination and text discrimination threshold values of the original image. Use this adjustment for changing the center value for the letter adjustment in the user mode. A. Procedure a. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" 7.4.6 ACS adjustment
36 MODE
Conduct this adjustment when the ACS (Auto color selection) does not function properly.
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [5. Image judge adjustment] key. 4. "Image judge adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [3. Dot/Text adjustment] key. 5. "Dot/Text adjustment screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 6. Select the A3 paper and press the START button with a test chart set to the original glass. 7. A dot and text detection pattern is outputted. This output pattern shows how the original image is discriminated as an image. Cyan section: Discriminated as a dot. White section: Discriminated as a picture. Black section: Discriminated as a black text. Magenta section: Discriminated as a color text. 8. Press the C button while pressing the P button. 9. "Dot/Text area adjustment screen" 10. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -5 (dot area reduced and text area increased) to +5 (dot area increased and text area reduced) 11. Repeat steps 5 to 10 until it becomes suitable. 12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Image judge adjustment menu screen."
Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality adjustment menu screen" Press the [6. ACS adjustment] key. 4. "Set the chart and push [SCAN] screen" With an original in which the ACS does not function properly set to the original glass, press the [SCAN] key. 5. In the "JUDGE," the result of the ACS is shown as "COLOR" or "MONOCHROME." 6. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -5 (MONOCHROME) to +5 (COLOR) 7. Repeat steps 4 to 6 until it becomes suitable. 8. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Image quality mode menu screen."
1-91
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE 7.4.7 Density adjustment
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 6. A numeric value is shown in the "RESULT." 7. When the adjustment result is other than 0, enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key (e.g.: if the adjustment result is 2, input -2). Setting range: -5 to +5 8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 until the adjustment result becomes 0. 9. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Density adjustment mode menu screen."
I ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the AE (AES) density, copy density and the background density. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [7. Density adjustment] key. 4. "Density adjustment mode menu screen" For the density adjustment, the following items are provided: [1. AE (AES) adjustment] [2. Copy density adjustment] [3. Background adjustment] 5. Press the key of an item you want to adjust.
(2) Copy density adjustment Adjust the copy density. Use this adjustment for changing the center value for the density shift function in the user mode. a. Procedure
6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return from each of the adjustment screens to the "Density adjustment mode menu screen."
(1) AE (AES) adjustment Conduct this adjustment when you want to change the center value selected by the AE (Auto density selection) in the user mode. a. Procedure
3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [7. Density adjustment] key. 4. "Density adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [2. Copy density adjustment] key.
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [7. Density adjustment] key. 4. "Density adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [1. AE (AES) adjustment] key. 5. With a chart in which you want to change the AE density set to the original glass, press the [SCAN] key.
1-92
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 5. "Copy density adjustment screen" For the copy density adjustment, the following items are provided. Press the arrow key to select an item you want to adjust. "Text/Photo (Full color)" "Photo (Full color)" "Text (Full color)" "Map (Full color)" "Text/Photo (Mono color)" "Photo (Mono color)" "Text (Mono color)" "Map (Mono color)" "Text/Photo (Monochrome)" "Photo (Monochrome)" "Text (Monochrome)" "Map (Monochrome)" 6. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 7. Select a mode you want to adjust and then select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper. With the test chart set to the original glass, press the START button. 8. Press the C button while pressing the P button. 9. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -5 (lighter) to +5 (darker) 10. Repeat steps 6 to 9 until it becomes suitable. 11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Density adjustment mode menu screen." 6. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 5. "Background adjustment screen" 2. "36 mode menu screen" a. Procedure
36 MODE
Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [7. Density adjustment] key. 4. "Density adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [3. Background adjustment] key.
For the background adjustment, the following items are provided. Press the arrow key to select an item you want to adjust. "Text/Photo (Full color)" "Photo (Full color)" "Text (Full color)" "Map (Full color)" "Text/Photo (Mono color)" "Photo (Mono color)" "Text (Mono color)" "Map (Mono color)" "Text/Photo (Monochrome)" "Photo (Monochrome)" "Text (Monochrome)" "Map (Monochrome)"
7. Select a mode you want to adjust and then select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper. With the test chart set to the original glass, press the START button. 8. Press the C button while pressing the P button.
(3) Background adjustment Adjust the copy background density. The background adjustment in the user mode only supports the batch adjustment. It is not possible to adjust the background for each color mode or original mode. 9. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -5 (lighter) to +5 (darker) 10. Repeat steps 6 to 9 until it becomes suitable. 11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Density adjustment mode menu screen."
1-93
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE 7.4.8 Tone adjustment
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button with a test chart set to the original glass. 7. Press the C button while pressing the P button. 8. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -5 (lighter) to +5 (darker) 9. Repeat steps 6 to 8 until it becomes suitable. 10. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Image quality adjustment menu screen."
I ADJUSTMENT
Conduct the tone adjustment of red, green or blue. Use this adjustment for changing the center value for the tone adjustment in the user mode. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [8. Tone adjustment] key. 4. "Tone adjustment mode menu screen" For the tone adjustment, the following items are provided: [1. Red adjustment] [2. Green adjustment] [3. Blue adjustment] 5. Press the key of an item you want to adjust. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return from each of the adjustment screen to the "Image quality mode menu screen." a.
(2) Green adjustment Adjust the density of green. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [8. Tone adjustment] key.
(1) Red adjustment Adjust the density of red. This adjustment is not reflected to the IP. a. Procedure
4. "Tone adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [2. Green adjustment] key. 5. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button with a test chart set to the original glass. 7. Press the C button while pressing the P button. 8. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -5 (lighter) to +5 (darker) 9. Repeat steps 6 to 8 until it becomes suitable. 10. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Image quality mode menu screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [8. Tone adjustment] key. 4. "Tone adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [1. Red adjustment] key. 5. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
1-94
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 (3) Blue adjustment Adjust the density of blue. 7.4.9 Recall standard data
36 MODE
Reset the adjustment values of image quality a. Procedure adjustment to the standard data. (factory default data) Note: Data for the scanner gamma adjustment and the printer gamma sensor adjustment cannot 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [8. Tone adjustment] key. 4. "Tone adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [3. Blue adjustment] key. 5. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button with a test chart set to the original glass. 7. Press the C button while pressing the P button. 8. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -5 (lighter) to +5 (darker) 9. Repeat steps 6 to 8 until it becomes suitable. 10. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Image quality mode menu screen." A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [9. Recall standard data] key. 4. "Recall standard data: Image quality adj. screen" Press the [YES] key when recalling the standard date. Pressing the [NO] key or [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key returns to the [Image quality mode menu screen] without recalling the standard data. be reset to standard data.
1-95
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
7.5
I ADJUSTMENT
tion.
Running test mode
7.5.1 Setting method A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [4. Running test mode] key.
Conduct a test while in the continuous copy operaSelect [4. Running test mode] in the 36 mode menu screen to show the running mode menu screen. For this adjustment, the following items can be selected: A. Intermittent copy mode After completion of the copy operation for the set copy count, the copier changes into the copy ready state and waits for 0.5 sec. before resuming the same operation. B. Paperless running mode Without detecting paper or jam, the copy operation is made nearly at the same timing as the normal copy operation. In the same manner as the intermittent copy mode, after completion of the copy operation for the set copy count, the copier changes into the copy ready state and waits for 0.5 sec. before resuming the same operation. C. Paperless mode Without detecting paper or jam, the copy operation is made nearly at the same timing as the normal copy operation. D. Paperless endless mode The copier operates with the copy count infinitely set automatically. In the same manner as the paperless mode, without detecting paper or jam, the copy operation is made nearly at the same timing as the normal copy operation. E. Running mode The copy operation is made in the paperless endless mode plus the scanner each-time scan and the auto paper feed tray switching.
3. "Running test mode menu screen" Press the mode key of one of the modes 1 to 5. 4. "Basic screen" Press the [Start] key. 5. After confirmation of the copy operation, press the STOP button and turn OFF the sub power switch (SW2).
1-96
36 MODE
7.6
Test pattern output mode

I ADJUSTMENT
1
Output various test patterns to separate abnormalities. Select [5. Test pattern output mode] in the 36 mode screen to show "Test pattern output mode screen." Note: As for modes specifically not given in the Service Manual, be sure not to output test patterns. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [5. Test pattern output mode] key. 3. "Test pattern output mode screen" After entering an output pattern number through the numeric keys, press the [SET] key. 4. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 5. "Basic screen" Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and press the START button to output a test pattern. 6. When outputting another test pattern, repeat steps 3 to 5 while pressing the C button with the P button being pressed at the same time. 7. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] to return to the "36 mode menu screen."
1-97
36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
No.1 Overall halftone

[Check Items] When the density is set to 70 (halftone) When there are image stripes or uneven density found, check the printer system for any abnormality. [Recommended checkpoints]: Developing unit, cleaning unit and transfer belt unit. When the density is set to 0 (white) When there is image foggy back ground, check the printer system for any abnormality. [Recommended checkpoints]: Charging corona, and high voltage contact. When the density is set at 255 (Y, M, C, K) When the density is light, check the printer system for any abnormality. [Recommended check point]: Write unit * For information about setting the density, see "7.7 Test pattern density setting."
Test Pattern When the density is set to 70 When the density is set to 0 When the density is set to 255
8050fs1019
1-98
36 MODE
No.11 Beam check

[Check Items 1] For development and analysis of the write unit [Check Items 2] Check the solid black pattern [1] to see if there is uneven density found in the main scanning and subscanning directions. [Recommended checkpoints]: Charging corona, developing unit, transfer belt unit, and 2nd transfer unit [Check Items 3] Check to see if there is any image repelling in the gradation pattern [2] at the leading/trailing edge of the test pattern in the feed direction. [Recommended checkpoint]: Transfer/separation corona unit
Test Pattern
[1]
[2]
8050fs1020
[1] Solid black pattern
[2] Gradation pattern
1-99
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
No.16 Linearity evaluation pattern

[Check Items] Judge from this test pattern which of the scanner system and the printer system is abnormal. Items that can be checked include horizontal magnification, vertical magnification, skew, and leading edge timing, etc. of the printer system. If the copy image is defective despite no abnormality being visible on the test pattern, the scanner system is defective.
Test Pattern
[1]
30mm 237mm 20mm 205.7mm
28 0m m
[1]
190mm
190mm
190mm
28 0m m
8050fs1021
[1] Edge of paper
1-100
36 MODE
No.80 Line screen resolution priority evaluation pattern

While in use of the copier, check the gradationality of the primary color to the tertiary color when the line screen high resolution is selected on the screen. [Check item 1] Check to see if the gradation of each color is smooth and even with no tone jump found. [Recommended checkpoint]: Conduct the adjustment of the printer gamma sensor. [Check item 2] For development and analysis.
Test Pattern
a b c
[1]
[2]
8050fs1120
a: Primary color
b: Secondary color
c: Tertiary color
1-101
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
No.81 Line screen gradation priority evaluation pattern

While in use of the copier, check the gradationality of the primary color to the tertiary color when the line screen smooth tone is selected on the screen. [Check item 1] Check to see if the gradation of each color is smooth and even with no tone jump found. [Recommended checkpoint]: Conduct the adjustment of the printer gamma sensor. [Check item 2] For development and analysis.
Test Pattern
a b c
[1]
[2]
8050fs1120
a: Primary color
b: Secondary color
c: Tertiary color
1-102
36 MODE
No.82 Dot screen resolution priority evaluation pattern

While in use of the copier, check the gradationality of the primary color to the tertiary color when the dot screen high resolution is selected on the screen. [Check item 1] Check to see if the gradation of each color is smooth and even with no tone jump found. [Recommended checkpoint]: Conduct the adjustment of the printer gamma sensor. [Check item 2] For development and analysis.
Test Pattern
a b c
[1]
[2]
8050fs1120
a: Primary color
b: Secondary color
c: Tertiary color
1-103
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
No.83 Dot screen gradation priority evaluation pattern

While in use of the copier, check the gradationality of the primary color to the tertiary color when the dot screen smooth tone is selected on the screen. [Check item 1] Check to see if the gradation of each color is smooth and even with no tone jump found. [Recommended checkpoint]: Conduct the adjustment of the printer gamma sensor. [Check item 2] For development and analysis.
Test Pattern
a b c
[1]
[2]
8050fs1120
a: Primary color
b: Secondary color
c: Tertiary color
1-104
36 MODE
No.84 Character area evaluation pattern

While in use of the copier, check the gradationality of CONTONE used in the character area when the line screen (smooth tone/high resolution) or the dot screen (smooth tone/high resolution) is selected on the screen. [Check item 1] Check to see if the density increases in incremental step from the lower density side and if the density in the high density section of each color is dark enough. [Recommended checkpoint]: Conduct the adjustment of the printer gamma sensor. [Check item 2] For development and analysis.
Test Pattern
[1]
[2]
8050fs1121
1-105
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
7.7
I ADJUSTMENT
Test pattern density setting
7.8
Finisher adjustment
Set the density of the test pattern. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [6. Test pattern density setting] key. 3. "Test pattern density setting-Y screen" Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select one of the colors: "Y, M, C and K" that you want to adjust. 4. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: 0 (lighter) to 255 (darker) 5. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 6. "Basic screen" Select the paper size and press the START button to output a test pattern. 7. When outputting another test pattern, repeat steps 3 to 5 while pressing the C button with the P button being pressed at the same time. 8. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] to return to the "36 mode menu screen."
Adjusting the FNS, PI, PK, TU. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 menu screen" Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key. 3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen" [1. Stitch & Fold stopper adj.] [2. Fold stopper adjustment] [3. Cover sheet tray size adj.] [4. Trimming stopper adjustment] [5. Punch adjustment] [6. Three-Fold position adj.] [7. 2 positions staple pitch adj.] 4. Press the key of an item you want to adjust. 5. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return from each of the adjustment screen to the "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen."
1-106
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 7.8.1 Stitch and fold stopper adjustment (FS215/FN-9/FS-606 only) Adjusting the stapling position when stitch and fold mode. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key. 3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [1. Stitch and Fold stopper adj.] key. 4. "Stitch and Fold stopper adj. (A3) screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 5. Set paper in the tray, set originals (more than 2 sheets) on RADF, and press the START button. For the machine with platen cover, scan originals (more than 2 sheets) with [Store] key. 6. Check the paper center and stapling position. Standard value: 1 mm 7. When the value is not within the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button. 8. "Stitch and Fold stopper adj. screen" Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a desired paper size. 9. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -128 to +127, 1 step = 0.1 mm 10. Repeat steps 4 to 9 until the standard value is obtained. 11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen."
36 MODE
7.8.2 Fold stopper adjustment (FS-215/FN-9/FS-
Adjusting the fold position when stitch and fold or folding mode. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key. 3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [2. Fold stopper adjustment] key. 4. "Fold stopper adjustment (A3) screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 5. Set paper in the tray, set originals on RADF, and press the START button. 6. Check the paper center and folding position. Standard value: 1 mm 7. When the value is not within the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button. 8. "Fold stopper adjustment screen" Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a desired paper size. 9. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -128 to +127, 1 step = 0.1 mm 10. Repeat steps 4 to 9 until the standard value is obtained. 11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen."
1-107
I ADJUSTMENT
606 only)
36 MODE
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 7.8.4 Trimming stopper adjustment (TU-109/ TMG-3 only) Adjusting the trimming amount. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key. 3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [4. Trimming stopper adjustment] key.
7.8.3 Cover sheet tray size adjustment (PI-110
I ADJUSTMENT
only) This adjustment should be performed when the cover sheet tray size cannot be detected properly and when centring adjustment for cover sheet tray is performed. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key. 3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [3. Cover sheet tray size adj.] key. 4. Set a A4R (for metric machine) or 8.5 x 11R (for inch machine) paper on the cover sheet tray (upper/lower) [1] and press the [Start] key. A complete message appears on the screen.
4. "Trimming stopper adjustment (A3) screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 5. Set paper in the tray, set originals (more than 2 sheets) on RADF, and press the START button. For the machine with platen cover, scan originals (more than 2 sheets) with [Store] key.
[1]
6. Check the trimming amount. Standard value: 2.5 to 4.5 mm Note: Setting a trimming amount of 2.5 mm or less may cause a trimming error. 7. When the value is not within the standard,
8050fs1022
press the C button while pressing the P button. 8. "Trimming stopper adjustment screen"
5. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Finisher adjustment menu screen."
Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a desired paper size. 9. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -128 to +127, 1 step = 0.1 mm 10. Repeat steps 4 to 9 until the standard value is obtained. 11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Finisher adjustment menu mode screen."
1-108
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 7.8.5 Punch adjustment (PK-120/PK-5/PK-507 only) This adjusts the punch vertical positions, punch horizontal positions, and punch registration loop amount. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [5. Punch adjustment] key. 3. "Punch adjustment mode menu screen" Punch adjustment includes the following items: [1. Punch kit vertical pos. adj.] [2. Punch kit horizontal pos. adj.] [5. Punch registration loop adj.] 4. Press the key of an item you want to adjust. 5. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return each adjustment screen to the "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen." a. Procedure
36 MODE
(1) Punch kit vertical position adjustment (PKAdjusting the punch vertical position.
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key. 3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [5. Punch adjustment] key. 4. "Punch adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [1. Punch kit vertical pos. adj.] key. 5. "Punch kit ver. pos. adj. (A3) screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 6. Set paper in the tray, set originals on RADF, and press the START button. 7. Check the punch vertical position. 8. When the value is not appropriate, press the C button while pressing down the P button. 9. "Punch kit ver. pos. adj. screen" Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a desired paper size. 10. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -50 to +50, 1 step = 0.1 mm 11. Repeat steps 5 to 10 until the value is appropriate. 12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Punch adjustment mode menu screen."
1-109
I ADJUSTMENT
120/PK-5/PK-507 only)
36 MODE
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 (3) Punch registration loop adjustment Adjusting the registration loop amount for the reversed paper exit, the ADU paper exit (straight exit) and cover sheet upper/lower.
(2) Punch kit horizontal position adjustment
I ADJUSTMENT
(PK-120/PK-5/PK-507 only) Adjusting the punch horizontal position. a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key. 3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [5. Punch adjustment] key. 4. "Punch adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [2. Punch kit Horizontal pos. adj.] key. 5. "Punch kit horizontal position adj. screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 6. Set paper in the tray, set originals on RADF, and press the START button. 7. Check the position of punch holes. Specification (Length between the edge of paper and the center of punch hole): 10.5 mm (2 holes /4 holes/swedish 4 holes), 9.5 mm (3 holes/inch 2 holes) 8. When the value is not within the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button. 9. "Punch kit horizontal position adj. screen" Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a desired paper size. 10. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -50 to +50, 1 step = 0.1 mm 11. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the value is obtained. 12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Punch adjustment mode menu screen."
a.
Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key. 3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [5. Punch adjustment] key. 4. "Punch adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [5. Punch registration loop adj.] key. 5. Press [1. Punch registration loop adj. (main body)] key. or [2. Punch registration loop adj. (PI)] key. 6. "Punch registration loop adj. menu screen" Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select the item to be adjusted. The screen changes as follows; reverse ADU or upper tray lower tray. 7. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 8. Press the START button to make a copy. 9. Check the punch registration loop amount. 10. When the value is not appropriate, press the C button while pressing the P button. 11. "Punch registration loop adj. screen" Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -20 to +20, 1 step = 0.8 mm 12. Repeat steps 6 to 11 until the value is appropriate. 13. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Punch registration loop adj. menu screen."
1-110
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 7.8.6 Three-folding adjustment (FS-215/FN-9/FS606 only) Adjusting the folding positions during the threefolded copy. a. Procedure 8. "Three-Fold adjustment screen"
36 MODE
Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a desired paper size. 9. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -128 to +127, 1 step = 0.1 mm 10. Repeat steps 4 to 9 until the standard value is obtained. Note: See "9. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS" to adjust the folded positions "b" and "c." 11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key. 3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [6. Three-fold position adj.] key. 4. "Three-Fold adjustment screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 5. Set paper in the tray, set originals on RADF, and press the START button. 6. Check the three-folded position "a."
c a
8050fs1023
Folded positions a b c
Standard value A4R 95 mm 101 mm 101 mm 8.5 x 11R 89.4 mm 95 mm 95 mm
Specification 2 mm 2 mm 2 mm
7. When the value is not within the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button.
1-111
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE 7.8.7 2 positions staple pitch adjustment
7.9
List output mode
I ADJUSTMENT
Adjusting the pitch of the 2 positions staple. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key. 3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [7. 2 positions staple pitch adj.] key. 4. "2 positions staple pitch adjustment screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 5. Set paper in the tray, set originals (more than 2 sheets) on RADF, and press the START button. For the machine with platen cover, scan originals (more than 2 sheets) with [Store] key. 6. Check the pitch of the 2 positions staple.
Output a variety of data. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [8. List output mode] key. 3. "List output mode menu screen" List output mode items are as follows: [1. Machine management list 1] [2. Adjustment data list] [3. Page fill data list] [4. Machine management list 2] [5. Parameter list] [6. Memory dump list] [7. Font pattern] Note: Setting DPSW 30-1 to 1, [4. Machine management list 2] and later appear. 4. Press the key of an item you want to output. 5. Select A4 or 8.5 x 11 paper and press the START button.
6. Press the C button while pressing the P button.

8050fs1024
7. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "36 mode menu screen."
7. When changing the dimension A, press the C button while pressing the P button. 8. "2 positions staple pitch adjustment screen" Enter a value with numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: 120 to 160, 1 step: 1 mm 9. Repeat steps 4 to 8 until the dimension A is appropriate. 10. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen."
1-112
47 MODE
8. 47 MODE
8.1 47 mode/multi mode setting method
5. Input check result will appear in the input check result display area. 6. Repeat steps 2 to 5 to perform the other signal input check.
A. 47 Mode This mode provides self-diagnostic functions (input/ output check function) to check and adjust the various signals and loads. B. Operation method for 47 mode (1) Starting 47 mode a. b. c. Turn off the sub power switch (SW2). Turn on the SW2 while holding down 4 and 7 of the numeric keys. The 47 mode is activated if the moment "I/O check mode" is displayed in the message display area at the center of the screen. "47 mode menu screen" 2. "47 mode menu screen" Enter the output check code with the numeric keys. *2 3. Press the P button when using the multi mode. 4. Enter the multi code with the numeric keys.* 2 5. Press the [Start] key to perform the output check. 6. Press the [STOP] key to exit from the output check. *1 See "8.5 Input check list".
(3) Output check method Follow the following procedure. a. Procedure
[2] [1] [3]

[1] [2] [3] [4]
7. Repeat steps 2 to 6 to check other signal out-
[4]
8050fs1001
put check. *2 See "8.6 Output check list".
Input/Output check code Multi code Input check Output check
(4) Exiting from the 47 mode Turn off the SW2 to exit from the 47 mode.
(2) Input check method Follow the following procedure. a. Procedure
1. Enter the 47 mode. 2. "47 mode menu screen" Enter the input check code with the numeric keys. *1 3. Press the P button when using the multi mode. 4. Enter the multi code with the numeric keys. *1
1-113
I ADJUSTMENT
47 MODE
8.2
I ADJUSTMENT
Adjustment data display
8.3
Hard disk check
Lists the adjustment values of the machine (factoryset values and current values). No adjustment value can be changed in this mode. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 47 mode. 2. "47 mode menu screen" Press "94" with the numeric keys. Check that "94-00" appears in the message display area. 3. Press the [Start] key. 4. Press the [STOP] key at the lower right corner of the screen. 5. Turn off the sub power switch (SW2) to exit from the 47 mode. Note: Turn off the SW2 to exit from the 47 mode.
Perform this operation if you want to check the HDD total capacity, the HDD remaining capacity, and the error code related to HDD. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 47 mode. 2. "47 mode menu screen" Press "99" with the numeric keys. Check that "99-00" appears in the message display area. 3. Press the P button. 4. Enter one of the followings with the numeric keys. Check that "99-xx" (xx represents the input number) appears in the message display area. 01: HDD total capacity check 02: HDD remaining capacity check 03: HDD bad sectors check and recovery 5. Press the [Start] key. At checking the total capacity: the total capacity is displayed At checking the remaining capacity: the remaining capacity is displayed At checking and recovering the bad sectors: During the operation-"NOW" appears The operation succeeded-"OK" appears The operation failed-"NG" appears Press the [Start] key to perform the HDD bad sectors check and recovery again when "NG" appears. 6. Press the [STOP] key to exit from the output check. 7. Turn off the SW2 to exit from the 47 mode. Note: The operation can not be canceled during the HDD bad sectors check and recovery (the [STOP] button or the [Change Mode] key are disabled).
1-114
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 The hard disk is vulnerable to vibrations and disk when you move the main body.
47 MODE
1-115
I ADJUSTMENT
physical shocks. Be sure to remove the hard
47 MODE
8.4
I ADJUSTMENT
Input check list

Code Multi code Name Display and signal source 001 000 0 to 255
Classification Symbol
High voltage, TEMP/HUM analog signal TEMP/HUM TDB TLD Y TLD M TLD C TLD K PS53 PS52 HV1
00
0 1 2 3
Temp/humidity sensor (machine-inside humidity) Temp/humidity sensor (machine-inside temperature) Temp detection board Remaining toner detection sensor /Y Remaining toner detection sensor /M Remaining toner detection sensor /C Remaining toner detection sensor /K Waste toner door sensor Waste toner full sensor High voltage unit /1 (charging /Y) High voltage unit /1 (charging /M) High voltage unit /1 (charging /C) High voltage unit /1 (charging /K) High voltage unit /1 (charging /Y) High voltage unit /1 (charging /M) High voltage unit /1 (charging /C) High voltage unit /1 (charging /K) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer Y) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer M) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer C) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer K)
0 to 255 No toner
01
4 5 6 7 8 9
Toner
Box FULL Abnormal
No box EMPTY Normal
02
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
HV2
03
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Abnormal
Normal
High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer Y, M, C, K) One or more High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer Y, M, C, K) color is abnormal High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer Y, M, C, K) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer K) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer Y) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer M) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer C) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer K) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer K) High voltage unit /2 (separation) High voltage unit /2 (separation) Gamma sensor Gamma sensor Gamma sensor Drum potential sensor /Y Drum potential sensor /M Drum potential sensor /C Drum potential sensor /K Abnormal Abnormal
Normal
Normal
HV2 PS11
04 05
0 1 2 6 11
Normal
0 to 255
DRPS Y DRPS M DRPS C DRPS K
06
0 1 2 3
1-116
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Classification Symbol Code Multi code Name
47 MODE Display and signal source 001 000 Normal Abnormal
High voltage, analog signal
HV2
4 5 6 7
High voltage unit /2 (guide plate)
HV2
08
0 1 2 3 4
High voltage unit/2 (2nd transfer)
Abnormal
Normal
HV1
09
0 1 2 3
High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /Y) High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /M) High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /C) High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /K) No paper sensor /1 No paper sensor /2 No paper sensor /3 No paper sensor /BP No paper sensor (LT-211, C-208) Remaining paper sensor /1 Remaining paper sensor /2 Remaining paper sensor /3 Remaining paper sensor /1 to /4 (LT-211, C-208) Paper size /S1 Paper size /L1 Paper size /S2 Paper size /L2 Paper size /S3 Paper size /L3 Paper size /SBP Paper size /LBP Paper sizeVR /1 Paper sizeVR /2 Paper sizeVR /3 Paper sizeVR /BP Tray upper limit sensor /1 Tray upper limit sensor /2 Tray upper limit sensor /3 Tray upper limit sensor /BP Upper limit sensor (LT-211, C-208) Tray set detection /1 Tray set detection /2 Tray set detection /3
Abnormal
Normal
Paper feed, conveyance
PS31 PS37 PS43 PS47 PS108 PS32 PS38 PS44 PS102 to 105 PS33 PS34 PS39 PS40 PS45 PS46 PS48 PS49 VR1 VR2 VR3 VR4 PS30 PS36 PS42 PS25 PS109
11
0 1 2 3 4
Paper
No paper
12
0 1 2 3
Paper
No paper
0 to 7 Paper No paper
13
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
14
0 1 2 3
0 to 255
16
0 1 2 3 4
Upper limit
Not at upper limit
Upper:1, lower:2, middle:0 Yes No
17
0 1 2
1-117
I ADJUSTMENT
47 MODE Classification Symbol Code Multi code
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Name Display and signal source 001 000 No paper Paper
I ADJUSTMENT
PS29 PS35 PS41 PS26 PS106 PS107 PS23 PS20 PS27 PS28 PS22 PS50 PS13 PS19 PS21 PS12 PS30 PS36 PS42 PS25 PS101, PS109 PS24
19
0 1 2 3 4
Pre-registration sensor /1 Pre-registration sensor /2 Pre-registration sensor /3 Bypass conveyance sensor Feed sensor (LT-211, C-208) Paper feed sensor (LT-211, C-208) ADU pre-registration sensor ADU conveyance sensor Intermediate conveyance sensor /1 Intermediate conveyance sensor /2 Registration sensor Vertical conveyance sensor Paper exit sensor Reverse paper exit sensor ADU paper reverse sensor Paper exit full sensor Tray upper limit sensor /1 Tray upper limit sensor /2 Tray upper limit sensor /3 Tray upper limit sensor /BP Lower limit sensor (LT-211, C-208) Upper limit sensor (LT-211, C-208) 2nd transfer HP sensor
20
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Paper
No paper
Paper
No paper
Full
Other than full
23
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Upper limit Other than upper limit
Upper limit:1, lower limit:2, middle:0 Other than Home position home position Open Close
24
0 1 2
PS18 PS51 PS54 PS14 PS100 PS115 SW100 M41 Light PS1 PS3 PS4 PS2
25
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Front door open/close sensor Vertical conveyance door open/close sensor Toner supply door open/close sensor Toner supply unit open/close sensor Fixing unit set detection Top cover open/close sensor1 (LT-211, C-208) Front door open/close sensor (LT-211, C-208) Tray down switch (LT-211, C-208) Paper feed motor Scanner HP sensor APS detection sensor /S APS detection sensor /L APS timing sensor
Installed Open ON Abnormal
Not installed Close OFF Normal
28 30
0 0 1 2 3
Home Other than position home position Paper OPEN No paper CLOSE
1-118
Light
M3 M4 M5 M6 M3, M4, M5, M6 M3 M4 M5 M6 M3, M4, M5, M6 INDX SB Y INDX SB M INDX SB C INDX SB B INDX SB Y, M, C, K PS5, PS6, PS7
32
0 1 2 3 4
Polygon motor /Y (abnormal rotation detection) Polygon motor /M (abnormal rotation detection) Polygon motor /C (abnormal rotation detection) Polygon motor /K (abnormal rotation detection) Polygon motor /Y, /M, /C, /K (abnormal rotation detection)
One or more colors are abnormal Abnormal
Normal
5 6 7 8 9
Polygon motor /Y (abnormal temperature detection) Polygon motor /M (abnormal temperature detection) Polygon motor /C (abnormal temperature detection) Polygon motor /K (abnormal temperature detection) Polygon motor /Y, /M, /C, /K (abnormal temperature detection)
Normal
One or more colors are abnormal Abnormal
Normal
33
0 1 2 3 4 5
Index sensor /Y Index sensor /M Index sensor /C Index sensor /K Index sensor /Y, /M, /C, /K
Normal
One or more colors are abnormal
Normal
35
Laser correction HP sensor /Y, /M, /C
Edge detected Edge from one or undetected more color Edge Edge detected undetected Edge detected Edge from one or undetected more color Edge Edge detected undetected Edge detected Edge from one or undetected more color Edge Edge detected undetected
PS5 PS6 PS7 PS5, PS6, PS7
1 2 3 4
Laser correction HP sensor /Y Laser correction HP sensor /M Laser correction HP sensor /C Laser correction HP sensor /Y, /M, /C
PS5 PS6 PS7 PS5, PS6, PS7
5 6 7 8
Laser correction HP sensor /Y Laser correction HP sensor /M Laser correction HP sensor /C Laser correction HP sensor /Y, /M, /C
PS5
Laser correction HP sensor /Y
1-119
I ADJUSTMENT
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Name Display and signal source 001 000 Edge Edge detected undetected 0 to 255 0 to 255
I ADJUSTMENT
Light
PS6 PS7 PS8 PS9 LDB Y LDB M LDB C LDB K PS1
35 36 37
10 11 3 4 1 2 3 4
Laser correction HP sensor /M Laser correction HP sensor /C Color registration sensor /F Color registration sensor /R Laser drive board /Y Laser drive board /M Laser drive board /C Laser drive board /K Scanner HP sensor Encoder sensor /Y1, /Y2
38 41
5 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Home Other than position home position Abnormal Normal
Main body
PS60, PS61 PS62, PS63 PS64, PS65 PS66, PS67 PS69, PS68 PS15
Encoder sensor /M1, /M2
Encoder sensor /C1, /C2
Encoder sensor /K1, /K2
Encoder sensor /belt 1, /belt 2
1st transfer HP sensor
Home Other than position home position
M2 M42 M10 M48 M47 M43, M44, M45, M46 M24 M28, M27, M26 M12, M13 M11 M25 M61, M62, M63
42
0 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Scanner cooling fan DCPS cooling fan Fixing cooling fan /1 Charger intake fan Drum unit fan Writing intake fan /1, /2, Writing exhaust fan /1, /2 IP cooling fan Paper exit fan /F, /M, /R Drum cooling fan /1, /2 Transfer belt cooling fan ICP cooling fan Paper exit fan /1, /2, /3
Abnormal
Normal
1-120
Main body
DCPS1 DCPS2
43
0 1 2 3 4
DC power supply unit /1 (12VDC) DC power supply unit /2 (24VDC) DC power supply unit /2 (24VDC) DC power supply unit /2 (24VDC) DC power supply unit /2 (24VDC) Total counter Checking to see if the key counterequipped machine is provided with a key counter or not.
C (T) C (K)
5 6
Yes Yes
No No
TH1 TH3 TH2 TH4 TH1 TH1 TH2 M29
45
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Fixing temperature sensor /1 Fixing temperature sensor /3 Fixing temperature sensor /2 Fixing temperature sensor /4 Fixing temperature sensor /1 Fixing temperature sensor /1 Fixing temperature sensor /2 TH1 correction temperature TH2 correction temperature TH1 correction temperature Fixing motor
0 to 255
47
0 1 2
Abnormal
Normal
PS16
3 4 5
Fixing pressure release sensor
Home Other than position home position Abnormal Normal
M29
9 10 11
Fixing motor
PS15
48
0 1 2 3
1st transfer HP sensor
Home Other than position home position
PRCB
49
Printer control board (drum motor control)
Displays abnormal code
1-121
I ADJUSTMENT
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Name Display and signal source 001 000 Normal Abnormal
I ADJUSTMENT
Intrinsic functions
M20
50
0 1 2
Developing motor /Y
M21
3 4 5
Developing motor /M
M22
6 7 8
Developing motor /C
M23
9 10 11
Developing motor /K
TDS Y
12
Toner density sensor /Y output value (a value reduced when the peak voltage is set to 128 while in the L detection adjustment)
0 to 255
TDS M
13
Toner density sensor /M output value (a value reduced when the peak voltage is set to 128 while in the L detection adjustment)
TDS C
14
Toner density sensor /C output value (a value reduced when the peak voltage is set to 128 while in the L detection adjustment)
TDS K
15
Toner density sensor /K output value (a value reduced when the peak voltage is set to 128 while in the L detection adjustment)
PCL Y PCL M PCL C PCL K TDS Y
51
4 5 6 7
Pre-charging lamp /Y Pre-charging lamp /M Pre-charging lamp /C Pre-charging lamp /K Toner density sensor /Y output value (a value reduced when the peak voltage is set to 128 while in the L detection adjustment) Toner density sensor /M output value (a value reduced when the peak voltage is set to 128 while in the L detection adjustment) Toner density sensor /C output value (a value reduced when the peak voltage is set to 128 while in the L detection adjustment)
Abnormal
Normal
54
0 1 2
0 to 255
TDS M
3 4 5
TDS C
6 7 8
1-122
47 MODE Display and signal source 001 000 0 to 255
Intrinsic functions
TDS K
54
9 10 11
Toner density sensor /K output value (a value reduced when the peak voltage is set to 128 while in the L detection adjustment) FS LT-211, C-208 DF-319, AFR-20 Control voltage for the correction of the toner density /Y Control voltage for the correction of the toner density /M Control voltage for the correction of the toner density /C Control voltage for the correction of the toner density /K Fixing paper exit sensor No paper sensor Registration sensor Timing sensor Reverse sensor Paper exit sensor Paper feed cover sensor Paper feed tray sensor Paper exit cover sensor DF-319, AFR-20 open/close sensor Sub-tray paper exit sensor Tray upper limit sensor Tray lower limit sensor FNS entrance sensor Stacker entrance sensor Main tray paper exit sensor Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor Alignment HP sensor /U Paper exit belt HP sensor Stapler rotation HP sensor Stapler movement HP sensor Paper exit opening HP sensor Clincher rotation HP sensor
TDS Y TDS M TDS C TDS K PS17 DF-319, AFR-20 PS304 PS301 PS302 PS305 PS306 PS303 PS308 PS307 RS1 FS PS701 PS702 PS703 PS704 PS705 PS706 PS707 PS708 PS709 PS713 PS711 PS712 PS714
57
0 1 2
Connected Unconnected
58
0 1 2 3
0 to 255
59 60
3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Paper Paper
No paper No paper
Open
Close
76
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Paper
No paper
Upper limit Other than upper limit Lower limit Other than lower limit No paper Paper Paper No paper
Other than Standby standby position position Other than Home position home position Other than home position Home position Home position Other than home position
Other than Close close position position Home position Other than home position
1-123
I ADJUSTMENT
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Name Display and signal source 001 000 No paper Home position No paper Staple Home position Start Home position Other than full Paper Other than home position Paper No staple Other than home position Other than start Other than home position Full
I ADJUSTMENT
FS
PS715 PS718 PS720 SW702 PS730 SW701 M710 PS732 PS719 MS701 SW704 PS731 SW703 M715 PS733 M707 PS722 PS723 PS724 PS725 PS726 PS729 M720
76
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
Counter reset sensor Shift HP sensor Stacker no paper sensor Staple switch /R Stapler HP sensor /R Cartridge switch /R Clincher motor /R Clincher HP sensor /R Sub-tray full sensor FNS interlock switch Staple switch /F Stapler HP sensor /F Cartridge switch /F Clincher motor /F Clincher HP sensor /F Paper exit roller motor lock detection FNS connection detection Folding knife HP sensor Stopper HP sensor Alignment HP sensor /L Folding exit sensor Folding passage sensor Folding full sensor Folding conveyance motor PI conveyance motor DIPSW0
No cartridge Cartridge
Front door Front door opened closed No staple Other than home position Other than start Other than home position Other than control speed Home position Other than home position Paper Full Other than control speed Other than control speed Staple Home position Start Home position Control speed Other than home position Home position No paper Other than full Control speed Control speed
No cartridge Cartridge
Connected Unconnected
PI-110
M203
Other than Single single operation operation
1-124
47 MODE Display and signal source 001 000 No paper Paper Paper No paper
PI-110
PS201 PS206
76
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82
PI passage sensor /U PI passage sensor /L Folding connection detection Gate HP sensor No sheet sensor /U Sheet set sensor /U Tray lower limit sensor /U Tray upper limit sensor /U Sheet feeder manual start/clear switch Sheet feeder manual punch button switch Sheet feeder manual function selection button switch PI interlock switch No sheet sensor /L Sheet set sensor /L Tray lower limit sensor /L Tray upper limit sensor /L Sheet size sensor /L PI connection detection
FS
PS716
Unconnected Connected
PI-110
PS202 PS203 PS205 PS204 MS201 PS207 PS208 PS210 PS209 PS212
Lower limit Other than lower limit Upper limit Other than upper limit Switch OFF Switch ON
Open No paper
Close Paper
Lower limit Other than lower limit Upper limit Other than upper limit
1-125
I ADJUSTMENT
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Name Display and signal source 001 000 Home position Full Other than set Paper Other than home position Other than full Set No paper
I ADJUSTMENT
PK-120, PK-5, PK-507
PS801 PS802 PS804
76
83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92
Punch HP sensor Punch scraps full sensor Punch scraps box set sensor Rocking End face detection 1 Rocking End face detection 2 Rocking End face detection 3 Rocking End face detection 4 Rocking End face detection 5 Rocking Punch movement home position Connection detection Cutting entrance detection Cutting conveyance detection Cutting end stopper HP detection Cutting clear HP detection Cutting press HP detectin Cutting knife upper limit HP detection Cutting booklet discharge Holder board of upper limit detection Holder board of lower limit detection Pusher HP Cutting stacker cover detection 24V Cutting front door detection 24V Cutting conveyance M lock signal under operation Cutting end scraps box set detection Cutting end scraps box full detection Cutting stucker full detection TU connection detection
PS803 TU-109, TMG-3 PS101 PS102 PS103 PS104 PS105 PS106 PS108 PS110 PS111 PS112 PS114 MS2 PS107 PS109 PS113 77
93 94 95 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Home position Paper Home position Other than home position Home position Paper
Other than home position No paper Other than home position Home position Other than home position No paper
Other than Upper limit upper limit Lower limit Other than lower limit Home position Open Locked Not set Other than full No paper Other than home position Close Unlocked Other than set Full Paper
1-126
47 MODE
8.5
Note:
Output check list

set or change in the field" column. These items are only for the developping/manufucting process. Outputs of them may damage the machine. Name Exposure lamp Toner bottle motor (low speed), toner bottle clutch /Y 1 2 M53, MC15 3 4 5 M53, MC16 6 7 8 M53, MC17 9 10 11 HV1 02 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Toner bottle motor (high speed), toner bottle clutch /Y Toner bottle motor (nonvolatile value), toner bottle clutch /Y Toner bottle motor (low speed), toner bottle clutch /M Toner bottle motor (high speed), toner bottle clutch /M Toner bottle motor (nonvolatile value), toner bottle clutch /M Toner bottle motor (low speed), toner bottle clutch /C Toner bottle motor (high speed), toner bottle clutch /C Toner bottle motor (nonvolatile value), toner bottle clutch /C Toner bottle motor (low speed), toner bottle clutch /K Toner bottle motor (high speed), toner bottle clutch /K Toner bottle motor (nonvolatile value), toner bottle clutch /K High voltage unit /1 (charging /Y) High voltage unit /1 (charging /M) High voltage unit /1 (charging /C) High voltage unit /1 (charging /K) High voltage unit /1 (charging /Y: for current measurement) High voltage unit /1 (charging /M: for current measurement) High voltage unit /1 (charging /C: for current measurement) High voltage unit /1 (charging /K: for current measurement) x x x x x x x x Cannot be set or changed in the field
Do not output items which cannot be set or changed in the field and codes which are not described in the output check list." Classification Symbol High voltage, L1 analog signal M53, MC14 Code 00 01 Multi code 0 0
1-127
I ADJUSTMENT
Do not output items with "x" in the "Cannot be
47 MODE Classification Symbol Code 03 Multi code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 L1 10 11 12 HV2 04 0 1 PS11 DRPS Y DRPS M DRPS C DRPS K HV2 07 05 06 2 6 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 08 0 1 2 3 4 5
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Name High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /Y) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /M) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /C) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /K) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /Y, / M, /C, /K) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /K) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /Y: for current measurement) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /M: for current measurement) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /C: for current measurement) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /K: for current measurement at color mode) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /K: for current measurement at color mode) High voltage unit /2 (separation) High voltage unit /2 (separation, measurement) Gamma sensor Gamma sensor (for individual check) Drum potential sensor /Y Drum potential sensor /M Drum potential sensor /C Drum potential sensor /K High voltage unit /2 (belt cleaning+output) High voltage unit /2 (belt cleaning-output) High voltage unit /2 (belt cleaning+output: for individual check) High voltage unit /2 (belt cleaning-output: for individual check) High voltage unit /2 (2nd transfer output1) High voltage unit /2 (2nd transfer output2) High voltage unit /2 (2nd transfer output1: for current measurement) High voltage unit /2 (2nd transfer output2: for current measurement) High voltage unit /2 (2nd transfer output3: for cleaning consideration)* High voltage unit /2 (guide plate) x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Cannot be set or changed in the field x x x x x
I ADJUSTMENT
High voltage, analog signal
HV2
1-128
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Classification Symbol High voltage, analog signal HV1 Code 09 Multi code 0 1 2 3 Paper feed, conveyance SD7 SD8 SD9 SD5 SD100 MC7 MC9 MC11 MC6 MC101 MC8 MC10 MC12 MC102 M40 M39 M38 M35 M100 M34 24 23 22 21 20 15 1 2 98 0 1 2 4 5 0 1 2 4 5 0 1 2 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 2 M30 25 0 1 2 3 4 M31 26 0 1 2 Name High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /Y) High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /M) High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /C) High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /K) Counter reset Job memory clear KRDS setup Pick up solenoid /1 Pick up solenoid /2 Pick up solenoid /3 Pick up solenoid /BP Paper feed solenoid (LT-211, C-208) Paper feed clutch /1 Paper feed clutch /2 Paper feed clutch /3 Paper feed clutch /BP Paper feed clutch (LT-211, C-208) Pre-registration clutch /1 Pre-registration clutch /2 Pre-registration clutch /3 Pre-registration clutch (LT-211, C-208) Tray up drive motor /1 Tray up drive motor /2 Tray up drive motor /3 Tray up drive motor /BP (down) Tray up drive motor /BP (up) UP/DOWN motor (LT-211, C-208: down) UP/DOWN motor (LT-211, C-208: up) 2nd transfer pressure/release motor (continuous rotation) 2nd transfer pressure/release motor (pressure) 2nd transfer pressure/release motor (release) Registration motor (1/3 speed) Registration motor (1/2 speed) Registration motor (1/1speed) Registration motor (paper feed line speed) Registration motor (hard timer on: 1/1 speed) Loop roller motor (1/3 speed) Loop roller motor (1/2 speed) Loop roller motor (1/1speed)
47 MODE Cannot be set or x x x x
1-129
I ADJUSTMENT
changed in the field
47 MODE Classification Symbol Code 26 27 Multi code 3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 M41 M101 MC13 MC4 MC5 SD1 M136, M137 SD6 M3 M4 M5 M6 M3, M4, M5, M6 M3 M4 M5 M6 M3, M4, M5, M6 5 6 7 8 9 32 29 28 0 1 0 1 2 3 5 6 0 1 2 3 4
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Name Loop roller motor (paper feed line speed) M33 Reverse/exit motor (normal rotation:1/3 speed) Reverse/exit motor (normal rotation:1/2 speed) Reverse/exit motor (normal rotation:1/1 speed) Reverse/exit motor (normal rotation:3 times speed) Reverse/exit motor (reverse rotation:1/ 3 speed) Reverse/exit motor (reverse rotation:1/ 2 speed) Reverse/exit motor (reverse rotation:1/ 1 speed) Reverse/exit motor (reverse rotation:3 times speed) Paper feed motor Paper feed motor (LT-211, C-208) Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 Intermediate conveyance clutch /2 Intermediate conveyance clutch /3 Transfer belt separating claw Paper feed assist fan /F, /R (LT-211, C-208) ADU lock solenoid Polygon motor /Y (1/1 rotation) Polygon motor /M (1/1 rotation) Polygon motor /C (1/1 rotation) Polygon motor /K (1/1 rotation) Polygon motor /Y, /M, /C, /K (1/1 rotation) Polygon motor /Y (rotates at nonvolatile setting) Polygon motor /M (rotates at nonvolatile setting) Polygon motor /C (rotates at nonvolatile setting) Polygon motor /K (rotates at nonvolatile setting) Polygon motor /Y, /M, /C, /K (rotates at nonvolatile setting) Cannot be set or changed in the field
I ADJUSTMENT
M31
1-130
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Classification Symbol Paper feed, conveyance LDB Y LDB M LDB C LDB K LDB Y, M, C, K PS8 PS9 37 91 92 93 94 95 M1 38 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Main body ACDB 40 0 1 M14 41 0 1 2 M15 3 4 5 M16 6 7 8 M17 9 10 11 34 36 3 4 0 Shading correction Color registration sensor /F Color registration sensor /R LD alarm level detection all colors LD alarm level clear (Y) LD alarm level clear (M) LD alarm level clear (C) LD alarm level clear (K) LD alarm level clear (all colors) Scanner motor (back and forth drive 1: continuous) Scanner motor (back and forth drive 2: continuous) Scanner motor (back and forth drive 3: continuous) Scanner motor (back and forth drive 4: continuous) Scanner motor (back and forth drive 5: continuous) Scanner motor (HP search) Scanner motor(moves to the back scan position) Scanner motor (back scan ACS operation+scan operation: one operation) AC drive board (RL1 (main relay)ON) AC drive board (HTR1, 2 (HTR1, 2 (heater /1, /2) OFF) Drum motor /Y (1/3 speed) Drum motor /Y (1/2 speed) Drum motor /Y (1/1speed) Drum motor /M (1/3 speed) Drum motor /M (1/2 speed) Drum motor /M (1/1speed) Drum motor /C (1/3 speed) Drum motor /C (1/2 speed) Drum motor /C (1/1speed) Drum motor /K (1/3 speed) Drum motor /K (1/2 speed) Drum motor /K (1/1speed) 1-131
47 MODE Name Cannot be set or
Code 33
Multi code 0 1 2 3 4
Laser drive board /Y Laser drive board /M Laser drive board /C Laser drive board /K Laser drive board /Y, /M, /C, /K
I ADJUSTMENT
47 MODE Classification Symbol Code 41 Multi code 12 13 14 15 M18 16 17 M2 M25 M42 M10, M36, M37 M48 M47 M43, M44, M45, M46 M24 M26, M27, M28 M12 M13 M11 M61, M62, M63 T (C) T (BK) T (K) DCPS2 L2, L3, L4 44 45 0 1 2 3 L2 L3 L4 L2, L3, L4 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 43 1 2 6 9 10 11 12 7 8 4 5 6 42 0 1 2 3
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Name Transfer belt motor (1/3 speed) Transfer belt motor (1/2 speed) Transfer belt motor (1/1speed) Transfer belt motor (1/3 speed: for nip measurement) Transfer belt motor (1/2 speed: for nip measurement) Transfer belt motor (1/1 speed: for nip measurement) Scanner cooling fan IPB cooling fan DCPS cooling fan Fixing cooling fan /1, /3, /2 Charger intake fan Drum unit fan Writing intake fan /1, /2, Writing exhaust fan /1, /2 IP cooling fan Paper exit fan /R, /M, /F Drum cooling fan /1 Drum cooling fan /2 Transfer belt cooling fan Paper exit fan /1, /2, /3 Total counter Black counter Key counter DC power supply unit /2 (24VDC breaking) Fixing upper lamp /1, /2, Fixing lower lamp x x x Cannot be set or changed in the field
I ADJUSTMENT
Main body
M18
Fixing upper lamp /1 Fixing upper lamp /2 Fixing lower lamp Fixing upper lamp /1, /2, Fixing lower lamp
1-132
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Classification Symbol Main body M29 Code 47 Multi code 0 1 2 3 4 5 9 10 11 M29, L2, L3, L4 M54 M19 48 15 0 1 2 3 M18 49 0 1 2 3 4 5 Intrinsic functions M20 50 0 1 2 M21 3 4 5 13 Name Fixing motor (1/3 speed) Fixing motor (1/2 speed) Fixing motor (1/1speed) Fixing motor (reverse rotation: release operation on, full-time rotation) Fixing motor (reverse rotation: moves to the pressure position) Fixing motor (reverse rotation: moves to the release position) Fixing motor (pressure continuous rotation: 1/3 speed) Fixing motor (pressure continuous rotation: 1/2 speed) Fixing motor (pressure continuous rotation: 1/1 speed) Fixing motor, Fixing upper lamp /1, /2, fixing lower lamp (fixing roller pressure+all heater lamps on) Web motor 1st transfer pressure/release motor (full-time rotation) 1st transfer pressure/release motor (stops at the release position) 1st transfer pressure/release motor (stops at black and white pressure position) 1st transfer pressure/release motor (stops at color mode pressure position) Transfer belt motor (for checking photosensitive material control 1: 1/1 speed) 1st transfer pressure/release motor (for checking photosensitive material control 2: 1/2 speed) 1st transfer pressure/release motor (for checking photosensitive material control 3: 1/3 speed) 1st transfer pressure/release motor (for checking photosensitive material control 4: 1/1 speed) 1st transfer pressure/release motor (for checking photosensitive material control 5: 1/2 speed) 1st transfer pressure/release motor (for checking photosensitive material control 6: 1/3 speed) Developing motor /Y (1/1speed) Developing motor /Y (1/2 speed) Developing motor /Y (1/3 speed) Developing motor /M (1/1speed) Developing motor /M (1/2 speed) Developing motor /M (1/3 speed) 1-133
47 MODE Cannot be set or
x x x x x x
I ADJUSTMENT
47 MODE Classification Symbol Code 50 Multi code 6 7 8 M23 9 10 11 PCL Y PLC M PCL C PCL K PCL Y PCL M PLC C PCL K M49 54 52 51 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 M50 3 4 5 M51 6 7 8 M52 9 10 11 MC14 MC15 MC16 MC17 SD2 SD3 55 12 13 14 15 0 1
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Name Developing motor /C (1/1speed) Developing motor /C (1/2 speed) Developing motor /C (1/3 speed) Developing motor /K (1/1speed) Developing motor /K (1/2 speed) Developing motor /K (1/3 speed) Pre-charging lamp /Y Pre-charging lamp /M Pre-charging lamp /C Pre-charging lamp /K Pre-charging lamp /Y (turns on the control signal) Pre-charging lamp /M (turns on the control signal) Pre-charging lamp /C (turns on the control signal) Pre-charging lamp /K (turns on the control signal) L detection reference for all colors L detection reference for colors (Y, M, C) L detection reference for K L detection reference for Y L detection reference for M L detection reference for C Toner supply motor /Y (high speed) Toner supply motor /Y (low speed) Toner supply motor /Y (setting value) Toner supply motor /M (high speed) Toner supply motor /M (low speed) Toner supply motor /M (setting value) Toner supply motor /C (high speed) Toner supply motor /C (low speed) Toner supply motor /C (setting value) Toner supply motor /K (high speed) Toner supply motor /K (low speed) Toner supply motor /K (setting value) Toner bottle clutch /Y Toner bottle clutch /M Toner bottle clutch /C Toner bottle clutch /K Color registration shutter solenoid Gamma sensor shutter solenoid x x x x x x Cannot be set or changed in the field
I ADJUSTMENT
Intrinsic functions
M22
1-134
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Classification Symbol Intrinsic functions Code 56 Multi code 0 1 2 3 TDS Y TDS M TDS C TDS K DF-319, AFR-20 M301 60 58 57 0 1 2 0 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 M302 7 8 9 10 11 12 M303 13 14 15 16 Name Indicator lamp (PAT1 on) Indicator lamp (PAT2 on) Indicator lamp (PAT3 on) Indicator lamp (PAT4 on) FS connection check LT-211, C-208 connection check DF-319, AFR-20 connection check Toner density sensor /Y Toner density sensor /M Toner density sensor /C Toner density sensor /K Paper feed motor (normal rotation: 300 mm/sec) Paper feed motor (normal rotation: 400 mm/sec) Paper feed motor (normal rotation: 900 mm/sec) Paper feed motor (reverse rotation: 300 mm/sec) Paper feed motor (reverse rotation: 400 mm/sec) Paper feed motor (reverse rotation: 900 mm/sec) Conveyance motor (normal rotation: 300 mm/sec) Conveyance motor (normal rotation: 400 mm/sec) Conveyance motor (normal rotation: 900 mm/sec) Conveyance motor (reverse rotation: 300 mm/sec) Conveyance motor (reverse rotation: 400 mm/sec) Conveyance motor (reverse rotation: 900 mm/sec) Paper exit motor (normal rotation: 300 mm/sec) Paper exit motor (normal rotation: 400 mm/sec) Paper exit motor (normal rotation: 900 mm/sec) Paper exit motor (reverse rotation: 300 mm/sec)
1-135
I ADJUSTMENT
47 MODE Classification Symbol Code 60 Multi code 17 18 SD302 SD301 MC301 FS M701 M702 75 19 20 21 1 2 3 4 M703 5 6 7 M705 M707 8 9 10 M708 M708 M709 M714 M711 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 M713 M718 M716 M719 M720 SD704 SD705 M705 19 20 21 23 24 31 32 33 34 35 M716 36 37 38 M718 39
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Name Paper exit motor (reverse rotation: 400 mm/sec) Paper exit motor (reverse rotation: 900 mm/sec) Reverse solenoid Paper exit solenoid Registration clutch FNS conveyance motor Shift motor (HP search) Shift motor (moves to the shift position) Shift motor (rotation) Tray up/down motor (HP search) Tray up/down motor (down) Tray up/down motor (up) Alignment motor /U (HP search) Paper exit roller motor (HP search) Paper exit roller motor (reverse rotation) Paper exit opening motor (HP search) Paper exit opening motor (moves to opening) Stapler motor /R (initianl operation) Stapler motor /R (stapling) Stapler motor /F (initianl operation) Stapler motor /F (stapling) Stapler movement motor (HP search) Stapler movement motor (movement by size) Stacker entrance motor Stopper motor (HP search) Alignment motor /L Folding knife motor Folding conveyance motor Paper exit opening solenoid Bypass gate solenoid Alignment motor /U (open) Alignment motor /U (close) Alignment motor /U (rocking) Alignment motor /L (open) Alignment motor /L (close) Alignment motor /L (rocking) Stopper motor (moves to the A4R position) Cannot be set or changed in the field
I ADJUSTMENT
DF-319, AFR-20
M303
1-136
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Classification Symbol TU-109, TMG-3 M101 M102 M103 M104 Code 75 Multi code 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 M105 PI-110 MC202 M202 SD202 PK-120, PK-5, PK-507 PI-110 M801 M802 MC201 M201 SD201 M203 FS M712 62 63 64 65 66 67 78 79 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 M721 M704 M706 SD706 ADU SD4 MC2 MC1 MC3 M32 84 80 81 0 1 2 0 1 2 3 91 92 93 94 95 96 99 Name Conveyance motor Cutter motor (normal rotation) Cutter motor (reverse rotation) Stopper motor (HP search) Stopper release motor (HP search) Stopper release motor (release) Stopper release motor (set) Press motor (HP search) Press motor (press) Conveyance clutch /L Tray up/down motor /L (down) Tray up/down motor /L (up) Sheet feed solenoid /L Punch motor Punch shift motor (HP search) Conveyance clutch /U Tray up/down motor (down) Tray up/down motor (up) Sheet feed solenoid /U PI conveyance motor Gate drive motor (HP search) Gate drive motor (stacker direction switching) Gate drive motor (straight direction switching) Sub-tray paper exit motor Clincher rotation motor (HP search) Clincher rotation motor (skew shift) Stapler rotation motor (HP search) Stapler rotation motor (skew shift) Three-folding gate solenoid FNS paperless running mode Reverse/exit solenoid ADU conveyance clutch /1 ADU conveyance clutch /2 ADU pre-registration clutch ADU reverse motor (forward rotation: 1/3 speed) ADU reverse motor (forward rotation: 1/2 speed) ADU reverse motor (forward rotation: 1/1 speed) ADU reverse motor (forward rotation: paper feed line speed)
1-137
I ADJUSTMENT
47 MODE Classification Symbol Code 84 Multi code 4 5 6 7 8 9 Others 97 98 99 94 0 1 2 1 2 3
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Name ADU reverse motor (forward rotation: 3 times speed) ADU reverse motor (reverse rotation: 1/3 speed) ADU reverse motor (reverse rotation: 1/2 speed) ADU reverse motor (reverse rotation: 1/1 speed) ADU reverse motor (reverse rotation: paper feed line speed) ADU reverse motor (reverse rotation:3 times speed) Adjustment data display Illuminate all LEDs on the operation board Message display E-RDH (DRAM) capacity display E-RDH (DRAM) check HDD bad sectors check and recovery Cannot be set or changed in the field
I ADJUSTMENT
ADU
M32
1-138
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
Caution: Make sure the power cord of the copier is unplugged from the power outlet
9.1
Paper feed roller/BP pressure adjustment
Perform the paper feed roller/BP pressure adjustment when the no feed jam occurs at the bypass feed. A. Procedure 1. Pull out the ADU. 2. Install the piled plate [3] on the paper feed roller/ BP [2] with 2 screws [1]. 3. Replace the ADU. 4. Perform the copy to check the paper feed operation. 5. Repeat steps 1 to 4 if the no feed jam continues to occur at the paper feed. Note: The weight plate (P/N:13FG4062*) is a supply part. It should be purchased separately. Up to 4 plates can be used at a time. Perform "9.3 Pick-up movement amount adjustment (bypass)" when the weight plate is added.
8050fs1050
[1]
[3]
[2]
1-139
I ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.2
I ADJUSTMENT
Paper feed height (upper limit) adjustment (bypass)
Perform the paper feed height (upper limit) adjustment when the no feed jam occurs, the edge of the fed paper is folded, or you want to feed curled paper. Note: This adjustment affects the pick-up movement amount. When the adjustment is complete, perform "9.3 Pick-up movement amount adjustment (bypass)". A. Procedure 1. Pull out the ADU. 2. Remove 6 screws [1] and remove the paper feed solenoid cover [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
8050fs1051
1-140
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 3. Loosen a screw [1] and adjust the position of the
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
Note: Take note of the original scale. (1) If it is not within the standard value: Adjust the vertical position of the sensor mounting bracket to make the height of the entrance guide upper surface and the up/down plate upper surface to be within the standard value. When raising the height of the up/down plate: lower the sensor mounting bracket. When lowering height of the up/down plate: lower the sensor mounting bracket. (2) If any problem occurs: When the edge of the fed paper is folded: raise the position of the sensor mounting bracket. When paper with a concave curl is fed: raise the position of the sensor mounting bracket. When paper with a convex curl is fed: lower the position of the sensor mounting bracket. 1. Replace the paper feed solenoid cover. 2. Replace the ADU. 3. Perform the copy to check the paper feed operation. 4. Repeat steps 1 to 6 to adjust the position of PS25 again if the problem continues to occur.
8050fs1052
[2]
[1]
1-141
I ADJUSTMENT
tray upper limit sensor/BP (PS25) [2].
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.3
I ADJUSTMENT
Pick-up movement amount adjustment (bypass)
Perform the pick-up movement amount adjustment when a no feed jam occurs frequently. A. Procedure 1. Pull out the ADU. 2. Remove 6 screws [1] and remove the paper feed solenoid cover [2].
[1]
[2]
3. Loosen a screw [1] and adjust the position of the pick-up solenoid/BP (SD5) [2]. Note: Take note of the original scale. 4. Replace the paper feed solenoid cover. 5. Replace the ADU. 6. Perform the copy to check the paper feed operation. 7. Repeat steps 1 to 6 to adjust the position of SD5 again if the no feed jam continues to occur.
[1]
8050fs1053
[2]
[1]
8050fs1054
1-142
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.4
Perform this adjustment when the mis-centering occurs even after "Printer-centering adjustment" in the 36 mode, has been performed. A. Procedure 1. Pull out the paper feed tray. 2. Loosen 3 screws [2] for the up/down plate [1]. 3. Move the guide plate and adjust the center position. 4. Tighten 3 screws [2]. 5. Print the test pattern (No.16).
[1]
[2]
[3]
8050fs1055
6. Fold the output in half vertically and check whether the mis-centering [3] of the center of image [2] against the center of paper [1] is within the standard value. Standard value: 3 mm or less 7. Repeat steps 1 to 6 until the mis-centering amount is within the standard value.
8050fs1056
[2] [3] [1]
1-143
I ADJUSTMENT
Paper feed tray /1 to /3 miscentering adjustment
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.5
I ADJUSTMENT
Paper feed tray/1 to /3 sheet feed pressure adjustment
Perform the sheet feed pressure adjustment when the no feed jam or the double feed jam occurs at the paper feed. The sheet feed pressure is affected by the paper type and the operating environment (the no feed jam is likely in the low temperature environment and the double feed is likely in the high temperature environment). Excess adjustment may reverse the symptom. A. Procedure 1. Pull out the paper feed tray [1]. 2. Remove 4 screws [2] and remove the paper feed unit cover [3].
[3]
[2]
[1] [2]
8050fs1057
1-144
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 3. Unplug the connector [1]. shaft screw [3]. 5. Slide the paper feed unit [4] toward the rear side and lift it up. Then, unplug the connector [5] and remove the paper feed unit [4].
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
[3]
[5]
[4]
[2]
[1]
8050fs1058
6. Change the hook position of the spring [1] at the bottom of the paper feed unit. Weak[2]: Double feed jam is corrected. Strong [3]: No feed jam is corrected. 7. Replace the paper feed unit and the paper feed tray.
[1]
[2]
[3]
8050fs1059
1-145
I ADJUSTMENT
4. Remove a screw [2] and loosen a hold-down
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.6
I ADJUSTMENT
FNS adjustment of the bypass conveyance guide plate magnet
A. Procedure 1. Open the finisher door. 2. Check whether the stopper piece [4] of the bypass conveyance guide plate is in contact with the bypass conveyance guide plate /L [5] when the magnet [2] for the bypass conveyance guide plate [1] is attached to the front panel [3]. If not, perform the following adjustment.
[1] [2]
[5]
[3]
[4] [1]
[5]
[2] [4]
8050fs1075
3. Loosen the magnet screw [1]. 4. Push the bypass conveyance guide plate [2] toward the arrow until the stopper piece [4] comes into contact with the conveyance guide plate /L [4]. 5. Attach the magnet [5] to the front panel [6]. Then, tighten the magnet screw [1]. 6. Close the finisher door.
[2] [5] [6]
[1]
[4]
[3]
8050fs1076
1-146
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.7
A. Procedure 1. Open the finisher door. 2. Pull out the stacker unit [1]. 3. Remove 2 rail stopper screws [2]. Then, pull out the stacker unit further. Note: To avoid FNS from falling, make sure to place a support [3] under the stacker unit.
[2]
[1] [2] [3]

4. Open the bypass conveyance guide plate [1]. 5. Visually check whether the clearance between the bypass gate [2] and the bypass conveyance plate [3] is within the standard value when the bypass gate solenoid (SD705) is off. Standard value: A = 3.2 0.5 mm If not, perform the following adjustment.
8050fs1077
[2] [1]
A=
3.2
0.5
mm
[3]
[2]
8050fs1078
1-147
I ADJUSTMENT
FNS adjustment bypass gate
of
the
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS 6. Remove the rear cover.
I ADJUSTMENT
7. Unplug all connectors [2] from the FNS control board (FNSCB) [1] and remove the wiring harness from the clamp [3]. 8. Remove 5 screws [4]. Then, remove the FNSCB [1] with the bracket [5].
[2]
[3] [4] [5]
[1]
8050fs1079
9. Loosen 2 screws [2] for the bypass gate solenoid (SD705) [1] and adjust the position of SD 705 [1] based on the mark [5] to make the clearance between the bypass gate [3] and the bypass conveyance plate [4] to be within the standard value when SD705 [1] is off. Standard value: A = 3.2 0.5 mm 10. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[4]
A=
3.2
0.5
mm
[3] [2]
[5]
[1]
8050fs1080
1-148
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.8
A. Procedure 1. Remove the following parts. Top cover or optional PI (if installed) Top cover /2 2. Turn on the main body, and then drive the shift motor (M702) in the 47 mode (code 75-2/75-3). 3. Check whether the edge of the actuator [5] for the slide gear is placed in the notched hole [3] at the slide stay [2] for the shift unit [1] for both the HP search (home position) and the shift position. If not, perform the following adjustment.
[3] [4]
[5]
[2]
[1]
8050fs1081
4. Loosen the bracket screw [2] for the shift HP sensor (PS718) and adjust the position of the bracket [4] based on the mark [3]. 5. Tighten the bracket screw [2] when the adjustment is complete. 6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[1]
[4]
[3] [2]
8050fs1082
1-149
I ADJUSTMENT
FNS adjustment of the shift position
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.9
I ADJUSTMENT
FNS adjustment of the paper exit opening solenoid
A. Procedure 1. Remove the following parts. Top cover /1 or optional PI (if installed) Top cover /2 Rear cover 2. Turn on the main body, and then turn on the paper exit opening solenoid (SD704) in the 47 mode (code 75-31). 3. Check whether the clearance between the plunger [2] on the solenoid and the stopper [3] on the bracket is within the standard value when SD704 [1] is on. Standard value: A = 6.5 0.5 mm If not, perform the following adjustment.
A=6.5 0.5mm
[1]
[2]
8050fs1083
4. Remove 2 solenoid bracket screws [1] and remove the solenoid [2] with the bracket [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
8050fs1084
1-150
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 5. Loosen 2 solenoid screws [1], adjust the posiscrews. Standard value: A = 6.5 0.5 mm
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
A=6.5 0.5mm
[1]
8050fs1085
6. Replace the solenoid bracket [1] and tighten the solenoid bracket screws [5] at the position where the paper exit guide [2] is in contact with the stopper (rubber) [4] on the paper exit guide stay [3]. Note: There should be the gap of 1 mm or more between the paper exit guide [2] and the paper exit guide stay [3].
[1] [4]
[5]
[3] [2]
[3]
7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
1mm
[2]
8050fs1086
1-151
I ADJUSTMENT
tion of the solenoid [2], and then tighten the
[2]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
9.10 FNS adjustment of the position of paper exit arm

A. Procedure 1. Open the finisher door and pull out the stacker unit. 2. Check whether the upper face of the paper exit belt arm [4] is located at the center of 2 marks [5] when the edge of the actuator [2] for the belt detection gear [1] is placed in the notched hole [3] at the rear panel. If not, perform the adjustment. 3. Remove the rail stopper screws for the stacker unit. Then, pull out the stacker unit further.
[3]
[2]
Note: To avoid the finisher from falling, make sure to place a support under the stacker unit.
[1]
[4]
[5]
8050fs1087
1-152
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 4. Remove a screw [2] for the belt detection gear [1]. Place the paper eject belt arm at the specified position. Then, fix the detection gear [1] at the specified position. 5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
[2]
8050fs1088
1-153
I ADJUSTMENT
[1]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
9.11 FNS adjustment of the position of alignment plate /U

A. Procedure 1. Turn on the main body. Once the finisher completes its initial operation, turn off the main body. 2. Open the finisher door and pull out the stacker unit. 3. Remove the rail stopper screws for the stacker unit. Then, pull out the stacker unit further. Note: To avoid the finisher from falling, make sure to place a support under the stacker unit. 4. Check whether the actuator [2] for the alignment HP sensor /U (PS708) [1] is aligned with the home position.
[1] [2]
8050fs1089
5. Check whether the clearance A for the alignment plate /U [1] is within the standard value. Standard value: A = 340.6 + 0/ -0.5 mm (in to in) If not, perform the following adjustment.
A=340.6 mm
[1]
PS708
8050fs1090
1-154
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 6. Loosen 2 screws [1]. Align the rear side of the center of the marking lines [3]. Then, adjust the front side of the alignment plate /U [4] to be within the standard value based on the rear side.
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
[2] [1] [3]

8050fs1091
1-155
I ADJUSTMENT
alignment plate /U [2] with the long line at the
[4]
[1]
[2]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
9.12 FNS adjustment of the position of alignment plate /L (only for FS-215/FN-9/FS606)
A. Procedure 1. Check whether "Adjustment of the position of FNS alignment plate /U" has been completed. 2. Turn on the main body. In the 47 mode, use one of the following codes to drive a motor and turn off the main body. Code 75-8: alignment motor /U (M705) home position search Code 75-21: alignment motor /L (M716) home position search Code 75-39: stopper motor (M718) moves to the A4R or larger position 3. Open the finisher door and pull out the stacker unit. 4. Remove the rail stopper screws for the stacker unit. Then, pull out the stacker unit further. Note: To avoid the finisher from falling, make sure to place a support under the stacker unit. 5. Remove the stapler unit cover. 6. Check whether the actuator for the alignment HP sensor /U (PS708) is aligned with the home position. 7. Check whether the actuator [3] for the alignment HP sensor /L (PS724) for the alignment plate /L [1] is aligned with the home position.
[1] [2] [3]

8050fs1092
1-156
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 8. Place a sheet larger than A4R in the stacker plate /U (rear) [1] and alignment plate /L (rear) [2] by placing a sheet [3]. Check whether the space A between the alignment plate /L (rear) [2] and the alignment plate /L (front) [4] is within the standard value. Standard value: A = 340.6 + 0/ -0.5 mm (in to in) If not, perform the following adjustment.
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
[4]
[2]
A=340.6
mm
8050fs1093
9. Loosen 2 screws [1] and adjust the position of the alignment plate /L [2] to be within the standard value.
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
8050fs1094
1-157
I ADJUSTMENT
section and check the position of the alignment
[3]
[1]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
9.13 FNS adjustment of the stapling position (flat stapling)

Note: Never move the stapler unit in a horizontal direction manually (it may cause the teeth to skip between the belt and gear). A. Procedure 1. Perform a stapling operation to check whether it is performed within the standard value. Standard value for the one-corner stapling (at rear) [1]: A = 8.5 3 mm Standard value for the one-corner stapling (at front) [2]: B=8.5 3 mm Standard value for the flat stapling [3]: C= B=8.5 3 mm (In the flat stapling, the paper edge and the line [4] connecting 2 staples must become parallel) If not, perform the following adjustment. 2. Open the finisher door and pull out the stacker unit. 3. Remove the rail stopper screws for the stacker unit. Then, pull out the stacker unit further. Note: To avoid the finisher from falling, make sure to place a support under the stacker unit. 4. Remove the stapler unit cover.
B=8.5 3mm
[1]
A=8.5 3mm
[2]
[3]
C=8.5 3mm
[4]
8050fs1095
1-158
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 5. Loosen the adjustment screws [3] for the the position of the flat-stapling stopper [5] based on the mark [4]. 6. Perform a stapling operation to check whether it is performed within the standard value.
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
[5]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[4] [4] [3]

8050fs1096
1-159
I ADJUSTMENT
clincher /F [1] and the clincher /R [2] and adjust
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
9.14 FNS adjustment of the stapling position in a vertical direction

A. Type of cartridge Note: The adjustment method of the FNS stapler upper and lower positions varies according to the form of the cartridge. The adjustment of a cartridge for the new type can be made by using a stapler positioning jig (129 X JG 011) for the old type and the old cartridge. [1] New cartridge [2] Reinforcing board [3] Old cartridge
8050fs1122
[3]
[2]
[1]
B. Procedure (New type) Note: Be sure to avoid the manual horizontal movement of the stapler unit. (This may cause the jumping of the belt and the gear teeth) 1. Conduct an actual stapling operation and check to see if any poor clinch occurs. No buckled stapling [1] is allowed. Floating stapling [2] must be less than the stipulated value (L = 1 mm). The height of the belt staple-needle [3] must be less than the stipulated value (L = 0.7 mm). When any defect is found, conduct the following adjustments. Note: When the clincher or stapler is replaced or removed, make adjustments after reinstalling it.
[1]
[2]
L=1mm
[3]
L=0.7mm
8050fs1123
1-160
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 2. Open the door of the finisher and pull out the 3. Remove the rail stopper fixing screw of the stacker unit and pull further out the stacker unit. Note: To prevent the finisher from falling down, be sure to place a support beneath the unit that has been pulled out. 4. Remove the stapler unit cover. 5. Remove the cartridge. 6. Loosen the fixing screws [3], 4 each, of the clincher /F [1] and the clincher /R [2].
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
[1]
[2]
[3] [1] [2]
[3]
[3]
8050fs1124
1-161
I ADJUSTMENT
stacker unit.
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
7. Attach the stapler positioning jig [1] to the car-
I ADJUSTMENT
tridge set section. Note: Be sure to push the stapler positioning jig until it gets locked.
[1]
8050fs1125
1-162
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 8. Rotate the stapler gear [1] in the lower direction pins [2] of the stapler positioning jig get smoothly into the positioning holes [4] of the clincher [3]. And then rotate the gear [1] in the lower direction to set the pin securely into the positioning hole. Note: When fitting forcibly the pin of the stapler positioning jig, this may result in the pin being hard to draw out. Be sure to rotate the stapler gear with care. 9. Tighten up each of 4 clincher fixing screws. 10. Rotate the stapler gear in the upper direction to remove the jig.
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
[1]
[3]
[4]
[2]
11. Bring the cartridge back to the original position. 12. Check the stapling operations.
8050fs1126
1-163
I ADJUSTMENT
and adjust the clincher position so that the 2
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS C. Procedure (Old type)
I ADJUSTMENT
Note: Never move the stapler unit in a horizontal direction manually (it may cause the teeth to skip between the belt and gear). 1. Perform a stapling operation to check for the clinch failure. Buckled staple-needles [1] Floating stapling [2] (standard value: L = 1 mm or less) Height of belt staple-needle [3] (standard value: L = 0.7 mm or less) If there is a failure, perform the following adjustment. Note: Adjust the clincher or stapler if it is replaced or removed. 2. Open the finisher door and pull out the stacker unit. 3. Remove the rail stopper screws for the stacker unit. Then, pull out the stacker unit further. Note: To avoid the finisher from falling, make sure to place a support under the stacker unit. 4. Remove the stapler unit cover. 5. Remove the cartridge [1], open the cover [2], and then remove the staple sheet [3] by sliding it.
[1]
[2]
L=1mm
[3]
L=0.7mm
8050fs1097
[1]
[3]
[2]
8050fs1098
1-164
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 6. Remove the plate [2] from the stapler positionthe hook holes [4] on the cartridge, and then close the cover [5]. 7. Attach the cartridge onto the stapler.
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
[5] [3] [2]
[4]
8050fs1099
8. Loosen 4 screws [3] for the clincher /F [1] and the clincher /R [2].
[1]
[2]
[3] [1] [2]
[3]
[3]
8050fs1100
1-165
I ADJUSTMENT
ing jig [1], insert the hooks [3] on the plate into
[1]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9. Fold the stacking assist unit [1] and insert 2
I ADJUSTMENT
guide pins [3] on the stapler positioning jig [2] into the holes [5] on the clincher [4]. Note: The stapler positioning jig is adequate to be hooked on the clincher.
[2]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[2] [3]
8050fs1101
1-166
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 10. Rotate the gear [1] for the stapler downward. plate [2] attached to the cartridge to be inserted into the slot [3] on the jig smoothly. Rotate the gear [1] downward further. Then, place the plate [2] onto the slot [3] on the jig and fully insert the jig into the clincher unit [4]. 11. Tighten 4 screws for each clincher. 12. Remove the jig by rotating the gear for the stapler upward. Note: Make sure not to snag on Mylar on the clincher when removing the stapler positioning jig. 13. Remove the cartridge and plate. Then, replace the staple sheet removed at the step 5. Replace the cartridge. 14. Check the operation of the stapler.
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
[1] [3] [2] [4]
[1]
8050fs1102
1-167
I ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the position of the clincher [4] for the
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
9.15 FNS adjustment of the stapling position (flat stapling) (only for FS-215/FN-9/FS606)
A. Procedure Note: Never move the stapler unit in a horizontal direction manually (it may cause teeth to skip between the belt and gear). 1. Perform a stapling operation to check whether the paper edge and the line [2] connecting 2 staples [1] becomes parallel [3] and the discrepancy L is within the standard value. Standard value: discrepancy L = 1 mm or less If the discrepancy is not within the standard value, perform the following adjustment. 2. Check whether "adjustment of the position of FNS alignment plate /U" and "adjustment of the position of alignment plate /L" has been complete. 3. Open the finisher door and pull out the stacker unit. 4. Remove the rail stopper screws for the stacker unit. Then, pull out the stacker unit further. Note: To avoid the finisher from falling, make sure to place a support under the stacker unit. 5. Remove the stapler unit cover. 6. Loosen 3 screws [2] for the alignment plate /L [1].
8050fs1103
[1] [2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
8050fs1104
1-168
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 7. Adjust the position based on the mark [3] to paper to be horizontal. 8. Tighten the 3 screws, then perform a stapling operation to check whether the stitch-and-fold position is within the standard value.
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
[1]
[3] [2] [3]

8050fs1105
1-169
I ADJUSTMENT
make the upper edge [1] and lower edge [2] of
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
9.16 FNS adjustment of the angle of the folding stopper (only for FS-215/FN-9/FS-606)
Note: Never move the stapler unit in a horizontal direction manually (it may cause teeth to skip between the belt and gear). Never loosen the screw [1] that must not be removed.
[1]
8050fs1106
A. Procedure 1. Perform a folding operation with A3 paper to check whether the discrepancy at the folding edge is within the standard value. Standard value: A = 1 mm or less If the discrepancy is not within the standard value, perform the following adjustment. 2. Open the finisher door and pull out the stacker unit. 3. Remove the rail stopper screws for the stacker unit. Then, pull out the stacker unit further. Note: To avoid the finisher from falling, make sure to place a support under the stacker unit. 4. Remove the stapler unit cover.
8050fs1107
1-170
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 5. Loosen 5 screws [2] for the folding stopper [1]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
Note: Never loosen the screw [4] that must not be removed. 6. Tighten the 5 screws [2], then perform the folding to check whether the discrepancy is within the standard value.
[4] [2] [1] [3]

8050fs1108
1-171
I ADJUSTMENT
and adjust the angle based on the mark [3].
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
9.17 FNS adjustment of the folding force (only for FS-215/ FN-9/FS-606)
A. Procedure 1. Perform the followings to change the pressure of the folding roller. 2. Remove the rear cover. 3. Open the finisher door and pull out the stacker unit. 4. Remove the stacker unit cover. 5. Change the positions of each 2 pressure springs [3] at front [1] and rear [2]. Note: The 4 pressure springs [3] must be hooked on the hook holes with same symbol.
A B
[3]
C B A
[1]
C B A C B A
[3]
[2]
8050fs1109
1-172
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
A. Procedure 1. Check whether "adjustment of the angle of the folding stopper" has been completed.
Folding position a b c
Standard value A4R 95 mm 101 mm 101 mm 8.5 x 11R 89.4 mm 95 mm 95 mm
Specification 2 mm 2 mm 2 mm
a c
2. Perform a three-folding operation to check whether the three-folding position is within the specification. If it is not within the specification, perform the following adjustment. 3. Turn on the main body, adjust the first folding position (standard value a) in "Finisher adjustment" "Three-holding position adjustment" in the 36 mode. Then, perform the three-folding for confirmation. 4. Once the first folding line is adjusted within the specification, open the finisher door and pull out the stacker unit. 5. Open the three-folding guide plate [1], loosen 2 three-folding stopper screws [2], and then adjust the position of the three-folding stopper [4] based on the mark [3]. 6. Tighten the 2 screws [2], then perform the threefolding to check whether the three-folding position is within the standard value.
b
8050fs1110
[3]
[2] [4] [2] [1]

8050fs1111
1-173
I ADJUSTMENT
9.18 FNS adjustment of the threeholding position (only for FS-215/FN-9/FS-606)
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
9.19 FNS adjustment of the stapler drive belt position

A. Procedure Note: This adjustment is performed only if the position between the drive belt and the gear is displaced during another adjustment by mistake. 1. Open the finisher door and pull out the stacker unit. 2. Remove the rail stopper screws for the stacker unit. Then, pull out the stacker unit further. Note: To avoid the finisher from falling, make sure to place a support under the stacker unit. 3. Remove the following parts. Rear cover Stapler unit cover 4. Insert the stacker unit. 5. Loosen 2 screws (M3) [2] for the staple slide pulley /B [1] from the rear side with the hexagonal wrench [3]. 6. Move the stapler and clincher simultaneously toward center until they contacts with the bearing. Note: Make sure to move them simultaneously. The flat-stapling stopper may be damaged at the metal frame of the stapler if they are moved individually.
[2]
[1]
[3]
8050fs1112
1-174
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 7. Remove the cartridge [1] for the stapler /R, open [3] by sliding it.
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
[1]
[3]
[2]
8. Remove the plate [2] from the stapler positioning jig [1], insert the hooks [3] on the plate into the hook holes [4] on the cartridge, and then close the cover [5]. 9. Attach the cartridge onto the stapler /R.
8050fs1113
[1]
[5] [3] [2]
[4]
8050fs1114
1-175
I ADJUSTMENT
the cover [2], and then remove the staple sheet
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
10. Fold the stacking assist unit [1] and insert 2
I ADJUSTMENT
guide pins [3] on the stapler positioning jig [2] into the holes [5] on the clincher [4]. Note: The stapler positioning jig is adequate to be hooked on the clincher.
[2]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[2] [3]
8050fs1115
11. Rotate the gear [1] for the stapler /R downward. Adjust the horizontal position of the clincher [4] for the plate [2] attached to the cartridge to be inserted into the slot [3] on the jig smoothly. Then, adjust the horizontal position of the stapler /R and the clincher /R. Then, rotate the gear [1] downward further. Place the plate [2] onto the slot [3] on the jig and fully insert the jig into the clincher unit [4]. Note: Do not loosen the screws for the clincher at this time. The stapler /R and the clincher /R must be finely adjusted if the position is not matched.
[3] [2] [4]
[1]
8050fs1116
1-176
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 12. Insert the stacker with the jig attached (with the for the staple slide pulley /B from the rear side. 13. Pull out the stacker unit. Then, remove the jig by rotating the gear for the stapler upward. Note: Make sure not to snag on Mylar on the clincher when removing the stapler positioning jig. 14. Remove the cartridge for the stapler /R and plate. Replace the staple sheet removed at the step 7 and replace the cartridge. Then check following 3 stapling operations. 1-staple (at rear) 1-staple (at front) 2-staple 15. Replace the rear cover and the stapler cover.
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
1-177
I ADJUSTMENT
plate and the jig joined). Then, tighten 2 screws
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
9.20 TU adjustment of the sheet cutting parallelism

A. Procedure 1. Measure the length between the folding face [1] and trimming surface [2] and calculate the parallelism. Then, check whether it is within the standard value. Standard value: parallelism = A-B = 1 mm or less If not, perform the following adjustment.
A
[1]
[2]
8050fs1117
2. Open the front door [1]. 3. Push up the pressure release lever [2]. 4. Loosen the screw [3]. Then adjust the conveyance guide plate [5] based on the mark [4]. 5. Tighten the screw [3].
[2] [1]
[5]
[4]
[3]
8050fs1118
1-178
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
Perform this adjustment when the positioning correction cannot be done (the mis-centering amount exceeds the automatic adjustment range of 5 mm) even if "Printer centring adjustment (tray 4)" in the 36 mode, has been performed. A. Procedure 1. Print the test pattern No.16 to check the miscentering amount. 2. Lift up the up/down plate [1]. 3. Open the top cover [2]. 4. Loosen 4 screws [3] at the top of LCT. Then, slide the guide plate/front [4] and the guide plate/rear [5] in the same direction at the same amount.
[4]
[3]
[3]
[5]
[2]
[1]
8050fs1064
1-179
I ADJUSTMENT
9.21 LCT tray adjustment
mis-centering
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
5. Loosen 2 screws [2] for the center positioning
I ADJUSTMENT
bracket [1] at the bottom of LCT. Then, slide the guide plate in the same direction at the same amount with step 4 6. Tighten the 2 screws [2]. 7. Replace the LCT and print the test pattern No.16 again. 8. Repeat steps 1 to 7 until the mis-centering amount becomes within the automatic adjustment range.
[2]
[1]
8050fs1065
1-180
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.22 LCT skew adjustment

Perform the LCT skew adjustment when the paper skew is different with paper supplied from the other tray in such case as LCT is placed on the inclined surface. However, it has just a little effect because all paper is corrected at the second paper feed section. A. When all printouts are skewed: 1. Print the test pattern No.16 in the continuous copy mode to check the skew amount. 2. Open the front door of the LCT. 3. Loosen 2 screws [2] for the positioning bracket [1] at the bottom of the LCT. 4. Adjust the position of the positioning bracket [2]. 5. Tighten the 2 screws [2].
[1]
[2]
8050fs1066
1-181
I ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS B. When some printouts are skewed:
I ADJUSTMENT
1. Print the test pattern No.16 in the continuous copy mode to check the skew amount. 2. Open the top cover [1]. 3. Loosen 6 screws [2] at the top of LCT to loosen the guide plate/front [3], the guide plate/rear [4], and the guide plate/right side [5]. 4. Tighten the 6 screws at the position where each guide plate is in contact with paper. Reference: The size indicator on the guide plate is approximately 2 mm wider than the actual standard size paper. It may cause the skew for some paper. The skew amount is reduced if paper is fixed with each guide plate in tight.
[3]
[2]
[2]
[4]
[1]
[2] [5]
8050fs1067
1-182
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
Perform the LCT paper feed roller pressure adjustment when the no feed jam occurs at the paper feed (when coated paper is being used). Note: The piled plate kit (P/N: SE95-4330) is a supply part. It should be purchased separately. A. Procedure 1. Open the top cover [1]. 2. Remove the spring [2]. 3. Install the piled plate holder [4] on the paper feed roller [3] with 2 screws [5].
[5]
[4]
[6]
Note: The piled plate kit is accompanied with the 5 piled plates [6]. However, the number of the piled plates [6] should be adjusted while checking no feed condition. (When the piled plates are too heavy, this may result in double feeding.) The piled plates [6] can be removed by loosening the 2 screws [7]. 4. Replace the spring [2]. 5. Close the top cover. 6. Perform the continuous copy to check the paper feed. 7. Repeat steps 1 to 6 if the no feed jam continues to occur at the paper feed.
[3]
[1]
[7]
[2]
8050fs1068
1-183
I ADJUSTMENT
9.23 LCT paper feed roller pressure adjustment
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
9.24 LCT up/down plate horizontal adjustment

Perform the LCT up/down plate horizontal adjustment when the paper feed jam occurs frequently or the up/down wire is replaced. A. Procedure 1. Lift up the up/down plate [1]. 2. Open the top cover [2]. 3. Loosen 4 screws [3] at the front and rear side. 4. Position the mark [5] to make the up/down plate to be horizontal with 2 adjusting screws [4] at the front and rear side. 5. Tighten the 4 screws [3].
[5] [2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[5]
8050fs1069
1-184
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
Perform the LCT sheet feed pressure adjustment when a no feed jam or a double feed jam occurs at the paper feed. The sheet feed pressure is affected by the paper type and the operating environment (the no feed jam is likely in the low temperature environment and the double feed is likely in the high temperature environment). A. Procedure 1. Remove LCT from the main body. 2. Check the adjusting spring mechanism [2] from the top left side of the LCT (paper exit side) [1]. 3. Change the spring hook position [2] depending on the symptom. The load of the spring changes approximately 10% for a change in its position. Note: Excess adjustment may reverse the symptom. For example, a no feed jam becomes a double feed jam. Weak: Double feed jam is corrected. Strong: No feed jam is corrected.
[2]
[1]
8050fs1070
1-185
I ADJUSTMENT
9.25 LCT sheet feed pressure adjustment
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
9.26 LCT paper feed height (upper limit) adjustment

Perform the LCT paper feed height (upper limit) adjustment when the no feed jam occurs, the edge of the fed paper is folded, or you want to feed curled paper. The adjustment is performed by changing the vertical position of the upper limit sensor (PS109). A. Procedure 1. Lift up the up/down plate [1]. 2. Open the top cover [2]. 3. Measure the height of the entrance guide upper surface [3] and up/down plate upper surface [4] with a scale to check whether it is within the standard value. Standard value: 2 to 5 mm Perform the following adjustment if it is not within the standard value or the edge of the fed paper is folded even if it is within the standard value. Note: This adjustment affects the pick-up release amount. When the adjustment is complete, perform "9.27 LCT pick-up release amount adjustment". 4. Remove the sprint [6] from the paper feed unit [5]. 5. Remove 4 screws [7]. 6. Remove the paper feed pick-up cover /B [8] toward right.
[6]
[3]
[5] [1] [4]
[2]
[8]
[7]
8050fs1071
1-186
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 7. Loosen a screw [1]. 8. Move the sensor mounting bracket [2] vertically to make the height of the entrance guide upper surface and the up/down plate upper surface to be within the standard value. If it is not within the standard value and the height of the up/down plate has to be raised: When paper with a convex curl is fed: Lower the position of the sensor mounting bracket If it is not within the standard value and the height of the up/down plate has to be lowered: When the edge of the fed paper is folded: When paper with a concave curl is fed: Raise the position of the sensor mounting bracket 9. When the adjustment is complete, tighten a screw [1].
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
8050fs1072
1-187
I ADJUSTMENT
[1]
[2]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
9.27 LCT pick-up release amount adjustment

Perform the LCT pick-up release amount adjustment when a no feed jam occurs frequently. The adjustment is performed by changing the horizontal position of the paper feed solenoid (SD100). A. Procedure 1. Lift up the up/down plate [1]. 2. Open the top cover [2]. 3. Remove the sprint [4] from the paper feed unit [3]. 4. Remove 4 screws [5]. 5. Remove the paper feed pick-up cover /B [6] toward right.
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[6]
[5]
8050fs1073
1-188
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 6. Pull the moving section of SD100 (paper feed the paper feed roller [2] and the upper surface of the up/down plate [3] to check whether it is within the standard value. Standard value: 0.5 to 2.5 mm Perform the following adjustment if it is not within the standard value. 7. Loosen a screw [4].
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
[2]
[1]
[3]
Note: Before starting the operation, note the original position of the solenoid. 8. Move the paper feed solenoid (SD100) [1] horizontally to make the distance between the paper feed roller and the upper surface of the up/down plate to be within the standard value. 9. Tighten the screw [4] for the paper feed solenoid.
[4]
8050fs1074
1-189
I ADJUSTMENT
solenoid) [1] and measure the distance between
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
Blank page
1-190
Description of the ISW
II
SERVICE TOOL
1.1
1.1.1
Setup
Board used for the ISW
1. Description of the ISW

ISWTrns supports the following boards for rewriting the control program in 8050. ISW (In-system Writer) is an operation to rewrite the control program stored in the flash ROM on a variety of control boards in the digital copier without removing the boards from the main body of the copier. ISW allows you to update the version of the control program without replacing the board or to install the latest program when replacing the board. [ISWTrns (PC software)] is provided to execute ISW, which rewrite the program by connecting a PC to the digital copier. The software rewrites the control program stored in the flash ROM in the copier main body directly. This chapter only describes the set up procedure on the main body for executing ISW. See the "ISW (InSystem Writer) Service Manual" for information on operating the ISWTrns. Note: When rewrite control program for new type, be sure to use the ISWTrns Ver. 3.51 or the above. When upgrading ISWTrns, be sure to uninstall the current ISWTrns before installing the new version. Installing it by overwriting may result in the installation of the USB driver unavailable. It is required to install the USB driver for ISWTrns to perform ISW via USB on this machine. See the installation procedure for the "2. USB ISW". Before performing ISW via USB, be sure to turn on the USB radio button in [Setting (S)] [Set Communication (C)] in ISWTrns and press the OK button. From "machine" list box of ISWTrns, be sure to select "8050" for old type and "bizhub C500" for new type. A. Power ON mode The power ON mode is used if no program is installed on the overall control board (OACB) or it is faulty. If no program is installed on OACB, the OACB program becomes possible to be written at power ON. No display appears on the operation panel and the timer LED flashes even if the operation board control program is installed because the OACB controls the power for the operation board. The copier supports three ISW transfer modes as follows. 1.1.3 ISW transfer type Note: The control program on other boards cannot be written until that for the overall control board (OACB) is written. The following shows the ISW data flow. PC OACB OB1 PRCB DFCB FNSCB 1.1.2 Data flow Overall control board (OACB) Printer controller board (PRCB) Operation board/1 (OB1) FNS control board (FNSCB) See IP Service Manual for the printer controller. ROM replacement is needed for boards other than the above. RADF control board (DFCB)
2-1
II SERVICE TOOL
Description of the ISW B. HELP + CHECK mode
The HELP + CHECK mode is started when the sub power switch (SW2) is pressed while pressing "HELP" and "CHECK button." This mode is designed specifically for ISW to be started when the overall control program is installed but the operation board control program is not installed because the 25 mode cannot be started in such case. C. 25 mode The 25 mode is available only if both the overall control program and the operation board control program are installed.
II SERVICE TOOL
2-2
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 1.1.4 Instances of ISW transfer
A. When writing a new program (because replacing a board or failed to rewrite the program) Normal startup display ISW transfer method Overall control board Operation board /1 Flashing timer LED No display on the operation panel Error code display Power ON mode Condition Overall control program is not installed or faulty
but the operation board program is not installed or faulty Both the overall control program and the operation board program is installed
Others
Error code display
25 mode
B. When updating the version of the program Normal startup display ISW transfer method Overall control board Operation board /1 Others Normal Normal Normal 25 mode 25 mode 25 mode Condition All program has been installed
2-3
II SERVICE TOOL
HELP + CHECK mode
The overall control program is installed
Description of the ISW 1.1.5 Setup procedure
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Note: Before performing ISW via USB, be sure to turn on the USB radio button in [Setting (S)] [Set Communication (C)] in ISWTrns and press the OK button. B. Power on mode a. Procedure
A. Connecting a PC a. Procedure
1. Loosen 4 screws [1] and remove the side cover/2 [2].
[1] II SERVICE TOOL
1. Turn ON the sub power switch (SW2). 2. Check the timer LED is flushing. The control program becomes possible to be written in this state. 3. Execute the operation according to the procedures specified in the "ISW (In-System Writer) Service Manual." Note: Do not turn OFF the copier while writing the ISW data is being rewritten. 4. The operation screen appears if it is completed
[2]
[1]
8050fs2012
successfully. If it is terminated abnormally, see "E. The relationship between ISW resulting operation and the operational LEDs."
2. Connect either of IEEE1284 port [1] or USB (Type B) port [2] to the PC via a cable.
C. HELP + CHECK mode a. Procedure
1. Turn ON the copie while pressing "HELP" and "CHECK button." 2. "ISW write mode select menu screen" Press 1 (PC) with the numeric keys.
ISW WRITE MODE SELECT MENU
1.PC
[1] [2]
PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY
9.EXIT
8050fs2040
2-4
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 3. "ISW device select menu screen" Select 3 (OPERATION CONTROL) with the numeric keys. Press 9 (EXIT) to exit from the menu or press 0 (PREVIOUS) to return to the previous screen.
ISW DEVICE SELECT MENU 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. GRAPHIC CONTROL PRINTER CONTROL OPERATION CONTROL ADF VIF [MODE:PC]
6. "ISW executing screen" Execute the operation according to the procedures specified in the "ISW (In-System Writer) Service Manual." "Result screen" appears once ISW is complete.
EXECUTING
PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY
0. PREVIOUS
9. EXIT
Note: Rewrite programs other than 3 (OPERATION CONTROL) in the 25 mode because this mode does not support them. 4. "Operation control - item select menu screen" Select an item from 1 - 5 to rewrite it individually or select 6 (ALL) to rewrite all items at a time. Press 9 (EXIT) to exit from the menu or press 0 (PREVIOUS) to return to the previous screen.
OPERATION CONTROL - ITEM SELECT MENU 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 01 02 03 04 05 [MODE:PC] PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY 0. CONTINUE 9. EXIT *** NORMAL END ***
7. "Result screen" The operation is completed successfully "NORMAL END" appears.
The operation is terminated abnormally "ABNORMAL END" appears. Check the error code on the screen if the rewriting is terminated abnormally.
0. PREVIOUS 9. EXIT *** ABNORMAL END *** INPUT DEVICE ERROR (ERROR CODE : XX)
6. ALL
PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY
5. "ISW start screen" Select 1 (YES) to start ISW. Select 2 (NO) to cancel.
OPERATION CONTROL - 01 [MODE:PC]
PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY
0. CONTINUE
9. EXIT
ISW START OK?
8. Select 0 (CONTINUE) to continue ISW or select 9 (EXIT) to exit. "PLEASE TURN OFF A POWER SUPPLY" appears when pressing 9, then turn OFF the
PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY
1. YES
2. NO
sub power switch (SW2).
2-5
II SERVICE TOOL
Description of the ISW b. Error code
Error code 01 1F 41 42 43 81
Causes Error in the instruction against the ISW processing unit Program error Input data format error (at ISW for the operation board program) Model name error in input data (at ISW for the operation board program) Board name error in input data (at ISW for the operation board program) Input device error such as the input time out (at ISW for the operation board program) Flash ROM erasing failure (at ISW for the overall control program) Flash ROM writing failure (at ISW for the overall control program) ROM check sum error (at ISW for the overall control program) Output device error such as the input time out Erase error Write error Communication error I/F communication parameter error between the overall control board and the operation board (at ISW for the operation board program) I/F command sequence error between the overall control board and the operation board (at ISW for the operation board program) I/F communication timeout error between the overall control board and the operation board (at ISW for the operation board program) Flash ROM error (at ISW for the operation board program) Flash ROM verify error (at ISW for the operation board program) Flash ROM write error (at ISW for the operation board program) Flash ROM erase error (at ISW for the operation board program) I/F receive checksum error between the overall control board and the operation board (at ISW for the operation board program) I/F receive header code error between the overall control board and the operation board (at ISW for the operation board program) I/F receive parity error between the overall control board and the operation board (at ISW for the operation board program) I/F receive framing error between the overall control board and the operation board (at ISW for the operation board program) I/F receive overflow error between the overall control board and the operation board (at ISW for the operation board program)
No. of resulting operation (1) (1) (2) (2) (2) (3) (5) (5) (8) (6) (9) (9) (4) (4) (4) (4) (7) (7) (7) (7) (7) (7) (7) (7) (4)
II SERVICE TOOL
C1 C2 C3 C4 E1 E2 E3 E9 EA EB F0 F1 F2 F3 F8 F9 FA FB FC
Resulting operations (1) The program is not operating normally. Turn OFF and ON the sub power switch (SW2) and then start ISW again. (2) Check the ISW transfer data file. (3) Check the connection of the communication cable from the input device (PC). (4) Check I/F between the overall control board and the operation board. (5) The flash ROM on the overall control board is faulty. Execute ISW again. If the same error occurs, the flash ROM on the overall control board may be faulty or it may have reached its life. Replace the overall control board.
2-6
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 (6) An error is detected from the board on which you want to rewrite the program. Check the board on which you want to execute ISW. (7) The flash ROM on the operation board/1 is faulty. Execute ISW again. If the same error occurs, the flash ROM on the operation board/1 may be faulty or it may have reached its life. Replace the operation board/1. (8) The checksum calculated after the program is written does not become equal to the ROM checksum data. Execute ISW again. If the same error occurs, the ISW transfer data file may not be downloaded properly. (9) It cannot write/erase data to/from area on which ISW is executed. The flash ROM may be faulty or have reached its life. Replace the object board. The checksum calculated after the program is written does not become equal to the ROM checksum data. Execute ISW again. If the same error occurs, the ISW transfer data file may not be downloaded properly. Note: If an error occurs during rewriting the program on the overall control board, the operation panel cannot be displayed even if the sub power switch is ON because the program controlling the whole components has been lost. Execute ISW in the power ON mode if such is the case. If an error occurs during rewriting the program on the operation board/1, it cannot be started in the 25 mode because the error code is displayed. Execute ISW in the HELP + CHECK mode if such is the case. a. Procedure D. 25 mode
1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [11 ISW] key. 3. "ISW mode menu screen"
4. Pressing the [Start] key, cause the machine to be data waiting condition. Note: See "C. HELP + CHECK mode" since selecting "Operation panel" switches to the HELP + CHECK mode. 5. Execute the operation according to the procedures specified in the "ISW (In-System Writer) Service Manual." Note: Do not turn OFF the copier while rewriting the ISW data is being written.
2-7
II SERVICE TOOL
Select a program for which ISW is executed.
E. The relationship between ISW operation and the operational LEDs The following shows the display of the operation panel in the power ON mode with ISW executed. No. 1 2 3 CPU initialization During memory check Memory check error (waiting data from PC) ISW processing (receiving data) ISW processing (writing to flash ROM) Transfer data error Flash ROM write error Memory check successful and reboot Operation Timer LED OFF OFF Blink OFF OFF Blink Blink OFF Power save LED OFF OFF OFF Blink Blink Blink Steady lit OFF
II SERVICE TOOL
4 5 6 7 8
2-8
USB ISW
2. USB ISW
2.1 What is the USB ISW?
The ISW RNs tool for transfer can be installed in the PC by using the setup disk. However, the USB driver (KCAUSB.SYS) is required to be installed by the plug-and-play of the Windows after connecting the PC and the copier with the USB cable. The installation of the USB driver is required only when the PC is connected to the copier for the first time. (No installation is required on and after the second connection.) A. USB driver installation procedure (Windows 2000/XP) When the PC and the copier are connected with the USB cable, the USB driver is automatically installed by the plug-and-play. However, this may cause the USB driver (USBPRINT.SYS) of the Windows to be installed. Accordingly, the USB driver should be set by following the procedure given below: 1. Select "Install from a list or specific location [Advanced]" in the display shown below, and then click [Next].
2. Select "Display a list of the known drivers for this device so that I can choose a specific driver" in the "Install Hardware Device Drivers" screen, and then click [Next].
2-9
II SERVICE TOOL
USB ISW
3. Select the USB driver in the driver selection screen, and then click [Next] for installation. USB driver: Konica Minolta 8050 USB Driver (ISW)
II SERVICE TOOL
4. When the "Completing the Upgrade Device Driver Wizard" screen is displayed, click [Finish] to finish the installation. 5. In the "Device Manager" screen, check to see if the installation of the USB driver is carried out correctly. USB driver: Konica Minolta 8050 USB Driver (ISW)
2-10
INTERNET ISW
3. INTERNET ISW
3.1 What is the Internet ISW?
The Internet ISW is the system to perform ISW, by indicating ISW using the Internet mail (E-mail) or browser to let copier automatically acquire the subject program from program server and rewrite its own program. With this Internet ISW, you can update copier's programs just by transmitting E-mail with simple keyword described, without visiting customer's office. With the Web function, you can perform the ISW on customer site, without carrying the actual programs with you.
3.2
Operating environment
To use the Internet ISW function, the following conditions must be satisfied. A. The copier is connected to a built in network where programs can be downloaded from the Internet using ftp or http protocol. *1 B. The Internet ISW does not function in copier under the following conditions. (1) The main power switch (SW1) is OFF. (2) The sub power switch (SW2) is OFF. (3) The copier is shut OFF by the auto shut off function. *1 Programs can be downloaded using Firewall. Note: The Internet ISW does not function even if the copier receives the Internet ISW designating mail, as long as it is in any of the above conditions. The Internet ISW starts when the above conditions are released. However, the mails are able to have period of validity. The Internet ISW continues to function in the condition of a paper jam or SC occurs, or in the low power mode.
3.3
Main features
With the Internet ISW, the following functions are available. A. Internet ISW using E-Mail remote notification system *2 By sending simple keywords to a copier by E-Mail, the programs in the copier are rewritten automatically. The boards of which programs can be rewritten with the Internet ISW are as follows. *3 (1) Overall control board (I) (2) Printer control board (C) (3) Operation board /1 (O) (4) RADF control board (F) (5) FNS control board (N) *2 *3 To use the function, the E-Mail remote notification system must be setup separately. The available boards are different depending on the copier models. B. Internet ISW using Web utility By accessing copier main body's homepage via PC web browser, programs in the copier are rewritten automatically. To use the function, a Web terminal that is networked to the copier is necessary. *4 *4 In case it is connected to a LAN, it can only be used within the LAN. 2-11
1
II SERVICE TOOL
INTERNET ISW
3.4
Initial setting
To use the Internet ISW, the related settings such as network parameter, program server address, firewall address must be performed in the copier main body beforehand. Also, to use the [3.5 Internet ISW using E-Mail remote notification system], the related settings such as account registration must be set on the mail server separately. For the details, please refer to "4. Mail remote notification system". 3.4.1 Setting on Control panel
II SERVICE TOOL
First, set the copier's IP address on the control panel, to network the copier. If it has already been set, go to "3.4.2 Setting on Web browser". a. Procedure 1. Select "Key operator mode" on the control panel. 2. Select "[1] System initial setting". 3. Select "[3] IP address setting". 4. Enter [IP address], [Subnet mask] and [Gateway address]. *5 5. Reboot the copier. *5 Copier's IP address, etc. are usually assigned by the system administrator. For the details, please contact the customer's system administrator. 3.4.2 Setting on Web browser
Next, set the program server, etc. from the Web browser. To use the Web browser, prepare a networked PC *6. *6 Prepare a PC by borrowing customer's PC or carrying laptop PC, for example. (Considerations) In any setting item, space cannot be set. If there is a mistake in input process on the Web browser, be sure to correct it according to error message displayed. If the mistake is left without correction, program download error may occur. Web's layout may change without prior notice.
2-12
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 a. Procedure 1. Start the Web browser. *7
INTERNET ISW
2. Specify the copier's IP address that you have entered at "3.4.1 Setting on Control panel". If you access the copier's http address, the [Main page] as the top figure on next page appears. *7 If proxy is set on the web browser, it may not be able to access the copier's http address (web page). For the details, please contact the customer's system administrator. As Web browser, Internet Explorer or Netscape is recommended. Do not perform setting from two or more browsers concurrently.
Copyright 2000 GoAhead Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Copier Web Utility Main Page 3. On the [Main page], click the [Environment setup], to display [Login to Environment setup] page.
Login window to Environment setting
2-13
II SERVICE TOOL
INTERNET ISW
4. On [Login to Environment setup] page, enter the key operator password (the same password as key operator mode password) and click Apply. The environment setup list appears. Then click [Extension for maintenance].
II SERVICE TOOL
Environment setup screen 5. On [Login to Extension for maintenance] page, enter the password (the same password as mode change menu password) and click Apply. The environment setting list appears. Then click [Internet ISW].
Login window to Extension for maintenance
Extension for maintenance screen
2-14
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 6. Click [Initial Setting].
INTERNET ISW
Internet ISW main screen 7. Set proxy server. When you don't use proxy server (firewall), go to Step 9.
2-15
II SERVICE TOOL
INTERNET ISW
Enableproxy
Select [no] if you do not use proxy Select [Use ftp proxy] if you use ftp proxy Select [Use http proxy] if you use http proxy
Proxy server Type *8
If you selected [Use ftp proxy] for [Use of proxy], select the type of proxy from the following. Type1 [USER USER@HOST] Type2 [OPEN HOSTNAME] Type3 [FW USERNAMEFW PASSWORDSITE HOSTNAME]
II SERVICE TOOL
Type4 [FW USERNAMEFW PASSWORDUSER USER@HOST] Proxy server IP Address Port Number User name on the proxy server Password for the proxy server *8 If you use proxy server, enter the IP address of the proxy server. If you use proxy server, set the port No. that is used by the proxy server. If you selected Type1 or Type2 for [Type of proxy server], set an account name for the proxy server. If you selected Type1 or Type2 for [Type of proxy server], set a password for the proxy server.
Types 2, 3 and 4 are not guaranteed. When you finish entering all items, click [Next] and check the contents on the setting confirmation screen. If all are fine, click [Next]. If there is any input error, click [Back] and reset the item according to the message in red. 8. Set the program server. (Proxy server is used)
2-16
INTERNET ISW
Program server address
Enter the address of the server where programs to download are stored. Select the protocol you use from the drop down list at the left and enter the following address in the test box at the right. In case of ftp, it is the relative path from the home directory. Example: ftp://210.226.5.5/EUR/8050/
User name on the program server Password for the program server Receiving time out
Enter the account name of the program server. Enter the program server password. Set the program reception timeout. (Default: 30 minutes) If timeout occurs, the program downloading is forcibly terminated. Without performing ISW, the machine recovers to normal mode.
When you finish entering all items, click [Next] and check the contents on the setting confirmation screen. If all are fine, click [Finish]. If there is any input error, click [Back] and reset the item according to the message in red. 9. Set the program server. (Proxy is not used.)
Protocol Program server IP Address Target directory
Select a protocol to receive programs. Enter the IP address of the server where programs to download are stored. For http, enter path that follows the host domain. For ftp, enter the relative path from the home directory. Example: EUR/8050/
User name on the program server Password for the Program server Receiving time out
Enter the account name of the program server. Enter the program server password. Set the program reception timeout. (Default: 30 minutes) If timeout occurs, the program downloading is forcibly terminated. Without performing ISW, the machine recovers to normal mode.
2-17
II SERVICE TOOL
INTERNET ISW
When you finish entering all items, click [Next] and check the contents on the setting confirmation screen. If all are fine, click [Finish]. If there is any input error, click [Back] and reset the item according to the message in red. 10. Perform the download test. This test downloads "test.dat" from the program server set in the initial setting, to ensure all items have been set appropriately. If the download test fails, check the setting items again according to the error message. When the test finished successfully, the communication speed and estimated download time are displayed as shown below. Draw upon the data to decide [Reception timeout].
II SERVICE TOOL
2-18
INTERNET ISW
If the download test fails, response error code sent from the server is displayed as follows. There may be input errors. Check the initial setting again.
2-19
II SERVICE TOOL
INTERNET ISW
3.5
3.5.1
Internet ISW using E-Mail remote notification system

Function
Customer engineer sends an E-mail with simple keyword description. Then, the copier that received the mail downloads specified program from the program server and rewrites its program. This function is executed by a different command (keyword) from the list print acquisition function of the [EMail remote notification system]. A. The boards of which programs can be rewritten with the Internet ISW are as follows. (1) Overall control board: I0 (2) Printer control board: C0 (3) Operation board /1: O0, O1, O2, O3, O4, O5 (4) RADF control board: F0 (5) FNS control board: N0 B. You can acquire version information of programs to be rewritten. C. You can find out how to use [Internet ISW] by mail. To use the above functions, it is necessary to send the copier E-mail with the specified simple keyword (command) description. The following are the commands and the options.
II SERVICE TOOL
Command ISW
Option Subject board name
Description Specifies name of a board to ISW. (must be entered) The specifiable boards are as follows. [I0, C0, O0, O1, O2, O3, O4, O5, F0, N0] The available boards are different depending on models. File name can be specified with "=" as [Subject board name=File name].
Timeout
Specifies period of validity of mail. (From 5 to 1,440 minutes. Unit is minute. If none is specified, timeout takes place at 90 minutes.) When the time from mail transmission by CE to mail reception at copier exceeds the specified period, ISW is not performed due to expiration.
ISWHELP
Returns a help mail with the above command use descriptions.
When no file name is specified, the following files are acquired from the program server address set beforehand.
I0
bootI1.bin
C0
bootC1.bin
O0 O1 O2 O3 O4 O5
bootO0.bin bootO1.bin bootO2.bin bootO3.bin bootO4.bin bootO5.bin
F0
bootF1.bin
N0
bootN1.bin
2-20
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 3.5.2 Transmitting E-Mail
INTERNET ISW
The following is an example of transmitting an E-mail with the aforementioned command to a copier. You can use either upper and lower case characters when typing a command (option) in E-mail. *9 When transmitting an E-mail to a copier, take care of the following. The ISW-designated mail has the period of validity. Therefore, set the date of mailer and time zone of the copier *10 accurately. One mail can be described with only one ISW command. If two or more commands are described, the second and later ones are ignored. With the mail software in use, transmit mails in text mode. (Commands in mails in HTML mode cannot be handled correctly.) Place at least one space or TAB *11 between command and option, and option and option described in mails. Type every command in mails only with alphanumeric one-byte characters (ASCII characters). If other characters *12 are typed, an error mail with [Command not found] is returned. Type every command in mails from the line head. Line head starting with a space or TAB is ignored. Do not attach files or others to the mails transmitted to copiers. Depending on the size of files, such mails may be handled as illegal mails and copier may refuse to receive. Do not type signatures in the mails transmitted to copiers. If auto signature addition is set on the mail software, turn off the setting. Signatures may be handled as commands and error mails may be returned from the copier. *9 *10 *11 *12 Case sensitivity is on for the file name. Take care when typing. Set in the E-mail transmission setting for [E-mail transmission setting]. Linefeed is not available. Two-byte characters also cause errors. Take care not to use them. Any mail software can be used. For example, mobile device mail, browser mail and so on.
(1) Transmitting ISW command The transmission mail must have the following descriptions. In Subject, type a CE password that has been entered in the mail reception setting. For the details, please refer to the "4. E-Mail remote notification system". In To, type mail address of a copier. In Body, type a command.
2-21
II SERVICE TOOL
INTERNET ISW An example of I0 ISW:
Copier's mail address
Password for authentication II SERVICE TOOL
Command
An example of return mail (ISW start) *13 When the copier allows the ISW, it moves into the ISW mode, displaying [Remote ISW executing] on the operation panel. The copier cannot be used while it is in the ISW mode. *14 Then, a mail like the following is returned from the copier.
*13 *14
The return mail is in English regardless of the language selected for the copier's main body operation panel display. During the ISW, sub power switch (SW2) of the copier does not function. The copier cannot be shutdown.
2-22
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 An example of return mail (ISW complete)
INTERNET ISW
When ISW completes and copier reboots automatically, a mail like the following is returned from the copier. You can confirm that the ROM version is upgraded.
However, if transmission of the above two kinds of return mails fails, the mails are not retransmitted. When specifying a file name When specifying a file name for ISW command, type the name with "=" following the subject board name. In this case, "65FAI012UGH0.bin" must exist in the program server address that has been set in the Internet ISW setting. Transmission mail ISW I0 = 65FAI012UGH0.bin 30 When transmission mail exceeds the period of validity On ISW command, period of validity (timeout) can be changed set for every mail. (Default: 90 minutes) If period from the mail transmission to mail reception at copier (duration) is longer than the timeout period, ISW is not performed by that mail.
2-23
II SERVICE TOOL
INTERNET ISW Transmission mail
II SERVICE TOOL
5 minutes is set for timeout
Return mail
Timeout took place as 6 minutes had passed.
2-24
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 (2) Transmitting ISWHELP command Manual that shows how to use command is returned by mail. It is useful if you forget how to use command and options. Transmission mail ISWHelp Return mail
INTERNET ISW
2-25
II SERVICE TOOL
INTERNET ISW
3.6
3.6.1
Internet ISW using Web utility

Function
Using the copier's web utility, just by clicking on the browser *15, customer engineer can let the copier automatically download programs from the program server and rewrite its own programs. The boards of which programs can be rewritten are the same as those of [Internet ISW using E-mail remote notification system]. *15 Usually, it is not possible to access company-inside copier from outside exceeding firewall. How to use
II SERVICE TOOL
3.6.2
A. Going to Internet ISW page The same as instructed in "3.4 Initial Setting", go to the [Internet ISW] page on the Web browser.
Internet ISW main screen Next to each board name, the program version is displayed.
2-26
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 B. Performing ISW
INTERNET ISW
From the [ISW] items, select a board to ISW and check the box. When specifying a name of file to download, type the name in the text box of [File name]. When no file name is specified, the following files are acquired from the program server address set beforehand. I0 bootI1.bin C0 bootC1.bin O0 O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 When the above input completes, click [ISW]. C. Starting ISW When ISW starts, the following screen appears. If there is any input error, click [Back] and reset the item according to the message in red. bootO0.bin bootO1.bin bootO2.bin bootO3.bin bootO4.bin F0 bootF1.bin N0 bootN1.bin
ISW execution screen When ISW completes successfully, the copier automatically reboots. If you click [Check status], you can check the current ISW status. If you click [Cancel], you can stop the ISW only while program is being downloaded
2-27
II SERVICE TOOL
bootO5.bin
INTERNET ISW D. Checking ISW status
II SERVICE TOOL
ISW status check screen This screen shows the current performance or error. The display items are as follows. *16 ISW is downloading ISW is writing Finished *16 ISW was cancelled due to transferring problem ISW was cancelled due to transferring overtime ISW was cancelled due to writing problem to flash memory Copier reboots after ISW completes normally. Do not click [Refresh] on the browser.
E. Ending ISW When ISW completes and copier reboots, ensure that the program version is upgraded on the [Internet ISW main screen].
2-28
INTERNET ISW
3.7
3.7.1
Precautions for use

Prior announcement to administrator
When performing the Internet ISW, be sure to contact the copier's administrator or the like and get his/her agreement beforehand. Perform ISW in condition that the copier is not being used. If the copier is being used (a job is being processed), the Internet ISW is not performed. 3.7.2 If power failure occurs during data rewriting
While ISW rewriting is in progress *17, the operation panel and sub power switch (SW2) are locked. However, if the main power goes down due to power failure or other, the copier becomes unable to start up. *18 This is only the problem on rewriting the overall control board and the operation board /1. Even if errors occur on rewriting other boards, the boards can be overwritten again with the Internet ISW. If the copier becomes unable to start for the above reason, go to the copier's site and rewrite the program using the ISWTrns. <How to recover> Overall control board: Turn ON the sub power switch (SW2) and then perform ISW. Operation board /1: Turn ON the sub power switch (SW2) while pressing HELP and CHECK button and then perform ISW. For the details, please refer to "1. ISW" *17 *18 3.7.3 Rewriting takes maximum 10 minute. No problem is cased by power failure during program downloading process. ISW of multiple programs
It is not possible with the Internet ISW to ISW several programs concurrently. Always perform ISW one by one. If several programs must be rewritten at the same time, perform ISW from board of higher priority. *19 Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 RADF control board (F), FNS control board (N) Printer control board (C), Operation board /1 (O) Overall control board (I)
When rewriting several programs, SC may occur during rewriting intervals between programs. However, such SC will clear when all the subject programs are rewritten. *19 In case of the Internet ISW using the E-mail remote notification system, the sequence of transmitted ISW designating mails and mails received by copier may change. Transmit multiple mails while ensuring reception of completion mail or putting enough intervals. 3.7.4 If ISW fails in low power mode
If ISW fails due to errors in program download, data check, and so on, the copier recovers into normal mode. Only in low power mode, the copier reboots when ISW fails.
2-29
II SERVICE TOOL
INTERNET ISW
3.8
3.8.1
Proxy server authentication in Internet ISW

What is a proxy server?
It is a server that receives request (HTTP or FTP etc.) from a client inside the firewall, and represents the client. With this server, access to outside the firewall is enabled. 3.8.2 Authentication of proxy server
II SERVICE TOOL
Following are the lists of commands of each authentication type: All the 4 types below are supported in the Internet ISW. 3.8.3 Type and command list for authentication on proxy server
The following shows the brief description of each authentication type and the list of commands being used. A. Type 1: USER user@host This type does not require an authentication to the proxy sever when accessing outside via proxy. In case it is possible to access outside via proxy server without entering user name and password of the proxy server, this type may be used. Command Command USER PASS Parameter user@host password Reply Code 331 230 Description Sends user name of the program server and program server's address Sends password for the above user name
B. Type 2: OPEN host It is almost the same as Type 1. The only difference is a command at the authentication. Apply this type when all the settings are set properly but communication fails with Type 1. Command Command OPEN Parameter host Reply Code ftp expanded function: Defined by each server USER PASS user password 331 230 Sends user name of the program sever Sends password for the above user name Description Sends program server's address
2-30
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 C. Type 3: FW user FW password SITE host This type requires an authentication to the proxy server itself when accessing outside.
INTERNET ISW
It is necessary to enter information of the server that you wish to access, user name and password of the proxy sever (firmware). In case the user name and password of the proxy server are required when accessing outside via proxy sever, this type may be used. Command Command USER PASS SITE Parameter FW user FW password host Reply Code 331 230 ftp expanded function: Defined by each server USER PASS user password 331 230 Sends user name of the program sever Sends password for the above user name Description Sends password for the above user name Sends program server's address
D. FW user name FW password USER user@host It is almost the same as Type 3. The only difference is a command at the authentication. Apply this type when all the settings are set properly but communication fails with Type 3. Command Command USER PASS USER PASS Parameter FW user FW password user@host password Reply Code 331 230 331 230 Description Sends user name of the proxy server Sends password for the above user name Sends user name of the program server and program server's address Sends password for the above user name
3.8.4
Remarks For fwtk2.1 (for unix) and Black Jumbo Dog (for Windows), authentication Type 1 is used. Type 1 is used in many proxy servers. If you are not sure about the authentication type of the proxy server, KC recommends that you use Type 1 in the meantime.
2-31
II SERVICE TOOL
Sends user name of the proxy server
MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM
4. MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM

4.1 What is the Mail remote notification system?
Mail remote notification system allows to acquire machine data, that have been available as "List Output Mode" in 36 mode from copier, through internet mail (E-mail). This function is achieved without visiting customer site and printing on paper if the simple keyword is e-mailed.
4.2
II SERVICE TOOL
Operation environment
Following conditions should be satisfied in order to use mail remote notification system. The function works during JAM, SC or Low power mode, but does not work during shut-off. However, the sent mail does not disappear and the copier process the mail after next starting up. During low power mode, the machine operation is as usual. A. The mail server *1 that allows copier to receive mail in POP3 or IMAP protocol. (It is preferred that mail server can receive external mail and service constantly.) B. The mail server *2 that allows copier to transmit mail in SMTP protocol. (It is preferred that mail server can send external mail and service constantly.). C. Mail remote notification system disabling conditions on copier are as follows. (1) Main power switch is OFF. (2) Sub power switch is OFF. *1 *2 qpopper, Lotus Notes, Mercury Mail etc. Assign one account per one copier. It can be the same machine to the SMTP server. "Mail remote notification system" corresponds to "POP before SMTP". Sendmail 8.9, qmail, Lotus Notes, Mercury Mail etc. It can be the same machine to the receiving server.
4.3
Initial setting
In order to use Mail remote notification system, settings such as network parameter on copier and account registration on mail server are necessary. A. Setting on operation panel In order to connect the copier main body to network, IP address of the copier should be set on operation panel. If it is already set, please go to "B. Setting on Web. a. Procedure 1. Select [Key operator mode] on operation panel. 2. Select [1. System initial setting]. 3. Select [3. IP address setting]. 4. Input [IP address], [Subnetmask] and [Gateway address]*1. 5. Turn OFF/ON power switch of copier. *1 System administrator usually assigns IP address and network related setting to copier. Please ask system administrator for details.
2-32
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 B. Setting on Web
Next, input setting for mail server from Web browser. Please use PC*2 connected to the network in order to use Web browser. *2 Note: No blank space should be entered for any column. Following characters cannot be used for the E-mail address. When the error message is displayed on the web browser, correct the input error following to the message. If the error is not corrected, mail sending or receiving may fail. Web design is subject to change without notice. (1) How to set a. Procedure 1. Start up Web browser *1. 2. Type IP address of the copier you input to the [A. Setting on operation panel]. When accessing Web, the [main page] (see upper figure in next page) is displayed. *1 If proxy is set on Web browser, it may not possible to access web utilities of copier. Please ask system administrator for details. KC recommends to use Internet explorer or Netscape as the Web browser. Do not perform setting from the two or more browsers concurrently. ()<> ;:"[] Prepare PC; borrow the customer's one or bring notebook computer.
Copyright 2000 GoAhead Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Copier Web utilities main page 3. In [Main] page, click [Environment Setup] button and display [Environment setup log in] page.
2-33
II SERVICE TOOL
II SERVICE TOOL
Environment setup log in page 4. Input key operator password in [Environment setup log in] page, then click [Apply]. [Environment set up] page is displayed. Then click [E-Mail transmission setting]. Even key operator password set "0000" in 25-mode setting, input "0000".
Environment setup page 5. Set the transmission setting. In order to use Mail remote notification system, registration of E-mail address of manager (machine administrator), and sending (SMTP) server input is mandatory.
Manager Address *1 DNS Server IP Address Time difference *1
To specify E-mail address of machine manager. The e-mail address to notify error from SMTP. Input as needed. If not needed, leave it blank. The send time of mail is calculated referring this value. Input the time difference from UTC within the range -1200 (12h00min) to +1200 (+12h00min). If setting is not made, it is +0000 (the same as UTC). For example, the time difference in New York is -5 hours, - 500 is input.
2-34
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Sending mail (SMTP) sever *1 Condition Informing Address *1 E-Mail Transmission *1
The IP address of SMTP sever. It is for mail transmission system. *2 You may leave it blank when mail transmission system is not used. It is for mail transmission system. *2 You may leave it blank when mail transmission system is not used.
*1 *2
The same setting can be set on LCD of the copier. But do not set concurrently from web browser and Web. Please see the "INSTRUCTION MANUAL" of copier if use the mail transmission system.
E-Mail transmission setting page 6. Click [Apply] button to finish input.
2-35
II SERVICE TOOL
MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM (2) Test mail sending
Click [Sending test] button and then a test mail is sent to SMTP server. Test mail is sent to [Manager address] set on Step5. Click [Sending test] to display result of the test mail. If it is failed, please re-confirm the setting following to error message. a. Procedure 1. Set the reception setting. In the [Extension for maintenance] column at the bottom of the page, input the password to change the mode then click the initial setting. Use the password for changing modes.
II SERVICE TOOL
Extension for maintenance page (for customer engineer) The records of sent and received mails listed on mail log on the [Extension for maintenance] page are the latest 10 mails. Even the main power switch is turned OFF, the communication is logged and kept though there are some restrictions.
2-36
E-Mail reception setting page 2. Set the e-mail reception screen based on the following. Enable E-mail notification Interval between fetching mails Select [Yes] to use Mail remote notification system. Default is [No]. Interval between checking mail on receiving mail server from copier. The interval can be set within the range from 1 min. to 60 min. Usually, set around 10 min. considering load for network. Receiving mail server Kind of mail spool User name on the server *1 Password *2 E-Mail Address of this copy machine Nickname *3 CE Password *2 The IP address of receiving mail server. Select [POP3] or [IMAP]. Default is [POP3]. The account name for copier assigned on receiving mail server. The password for the above user name. E-mail address of the copier. Usually, the name is [User name@receiving mail server name]. The name added to the mail subject sent from the copier. It can be blank. Input password used for the "Subject" of the mail sent to the copier. The copier uses this password for security check. Also Notice to the administrator (CC mail) - No - Only illegal mails - All mails Default (Do not send the e-mail to the administrator) Specify whether to transfer mail in following conditions; When the mail received by copier does not match to the registered password or the mail size is 10 k-byte or larger. Transfer all sending mails from Mail remote notification system.
2-37
II SERVICE TOOL
MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM Administrator E-Mail address
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Input address for the transfer if above [Only illegal mail] or [all mails] is selected.
Announce delay time in reply mail *4 Select whether to contain the time difference from CE`s transmission and copier reception on the mail. Default is [No]. Enable POP (IMAP) before SMTP Select whether SMTP server transmits the mail after POP (IMAP) server attests. Default is [Yes]. *1 Consult system administrator and create mail account for copier on receiving mail server. No echo back from the password. Use it as identifier, when managing multiple copiers. Use it to check the copier. is turned ON or not. If the time of the copier or the mail application software is not set correctly (including time difference), wrong time is described. In that case, select [No]. 3. Click "Apply" to finish input. 4. Test mail sending and receiving. Click [Sending and receiving test] button and then sending and receiving tests are performed by one transaction. It checks whether the sent mail is correctly received. Click [Sending and receiving test] to display result of the test. If it is failed, please re-confirm the setting following to error message. Sending mail test Mail sending test is performed to SMTP server. Test mail is sent to [E-Mail Address of the copy machine] set on Step2. Receiving mail test Receiving test from receiving mail server is performed. Test mail is received by [E-Mail Address of the copy machine] set on Step2.
II SERVICE TOOL
*2 *3 *4
5. Turn OFF/ON power switch of copier.
2-38
4.4
How to use the Mail remote notification system
A. Function CE can use following functions of Mail remote notification system by e-mailing simple keyword to copier. CE can receive the data of the desired copier data list by the e-mail. JOB memory list User management list Font pattern list Adjustment data list Parameter list E.K.C. management list Machine management list 2 Counter list Pixel ratio data list In order to use above function, the simple keyword (command) must be sent by e-mail. The following table shows the command and options. Command GETLOG Options [List output] JOB USER FONT MANAGEMENT ADJUSTMENT PARAMETER EKC 2MANAGEMENT COUNTER PIXEL ALL Not specified CHPASS [OldPasswd] [NewPasswd] [OldPasswd] [NewPasswd] HELP Not specified Specify current password Specify new password Help mail explaining usage of the above commands is sent. H Explanation The [List output] specified by the following is returned by mail. [JOB memory list] [User management list] [Font pattern list] [Machine management list 1] [Adjustment data list] [Parameter list] [EKC management list] [Machine management list 2] [Counter list] [Pixel ratio data list] All of above list data. Edited [Counter list] for the cellular phone display. To change the password used to certify mail. C J U F M A P E 2 C PI AL Minimum G Machine management list 1
2-39
II SERVICE TOOL
MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM B. Send mails
The example of the mail containing the command to the copier is shown. The command and option on the mail are recognized by the top letters without distinction between capital and small letters. Accordingly, not all letters of the command must be typed. It is recognized by the minimum letters in the above table *1. When sending mail to the copier, please note followings. Note: Mail software on any OS, handy terminal, free-mail using browser can be used without any difference. When sending mail on mail software, be sure to use text mode. (Mail in HTML mode cannot be handle properly.) As for the reception on mail software, the desirable maximum displayable letters per one line is 128 and over (single-byte). (The length of the one line reaches to 128 letters in the part of the data list mail. Accordingly, mail may not be easily seen on the cellular phone or other mobile devices.) Put minimum one space or TAB*2 between the command and option on the mail. Use only single-byte alphanumeric character (ASCII character) for the command on mail. Otherwise, an error mail, [Command Not Found], is returned. Type command from the beginning of the line. If the line starts with blank or TAB, the line is ignored. Maximum number of commands that can be contained in one mail is 10. The eleventh and onwards commands are ignored. Do not attach file to the mail sent to the copier. Depending on file size, it is handled as illegal mail. Do not attach signature to the mail sent to the copier. If automatic attachment of the signature is already set to the mail software, change the setting not to attach the signature. The signature is regarded as command and error mail may be returned. While copier is sending or receiving the mail, if the power switch of the copier is turned OFF or list output is performed on the copier, two mails may be returned. The maximum number of the mails that copier receives from the mail server is 5 per one time. If the mail server has more received mails at a time, remaining mails are processed after the [interval between fetching mails]. *1 *2 Example: All of G, GE, GET, GETL, GETLO, GETLOG equal to specify GETLOG. Return cannot be used.
II SERVICE TOOL
2-40
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 (1) Send GETLOG command Following should be described in the sending mail. a. Subject: Input "CE password" set in reception setting. To: Input E-mail address of the copier. Body: Input command. Example of mail requesting counter list
Mail address of the copier CE Password Command
2-41
II SERVICE TOOL
MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM b.
Example of mail requesting counter list*1
II SERVICE TOOL
Serial number of copier Mail address of the sender Nickname of the copier
Requested counter list
*1
Language of the returned mail is English only.
2-42
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 c. When option is not specified
GETLOG command without option is specified, Counter list for the cellular phone display is returned. Sending mail [GetLog] Example of returned mail
2-43
II SERVICE TOOL
MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM d. To receive multiple data list
Data lists in reply to GETLOG command are separately returned by mails; one list per mail. If the same list is requested twice or more in a mail, the list is returned only once. When followings are described in a mail, both counter list mail and machine management list 1 mail are returned. [GetLog Counter] [GetLog Management] When the commands are written in one line continuously, Management (the later command) is
II SERVICE TOOL
ignored and only counter list (the first command) is returned. [GetLog Counter Management] e. When unrecognizable option is specified. Sending mail [GetLog Log] Returned mail [Option Not Found GetLog Log] (2) Send CHPASS command The sending mail password described on the subject can be changed remotely. Specify 20 or less letters to [OldPasswd] and [NewPasswd]. Use ASCII characters except space. Password cannot be changed by mail if you don't remember the old password. Change the [CE password] from the browser, explained in Chapter 2. a. Example of correct password change In this case, old password [U-BIX] is changed to new password [Sitios]. Sending mail [ChPass U-BIX Sitios] Returned mail [SE's Password was changed successfully. New Password [Sitios]] When the password is changed, use [NewPasswd] from the next mail. When the mail is sent with [OldPasswd], it is treated as illegal mail.
2-44
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 b. Example of invalid password change Old password [U-BIX] is changed to new password [Sitios]. Sending mail [ChPass Sitios U-BIX] Returned mail [Old Password is Invalid. ChPass Sitios U-BIX]
Then, password was not changed. Accordingly, the password is unchanged and [U-BIX]. Sending mail [ChPass Sitios] Returned mail [Violation on format by new password. ChPass Sitios] When the new password is blank, password is not changed.
2-45
II SERVICE TOOL
MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM (3) Send HELP command
The manual describing above usage of the commands is returned by mail. Use this function when you forget how to use command and option. Sending mail [Help] Returned mail
II SERVICE TOOL
2-46
4.5
Disabling system
In order to disable Mail remote notification system, in Mail reception setting, select [No] for the "Enable E-Mail notification" and then click [Apply] button.
2-47
II SERVICE TOOL
II SERVICE TOOL
Blank page
2-48
SERVICE SCHEDULE
III SERVICE
1. SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.1
G
Service item 0 Main body Maintenance Every 100,000 copies Periodic check (1) Every 200,000 copies Periodic check (2) Every 400,000 copies Periodic check (3) Every 600,000 copies Periodic check (4) Every 1,000,000 copies Periodic check (5) Every 1,500,000 copies Periodic check (6) Every 2,000,000 copies Periodic check (7) Every 2,500,000 copies Periodic check (8) Every 4,000,000 copies DF-319/ Maintenance AFR-20 *1 Every 100,000 copies Periodic check (1) *1 Every 1,800,000 copies x 10,000 copies 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Service 90 100 150 180 200 250 300 350 360 400 450 500 count
Service schedule
49 times 24 times 12 times 8 times 4 times 3 times 2 times 1 time 1 time 49 times 2 times
*1
Perform the periodic check (1) for the DF-319/AFR-20 at 2 times (18,000,000 copies and 36,000,000 copies).
3-1
III SERVICE
SERVICE SCHEDULE
Service item 0 LT-211/ Maintenance C-208 Every 100,000 copies Periodic check (1) Every 600,000 copies Periodic check (2) Every 2,500,000 copies FS Maintenance Every 100,000 copies Periodic check (1) Every 200,000 copies Periodic check (2) Every 400,000 copies

Service x 10,000 copies 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 150 180 200 250 300 350 360 400 450 500 count
49 times 8 times 1 time 49 times 24 times 12 times 4 times 1 time 49 times 9 times 4 times 1 time 49 times 49 times 1 time
III SERVICE
Periodic check (3) Every 1,000,000 copies Periodic check (4) Every 2,500,000 copies PI-110 Maintenance Every 100,000 copies Periodic check (1) Every 500,000 copies Periodic check (2) Every 1,000,000 copies Periodic check (3) Every 3,000,000 copies PK-120/ Maintenance 5/507 Every 100,000 copies TU-109/ Maintenance TMG-3 Every 100,000 copies Periodic check (1) Every 4,000,000 copies
3-2
SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.2
Maintenance items
A. Main body (Every 100,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 2 Service item Quantity Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement Preparations (1) Image check Drum (1) Drum cartridge (2) Drum unit cleaning 4 *3 Hydro wipe (cleaning pad is not available) 4 Blower brush 1 4 ( ) *3 Hydro wipe (cleaning pad is not available) 1 1 Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Materials Tools used
Charging corona
(1) Charging wire assy /Y, /M, /C, /K (2) Changing grid plate / Y, /M, /C, /K (3) Charging corona dustproof filter
Developer
(1) Developer (Y, M, C, K) (2) Developer unit cleaning
ADU
(1) Separation corona unit (2) Paper feed roller /BP (3) Feed roller /BP (4) Double feed prevention roller /BP (5) Registration roller cleaning (6) Conveyance roller section cleaning (7) ADU paper through sensor cleaning
Blower brush 1 2 1 1 1 Multemp FF-RM (or Solvest 240)*3 Multemp FF-RM (or Solvest 240)*3 Roller cleaner 1 *1
Exterior
(1) Ozone filter /1 (2) Dust proof filter /1 (3) Dust proof filter /2
Fixing
(1) Fixing roller /U *2 (2) Fixing roller /L *2 (3) Cleaning roller
9 *1 *2 *3
Reverse/ exit
(1) Decurler roller 25 mode count reset
Reset "5. Parts counter" and "1. Count of special parts" in the 25 mode to prevent the fixing jam when replacing the decurler roller. When replacing the fixing roller /U or /L, be sure to apply Multemp FF-RM on the heat insulating sleeve /U or /L, respectively. Be sure to conduct the adjustment properly according to the adjustment items given in "LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS FOR 8050."
3-3
III SERVICE
Transfer belt
(1) Belt cleaning blade
*3
SERVICE SCHEDULE No. Classification Service item
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Quantity Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement Materials Tools used Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner
10 Paper feed (1) Paper feed roller /1, /2, /3 (2) Feed roller /1, /2, /3 (3) Double feed prevention roller /1, /2, /3 11 Vertical conveyance 12 Scanner 13 Write unit 14 Toner supply 15 Toner collection (1) Conveyance roller, sensor (1) Original glass, exposure lamp, reflector, lens, mirror, sensor (1) Dust-proof glass (Y, M, C, K) (1) Toner supply unit cleaning (1) Toner collection box replacing/cleaning (2) Exterior cleaning (3) Image and paper through check (4) PM counter resetting (25 mode) ( )
Cleaning pad/drum cleaner/blower brush Hydro wipe/drum cleaner/blower brush Hydro wipe Hydro wipe Cleaning pad
16 Final check (1) W.U.T. check Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner
III SERVICE
B. DF-319/AFR-20 (Every 100,000 copies/prints) No. Classification Service item Quantity Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement Preparations (1) Paper through check 1 Paper feed (1) Paper feed roller (2) Feed roller (3) Double feed prevention roller (4) Pre-separation rubber (5) Rubber roller (6) Reflective sensor (7) Conveyance belt 2 3 Exterior (1) Exterior cleaning Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Blower brush Blower brush Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Materials Tools used
Final check (1) Paper through check
3-4
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 C. LT-211/C-208 (Every 100,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 2 Service item Quantity
SERVICE SCHEDULE
Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement
Materials Tools used
Preparations (1) Paper through check Paper feed (1)Paper feed roller (2) Feed roller (3) Double feed prevention roller (4) Paper dust removing (5) Sensor (6) Gear ( ) Blower brush Plus guard No.2 *1 Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner
3 4
Exterior
(1) Exterior cleaning
D. FS-115/FN-120/FS-513 (Every 100,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 2 3 Service item Quantity Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement Preparations (1) Paper through check Conveyance (1) Conveyance roller Drive (1) Main drive unit (2) Tray up/down drive unit (3) Shift drive unit (4) Paper exit drive section (5) Staple unit 4 5 6 *1 Stapler Exterior (1) Staple check (1) Exterior cleaning ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Plus guard No.2 *1 Plus guard No.2 *1 Plus guard No.2 *1 Plus guard No.2 *1 Plus guard No.2 *1 Actual durable count: 5,000 Materials Tools used
Final check (1) Paper through check If abnormal sound is heard due to insufficient oil, lubricate it.
3-5
III SERVICE
SERVICE SCHEDULE
E. FS-215/FN-9/FS-606 (Every 100,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 2 3 Service item Quantity Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement Preparations (1) Paper through check Conveyance (1) Conveyance roller Drive (1) Main drive unit (2) Tray up/down drive unit (3) Shift drive unit (4) Paper exit drive section (5) Staple unit (6) Folding unit 4 5 6 7 Folding Stapler Exterior (1) Folding roller (1) Staple check (1) Exterior cleaning Stapler positioning jig Actual durable count: 5,000 ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Plus guard No.2 *1 Plus guard No.2 *1 Plus guard No.2 *1 Plus guard No.2 *1 Plus guard No.2 *1 Materials Tools used
Final check (1) Paper through check If abnormal sound is heard due to insufficient oil, lubricate it.
III SERVICE
*1
F.
PI-110 (Every 100,000 copies/prints) Service item Quantity Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement Materials Tools used Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner
No. Classification 1 2
Conveyance (1) Conveyance roller Paper feed (1) Feed roller (2) Paper feed conveyance roller (3) Double feed prevention roller
Final check (1) Paper through check (2) Exterior cleaning
3-6
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 G. PK-120/5/507 (Every 100,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 2 3 Service item Quantity
SERVICE SCHEDULE
Materials Tools used Blower brush Blower brush Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner
Punch unit (1) Punch die Punch scraps section (1) Punch scraps dump (2) Punch scraps full sensor (2) Interior cleaning
H. TU-109/TMG-3 (Every 100,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 Service item Quantity Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement Conveyance (1) Conveyance roller (2) Conveyance belt 2 Trimmer (1) Trimmer blade /U (2) Trimmer blade /L (3) Trimming box and its periphery 3 4 5 Stacker Drive (1) Pusher section (2) Stacker section (1) Conveyance drive section (2) Exterior cleaning *1 If abnormal sound is heard due to insufficient oil, lubricate it. Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner ( ) ( ) Plus guard No.2 *1 Plus guard No.2 *1 Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Materials Tools used Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner
3-7
III SERVICE
SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.3
Periodic check items (main body)
A. Periodic check (I) (Every 200,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 Charging corona Service item (1) Changing grid plate 65AA2507* (2) Changing grid spring 65AA2509* 2 Transfer belt (1) 1st transfer roller /K 65AA2604* 25 mode count reset (2) 1st transfer roller /C 65AA2612* 25 mode count reset (3) 2nd transfer roller /U 65AA2611* (4) Belt drive roller cleaning (5) Transfer belt 65AA2642* (6) Toner collection sheet /1 65AA-293* 3 4 2nd transfer (1) 2nd transfer roller /L 65AA4501* Fixing (1) Fixing cleaning unit 65AA-573* 25 mode count reset (2) Paper exit roller /Up (New type only) 65LA5343* 5 Paper exit (1) Paper exit roller (New type only) 65LA4808* (2) Paper exit guide roller /2 65AA4818* (3) Paper presser roller 65AA4849* *1 *2 1 1 1 *2 1 Quantity Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement 4 8 *1 1 1 3 1 Hydro wipe/ drum cleaner Materials Tools used
III SERVICE
1 4 2 *3 *4
Reset "5. Parts counter" and "1. Count of special parts" to prevent a image disturbances in the 25 mode when replacing the 1st transfer roller /Y/M/C/K. Reset "5. Parts counter" and "1. Count of special parts" in the 25 mod when replacing the fixing cleaning unit. Otherwise, the message "You need to replace the fixing cleaning unit. Please call the service." appears and the copy/print prohibition state is started.
3-8
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 3
SERVICE SCHEDULE
For the old types, the paper exit guide roller /2 is replaced only for machines provided with a kit against uneven wax. For identification of a measure against uneven wax, see the table below. Identification method Identification by means of the S/N Details Those on and after the following S/N are machines provided with a measure against uneven wax. Main body: 65AE01429 65AF00476 65AN00169 65AP00005 65AK00016 65BE01391 65BF01416 FS-115: FS-215: Proposed kit 20AK01550 20BK00236 20AL01551 20BL00320 Machines provided with the following proposed kits against uneven wax in the field. FS-115/215: SE95-4290
*4
Since machines connected to the finisher are not provided with the paper presser roller, this is excluded from the periodically replaced parts.
B. Periodic check (II) (Every 400,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 Service item Quantity Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement Paper feed (1) Feed rubber (tray/1, /2, /3) 25SA4096* (2) Double feed prevention rubber (tray/1, /2, /3) 25SA4096* 3 3 Materials Tools used Actual durable count: 125,000 Actual durable count: 125,000
3-9
III SERVICE
Main body:
SE95-4280
SERVICE SCHEDULE
C. Periodic check (III) (Every 600,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 Charging corona Developer Service item (1) Charging corona dustproof filter 65AA-387* (1) Developing unit /Y, /M, /C, /K 65AA-972* (1) Transfer belt separation claw 65AA-287* (2) Belt cleaning roller unit 65LA-288* 4 Registration (1) Registration cleaning sheet 65AA-462* Fixing (1) Ball bearing /U 45407504* (2) Ball bearing /L 26NA5371* (3) Heat insulating sleeve /U 45405339* (4) Heat insulating sleeve /L 65AA5341* (5) Fixing torque limiter 65AA5365* Quantity Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement 1 Materials Tools used
Transfer belt
3 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 Multemp FF-RM (or Solvest 240) Multemp FF-RM (or Solvest 240)
III SERVICE
D. Periodic check (IV) (Every 1,000,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 2 3 Fixing Service item (1) Fixing drive gear 65AA7727* Quantity Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement 1 1 *1 1 Materials Tools used Multemp FF-RM (or Solvest 240)
2nd transfer (1) Transfer ground plate unit 65AA-456* Paper exit (1) Paper exit roller (Old type only) 65AA4808*
*1
For the old type, the paper exit roller is replaced only when the proposed kit against uneven wax is installed.
3-10
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 E. Periodic check (V) (Every 1,500,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 2 3 Service item Quantity
SERVICE SCHEDULE
Materials Tools used
Registration (1) Registration roller 65AA4601* Transfer belt ADU (1) Separation claw solenoid 26NA8251* (1) Feed rubber /BP 25SA4096* (2) Double feed prevention rubber /BP 25SA4096*
1 1 1 1 Actual durable count: 125,000 Actual durable count: 125,000
F.
Periodic check (VI) (Every 2,000,000 copies/prints) Service item Quantity Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement Materials Tools used Actual durable count: 2,000,000 Actual durable count: 2,000,000 Actual durable count: 2,000,000
No. Classification 1
Vertical (1) Intermediate conveyance conveyance clutch /1 56AA8201* ADU (1) Intermediate conveyance clutch /2 56AA8201* (2) Intermediate conveyance clutch /3 56AA8201*
G. Periodic check (VII) (Every 2,500,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 Fixing Service item (1) Fixing upper lamp /1 65AF8303* (2) Fixing upper lamp /2 65AF8304* (3) Fixing lower lamp 65AF8305* (4) Fixing temperature sensor /3 65AA-553* (5) Fixing temperature sensor /4 65AA-554* 2 Paper feed (1) Paper feed roller (tray/1, /2, /3) 56AA-458* Quantity Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement 1 1 1 1 Materials Tools used
1 Actual durable count: 800,000
3-11
III SERVICE
SERVICE SCHEDULE
H. Periodic check (VIII) (Every 4,000,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 Service item Quantity Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement Paper feed (1) Paper feed clutch (tray/1, /2, /3) 56AA8201* (2) Pre-registration clutch (tray/1, /2, /3) 56AA8201* 2 ADU (1) ADU conveyance clutch /1 56AA8201* (2) ADU conveyance clutch /2 56AA8201* (3) ADU pre-registration clutch 56AA8201* (4) Paper feed roller /BP 65AA-520* 3 Materials Tools used Actual durable count: 2,000,000 Actual durable count: 2,000,000 Actual durable count: 2,000,000 Actual durable count: 2,000,000 Actual durable count: 2,000,000 Actual durable count: 800,000 Actual durable count: 2,000,000
1 1 1 1
III SERVICE
(5) Paper feed clutch /BP 56AA8201*
1.4
Periodic check items (DF-319/AFR-20)
A. Periodic check (I) (Every 1,800,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 Service item Quantity Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement Paper feed (1) Paper feed roller 13YH4064* (2) Feed roller 13YH4039* (3) Double feed prevention roller 20AJ4015* 1 1 1 Materials Tools used Actual durable count: 625,000 Actual durable count: 625,000 Actual durable count: 625,000
1.5
Periodic check items (LT-211/C-208)
A. Periodic check (I) (Every 600,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 Service item Quantity Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement Paper feed (1) Paper feed roller 55VA-484* (2) Feed roller 55VA-483* (3) Double feed prevention roller 55VA-483* 1 1 1 Materials Tools used Actual durable count: 500,000 Actual durable count: 500,000 Actual durable count: 500,000
3-12
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 B. Periodic check (II) (Every 2,500,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 Service item Quantity
SERVICE SCHEDULE
Materials Tools used Actual durable count: 2,000,000 Actual durable count: 2,000,000
Paper feed (1) Paper feed clutch 56AA8201* (2) Pre-registration clutch 56AA8201*
1 1
1.6
Periodic check items (FS-115/215/FN-120/9/FS-513/606)
A. Periodic check (I) (Every 200,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 Service item Quantity Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement Conveyance (1) Paper exit roller /A (sponge roller) 122H4825* (2) Intermediate conveyance roller /4 (sponge roller) 13QE4531* 10 Materials Tools used Actual durable count: 200,000 Actual durable count: 200,000
B. Periodic check (II) (Every 400,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 Service item Quantity Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement Conveyance (1) Stack assist roller (sponge roller) 20AK4210* 1 Materials Tools used
C. Periodic check (III) (Every 1,000,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 Stapler Service item (1) Stapler unit 20AK4241* Quantity Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement 2 Materials Tools used Stapler positioning jig Actual durable count: 200,000
D. Periodic check (IV) (Every 2,500,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 Drive Service item (1) FNS up/down motor 13QE-115* Quantity Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement 1 Materials Tools used Actual durable count: 2,500,000
3-13
III SERVICE
SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.7
Periodic check items (PI-110)
A. Periodic check (I) (Every 500,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 Service item Quantity Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement Paper feed (1) Feed roller assembly /B 50BA-575* (2) Double feed prevention roller assembly 13QN-443* 2 2 Materials Tools used Actual durable count: 100,000 Actual durable count: 100,000
B. Periodic check (II) (Every 1,000,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 Service item Quantity Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement Paper feed (1) Feed roller assembly /A 50BA-574* 2 Materials Tools used Actual durable count: 200,000
C. Periodic check (III) (Every 3,000,000 copies/prints)0
III SERVICE
No. Classification 1
Service item
Quantity
Materials Tools used Actual durable count: 600,000
Paper feed (1) Torque limiter 13QN4073*
1.8
Periodic check items (TU-109/TMG-3)
A. Periodic check (I) (Every 4,000,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 Trimmer Service item (1) Trimmer blade /U 13LHK001* (2) Trimmer blade /L 13LHK002* Quantity Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement 1 1 Materials Tools used Actual durable count: 500,000 Actual durable count: 500,000
3-14
SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.9
Note:
Replacement parts list
No. in this list is identical with No. in "5. Parts counter" and "1. Count of special parts" in the 25 mode.
No.
Unit
Parts name Toner collection box Ozone filter /1 Dust proof filter /1 Dust proof filter /2 Charging corona dust-proof filter Drum cartridge /Y Drum cartridge /M Drum cartridge /C Drum cartridge /K Charging wire assy /Y Charging grid plate /Y Charging wire assy /M Charging grid plate /M Charging wire assy /C Charging grid plate /C Charging wire assy /K Charging grid plate /K Charging grid spring Transfer belt 1st transfer roller /Y 1st transfer roller /M 1st transfer roller /C 1st transfer roller /K 2nd transfer roller /U Transfer belt separation claw Belt cleaning roller unit Toner collection sheet /1 Belt cleaning blade 2nd transfer roller /L Separation Discharging board unit Fixing cleaning unit Fixing roller /U Fixing roller /L
Parts No. 65AA-245* 65AA1043* 65AA1044* 65AA-142* 65AA-387* 65AA-200* 65AA-200* 65AA-200* 65AA-200* 65AA-252* 65AA2507* 65AA-252* 65AA2507* 65AA-252* 65AA2507* 65AA-252* 65AA2507* 65AA2509* 65AA2642* 65AA2612* 65AA2612* 65AA2612* 65AA2604* 65AA2611* 65AA-287* 65LA-288* 65AA-293* 65AA2630* 65AA4501* 65AA-452* 65AA-573* 65AA5301* 65AA5302*
Quantity Actual durable count 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 50,000 100,000 100,000 100,000 600,000 100,000 100,000 100,000 100,000 100,000 200,000 100,000 200,000 100,000 200,000 100,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 600,000 600,000 200,000 100,000 200,000 100,000 200,000 100,000 100,000
001 Toner collection 002 Main body 004 005 006 Charging corona 007 Drum 012 017 022 028 Charging corona 029 031 032 034 034 037 038 040 Transfer belt 041 042 043 044 045 046 048 049 050 051 2nd transfer 052 ADU 053 Fixing 054 055
3-15
III SERVICE
SERVICE SCHEDULE No. Unit
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Parts name Developer /Y Parts No. New type: 65LA (/LK/LQ) 3079* Old type: 65AA3079* Quantity Actual durable count 1 100,000
056 Developing
057
Developer /M
New type: 65LA (/LK/LQ) 3080* Old type: 65AA3080*
100,000
058
Developer /C
100,000
059
Developer /K
100,000
III SERVICE
060 061 062 063 069 FS 070 071 108 109 110 078 PI-110 079 080 081 083 084 085 086 087 TU-109/TMG-3 087 092 DF-319/AFR-20 093 095 113 Registration
Developing unit /Y (color label included) Developing unit /M (color label included) Developing unit /C (color label included) Developing unit /K (color label included) FNS up/down motor Stapler unit Stapler unit Staple Paper exit roller /A (sponge roller) Intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller) Stacking assist roller (sponge roller) Feed roller assembly /A Feed roller assembly /B Double feed prevention roller assembly Torque limiter Feed roller assembly /A Feed roller assembly /B Double feed prevention roller assembly Torque limiter Trimmer blade /U Trimmer blade /L Paper feed roller Feed roller Double feed prevention roller Registration cleaning sheet
65AA-972* 65AA-972* 65AA-972* 65AA-972* 13QE-115* 20AK4241* 20AK4241* 12QRK001* 122H4825* 13QE4531* 20AK4210* 50BA-574* 50BA-575* 13QN-443* 13QN4073* 50BA-574* 50BA-575* 13QN-443* 13QN4073* 13LHK001* 13LHK002* 13YH4064* 13YH4039* 20AJ4015* 65AA-462*
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 10 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
600,000 600,000 600,000 600,000 2,500,000 200,000 200,000 5000 200,000 200,000 400,000 200,000 100,000 100,000 600,000 200,000 100,000 100,000 600,000 500,000 500,000 625,000 625,000 625,000 600,000
3-16
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 No. Unit Parts name Fixing torque limiter Ball bearing /U (for upper roller) Heat insulating sleeve /U (for upper roller) 116 Vertical conveyance 117 ADU 118 119 Main body paper feed 119 120 120 121 121 122 122 130 131 132 133 123 Registration 124 Transfer belt 125 Fixing 126 127 128 129 134 ADU 135 136 137 Fixing 138 139 140 Reverse/exit unit 141 LT-211/C-208 142 143 144 Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 Intermediate conveyance clutch /2 Intermediate conveyance clutch /3 Paper feed rubber /1 Double feed prevention rubber /1 Paper feed rubber /2 Double feed prevention rubber /2 Paper feed rubber /3 Double feed prevention rubber /3 Paper feed rubber /BP Double feed prevention rubber /BP Paper feed roller /1 Paper feed roller /2 Paper feed roller /3 Paper feed roller (Bypass) Registration roller Separation claw solenoid Fixing upper lamp /1 Fixing upper lamp /2 Fixing lower lamp Fixing temperature sensor /3 Fixing temperature sensor /4 ADU conveyance clutch /1 ADU conveyance clutch /2 ADU pre-registration clutch Ball bearing /L (for lower roller) Heat insulating sleeve/L (for lower roller) Fixing drive gear Decurler roller Paper feed roller Feed roller Double feed prevention roller Paper feed clutch Pre-registration clutch 65AA7727* 65AA4905* 55VA-484* 55VA-483* 55VA-483* 56AA8201* 56AA8201* 56AA8201* 56AA8201* 56AA8201* 25SA4096* 25SA4096* 25SA4096* 25SA4096* 25SA4096* 25SA4096* 25SA4096* 25SA4096* 56AA-458* 56AA-458* 56AA-458* 65AA-520* 65AA4601* 26NA8251* 65AF8303* 65AF8304* 65AF8305* 65AA-553* 65AA-554* 56AA8201* 56AA8201* 56AA8201* 26NA5371* 65AA5341* Parts No. 65AA5365* 45407504* 45405339*
SERVICE SCHEDULE Quantity Actual durable count 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 600,000 600,000 600,000 2,000,000 2,000,000 2,000,000 125,000 125,000 125,000 125,000 125,000 125,000 125,000 125,000 800,000 800,000 800,000 1,500,000 1,500,000 2,500,000 2,500,000 2,500,000 2,500,000 2,500,000 2,000,000 2,000,000 2,000,000 600,000 600,000 1,000,000 100,000 500,000 500,000 500,000 2,000,000 2,000,000 800,000
112 Fixing unit 114 115
3-17
III SERVICE
SERVICE SCHEDULE No. Unit
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Parts name Paper feed clutch /1 Pre-registration clutch /1 Paper feed clutch /2 Pre-registration clutch /2 Paper feed clutch /3 Pre-registration clutch /3 Paper feed clutch /BP Transfer ground plate unit Paper exit guide roller /2 Paper exit roller Paper exit roller /Up Parts No. 56AA8201* 56AA8201* 56AA8201* 56AA8201* 56AA8201* 56AA8201* 56AA8201* 65AA-456* 65AA4818* 65LA4808* 65LA5343* Quantity Actual durable count 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 2 2,000,000 2,000,000 2,000,000 2,000,000 2,000,000 2,000,000 2,000,000 1,000,000 200,000 200,000 200,000
145 Main body paper feed 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 2nd transfer 153 Paper exit 154 (New type only) 155
Note: For the old type, the parts listed below are not registered in [1. Count of special parts] of the 25 mode [5. Parts counter.] Therefore, be sure to register these parts in [2. Count of each parts] (See "6.7.2 Count of each parts") for proper management.
III SERVICE
No.
Unit
Parts name Paper exit guide roller/2 Paper exit roller
Parts No. 65AA4818* 65AA4808*
Quantity Actual durable count 4 1 200,000 1,000,000
Paper exit
Note: When installed with no finisher, the parts listed below are not registered in [1. Count of special parts] of the 25 mode [5. Parts counter.] Therefore, be sure to register these parts in [2. Count of each parts] (See "6.7.2 Count of each parts") for proper management.
No.
Unit
Parts name Paper presser roller
Parts No. 65AA4849*
Quantity Actual durable count 2 200,000
Paper exit
3-18
SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.10 Important maintenance parts

The important parts specified by Konica Minolta in order to maintain safety of the products are referred to as "important maintenance parts". The important maintenance parts for this machine are as described below: No. 1 2 Unit Fixing unit Fixing unit Parts name Parts No. Quantity 1 1
Thermostat /1 SP00-0030 Thermostat /L SP00-0180
Note: "SP" is indicated in front of the parts number of the important maintenance part. Exercise care when installing the parts according to "III. Directions for disassembly and assembly" in this manual.
3-19
III SERVICE
COPY MATERIAL
2. COPY MATERIAL
2.1 Product
A. Drum cartridge
2.2
Materials
A. Single unit supply Drum Toner black Toner yellow Toner magenta Toner cyan DR501 (New type/Old type) TN510K (New type) /TN501K (Old type) TN510Y (New type) /TN501Y (Old type) TN510M (New type) /TN501M (Old type) TN510C (New type) /TN501C (Old type)
B. Kit a Developer black set DV510K (New type) /DV501K (Old type)
III SERVICE
Developer black Developer charging funnel/U Developer collection sheet (rubber band)
Developer yellow set DV510Y (New type) /DV501Y (Old type)
Developer yellow Developer charging funnel/U Developer collection sheet (rubber band)
Developer magenta set DV510M (New type) /DV501M (Old type)
Developer magenta Developer charging funnel/U Developer collection sheet (rubber band)
Developer cyan set DV510C (New type) /DV501C (Old type)
Developer cyan Developer charging funnel/U Developer collection sheet (rubber band)
3-20
COPY MATERIAL
2.3
PM parts kit
A. 100,000 copies/1 set <For old type> Name Ozone filter /1 Dust proof filter /1 Dust proof filter /2 Belt cleaning blade Separation corona unit Fixing roller /U Fixing roller /L Decurler roller Charging wire assy Paper for fixing speed adjustment (16 sheets/A3) Dust bag (rubber band) Hand case for collection Cotton swab (x4) Hydro wipe (x10) Part No. USA 65AA1043* 65AA1044* 65AA-142* 65AA2630* 65AA-452* 65AA5301* 65AA5302* 65AA4905* 65AA-252* 65AA-991* 000V-3070* 000V-3080* 000V-3090* 65AA-992* 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 Quantity Europe/Other 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 1
<For new type> Name Toner collection box Ozone filter /1 Dust proof filter /1 Dust proof filter /2 Belt cleaning blade Separation corona unit Fixing roller /U Fixing roller /L Decurler roller Charging wire assy Paper for fixing speed adjustment (16 sheets/A3) Dust bag (rubber band) Hand case for collection Cotton swab (x4) Hydro wipe (x10) Part No. USA 65AA-245* 65AA1043* 65AA1044* 65AA-142* 65AA2630* 65AA-452* 65AA5301* 65AA5302* 65AA4905* 65AA-252* 65AA-991* 000V-3070* 000V-3080* 000V-3090* 65AA-992* 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 Quantity Europe/Other 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1
3-21
III SERVICE
COPY MATERIAL B. 200,000 copies/1set (total) <For old type> Name Transfer belt 1st transfer roller /K 1st transfer roller /Y, /M, /C Toner collection sheet /1 2nd transfer roller /U 2nd transfer roller /L Fixing cleaning unit Changing grid plate Changing grid spring
Part No. USA 65AA2642* 65AA2604* 65AA2612* 65AA-293* 65AA2611* 65AA4501* 65AA-573* 65AA2507* 65AA2509* 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 4 8
Quantity Europe/Other 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 4 8
<For new type> Name Transfer belt 1st transfer roller /K 1st transfer roller /Y, /M, /C Toner collection sheet /1 2nd transfer roller /U 2nd transfer roller /L Fixing cleaning unit Changing grid plate Changing grid spring Paper exit guide roller /2 Paper exit roller Paper exit roller /U Part No. USA 65AA2642* 65AA2604* 65AA2612* 65AA-293* 65AA2611* 65AA4501* 65AA-573* 65AA2507* 65AA2509* 65AA4818* 65LA4808* 65LA5343* 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 4 8 4 1 2 Quantity Europe/Other 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 4 8 4 1 2
III SERVICE
3-22
SERVICE MATERIAL LIST
3. SERVICE MATERIAL LIST

Material No. 000V-16-0 Name Drum cleaner Shape Remark 200ml
000V-17-0
Roller cleaner
200ml
000V-19-0
Setting powder
25g
000V-18-1
Cleaning pad
10pcs/1pack
65AA-9920
Hydro wipe
10pcs/1pack
00GR00260
Multemp grease FF-RM
25g
00GR00210
Solvest 240
Multemp FF-RM is recommended
00GR00020
Plasguard No.2
3-23
III SERVICE
CE TOOLS LIST
4. CE TOOLS LIST
Tool No. 65AAJG021 Name Fixing thermostat positioning jig (for upper roller) 65AAJG031 Fixing thermostat positioning jig (for lower roller) 7050K0020 Mirror positioning jig 2 1 Shape Quantity 1 Remark
00M6-2-00
Door switch jig
25TU00480
Color chart (metric)
III SERVICE
111T96110
Color chart (inch)
00VD-5000
New Pyramid chart
120A9711*
Adjustment chart
00VC-2-00
Drum cover
00VD-1000
Blower brush
00VE-1004
Tester
129XJG011
Stapler positioning jig
For old type cartridge
13QEJG010
Stapler positioning jig
For new type cartridge
3-24
JAM CODE LIST
IV JAM CODE LIST

1. JAM CODE LIST
Classification Bypass feed Jam code During operation J10-01 Causes After the pickup solenoid /BP (SD5) is turned ON, bypass feed feeder sensor (PS26) is not turned ON within the specified time. After no paper sensor /BP (PS47) is turned ON, tray up drive motor /BP (M35) is not turned ON within specified time. J10-03 After the tray up drive motor /BP (M35) is turned ON, tray upper limit sensor / BP (PS25) is not turned ON within specified time. During operation When idling J10-11 Bypass feed conveyance sensor (PS26) was turned ON in the idling condition. After the pick-up solenoid /1 (SD7) is turned ON, pre-registration sensor /1 (PS29) is not turned ON within the specified time. If copy is progressing when jam arises, main body stops after completion of paper exit. During operation When idling J11-11 Pre-registration sensor /1 (PS29) was turned ON in the idling condition. Remove the paper from the bypass feed tray once and remove jammed paper, if any. Pull out the paper feed jammed paper, if any. tray /1 and remove Resulting operation If copy is progressing when jam arises, main body stops after completion of paper exit. Correction Remove the paper from the bypass feed tray once and remove jammed paper, if any. Remove paper from the bypass feed tray once, decrease the stacked sheets and set again.
J10-02
Paper feed tray /2
J12-01
After pick-up solenoid /2 (SD8) is turned ON, pre-registration sensor /2 (PS35) is not turned ON within specified time.
If copy is progressing when jam arises, main body stops after completion of paper exit.
Pull out the paper feed tray /2 and remove jammed paper, if any.
When idling
J12-11
Pre-registration sensor /2 (PS35) was turned ON in the idling condition.
4-1
IV JAM CODE LIST
Paper feed tray /1
J11-01
JAM CODE LIST Classification Paper feed tray /3 Jam code During operation J13-01 Causes
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Resulting operation If copy is progressing when jam arises, main body stops after completion of paper exit. Pre-registration sensor /3 (PS41) was turned ON in the idling condition. Correction Pull out the paper feed tray /3 and remove jammed paper, if any.
After the pick-up solenoid /3 (SD9) is turned ON, pre-registration sensor /3 (PS41) is not turned ON.
LT-211 C-208
J14-01
During operation When idling
J13-11
After the paper feed solenoid (SD100) is turned ON, paper feed sensor (PS107) is not turned ON within specified time.
Open the LCT top cover and remove jammed paper, if any.
When idling
J14-11
Feed sensor (PS106) was turned ON in the idling condition.
During operation
Paper feed
J17-01
After the loop roller motor (M31) is turned ON, registration sensor (PS22) is not turned ON within specified time.
Pull out ADU and remove jammed paper, if any.
IV JAM CODE LIST
J17-02
After the ADU pre-registration clutch (MC3) is turned ON, registration sensor (PS22) is not turned ON within the specified time.
Printer section stops immediately. If copy is progressing when jam arises, main body stops after completion of paper exit. Open the vertical conveyance door and remove jammed paper, if any. Pull out the paper feed tray /2 and remove jammed paper, if any.
J17-03
After the pre-registration clutch /3 (MC12) is turned ON, vertical conveyance sensor (PS50) is not turned ON within specified time.
J17-04
After the pre-registration clutch /2 (MC10) is turned ON, vertical conveyance sensor (PS50) is not turned ON within specified time.
4-2
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Classification Paper feed Jam code During operation J17-05 Causes After the intermediate conveyance clutch /1 (MC13) is turned ON, intermediate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27) is After the pre-registration clutch /1 (MC7) is turned ON, intermediate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27) is not turned ON within the specified time. J17-07 After the pre-registration clutch (MC102) is turned ON, intermediate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27) is not turned ON within the specified time. J17-08 After the intermediate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27) is turned ON, intermediate conveyance sensor /2 (PS28) is not turned ON within specified time. J17-09 After the bypass feed conveyance sensor (PS26) is turned ON, the intermediate conveyance sensor /2 (PS28) is not turned ON within the specified time. LT-211 C-208 J17-10 After the pre-registration clutch (MC102) is turned ON, paper feed sensor (PS107) is not turned ON within the specified time. When idling Paper feed J17-11 Vertical conveyance sensor (PS50) was turned ON in the idling condition. Resulting operation If copy is progressing when jam arises, main completion of paper exit.
JAM CODE LIST Correction Open the vertical conveyance door and remove jammed paper, if any.
not turned ON within the specified time. body stops after
J17-06
Open the LCT front door and remove jammed paper, if any. Pull out ADU and remove jammed paper, if any. Remove paper from the bypass feed tray and remove jammed paper, if any. Open the LCT top cover and remove jammed paper, if any. Open the vertical conveyance door and remove jammed paper, if any.
J17-12
Intermediate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27) was turned ON in the idling condition.
J17-13
Intermediate conveyance sensor /2 (PS28) was turned ON in the idling condition.
J17-14 LT-211 C-208 J17-15
Registration sensor (OS22) was turned in the idling condition. Paper feed sensor (PS107) was turned ON in the idling condition. Open the LCT front door and remove jammed paper, if any.
4-3
IV JAM CODE LIST
JAM CODE LIST Classification Others Jam code During operation J19-01 Causes
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Resulting operation If copy is progressing when jam arises, main body stops after completion of paper exit. LCT top cover open jam or LCT front door open jam. Top cover open/close sensor (PS100) or front door open/ close sensor (PS115) was turned OFF when copying/printing. In case of LCT paper feed, main body stops after completion of paper exit. In case of paper feed other than LCT, main body does not stop. Close the LCT top cover or LCT front door. Correction Close the vertical conveyance door.
Vertical conveyance door open jam. Vertical conveyance door sensor (PS51) was turned OFF when copying / printing.
Others LT-211 C-208
J19-02
Paper exit
J31-02
After the registration roller motor (M30) is turned ON, fixing paper exit sensor (PS17) is not turned ON.
Printer section stops immediately.
J32-01
After the fixing paper exit sensor (PS17) is turned ON, paper exit sensor (PS13) is not turned ON within the specified time.
J32-02
After the fixing paper exit sensor (PS17) is turned ON, reverse paper exit sensor (PS19) is not turned ON within the specified time.
IV JAM CODE LIST
J32-03
In the reverse paper exit mode, after the reverse paper exit sensor (PS19) is turned ON, paper exit sensor (PS13) is not turned ON within the specified time.
J32-04
After the fixing paper exit sensor (PS17) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time.
J32-05
After the paper exit sensor (PS13) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time (in straight paper exit mode).
J32-07
After the paper exit sensor (PS13) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time (in reverse paper exit mode).
J32-08
When the registration roller motor (M30) is ON, fixing paper exit sensor (PS17) is ON.
4-4
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Classification Paper exit Jam code When idling J32-11 J32-12 J32-13 During operation Others J51-01 Causes Paper exit sensor (PS13) is ON in the idling condition. Fixing paper exit sensor (PS17) is turned ON in the idling condition. Reverse paper exit sensor (PS19) is ON in the idling condition. Front door open jam. Front door open/ close sensor (PS18) was turned OFF while copying/printing. Paper feed section cover open jam. Paper feed cover sensor (PS303) was turned OFF when copying. Paper feed tray open jam. Tray open/ close sensor (PS308) was turned OFF when copying. J61-03 Paper exit section cover open jam. Paper exit cover sensor (PS307) was turned OFF when copying. J62-01 Registration sensor (PS301) is not turned OFF within specified time after paper feed is started. J62-02 After reversal of paper feed motor (M301) is started, timing sensor (PS302) is not turned ON within the specified time. J62-03 After the timing sensor (PS302) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time. J62-04 After the reverse/paper exit motor (M303) is turned ON, reverse sensor (PS305) is not turned ON within the specified time. J62-05 After the reverse sensor (PS305) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time. J62-06 In the one-sided original exit mode, paper exit sensor (PS306) is not turned ON within the specified time after the start of paper exit. In the double-sided original exit mode, original exit sensor (PS306) is not turned ON within the specified time after the reverse sensor (PS305) is turned ON. Printer section stops immediately. RADF stops immediately. If there is paper in or after transfer process, main body stops after paper exit. Resulting operation
JAM CODE LIST Correction Pull out ADU and remove jammed paper, if any.
Close the front door.
DF-319 AFR-20
J61-01
Close the paper feed section cover. Close the paper feed tray. Close the paper exit section cover. Open the paper feed section cover and remove jammed paper, if any. Remove jammed paper in the main body conveyance section, if any.
J61-02
Open the paper exit section cover and remove jammed paper, if any. Remove jammed paper in the main body conveyance section, if any.
4-5
IV JAM CODE LIST
JAM CODE LIST Classification DF-319 AFR-20 Jam code During operation J62-07 Causes
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Resulting operation RADF stops immediately. If there is paper in or after transfer process, main body stops after paper exit. When idling Correction Open the paper exit section cover and remove jammed paper, if any. Remove jammed paper in the main body conveyance section, if any. Open the paper feed section cover and remove jammed paper, if any. Reverse sensor (PS305) is ON in the idling condition. Open the paper exit section cover and remove jammed paper, if any.
After the paper exit sensor (PS306) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time.
J65-01
Registration sensor (PS301) is ON in the idling condition.
J65-02
J65-03
Timing sensor (PS302) is ON in the idling condition.
Open the paper feed section cover and remove jammed paper, if any.
J65-04
Paper exit sensor (PS306) is ON in the idling condition.
Open the paper exit section cover and remove jammed paper, if any.
IV JAM CODE LIST
During operation
Others FS Others TU-109 TMG-3 FS
J71-01
FNS front door open jam. FNS interlock switch (MS701) was turned OFF when copying/printing. TU front door open jam. Front door MS2 (MS2) was turned OFF when copying/printing. After the paper exit sensor (PS13) is turned ON, FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is not turned ON within the specified time.
Close the FNS front door. Close the TU front door.
J71-02
J72-16
FNS/main body stop immediately.
Remove jammed paper in the FNS/main body, if any.
J72-17
After the FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is turned ON, main tray paper exit sensor (PS706) is not turned ON within the specified time.
J72-18
After the FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is turned ON, stacker inlet sensor (PS705) is not turned ON within the specified time (when stapling).
4-6
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Classification FS Jam code During operation J72-19 Causes After the stacker inlet motor (M713) is turned ON, stacker inlet sensor (PS705) is not turned ON within the specified time. After paper exit operation is started, main tray paper exit sensor (PS706) is not turned ON within the specified time (when stapling). J72-21 After the main tray paper exit sensor (PS706) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time (in the large-size staple mode). J72-22 After the FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is turned ON, sub-tray paper exit sensor (PS701) is not turned ON within the specified time within the specified time (in the sub-tray paper exit mode). J72-23 After the sub-tray paper exit sensor (PS701) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time (in the large-size staple mode). J72-24 After completion of stapling, folding passage sensor (PS726) is not turned ON. J72-25 After the folding knife motor (M719) is turned ON, folding paper exit sensor (PS725) is not turned ON within the specified time. J72-26 After the folding paper exit sensor (PS725) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time. J72-28 After the stacker inlet sensor (PW705) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time. J72-29 After the main tray paper exit sensor (PS706) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time (in the non-staple mode). J72-30 After the main tray paper exit sensor (PS706) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time (in the small-size staple mode). Resulting operation FNS/main body stop immediately.
JAM CODE LIST Correction Remove jammed paper in the FNS/main body, if any.
J72-20
4-7
IV JAM CODE LIST
JAM CODE LIST Classification TU-109 TMG-3 Jam code During operation J72-32 Causes
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Resulting operation TU/FNS/main body stop immediately. Correction Remove jammed paper in TU/FNS/main body, if any.
After the folding paper exit sensor (PS725) is turned ON, inlet sensor (PS101) is not turned ON within the specified time. After the inlet sensor (PS101) is turned ON, inlet sensor (PS101) is not turned ON within the specified time.
J72-33
J72-34
After the conveyance motor (M101) is turned ON, paper exit sensor (PS108) is not turned OFF within the specified time.
PI-110
J72-35
After the conveyance clutch /L (MC202) is turned ON, PI passage sensor /L (PS206) is not turned ON within specified time.
FNS/main body stop immediately.
Remove jammed paper in the FNS/main body, if any.
PK-120 PK-5 PK-507 FS
J72-43
After the punch motor (M801) is turned ON, punch HP sensor (PS801) is not turned ON within the specified time.
J72-48
After the folding passage sensor (PS726) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time.
PI-110
J72-49
After the conveyance clutch /U (MC201) is turned ON, PI passage sensor (PS201) is not turned ON within the
IV JAM CODE LIST
specified time. J72-50 After the PI passage sensor (PS201) is turned ON, FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is not turned ON within the specified time. J72-51 After the PI passage sensor /L (PS206) is turned ON, FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is not turned ON within the specified time. FS J72-81 After the stapler motor /F (M714) and clincher motor /F (M715) are turned ON, stapler HP sensor /F (PS731) and clincher HP sensor /F (PS733) are not turned ON within specified time. J72-82 After the stapler motor /R (M709) and clincher motor /R (M710) are turned ON, stapler HP sensor /R (PS730) and clincher HP sensor (PS732) are not turned ON within the specified time.
4-8
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Classification FS Jam code During operation J72-83 Causes After the stapler motor /F, /R (M714), M709), and clincher motor /F, /R (M715, M710) are turned ON, stapler HP sensor /F, /R (PS731, PS730) and clincher HP sensor /F, /R (PS733, PS732) are not turned ON within the specified time. J72-90 After operation stop signal is transmitted from the main body to FNS, FNS does not stop within the specified time. When idling J73-01 J73-02 J73-05 J73-07 J73-08 J73-09 J73-10 TU-109 TMG-3 J73-11 J73-12 J73-13 PI-110 J73-14 Main tray paper exit sensor (PS706) is ON in the idling condition. Stacker inlet sensor (PS705) is ON in the idling condition. FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is ON in the idling condition. Sub-tray paper exit sensor (PS701) is ON in the idling condition. Stacker no-paper sensor (PS720) is ON in the idling condition. Folding passage sensor (PS726) is ON in the idling condition. Folding paper exit sensor (PS725) is ON in the idling condition. Inlet sensor (PS101) is ON in the idling condition. Conveyance sensor (PS102) is ON in the idling condition. Paper exit sensor (PS108) is ON in the idling condition. PI passage sensor (PS206) is ON in the idling condition. Resulting operation FNS/main body stop immediately.
JAM CODE LIST Correction Remove jammed paper in the FNS/main body, if any.
Open the FNS front door and remove jammed paper, if any.
Remove jammed paper in the sub-tray, if any. Open the FNS front door and remove jammed paper, if any.
Open the TU front door and remove jammed paper, if any.
Remove paper from the cover sheet feeder /L and remove jammed paper, if any.
J73-17
PI passage sensor /U (PS201) is ON in the idling condition.
Remove paper in the cover sheet feeder /U once and remove jammed paper, if any.
During operation
ADU
J92-01
After the reverse paper exit sensor sor (PS21) is not turned ON within the specified time.
Printer section ately.
(PS19) is turned ON, ADU reverse sen- stops immedi-
4-9
IV JAM CODE LIST
JAM CODE LIST Classification ADU Jam code When idling J92-11 Causes
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Resulting operation Correction Pull out ADU and remove jammed paper, if any. After reversal of ADU reverse motor (M32) is turned ON, ADU conveyance sensor (PS20) is not turned ON within the specified time. Printer section stops immediately.
ADU reverse sensor (PS21) is ON in the idling condition.
During operation
J93-01
When idling
J93-11
ADU conveyance sensor (PS20) is ON in the idling condition.
During operation
J94-02
After the ADU conveyance sensor (PS20) is turned ON, ADU pre-registration sensor (PS23) is not turned ON within the specified time.
When idling
J94-11
ADU pre-registration sensor (PS23) is ON in the idling condition.
IV JAM CODE LIST
4-10
ERROR CODE LIST
V ERROR CODE LIST

1. ERROR CODE LIST
Note: In the F code area of warning codes, "Contact the Service Section" is indicated and in the E code area, "Turn ON the power switch again" is indicated. On the actual LCD screen, all the indications are SC codes.
Classification Abnormality code Main body Communication abnormality Paper feed motor abnormality LT paper feed motor abnormality Paper feed tray abnormality LT-211, C-208 F10-10
Causes Communication abnormality between printer control board (PRCB) and LT drive board (LTDB)
Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
Estimated abnormal parts Printer control board (PRCB) LT drive board (LTDB)
F13-01
M41 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time when the paper feed motor (M41) was ON.
Printer control board (PRCB) Paper feed motor (M41)
F13-02
M101 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time when the paper feed motor (M101) was ON.
LT drive motor (LTDB) Paper feed motor (M101)
Main body
F18-01
After the tray up/down motor /l (M40) is turned ON, tray upper limit sensor /1 (PS30) is not turned ON.
Printer control board (PRCB) Tray up/down motor /1 (M40) Tray upper limit sensor /1 (PS30) Printer control board (PRCB) Tray upper limit motor /2 (M39) (PS38) Printer control board (PRCB) Tray upper limit motor /3 (M38) Tray upper limit sensor /3 (PS42) Conveyance drive board (CVDB) Tray up/down motor /BP (M35) Tray upper limit sensor /BP (PS25) Tray upper limit sensor /2
F18-02
After the tray up/down motor /2 (M39) is turned ON, tray upper limit sensor /2 (PS38) is not turned ON.
F18-03
After the tray up/down motor /3 (M38) is turned ON, tray upper limit sensor /3 (PS42) is not turned ON.
F18-04
After the tray up/down motor / BP (M35) is turned ON, the tray upper limit sensor /BP (PS25) is not turned ON within the specified time.
5-1
V ERROR CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST Classification Abnormality code LT-211, C-208 LT up/ down motor abnormality F18-50 Causes
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF. LT drive board (LTDB) UP/DOWN motor (M100) Upper limit sensor (PS109) Lower limit sensor (PS101) Estimated abnormal parts LT drive board (LTDB) UP/DOWN motor (M100)
When the up/down motor (M100) was ON, M100 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time.
F18-51
When the upper limit sensor (PS109) or lower limit sensor (PS101) is OFF, PS101 or PS109 is not turned ON within the specified time after the up/ down motor (M100) is turned ON.
LT paper feed assist fan abnormality
F18-60
When the paper feed assist fan /R (M137) was ON, M137 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time.
LT drive board (LTDB) Paper feed assist fan /R (M137)
F18-61
When the paper feed assist fan /F (M136) was ON, M136 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time.
LT drive board (LTDB) Paper feed assist fan /F (M136)
LT power abnormality Main body Communication abnormality
F18-70 F18-71 F20-10
24VDC is not supplied to LCT. 12VDC is not supplied to LCT. Communication abnormality between printer control board (PRCB) and drum drive board / Y (DRDB /Y) or drum drive board /M (DRDB /M).
DC power unit /2 (DCPS2) LT drive board (LTDB) DC power unit /1 (DCPS1) LT drive board (LTDB) Printer control board (PRCB) Drum drive board /Y (DRDB /Y) Drum drive board /M (DRDB /M)
F20-11
Communication abnormality between printer control board (PRCB) and drum drive board / C (DRDB /C) or drum drive board /K (DRDB /K).
Printer control board (PRCB) Drum drive board /C (DRDB /C) Drum drive board /K (DRDB /K)
V ERROR CODE LIST
F20-12
Communication abnormality between printer control board (PRCB) and transfer belt motor (M18)
Printer control board (PRCB) Transfer belt motor (M18)
5-2
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Classification Abnormality code Precharging exposure lamp abnormality Main body F21-01 Causes Pre-charging exposure lamp /Y (PCL Y) set cannot be detected. Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF. F21-02 Pre-charging exposure lamp / M (PCL M) set cannot be detected. F21-03 Pre-charging exposure lamp /C (PCL C) set cannot be detected. F21-04 Pre-charging exposure lamp /K (PCL K) set cannot be detected. Developing motor abnormality F23-01 When the developing motor /Y (M20) was ON, M20 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. F23-02 When the developing motor /M (M21) was ON, M21 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. F23-03 When developing motor /C (M22) was ON, M22 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. F23-04 When the developing motor /K (M23) was ON, M23 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. Drum motor abnormality F23-05 When the drum motor /Y (M14) was ON, M14 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. F23-06 When the drum motor /M (M15) was ON, M15 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time.
ERROR CODE LIST Estimated abnormal parts Printer control board (PRCB) Pre-charging exposure lamp /Y (PCL Y)
Printer control board (PRCB) Pre-charging exposure lamp /M (PCL M) Printer control board (PRCB) Pre-charging exposure lamp /C (PCL C) Printer control board (PRCB) Pre-charging exposure lamp /K (PCL K) Printer control board (PRCB) Developing motor /Y (M20)
Printer control board (PRCB) Developing motor /M (M21)
Printer control board (PRCB) Developing motor /C (M22)
Printer control board (PRCB) Developing motor /K (M23)
Printer control board (PRCB) Drum drive board /Y (DRDB /Y) Drum motor /Y (M14)
Printer control board (PRCB) Drum drive board /M (DRDB /M) Drum motor /M (M15)
5-3
V ERROR CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST Classification Abnormality code Main body Drum motor abnormality F23-07 Causes
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF. Printer control board (PRCB) Drum drive board /K (DRDB /K) Drum motor /K (M17) Estimated abnormal parts Printer control board (PRCB) Drum drive board /C (DRDB /C) Drum motor /C (M16)
When the drum motor /C (M16) was ON, M16 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time.
F23-08
When drum motor /K (M17) was ON, M17 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time.
Transfer belt unit abnormality
F23-09
When the transfer belt motor (M18) was ON, M18 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time.
Printer control board (PRCB) Transfer belt motor (M18)
F23-10
When the 1st transfer HP sensor (PS15) is ON, PS15 is not turned OFF within the specified time after the 1st transfer pressing/releasing motor (M19) is turned ON. When PS15 is OFF, PS15 is not turned ON within the specified time after M19 is turned ON.
Printer control board (PRCB) 1st transfer pressing/releasing motor (M19) 1st transfer HP sensor (PS15)
Toner supply abnormality
F23-11
When either of the toner supply motor /Y, /M, /C, /K (M49, M50, M51, or M52), toner bottle motor (M53), or toner bottle clutch /Y, /M, /C, /K (MC14, MC15, MC16, or MC17) was ON, either abnormality detec-
Printer control board (PRCB) Toner supply drive board (TSDB) Toner supply motor /Y (M49) Toner supply motor /M (M50) Toner supply motor /C (M51) Toner supply motor /K (M52) Toner bottle motor (M53) Toner bottle clutch /Y (MC14) Toner bottle clutch /M (MC15) Toner bottle clutch /C (MC16) Toner bottle clutch /K (MC17)
V ERROR CODE LIST
tion signal was continuously detected for the specified time.
L detection abnormality
F27-01
Output of toner density sensor / Y (TDS Y) cannot be controlled.
Printer control board (PRCB) Toner density sensor /Y (TDS Y)
F27-02
Output of toner density sensor / M (TDS M) cannot be controlled.
Printer control board (PRCB) Toner density sensor /M (TDS M) Printer control board (PRCB) Toner density sensor /C (TDS C)
F27-03
Output of toner density sensor / C (TDS C) cannot be controlled. 5-4

KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Classification Abnormality code Main body L detection abnormality High pressure unit abnormality F27-04 Causes Resulting operation stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is F28-01 When the charging /Y was ON, charging /Y abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. F28-02 When charging /M was ON, charging /M abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. F28-03 When charging /C is ON, charging /C abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. F28-04 When charging /K was ON, charging /K abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. F29-01 When the primary transfer Y was ON, primary transfer Y abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. F29-02 When the primary transfer M was ON, primary transfer M abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. F29-03 When the primary transfer C was ON, primary transfer C abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. F29-04 When the primary transfer K was ON, primary transfer K abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. turned OFF.
ERROR CODE LIST Estimated abnormal parts Printer control board (PRCB) Toner density sensor /K (TDS K)
Output of toner density sensor / Main body K (TDS K) cannot be controlled.
High pressure unit /1 (HV1)
High pressure unit /2 (HV2) 1st transfer roller
5-5
V ERROR CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST Classification Abnormality code Main body Process abnormality F29-06 Causes
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF. Printer control board (PRCB) Developing unit /Y Gamma sensor (PS11) Printer control board (PRCB) Developing unit /M Gamma sensor (PS11) Printer control board (PRCB) Developing unit /C Gamma sensor (PS11) Printer control board (PRCB) Developing unit /K Gamma sensor (PS11) Printer control board (PRCB) Drum potential sensor board /Y (DRPSB Y) Drum potential sensor /Y (DRPS Y) Printer control board (PRCB) Drum potential sensor board /M (DRPSB M) Drum potential sensor /M (DRPS M) Printer control board (PRCB) Drum potential sensor board /C (DRPSB C) Drum potential sensor /C (DRPS C) Printer control board (PRCB) Drum potential sensor board /K (DRPSB K) Drum potential sensor /K (DRPS K) Printer control board (PRCB) Drum potential sensor board /Y (DRPSB Y) Drum potential sensor /Y (DRPS Y) Estimated abnormal parts Printer control board (PRCB) Gamma sensor (PS11)
Gamma sensor (PS11) improperly adjusted while in the Dmax control.
F29-07
Dmax control /Y resulted in an abnormality.
F29-08
Dmax control /M resulted in an abnormality.
F29-09
Dmax control /C resulted in an abnormality.
F29-10
Dmax control /K resulted in an abnormality.
F29-11
In charging potential control, drum surface potential /Y was out of specification.
F29-12
In charging potential control, drum surface potential /M was out of specification.
F29-13
In charging potential control, drum surface potential /C was out of specification.
F29-14
In charging potential control, drum surface potential /K was out of specification.
V ERROR CODE LIST
F29-15
Charging potential control /Y resulted in an abnormality.
F29-16
Charging potential control /M resulted in an abnormality.
Printer control board (PRCB) Drum potential sensor board /M (DRPSB M) Drum potential sensor /M (DRPS M)
5-6
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Classification Abnormality code Main body Process abnormality F29-17 Causes Charging potential control /C resulted in an abnormality. Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is F29-18 Charging potential control /K resulted in an abnormality. turned OFF.
ERROR CODE LIST Estimated abnormal parts Printer control board (PRCB) Drum potential sensor board /C (DRPSB C) Drum potential sensor /C (DRPS C) Printer control board (PRCB) Drum potential sensor board /K (DRPSB K) Drum potential sensor /K (DRPS K)
F29-19
Dot diameter adjustment control /Y resulted in an abnormality.
Printer control board (PRCB) Drum potential sensor board /Y (DRPSB Y) Drum potential sensor /Y (DRPS Y) Printer control board (PRCB) Drum potential sensor board /M (DRPSB M) Drum potential sensor /M (DRPS M) Printer control board (PRCB) Drum potential sensor board /C (DRPSB C) Drum potential sensor /C (DRPS C) Printer control board (PRCB) Drum potential sensor board /K (DRPSB K) Drum potential sensor /K (DRPS K) Printer control board (PRCB) Gamma sensor (PS11) High voltage unit /2 (HU2) High voltage unit /2 (HU2) Conveyance drive board (CVDB) Printer control board (PRCB) Printer control board (PRCB) Fixing cooling fan /1 (M10) Fixing cooling fan /2 (M37) Fixing cooling fan /3 (M36)
F29-20
Dot diameter adjustment control /M resulted in an abnormality.
F29-21
Dot diameter adjustment control /C resulted in an abnormality.
F29-22
Dot diameter adjustment control /K resulted in an abnormality.
F29-23
Gamma sensor (PS11) improperly adjusted while in the gamma correction control
F30-01 F30-02 Motor abnormality Fan abnormality F30-10
2nd transfer abnormality Separation abnormality ADU conveyance drive board communication abnormality
F32-01
When the fixing cooling fan /1 and /2 (M10, M36, M37) were ON, abnormality detection signal of either of them was continuously detected for the specified time.
F32-02
When the drum unit fan /3 (M47) was ON, M36 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time.
Printer control board (PRCB) Drum unit fan /3 (M47) Fixing cooling fan /3 (M36)
5-7
V ERROR CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST Classification Abnormality code Main body Fan abnormality F32-03 Causes
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF. Toner supply drive board (TSDB) Charging air suction fan (M48) Estimated abnormal parts Printer control board (PRCB) Paper exit fan /F (M28) Paper exit fan /M (M27) Paper exit fan /R (M26)
When the paper exit fan /F, /M, and /R (M28, M27, and M26) were ON, abnormality detection signal of either of them was continuously detected for the specified time.
F32-04
When charging air intake fan (M48) was ON, M48 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time.
F32-05
When the drum cooling fan /1 and /2 (M12, M13) were ON, abnormality detection signal of either of them was continuously detected for the specified time.
Printer control board (PRCB) Drum cooling fan /1 (M12) Drum cooling fan /2 (M13)
F32-06
When the transfer belt cooling fan (M11) was ON, M11 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time.
Printer control board (PRCB) Transfer belt cooling fan (M11)
F32-07
In the case of the new type While the paper exit fans /1, / 2 and /3 (M61, M62 and M63) are turned ON, an error detection signal of either M61, M62 or M63 is detected for the specified period of time in succession. In the case of the old type For the M61, M62 or M63 that
Printer control board (PRCB) Paper exit fan /1 (M61) Paper exit fan /2 (M62) Paper exit fan /3 (M63) Note: Since the old type is not installed with the M61, M62 and M63, be sure to check to see if the 25 DIPSW is set as shown below: Old type: DIPSW 21-0-0
V ERROR CODE LIST
is not installed, an abnormal rotation is detected incorrectly.
5-8
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Classification Abnormality code Main body Motor abnormality F33-01 Causes When the fixing motor (M29) was ON, M29 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. F33-02 When the pressure release sensor (PS16) is ON, PS16 is not turned OFF within the specified time after the fixing motor (M29) is turned ON. When PS16 is OFF, PS16 is not turned ON within the specified time after M29 is turned ON. F33-03 After the 2nd transfer pressing/ releasing motor (M34) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time. F33-04 Abnormality of Web motor (M54) or circuit was detected. Fixing high temperature abnormality F34-01 Fixing high temperature abnormality (TH1) Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detection temperature over 250C was continuously detected for the specified time. Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
ERROR CODE LIST Estimated abnormal parts Conveyance drive motor (CVDB) Fixing motor (M29)
Conveyance drive motor (CVDB) Fixing motor (M29) Fixing pressure release sensor (PS16)
Conveyance drive motor (CVDB) 2nd transfer pressing/releasing motor (M34) Conveyance drive motor (CVDB) Web motor (M54) Printer control board (PRCB) AC drive board (ACDB) Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2) Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3) Fixing lower lamp (L4) Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) Fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) Fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4)
WARNING When F34-**, F35-** or F36-** (fixing temperature related abnormality) occurs, be sure to repair a defective part before setting the 25 DIPSW 3-1 to 0. If the 25 DIPSW 3-1 is set to 0 without repairing a defective part, this may cause a fire.
5-9
V ERROR CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST Classification Abnormality code Fixing high temperature abnormality Main body F34-02 Causes
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF. Estimated abnormal parts Printer control board (PRCB) AC drive board (ACDB) Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2) Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3) Fixing lower lamp (L4) Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) Fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) Fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4)
Fixing high temperature abnormality (TH3) Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) detection temperature over 250C was continuously detected for the specified time.
F34-03
F34-04
F34-05
Fixing compensation high temperature abnormality (TH1) Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detection temperature over 150C was continuously detected for the specified time.
F34-06
Fixing compensation high temperature abnormality (TH2) Fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) detection temperature over 150C was continuously detected for the specified time.
F34-07
Fixing roller paper winding abnormality A condition in which the detected temperature of the fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) is 25C higher than the detected temperature of the fixing temperature sensor /1, is detected for the specified period of time in succession.
V ERROR CODE LIST
F34-08
Fixing roller paper seizure abnormality J31-02 occurred 4 continuous times.
5-10
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Classification Abnormality code Fixing low temperature abnormality Main body F35-01 Causes Fixing low temperature abnormality (TH1) Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detection temperature under 150C was continuously detected. F35-02 Fixing low temperature abnormality (TH3) Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) detection temperature under 150C was continuously detected for the specified time. F35-03 Fixing low temperature abnormality (TH2) Fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) detection temperature under 150C was continuously detected for the specified time. F35-04 Fixing low temperature abnormality (TH4) Fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4) detection temperature under 150C was continuously detected for the specified time. F35-05 Fixing compensation low temperature abnormality (TH1) Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detection temperature under 20C was continuously detected for the specified time. F35-06 Fixing compensation low temperature abnormality (TH2) Fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) detection temperature under 20C was continuously detected for the specified time. Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
ERROR CODE LIST Estimated abnormal parts Printer control board (PRCB) AC drive board (ACDB) Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2) Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3) Fixing lower lamp (L4) Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) Fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) Fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4)
5-11
V ERROR CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST Classification Abnormality code Main body Fixing sensor abnormality F36-02 Causes
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF. Estimated abnormal parts Printer control board (PRCB) AC drive board (ACDB) Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2) Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3) Fixing lower lamp (L4) Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) Fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) Fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4)
Fixing high temperature hardware detection abnormality (TH3) Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time.
F36-04
Fixing high temperature hardware detection abnormality (TH4) Fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time.
F36-05
Fixing low temperature hardware detection abnormality (TH1) Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time. WARNING When F34-**, F35-** or F36-** (fixing temperature related abnormality) occurs, be sure to repair a defective part before setting the 25 DIPSW 3-1 to 0. If the 25 DIPSW 3-1 is set to 0 without repairing a defective part, this may cause a fire.
F36-06
Fixing low temperature hardware abnormality (TH3) Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time.
F36-07
Fixing low temperature hardware detection abnormality (TH2) Fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time.
F36-08
Fixing low temperature hardware detection abnormality (TH4) Fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time.
F36-09
Fixing compensation high temperature hardware detection abnormality (TH1) Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time.
V ERROR CODE LIST
F36-10
Fixing compensation low temperature hardware detection abnormality (TH1) Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time.
5-12
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Classification Abnormality code Main body Fixing sensor abnormality F36-11 Causes Fixing compensation high temperature hardware detection abnormality (TH2) Fixing temperature sensor /2(TH2) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time. F36-12 Fixing compensation low temperature hardware detection abnormality (TH2) Fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time. F38-02 After the sub power switch (SW2) is turned ON, fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detection temperature does not reach 150C within the specified time. F38-03 After the sub power switch (SW2) is turned ON, fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) detection temperature does not reach 150C within the specified time. F39-01 Scanner abnormality F41-01 Fixing section has not been set. At the home position search, scanner HP sensor (PS1) is not turned on within the specified time after the scanner motor (M1) is turned ON. Motor abnormality F41-02 When the polygon motor /Y (M3) is started or when the speed is switched, M3 lock signal is not detected within the specified time. When the write intake fan /1, /2 (M43, M44), and write exhaust fan /1, /2 (M45, M46) were ON, abnormality detection signal of either of them was continuously detected for the specified time. Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
ERROR CODE LIST Estimated abnormal parts Printer control board (PRCB) AC drive board (ACDB) Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2) Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3) Fixing lower lamp (L4) Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) Fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) Fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4)
Scanner drive board (SCDB) Scanner motor (M1) Scanner HP sensor (PS1)
Printer control board (PRCB) Polygon motor /Y (M3) Writing suction fan /1 (M43) Writing suction fan /2 (M44) Writing exhaust fan /1 (M45) Writing exhaust fan /2 (M46)
5-13
V ERROR CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST Classification Abnormality code Main body Motor abnormality F41-03 Causes
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF. Estimated abnormal parts Printer control board (PRCB) Polygon motor /M (M4) Writing suction fan /1 (M43) Writing suction fan /2 (M44) Writing exhaust fan /1 (M45) Writing exhaust fan /2 (M46)
When the polygon motor (M4) is started or the speed is switched, M4 lock signal is not detected within the specified time. When the write intake fan /1, /2 (M43, M44), and write exhaust fan /1, /2 (M45, M46) were ON, abnormality detection signal of either of them was continuously detected for the specified time.
F41-04
When the polygon motor /C (M5) is started or the speed is switched, M5 lock signal is not detected within the specified time. When the write intake fan /1, /2 (M43, M44), and write exhaust fan /1, /2 (M45, M46) were ON, abnormality detection signal of either of them was continuously detected for the specified time.
Printer control board (PRCB) Polygon motor /C (M5) Writing suction fan /1 (M43) Writing suction fan /2 (M44) Writing exhaust fan /1 (M45) Writing exhaust fan /2 (M46)
F41-05
When the polygon motor /K (M6) is started or the speed is switched, M6 lock signal is not detected within the specified time. When the write intake fan /1, /2 (M43, M44), and write exhaust fan /1, /2 (M45, M46) were ON,
Printer control board (PRCB) Polygon motor /K (M6) Writing suction fan /1 (M43) Writing suction fan /2 (M44) Writing exhaust fan /1 (M45) Writing exhaust fan /2 (M46)
V ERROR CODE LIST
abnormality detection signal of either of them was continuously detected for the specified time. Scanner abnormality F41-06 When the optical scanning returns, scanner HP sensor (PS1) is not turned ON within the specified time after the scanner motor (M1) is turned ON. Motor abnormality F41-07 Abnormal temperature of polygon motor /Y (M3) was detected. Printer control board (PRCB) Polygon motor /Y (M3) Scanner drive board (SCDB) Scanner motor (M1) Scanner HP sensor (PS1)
5-14
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Classification Abnormality code Main body Motor abnormality F41-09 F41-10 F41-08 Causes Abnormal temperature of polygon motor /M (M4) was detected. Abnormal polygon motor /C (M5) was detected. Abnormal temperature of polygon motor /K (M6) was detected. F41-11 Temperature detection board (TDB) detected temperature abnormality in writing unit /K. Fan abnormality F42-01 When the write intake fan /1, /2 (M43, M44), and write exhaust fan /1, /2 (M45, M46) were ON, abnormality detection signal of either of them was continuously detected for the specified time. F42-02 When scanner cooling fan (M2) was ON, M2 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. Color registration abnormality F45-01 Color registration base line correction /F resulted in abnormality. F45-03 Color registration base line correction /R results in abnormality. F45-07 When laser correction motor /Y (M7) was ON, laser correction HP sensor /Y (PS5) was turned OFF. F45-08 When the laser correction motor /M (M8) was ON, laser correction HP sensor /M (PS6) was turned OFF, F45-09 When the laser correction motor /C (M9) was ON, laser correction HP sensor /C (PS7) was turned OFF. Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
ERROR CODE LIST Estimated abnormal parts Printer control board (PRCB) Polygon motor /M (M4) Printer control board (PRCB) Polygon motor /C (M5) Printer control board (PRCB) Polygon motor /K (M6) Printer control board (PRCB) Temperature detection board (TDB) Printer control board (PRCB) Writing suction fan /1 (M43) Writing suction fan /2 (M44) Writing exhaust fan /1 (M45) Writing exhaust fan /2 (M46)
Scanner drive board (SCDB) Scanner cooling fan (M2)
Printer control board (PRCB) Color registration sensor /F (PS8) Printer control board (PRCB) Color registration sensor /R (PS9) Printer control board (PRCB) Laser correction motor /Y (M7) Laser correction HP sensor /Y (PS5) Printer control board (PRCB) Laser correction motor /M (M8) Laser correction HP sensor /M (PS6) Printer control board (PRCB) Laser correction motor /C (M9) Laser correction HP sensor /C (PS7)
5-15
V ERROR CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST Classification Abnormality code Color registration abnormality Main body F45-10 Causes
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF. Printer control board (PRCB) Laser correction motor /M (M8) Laser correction HP sensor /M (PS6) Estimated abnormal parts Printer control board (PRCB) Laser correction motor /Y (M7) Laser correction HP sensor /Y (PS5)
After the laser correction motor /Y (M7) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time. Or, laser correction HP sensor /Y (PS5) installing position is abnormal.
F45-11
Laser correction motor /M (MB) is not turned OFF within the specified time after it is turned ON. Or, laser correction HP sensor /M (PS6) installing position is abnormal.
F45-12
Laser correction motor /C (M9) is not turned OFF within the specified time after it is turned ON. Or, the laser correction HP sensor /C (PS7) installing position is abnormal.
Printer control board (PRCB) Laser correction motor /C (M9) Laser correction HP sensor /C (PS7)
F45-20
Color registration correction results in abnormality.
Printer control board (PRCB) Color registration sensor /F (PS8) Color registration sensor /R (PS9) Writing unit /Y /M /C /K Image processing board (IPB)
E46-01
When scanning the image, sub-scan beam correction APC cannot be applied. Laser does not light up because 12VDC power to drive the beam is not supplied, MPC is not correct, or because of fault laser.
E46-02
Address abnormality of FIFO for scanner. When scanning the image, compression of scanned image data is not nor-
Image processing board (IPB) Printer control board (PRCB)
V ERROR CODE LIST
mally completed. E46-03 Address abnormality of FIFO for printer. Expansion of scanned image data is not normally completed. E46-05 FIFO interrupt error of compression/expansion chip occurred. E46-06 Image data expansion abnormality Image processing board (IPB) MU-412 Image processing board (IPB)
5-16
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Classification Abnormality code Image processing abnormality Main body E46-07 Causes Connection abnormality between CCD board (CCDB) and image processing board (IPB) E46-08 Index sensor output does not change by the execution of APC. Index sensor cannot detect the laser because the polygon mirror does not rotate, or because of the index sensor out of position or defective index sensor E46-09 Connection abnormality between index sensor /Y, /M, / C, /K (INDX SB Y, M, C, K) or laser drive board (LDB Y, M, C, K) and image processing board (IPB) E46-12 After negation of SVV, compression of scanned image and evolution to page memory are not completed. E46-13 When scanning the image, compression process from scanner to memory is not completed within the specified time. Evolution from scanner to page memory is not completed within the specified time. SVV is not detected within the specified time. expansion process from memory to printer is not completed within the specified time. Output from page memory to printer is not completed within the specified time. PVV is not detected within the specified time. E46-15 When scanning the image, access to expansion device or some other improper process took place even though there was no resource. 5-17
ERROR CODE LIST Resulting operation Estimated abnormal parts Image processing board (IPB) Overall control board (OACB) CCD board (CCDB) CCD wiring harness Writing unit /Y /M /C /K Image processing board (IPB) Printer control board (PRCB)
Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
Writing unit /Y /M /C /K Image processing board (IPB)
Printer control board (PRCB) Overall control board (OACB) Image processing board (IPB) Printer control board (PRCB) Overall control board (OACB) Image processing board (IPB)
Overall control board (OACB) Image processing board (IPB) Writing unit /Y /M /C /K
Image processing board (IPB) Program of overall control board (OACB)
V ERROR CODE LIST
E46-14
When scanning the image,
Printer control board (PRCB)
ERROR CODE LIST Classification Abnormality code Image processing abnormality Main body E46-16 Causes
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF. Estimated abnormal parts Image processing board (IPB) Program of overall control board (OACB)
When scanning the image, access to compression device or some other improper process took place even though there was no resource.
E46-17
When processing the image, filter coefficient cannot be properly prepared.
E46-19
When accessing the memory device, software fault was detected.
E46-21
Expansion process from memory to page memory is not completed within the specified time. Compression process from page memory to memory is not completed within the specified time. Evolution from memory to page memory is not completed within the specified time. Compressed data transfer from memory to memory is not completed within the specified time.
Printer control board (PRCB) Image processing board (IPB) Program of overall control board (OACB)
E46-23
When scanning the image, SVV is not turned OFF within the specified time and therefore scanning of next page cannot be started.
Printer control board (PRCB) Image processing board (IPB) Overall control board (OACB)
E46-24
Shading correction abnormality (GA abnormality)
Image processing board (IPB) Program of image processing board (IPB)
V ERROR CODE LIST
5-18
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Classification Abnormality code Image processing abnormality Main body E46-25 mality Blocking cover and lens cover of scanner section are out of place. CCD board (CCDB) connector is disconnected. CCDB power cable is disconnected. CCDB IC protector is broken. Quantity of light of exposure lamp (L1) is excess. L1 does not light up. E46-26 There is no correction data which has been reserved by resolution. Abnormality detection process is performed but no abnormality code is indicated on the operation board and main body continues operation. Abnormality code is indicated only for data collection, list output and KRDS. E46-31 Before completion of MPC, APC initial sampling was attempted. E46-32 Execution of MPC was attempted during execution of APC. E46-35 Continuous page imaging range abnormality. Image cannot be evolved on memory due to abnormal image range on memory. Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF. Causes AOC/AGC adjustment abnorResulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
ERROR CODE LIST Estimated abnormal parts CCD board (CCDB) Exposure lamp (L1) Image processing board (IPB) Printer control board (PRCB) Overall control board (OACB) Scanner drive board (SCDB) L1 inverter board (L1INVB)
Image processing board (IPB) Program of overall control board (OACB)
Image processing board (IPB) ICP program
5-19
V ERROR CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST Classification Abnormality code Main body Image processing abnormality E46-40 E46-36 Causes
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is Hard disk initialization abnormality. Hard disk failure or improper connector connection. turned OFF. Image processing board (IPB) Hard disk (HD-106) HDD I/F board (HDD IFB) Estimated abnormal parts Image processing board (IPB) ICP program
When starting APC, PVV was ON (APC was executed during print)
E46-41 E46-42
JOB information could not be stored in the hard disk. At the time of automatic hard disk job deletion, route could not be opened.
E46-43
Hard disk access error. Hard disk failure or improper connector connection.
E46-58
Software failure. CCD board was replaced but I1ROM version is not compliant.
Image processing board (IPB) I ROM program CCD wiring harness of CCD board (CCDB)
E46-59
CCD board (CCDB) bunch or connector is damaged.
F46-62
Before completion of paper mis-centering correction, scanning was started (mis-centering correction cannot be completed).
Abnormality detection process is conducted but no code is indicated on the operation board and main body continues operation. Abnormality code is indicated only for data collec-
Printer control board (PRCB) Image processing board (IPB) LCT drive board (LTDB)
F46-63
Since the quantity of light of exposure lamp (L1) decreased, AGC was retried, though no error occurred.
Exposure lamp (L1) Overall control board (OACB) CCD board (CCDB) Toner density sensor /Y (TDS Y) Toner density sensor /M (TDS M) Toner density sensor /C (TDS C) Toner density sensor /K (TDS K) Printer control board (PRCB) Image processing board (IPB) Image processing board (IPB) Overall control board (OACB)
V ERROR CODE LIST
F46-64
PWM gammer curve was not properly prepared.
E46-66
Shift failure at repeat.
tion, list output and KRDS.
5-20
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Classification Abnormality code Image processing abnormality Main body E46-80 E46-81 E46-82 E46-83 E46-90 E46-91 E46-98 E46-99 Causes Message cue was not enough or destructed. Parameter value exceeds allowable range. Message cue sender task has an undefined ID. Message receiving event is undefined. Abnormal access to memory Header address scanning abnormality Page memory cannot be secured for printing. Memory initialization abnormality. Memory may not be correctly connected. Communication abnormality E50-01 12VDC abnormality. Abnormality signal was continuously detected for the specified time. E50-02 24VDC abnormality. Abnormality signal was continuously detected for the specified time after the specified time from REN /2 ON. E50-03 Conveyance drive board (CVDB) 24VDC abnormality. Abnormality signal of 24VDC for CVDB was detected after specified time from REN /2 ON. abnormality. Abnormal 5VDC for laser correction motor /Y, /M, and /C (M7, M8, and M9) was detected. E50-05 Conveyance drive board (CVDB) 12VDC abnormality. Abnormality signal of 12VDC for CVDB was detected. E50-04 Laser correction motor 5VDC Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
ERROR CODE LIST Estimated abnormal parts Image processing board (IPB) Program of overall control board (OACB)
Image processing board (IPB) Overall control board (OACB) MU-412
DC power unit /1 (DCPS1)
DC power unit /2 (DCPS2) Conveyance drive motor (CVDB)
DC power unit /1 (DCPS1) Conveyance drive motor (CVDB)
5-21
V ERROR CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST Classification Abnormality code Main body Communication abnormality E50-10 Causes
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF. Estimated abnormal parts Overall control board (OACB) Image processing board (IPB)
Line status error and check sum error was detected between the overall control board (OACB) and image processing board (IPB) and demand for re-transmission was sent but recovery could not be attained. Re-transmission was demanded and answered but recovery could not be attained. Space is not obtained in the transmission ring buffer within the specified time.
E50-11 Fan abnormality F52-01
Communication with the coin vendor cannot be performed. When the DCPS cooling fan (M42) was ON, M42 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time.
Printer control board (PRCB) Coin vendor Printer control board (PRCB) DCPS cooling fan (M42)
F52-02
When the IP cooling fan (M24) was ON, M24 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time.
Printer control board (PRCB) IP cooling fan (M24)
F52-03
When the IPB cooling fan (M25) was ON, M25 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time.
Printer control board (PRCB) IPB cooling fan (M25)
V ERROR CODE LIST
Operation board abnormality
E56-02
After the sub power switch (SW2) is turned ON, communication between the printer control board (PRCB), overall control board (OACB), and operation board /1 (OB1) is not started.
Printer control board (PRCB) Overall control board (OACB) Operation board /1 (OB1)
E56-11
When the sub power switch (SW2) was turned ON, unwritten control program 01 of operation board /1 (OB1) was detected.
Operation board /1 (OB1)
5-22
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Classification Abnormality code Operation board abnormality Main body E56-12 Causes When the sub power switch (SW2) was turned ON, unwritten control program 02 of operation board /1 (OB1) was detected. E56-13 When the sub power switch (SW2) was turned ON, unwritten control program 03 of operation board /1 (OB1) was detected. DF-319, AFR-20 DF-319 and AFR-20 abnormality E60-01 F61-01 F61-02 F61-03 F61-04 F61-05 F61-06 F61-07 Communication error. Registration sensor (PS301) error. Timing sensor (PS302) error. Reverse sensor (PS305) error. Paper exit sensor (PS306) error. Size VR (VR301) error. Non-volatile memory error. When the sub power switch (SW2) was ON, unwritten control program of RADF control board (DFCB) was detected. F61-08 F61-09 F61-10 Paper feed motor (M301) error. Conveyance motor (M302) error. Reverse paper exit motor (M303) error. FS abnormality FS E70-01 F77-01 Communication error. Shift unit does not reach the shifting position or home position within the specified time. F77-02 After the tray up/down motor (M703) was turned ON, tray upper limit sensor (PS702) is not turned ON within the specified time. Main body and FNS stop operation immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF. Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
ERROR CODE LIST Estimated abnormal parts Operation board /1 (OB1)
Operation board /1 (OB1)
RADF control board (DFCB) Printer control board (PRCB) RADF control board (DFCB) Registration sensor (PS301) RADF control board (DFCB) Timing sensor (PS302) RADF control board (DFCB) Reverse sensor (PS305) RADF control board (DFCB) Paper exit sensor (PS306) RADF control board (DFCB) Size VR (VR301) RADF control board (DFCB)
RADF control board (DFCB) Paper feed motor (M301) RADF control board (DFCB) Conveyance motor (M302) RADF control board (DFCB) Reverse paper exit motor (M303) FNS control board (FNSCB) Printer control board (PRCB) FNS control board (FNSCB) Shift motor (M702) Shift HP sensor (PS718) FNS control board (FNSCB) Tray up/down motor (M703) Tray upper limit sensor (PS702)
5-23
V ERROR CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST Classification Abnormality code FS abnormality FS F77-03 Causes
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Resulting operation Main body and FNS stop operation immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF. FNS control board (FNSCB) Paper exit roller motor (M707) Estimated abnormal parts FNS control board (FNSCB) Alignment motor /U (M705) Alignment HP sensor /U (PS708)
After the alignment motor /U (M705) was turned ON, the alignment HP sensor /U (PS708) is not turned ON or OFF within the specified time.
F77-04
After the paper exit roller motor (M707) was turned ON, speed does not reach the specified level within the specified time.
F77-05
After the paper exit motor (M708) is turned ON, paper exit opening HP sensor (PS712) is not turned ON or OFF within the specified time.
FNS control board (FNSCB) Paper exit opening motor (M708) Paper exit opening sensor (PS712) FNS control board (FNSCB) Stapler movement motor (M711) Stapler movement HP sensor (PS711)
F77-06
After the stapler moving motor (M711) is turned ON, stapler moving HP sensor (PS711) is not turned ON or OFF within the specified time.
F77-07
After the clincher rotating motor (M704) is turned ON, clincher rotating HP sensor (PS714) is not turned ON or OFF within the specified time.
FNS control board (FNSCB) Clincher rotation motor (M704) Clincher rotation HP sensor (PS714)
F77-08
After the stapler rotating motor (M706) is turned ON, stapler rotating HP sensor (PS713) is not turned ON or OFF within the specified time.
FNS control board (FNSCB) Stapler rotation motor (M706) Stapler rotation HP sensor (PS713)
F77-11
After the stapler motor /F (M714) is turned ON, stapler HP sensor /F (PS731) is not
FNS control board (FNSCB) Stapler motor /F (M714) Stapler HP sensor /F (PS731)
V ERROR CODE LIST
turned ON within the specified time. F77-12 After the stapler motor /R (M709) is turned ON, stapler HP sensor /R (PS730) is not turned ON within the specified time. F77-13 After the clincher motor /F (M715) is turned ON, clincher HP sensor /F (PS733) is not turned ON within the specified time. FNS control board (FNSCB) Clincher motor /F (M715) Clincher HP sensor /F (PS733) FNS control board (FNSCB) Stapler motor /R (M709) Stapler HP sensor /R (PS730)
5-24
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Classification Abnormality code FS abnormality FS F77-14 Causes After clincher motor /R (M710) is turned ON, clincher HP sensor /R (PS732) is not turned ON within the specified time. F77-21 After the stopper motor (M718) is turned ON, stopper HP sensor (PS723) is not turned ON within the specified time. F77-22 After the alignment motor /L (M716) is turned ON, alignment HP sensor /L (PS724) is not turned ON within the specified time. F77-25 After the folding knife motor (M719) is turned ON, folding knife HP sensor (PS722) is not turned ON within the specified time. F77-26 After the folding conveyance motor (M720) is turned ON, speed does not reach the specified level within the specified time. TU-109, TMG-3 TU-109, TMG-3 abnormality F77-31 After the conveyance motor (M101) is turned ON, speed does not reach the specified level within the specified time. Resulting operation Main body and FNS stop operation immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
ERROR CODE LIST Estimated abnormal parts FNS control board (FNSCB) Clincher motor /R (M710 Clincher HP sensor /R (PS732) FNS control board (FNSCB) Stopper motor (M718) Stopper HP sensor (PS723) FNS control board (FNSCB) Alignment motor /L (M716) Alignment HP sensor /L (PS724) FNS control board (FNSCB) Folding knife motor (M719) Folding knife HP sensor (PS722) FNS control board (FNSCB) Folding conveyance motor (M720)
FNS control board (FNSCB) TU drive board (TUDB) Conveyance motor (M101)
F77-32
After the cutter motor (M102) is turned ON, cutter HP sensor (PS106) is not turned ON within the specified time.
FNS control board (FNSCB) TU drive board (TUDB) Cutter motor (M102) FNS control board (FNSCB) TU drive board (TUDB) Stopper motor (M103) Stopper HP sensor (PS103) FNS control board (FNSCB) TU drive board (TUDB) Stopper release motor (M104) Stopper release HP sensor (PS104) FNS control board (FNSCB) TU drive board (TUDB) Press motor (M105) Press HP sensor (PS105) Cutter HP sensor (PS106)
F77-33
After the stopper motor (M103) is turned ON, stopper HP sensor (PS103) is not turned ON within the specified time.
F77-34
After the stopper release motor (M104) is turned ON, stopper release HP sensor (PS104) is not turned ON within the specified time.
F77-35
After the press motor (M105) is turned ON, press HP sensor (PS105) is not turned ON within the specified time. 5-25
V ERROR CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST Classification Abnormality code TU-109 TU-109 abnormality F77-36 Causes
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Resulting operation Main body and FNS stop operation immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF. FNS control board (FNSCB) TU drive board (TUDB) Holder motor (M106) Upper limit PS sensor (PS110) FNS control board (FNSCB) PI drive board (PIDB) Tray up/down motor /L (M202) Tray upper limit sensor /L (PS209) Tray lower limit sensor /L (PS210) FNS control board (FNSCB) PI drive board (PIDB) Tray up/down motor /U (M201) Tray upper limit sensor /U (PS204) Tray lower limit sensor /U (PS205) FNS control board (FNSCB) PI drive board (PIDB) PI Conveyance motor (M203) FNS control board (FNSCB) Punch drive board (PKDB) Punch shift motor (M802) Punch shift HP sensor (PS803) FNS control board (FNSCB) Punch drive board (PKDB) Estimated abnormal parts FNS control board (FNSCB) TU drive board (TUDB) Pusher motor (M107) Pusher HP sensor (PS112)
After the pressure motor (M107) is turned ON, pressure HP sensor (PS112) is not turned ON within the specified time.
F77-37
After the holder motor (M106) is turned ON, upper limit PS sensor (PS110) is not turned ON.
PI-110 abnormality
PI-110
F77-41
After the tray up/down motor /L (M202) is turned ON, tray upper limit sensor /L (PS209) or tray lower limit sensor /L (PS210) is not turned ON within the specified time.
F77-42
After the tray up/down motor /U (M201) is turned ON, tray upper limit sensor /U (PS204) or tray lower limit sensor /U (PS205) is not turned ON within the specified time.
F77-43
After the PI conveyance motor (M203) is turned ON, speed does not reach the specified level within the specified time.
PK-120, PK-5, PK-507
PK-120, PK-5, PK-507 abnormality
F77-44
After the punch shift motor (M802) is turned ON, punch shift HP sensor (PS803) is not turned ON within the specified time.
V ERROR CODE LIST
F77-47
Communication abnormality between FNS control board (FNSCB) and punch drive board (PKDB)
F77-54
After punch motor (M801) is turned ON, punch HP sensor (PS801) is not turned ON within the specified time.
FNS control board (FNSCB) Punch drive board (PKDB) Punch motor (M801) Punch HP sensor (PS801)
5-26
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Classification Abnormality code FS abnormality FS F77-81 Causes After the gate drive motor (M712) is turned ON, gate HP sensor (PS716) is not turned ON within the specified time. F77-91 Communication abnormality when sub-CPU in FNS control board (FNSCB) receives data F77-92 Communication abnormality when the main CPU in FNS control board (FNSCB) receives data. F77-98 When the sub power switch (SW2) was turned ON, unwritten control program of FNS control Board (FNSCB) was detected. F77-99 Abnormality other than those known to control program of FNS control board (FNSCB) was detected. Main body Communication abnormality E80-01 When the sub power switch (SW2) is ON, no response is received from the printer control board (PRCB) within the specified time. E80-02 E80-03 ISW abnormality E80-11 Printer control board (PRCB) communication abnormality Operation board communication abnormality When the sub power switch (SW2) was ON, unwritten range of ISW was detected in the printer control program. E80-21 When the sub power switch (SW2) was ON, unwritten range of ISW was detected in the GIF control program. E80-30 In the data transfer by ISW, regular header information cannot be received within the specified time. E80-31 In the data transfer by ISW, check sum error or header error was detected in the downloaded data. Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF. Resulting operation Main body and FNS stop operation immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
ERROR CODE LIST Estimated abnormal parts FNS control board (FNSCB) Gate drive motor (M712) Gate HP sensor (PS716) FNS control board (FNSCB) Printer control board (PRCB)
Printer control board (PRCB) Overall control board (OACB)
Operation board /1 (OB1) Printer control program
VIF control program
Printer cable USB cable PC parallel port PC USB port Printer cable USB cable Program file abnormality
5-27
V ERROR CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST Classification Abnormality code Main body ISW abnormality E80-32 Causes
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF. Estimated abnormal parts Printer cable USB cable Program transferred board Printer control program
When transferring data by ISW, data cannot be correctly written to flash ROM.
E80-40
Engine continued operation without preparing image or process patch for the specified time.
E81-01
A printer control ROM software is not installed that is corresponding to the material changeover setting.
V ERROR CODE LIST
5-28
ABOUT ABNORMAL UNIT ISOLATION
2. ABOUT ABNORMAL UNIT ISOLATION

In the event of following abnormalities, the failed unit can be isolated so that other functions may be temporarily operated. If any abnormality code is issued, press the Auto Reset key and turn OFF and ON the SW2 (sub power switch). The unit subjected to abnormality is isolated in the software system and other functions can be operated. If SW2 is turned OFF or ON without correcting the faulty unit, the abnormality is detected and the abnormality code is indicated again (a function effective only one time).
Error code 18-01 18-02 18-03 18-05 13-02 46-40 to 43 77-22, 25, 26 77-31, 37 77-41, 42, 43 77-44, 47, 55
Error Error in paper feed tray /1 up Error in paper feed tray /2 up Error in paper feed tray /3 up Error in LT tray up LT paper feed motor abnormality HDD abnormality Folding drive abnormality Cutting drive abnormality CF tray drive abnormality Punch rocking motor abnormality
Unit to be cut off Paper feed tray /1 Paper feed tray /2 Paper feed tray /3 LT tray HDD Folding machine TU-109, TMG-3 PI-110 PK-120, PK-5, PK-507
Remarks Tray can not be selected. Tray can not be selected. Tray can not be selected. Tray can not be selected. HDD can not be used. Folding mode, stitch-andfold mode, and cutting mode can not be selected. Cover sheet mode can not be selected. Punch mode can not be selected.
5-29
V ERROR CODE LIST
ABOUT ABNORMAL UNIT ISOLATION
Blank page
V ERROR CODE LIST
5-30
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
VI DIAGRAMS
1. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
1.1 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 parts layout drawing
A. Switches and sensors (1) Rear of the main body
[11]
[12]
[10]
[9]
[8] [7] [6] [5] [4] [3] [2] [1]

8050fs6600
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
Encoder sensor /Y1 (PS60) Encoder sensor /M1 (PS62) Encoder sensor /C1 (PS64) Encoder sensor /K1 (PS66) Encoder sensor /Y2 (PS61) Encoder sensor /M2 (PS63)
[7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12]
Encoder sensor /C2 (PS65) Encoder sensor /K2 (PS67) Waste toner full sensor (PS52) Waste toner door sensor (PS53) Encoder sensor /belt 2 (PS68) Encoder sensor /belt 1 (PS69)
6-1
VI DIAGRAMS
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING (2) Top of the main body
[5]
[6]
[1]
[4]
[1] [2] [3] DF reset switch (RS1)
[3]
[4] [5] [6]
[2]
APS sensor /S (PS3) Scanner HP sensor (PS1) AAPS timing sensor (PS2)
8050fs6601
Toner supply unit open/close sensor (PS14) APS sensor /L (PS4)
(3) Front of the main body
[3]
[4]
[2] VI DIAGRAMS
[1] [2] Front door open/close sensor (PS18) Front door interlock switch (MS1) [3] [4]
[1]
8050fs6602
Sub power switch (SW2) Main power switch (SW1)
6-2
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 (4) Right side of the main body
[1]
[1] Temp/humidity sensor (TEMP/HUM)
8050fs6603
(5) Front side of the main body
[1]
[1] 1st transfer HP sensor (PS15)
8050fs6604
6-3
VI DIAGRAMS
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING (6) Write unit
[5] [6] [7]
[4] [3] [2] [1]

[1] [2] [3] [4] Index sensor board /Y (INDX SB Y) Index sensor board /M (INDX SB M) Index sensor board /C (INDX SB C) Index sensor board /K (INDX SB K) [5] [6] [7]
8050fs6605
Laser correction HP sensor /Y (PS5)* Laser correction HP sensor /M (PS6)* Laser correction HP sensor /C (PS7)*
* Laser correction HP sensor does not attached to write unit /K. (7) Process unit
[4] [3] [2] [1]

[1] [2] Drum potential sensor /K (DRPS K) Drum potential sensor /C (DRPS C) [3] [4]
8050fs6606
Drum potential sensor /M (DRPS M) Drum potential sensor /Y (DRPS Y)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-4
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 (8) Developing unit
[4]
[1] [2]
[3] [2]
[1]
[3] [4]
8050fs6607
Toner density sensor /K (TDS K) Toner density sensor /C (TDS C)
Toner density sensor /M (TDS M) Toner density sensor /Y (TDS Y)
(9) Image correction unit
[2]
[3]
[1]
[1] [2] Gamma sensor (PS11) Color registration sensor /F (PS8) [3]
8050fs6608
Color registration sensor /R (PS9)
6-5
VI DIAGRAMS
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING (10) Toner supply unit
[4]
[5]
[6]
[3]
[1] [2] [3] Toner level detection sensor /K (TLD K) Toner level detection sensor /C (TLD C) Toner supply interlock switch (MS2)
[2]
[4] [5] [6]
[1]
8050fs6609
Toner supply door open/close sensor (PS54) Toner level detection sensor /M (TLD M) Toner level detection sensor /Y (TLD Y)
(11) Paper feed tray 1 to 3
[4] [5] [6]
[9] [8] [7] [3] [2] [1] [18] [17] [16]

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
[15] [14] [13]
[12] [11] [10]

[10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] 6-6 Paper size VR/1 (VR1) Paper size VR/2 (VR2) Paper size VR/3 (VR3) Paper size /S1 (PS33) Paper size /S2 (PS39) Paper size /S3 (PS45) Paper size /L1 (PS34) Paper size /L2 (PS40) Paper size /L3 (PS46)
8050fs6630
Pre-registration sensor /1 (PS29) Pre-registration sensor /2 (PS35) Pre-registration sensor /3 (PS41) No paper sensor /1 (PS31) No paper sensor /2 (PS37) No paper sensor /3 (PS44) Tray upper limit sensor /1 (PS30) Tray upper limit sensor /2 (PS36) Tray upper limit sensor /3 (PS42)
VI DIAGRAMS
[6] [7] [8] [9]
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 (12) Bypass feed unit
[4]
[1] [2] Paper size /LBP (PS49) No paper sensor /BP (PS47)
[3]
[2]
[3] [4]
[1]
Paper size VR/BP (VR4) Paper size /SBP (PS48)
8050fs6610
(13) Vertical conveyance unit
[2]
[1]
8050fs6631
[1]
Vertical conveyance door sensor (PS51)
[2]
Vertical conveyance sensor (PS50)
6-7
VI DIAGRAMS
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING (14) ADU
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10] [11]
[5]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[7] [8] [9] [10] [11]
[1]
ADU conveyance sensor (PS20) ADU reverse sensor (PS21) Registration sensor (PS22)
8050fs6611
Intermediate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27) Intermediate conveyance sensor /2 (PS28) ADU pre-registration sensor (PS23) 2nd transfer HP sensor (PS24) Conveyance lever sensor (PS55) Reverse/exit sensor (PS19)
Bypass conveyance sensor (PS26) Tray upper limit sensor (PS25)
(15) Paper exit section (left side of the main body)
[2]
[1]
8050fs6612
[1]
Paper exit sensor (PS13)
[2]
Paper exit full sensor (PS12)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-8
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 (16) Fixing unit
[8] [7]
[1]
[2] [6]
[5] [3]
[4]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) Thermostat /1 (TS1) Fixing pressure/release sensor (PS16) [5] [6] [7] [8] Thermostat /2 (TS2)
8050fs6632
Fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) Fixing paper exit sensor (PS17) Fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4)
6-9
VI DIAGRAMS
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING B. Loads (1) Rear of the main body
[12]
[13]
[14] [15] [16] [17]
[18]
[19] [20] [21] [22]
[23]
[5] [4] [3] [2] [11]

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12]
[1]
8050fs6613
[10]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23]
[6]
DCPS cooling fan (M42) Developing motor /K (M23) Developing motor /C (M22) Developing motor /M (M21) Scanner motor (M1) Developing motor /Y (M20) Drum cooling fan /2 (M13) Drum cooling fan /1 (M12) Fixing cooling fan /3 (M36) Fixing cooling fan /2 (M37) Transfer belt motor (M18)
1st transfer pressure/release motor (M19) Drum motor /Y (M14) Drum motor /M (M15) Drum motor /C (M16) Drum motor /K (M17) Fixing cooling fan /1 (M10) IP cooling fan (M24) IPB cooling fan (M25) Tray up drive motor /1 (M40) Tray up drive motor /2 (M39) Tray up drive motor /3 (M38) Paper feed motor (M41)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-10
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 (2) Top of the main body
[1]
[2]
[1] Scanner cooling fan (M2) [2] Exposure lamp (L1)
8050fs6614
[1]
[1] Transfer belt cooling fan (M11)
8050fs6615
6-11
VI DIAGRAMS
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING (4) Right side of the main body
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[3]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Writing exhaust fan /2 (M46) Heater /1 (HTR1) Heater /2 (HTR2) Writing intake fan /2 (M44) [5] [6] [7]
[2]
[1]
8050fs6616
Writing intake fan /1 (M43) Writing exhaust fan /1 (M45) Drum unit fan (M47)
(5) Left side of the main body
[4]
[5]
[6]
[3] VI DIAGRAMS
[1] [2] [3] Paper exit fan /F (M28) Paper exit fan /M (M27) Paper exit fan /R (M26)
[2]
[4] [5] [6]
[1]
8050fs6617
Paper exit fan /3 (M63) (New type only) Paper exit fan /2 (M62) (New type only) Paper exit fan /1 (M61) (New type only)
6-12
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 (6) Write unit
[7] [6] [5]

[1] [2] [3] [4] Polygon motor /Y (M3) Polygon motor /M (M4) Polygon motor /C (M5) Polygon motor /K (M6)
[4] [3] [2] [1]

[5] [6] [7] Laser correction motor /Y (M7)* Laser correction motor /M (M8)* Laser correction motor /C (M9)*
8050fs6618
* Laser correction motor does not attached to write unit /K. (7) Process unit
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
8050fs6619
[1] [2] [3]
Pre-charging lamp /Y (PCL Y) Pre-charging lamp /M (PCL M) Pre-charging lamp /C (PCL C)
[4] [5]
Pre-charging lamp /K (PCL K) Belt separation claw solenoid (SD1)
6-13
VI DIAGRAMS
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING (8) Image correction unit
[2]
[1] Gamma shutter solenoid (SD3) [2]
[1]
8050fs6620
Color registration shutter solenoid (SD2)
(9) Toner supply unit
[9]
[10]
[1]
[2]
[8]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] Toner bottle clutch /M (MC15) Toner bottle motor (M53) Toner bottle clutch /C (MC16) Toner bottle clutch /K (MC17) Toner supply motor /K (M52)
[7] [6] [5]

[6] [7] [8] [9] [10]
[4] [3]
Toner supply motor /C (M51) Toner supply motor /M (M50) Charger intake fan (M48) Toner supply motor /Y (M49) Toner bottle clutch /Y (MC14)
8050fs6621
VI DIAGRAMS
6-14
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 (10) Paper feed tray 1 to 3
[7] [8] [9]
[6] [5] [4] [3] [2] [1]

8050fs6633
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
Pick up solenoid /1 (SD7) Pick up solenoid /2 (SD8) Pick up solenoid /3 (SD9) Paper feed clutch /1 (MC7) Paper feed clutch /2 (MC9)
[6] [7] [8] [9]
Paper feed clutch /3 (MC11) Pre-registration clutch /1 (MC8) Pre-registration clutch /2 (MC10) Pre-registration clutch /3 (MC12)
(11) Vertical conveyance unit
[1]
[1] Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 (MC13)
8050fs6634
6-15
VI DIAGRAMS
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING (12) ADU
[9]
[10] [11] [12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[8]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
[7]
[6] [5]
[4] [3] [2]

[9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15]
[1]
8050fs6622
Intermediate conveyance clutch /2 (MC4) Intermediate conveyance clutch /3 (MC5) ADU lock solenoid (SD6) ADU pre-registration clutch (MC3) ADU conveyance clutch /2 (MC1) Reverse/exit motor (M33) ADU conveyance clutch /1 (MC2) Reverse/exit solenoid (SD4)
ADU reverse motor (M32) 2nd transfer pressure/release motor (M34) Registration motor (M30) Loop roller motor (M31) Pick up solenoid /BP (SD5) Paper feed clutch /BP (MC6) Tray up drive motor /BP (M35)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-16
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 (13) Fixing unit
[1]
[5] [2]
[3] [4]
8050fs6635
[1] [2] [3]
Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2) Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3) Web motor (M54)
[4] [5]
Fixing motor (M29) Fixing lower lamp (L4)
6-17
VI DIAGRAMS
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING C. PCBs and others (1) Rear of the main body
[17]
[18] [19]
[20]
[21]
[22] [23]
[24]
[9] [10] [11] [12]
[8] [16]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2] [1]
[15]
AC drive board (ACDB) Noise filter (NF) Circuit breaker /2 (CBR2) Circuit breaker /1 (CBR1)
[14]
[13]
[13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23] [24] HDD: option (HD-106)
8050fs6623
HDD I/F board: option (HDD IFB) Extended memory: option (MU-412) Memory board (MB) High voltage unit /1 (HV1) Overall control board (OACB) Image processing board (IPB) Scanner drive board (SCDB) DC power supply unit /4:Option (DCPS4) High voltage unit /2 (HV2) Printer control board (PRCB) Fixing heater control board: only in EU (FHCB)
Transformer /LCT (TRNS2) Transformer /main body (TRNS1) DC power supply unit /2 (DCPS2) DC power supply unit /1 (DCPS1) Drum drive board /Y (DRDB Y) Drum drive board /M (DRDB M) Drum drive board /C (DRDB C) Drum drive board /K (DRDB K)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-18
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 (2) Top of the main body
[3]
[2]
[1]
8050fs6624
[1] [2]
CCD board (CCDB) Key counter (C (K))
[3]
L1 inverter board (L1 INVB)
[3]
[4]
[5] [6] [7] [8]
[2]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Black counter (C (BK)) Total counter (C (T)) Operation board /2 (OB2) Operation board /3 (OB3)
[1]
[5] [6] [7] [8] OB inverter board (OB INVB) LCD board (LCDB) Touch panel board Operation board /1 (OB1)
8050fs6625
6-19
VI DIAGRAMS
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING (4) Write unit
[2] [3] [4] [5]
[1]
[1] [2] Temp detection board (TDB) (attached to write unit /K only) Laser drive board /Y (LDB Y) [3] [4] [5] Laser drive board /M (LDB M) Laser drive board /C (LDB C) Laser drive board /K (LDB K)
8050fs6626
(5) Process unit
[4]
[1] [2] Drum potential sensor board /K (DRSPSB K) Drum potential sensor board /C (DRSPSB C)
[3]
[2]
[3] [4]
[1]
8050fs6627
Drum potential sensor board /M (DRSPSB M) Drum potential sensor board /Y (DRSPSB Y)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-20
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 (6) Image correction unit
[1]
[1] Color registration board /F (CRB/F) [2]
[2]
8050fs6636
Color registration board /R (CRB/R)
(7) Toner supply section
[1]
[1] Toner supply drive board (TSDB)
8050fs6628
(8) ADU
[1]
[1] Conveyance drive board (CVDB)
8050fs6629
6-21
VI DIAGRAMS
1.2
DF-319/AFR-20 parts layout drawing

[18] [2] [7] [15] [1] [3] [11] [10] [9]
[16] [5] [6] [8]

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] Paper feed motor (M301) Conveyance motor (M302) Reverse/exit motor (M303) Registration clutch (MC301) Registration sensor (PS301) Timing sensor (PS302) Paper feed cover sensor (PS303) No paper sensor (PS304) Reverse sensor (PS305) Paper exit sensor (PS306)
[17]
[4]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
8050fs6031
Paper exit cover sensor (PS307) Tray open/close sensor (PS308) Size sensor /S (PS309) Size sensor /L (PS310) Paper exit solenoid (SD301) Reverse solenoid (SD302) Size VR (VR301) RADF control board (DFCB) Size sensor board (SSB)
[12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19]
VI DIAGRAMS
6-22
1.3
LT-211/C-208 parts layout drawing

[13] [14] [15] SW100 SD100 [1]
FRONT
[2] [3] [12] [11] [10] [4]
[9]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
M100
[8]
M101 [16]
[9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16]
[7]
[6]
[5]
8050fs6700
Front door interlock switch (MS101) Paper mis-centering sensor (PS120) No paper sensor (PS108) Paper feed sensor (PS107) Feed sensor (PS106) Upper limit sensor (PS109) Pre-registration clutch (MC102) Lower limit sensor (PS101)
Remaining paper sensor /4 (PS105) Remaining paper sensor /3 (PS104) Remaining paper sensor /2 (PS103) Remaining paper sensor /1 (PS102) Top cover interlock switch (MS102) Top cover open/close sensor (PS100) Paper feed clutch (MC101) LT drive board (LTDB)
6-23
VI DIAGRAMS
1.4
FS-115/FS-215/FN-120/FN-9/FS-513/FS-606 parts layout drawing

[26] [27]
[25] [24] [23] [21] [20] [19] [18] [17] [16] [22]
[1] [2]
[3]
[4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] FRONT [15] [14] [13]
8050fs6701
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10]
Sub-tray paper exit sensor (PS701) Paper exit opening HP sensor (PS712) Gate HP sensor (PS716) FNS inlet sensor (PS704) Stapler movement motor (M711) FNS interlock switch (MS701) Clincher rotation motor (M704) Alignment HP sensor /L (PS724) (FS-215/FN-9/FS-606 only) Alignment motor /L (M716) (FS-215/FN-9/FS-606 only) Folding knife HP sensor (PS722) (FS-215/FN-9/FS-606 only) Folding knife motor (M719) (FS-215/FN-9/FS-606 only) Stopper motor (M718) (FS-215/FN-9/FS-606 only) 6-24
[13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23] [24] [25] [26] [27]
Clincher rotation HP sensor(PS714) Folding passage sensor (PS726) (FS-215/FN-9/FS-606 only) Stopper HP sensor (PS723) (FS-215/FN-9/FS-606 only) Stacker inlet sensor (PS705) Stacker no paper sensor (PS720) Stacker auxiliary solenoid (SD702) Stack auxiliary motor (M722) Alignment HP sensor /U (PS708) Paper exit belt HP sensor (PS709) Stacker inlet motor (M713) Shift HP sensor (PS718) Shift motor (M702) Main tray paper exit sensor (PS706) Sub-tray full sensor (PS719) Paper exit opening solenoid (SD704)
VI DIAGRAMS
[11] [12]
2
[12] [11]
[13] [14]
[10]
[1] [2]
[9]
[3] [4]
[8] [5] [7] [6]
8050fs6702
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]
Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor (PS707) Tray upper limit sensor (PS702) Counter rest sensor (PS715) Bypass gate solenoid (SD705) Tray lower limit sensor (PS703) Tray up/down motor (M703) Folding conveyance motor (M720) (FS-215/FN-9/FS-606 only)
[8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14]
Relay board (RB) FNS control board (FNSCB) Gate drive motor (M712) FNS conveyance motor (M701) Paper exit opening motor (M708) Sub-tray paper exit motor (M721) Paper exit opening roller motor (M707)
6-25
VI DIAGRAMS
[8] [7] [6]
[5]
[4]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Folding paper exit sensor (PS725) (FS-215/FN-9/FS-606 only) Folding full LED (LED729) (FS-215/FN-9/FS-606 only) Folding full sensor (PS729) (FS-215/FN-9/FS-606 only) Stapler rotation HP sensor (PS713)
[3]
[5] [6] [7] [8]
[2]
[1]
8050fs6703
Three-folding gate solenoid (SD706) (FS-215/FN-9/FS-606 only) Stapler rotation motor (M706) Stapler movement HP sensor (PS711) Alignment motor /U (M705)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-26
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3] [2] [1]

8050fs6704
[1] [2] [3]
Clincher motor /R (M710)/ clincher motor / F (M715) Clincher HP sensor /R (PS732) / clincher HP sensor /F (PS733) Stapler motor /R (M709) /stapler motor /F (M714)
[4] [5] [6]
Stapler HP sensor /R (PS730) /stapler HP sensor /F (PS731) Cartridge switch/R (SW701) / cartridge switch/F (SW703) Stapler switch/R (SW702) /stapler switch/F (SW704)
6-27
VI DIAGRAMS
1.5
TU-109/TMG-3 parts layout drawing

[11] [10] [1]
[2]
[3] [9] [8] [4] [6]

[7] [8] [9] [10] [11]
[7]
[5]
8050fs6705
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
Upper limit sensor (PS110) DC power unit (DCPS) Lower limit sensor (PS111) Holder motor (M106) Circuit breaker (CBR) Relay 1 (RL1)
Relay 2 (RL28) Coil (COL) Scrap box detection sensor (PS107) Conveyance motor (M101) TU drive board (TUDB)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-28
[13] [12]
[14]
[15]
[16] [1] [2]
[3]
[4]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16]
[6]
[5]
8050fs6706
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
Scrap removal fan motor (M108) Scrap full LED (LED101) Scrap full sensor (PS109) Entrance sensor (PS101) Trimmer motor (M102) Trimmer HP sensor (PS106) Press HP sensor (PS105) Press motor (M105)
Front door MS2 (MS2) Paper exit sensor (PS108) Stacker S3 (MS3) Stacker door sensor (PS114) Stacker MS4 (MS4) Stacker full sensor (PS113) Pusher HP sensor(PS112) Pusher motor (M107)
[1]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
8050fs6707
[1] [2] [3]
Stopper movement motor(M103) Conveyance sensor (PS102) Stopper release HP sensor (PS104)
[4] [5]
Stopper release motor (M104) Stopper HP sensor (PS103)
6-29
VI DIAGRAMS
1.6
PK-120/PK-5/PK-507 parts layout drawing

M801 Punch motor PAPER EDGE SENSOR Paper edge sensor (PK-120 only) PS802 Punch scraps full PS PS801 Punch HP PS
PS804 Punch scraps box set PS (PK-110 only)
PS804 Punch scraps box set PS (PK-120 only)
PKDB Punch drive board (PK-110 only)
PS803 Punch shift HP PS (PK-120 only) PKDB Punch drive board (PK-120 only) FRONT M802 Punch shift motor (PK-120 only)
8050fs6119e
VI DIAGRAMS
6-30
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
2. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING

2.1
2.1.1
8050/CF5001/C500/8150 connector layout drawing

Relay connector
A. Main body rear side - 1
621 (W : 7 pin)
622 (W : 4 pin)
127 (BK : 8 pin)
128 (BK : 8 pin) 623 (GY : 18 pin)
493 (BK : 4 pin)
269 (W : 4 pin)
501 (W : 34 pin) 504 (W : 8 pin) 146 (W : 2 pin) 471 (W : 9 pin) 141 (W : 2 pin) 140 (W : 4 pin) 479 (W : 3 pin)
456 (W : 7 pin) 457 (W : 4 pin)
124 (BK : 8 pin) 123 (BK : 10 pin) 143 (W : 2 pin) 142 (W : 4 pin)
8050fs6107
6-31
VI DIAGRAMS
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING B. Main body rear side - 2
377 (W : 22 pin)
304 (W : 6 pin) 292 (W : 9 pin) 341 (W : 7 pin) 345 (W : 4 pin) 342 (W : 7 pin) 346 (W : 4 pin) 293 (W : 2 pin) 496 (W : 22 pin) 354 (W : 7 pin) 294 (W : 9 pin) 355 (W : 4 pin) 343 (W : 7 pin) 347 (W : 4 pin) 344 (W : 7 pin) 348 (W : 4 pin) 295 (W : 2 pin) 358 (W : 6 pin) 296 (W : 9 pin) 297 (W : 2 pin) 291 (W : 3 pin) 126 (BK : 10 pin) 298 (W : 9 pin) 125 (BK : 10 pin) 299 (W : 2 pin)
8050fs6108
VI DIAGRAMS
6-32
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 C. Main body upper side
703 (W : 6 pin)
161 (W : 4 pin)
614 (W : 3 pin)
617 (W : 9 pin)
615 (W : 6 pin)
701 (W : 26 pin)
492 (W : 4 pin)
487 (W : 4 pin)
8050fs6109
6-33
VI DIAGRAMS
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING D. Main body right side
652 (W : 2 pin)
653 (W : 2 pin)
654 (W : 2 pin)
655 (W : 2 pin)
443 (W : 12 pin)
466 (W : 8 pin)
465 (W : 11 pin) 452 (W : 8 pin)

8050fs6110
VI DIAGRAMS
6-34
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 E. Main body left side
754 (W : 3 pin) (New type only) 751 (W : 6 pin) (New type only)
468 (W : 6 pin)
469 (W : 6 pin)
483 (W : 6 pin)
482 (W : 12 pin)
8050fs6111e
F.
Writing section
273 (W : 17 pin) 656 (W : 15 pin)
277 (W : 17 pin)
660 (W : 15 pin)
281 (W : 17 pin) 664 (W : 15 pin)
285 (W : 17 pin)
8050fs6112
6-35
VI DIAGRAMS
668 (W : 15 pin)
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING G. Process unit section
361 (BK : 60 pin)
367 (W : 12 pin) 366 (W : 8 pin)
8050fs6113
H. Toner supply section
170 (W : 12 pin)
171 (W : 6 pin) 741 (W : 8 pin)
8050fs6115
VI DIAGRAMS
6-36
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 I. Paper supply tray 1 to 3
566 (W : 2 pin) 567 (W : 2 pin) 568 (W : 2 pin) 401 (BK : 32 pin) 415 (BK : 32 pin) 429 (BK : 32 pin) 402 (W : 13 pin) 416 (W : 13 pin) 430 (W : 13 pin) 409 (W : 5 pin) 423 (W : 5 pin) 437 (W : 5 pin)
8050fs6116
J.
ADU section
511 (W : 11 pin) 505 (W : 8 pin) 502 (W : 34 pin) 521 (W : 6 pin)
514 (W : 6 pin) 557 (W : 3 pin) 555 (W : 6 pin)
556 (W : 3 pin) 508 (W : 4 pin) 509 (W : 3 pin) 530 (B : 3 pin) 570 (W : 4 pin) 552 (W : 3 pin) 551 (BK : 3 pin) 554 (W : 3 pin)
8050fs6117
6-37
VI DIAGRAMS
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING K. Fixing section
130 (BK : 12 pin)
516 (W : 3 pin)
131 (BK : 12 pin)

8050fs6118
VI DIAGRAMS
6-38
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 2.1.2 Connector in the board
A. Printer control board
650 (W : 20 pin) 357 (W : 9 pin) 360 (W : 40 pin) 391 (GY : 18 pin) 651 (W : 20 pin) 384 (W : 30 pin) 572 (W : 10 pin) (New type only) 340 (W : 28 pin) 572 (W : 10 pin) (Old type only) 620 (BN : 7 pin) 600 (BN : 20 pin) 300 (BN : 18 pin) 303 (W : 2 pin) 302 (W : 6 pin) 574 (W : 3 pin) 376 (W : 28 pin) 564 (W : 2 pin) 309 (W : 36 pin) 700 (W : 26 pin)
393 (W : 24 pin) 573 (W : 3 pin)
353 (BN : 12 pin)
500 (BN : 34 pin) 467 (BN : 6 pin)
400 (BN : 32 pin) 2 (N.C.) 4 (N.C.) 414 (B : 32 pin) 459 (W : 10 pin) 151 (GY : 8 pin) 36 (N.C.) 730 (W : 32 pin) 301 (W : 4 pin) 1 (N.C.)
428 (BN : 30 pin)
464 (BN : 19 pin) 736 (W : 24 pin) 442 (W : 34 pin) 150 (GY : 24 pin) 37 (N.C.)
8050fs6033e
6-39
VI DIAGRAMS
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING B. AC drive board
120 (W : 5 pin)
152 (W : 11 pin)
156 (W : 5 pin) 153 (W : 4 pin)
121 (W : 8 pin)
155 (W : 5 pin)
157 (W : 4 pin)
8050fs6034
C. CCD drive board
511 (W : 50 pin)
8050fs6035
D. Conveyance drive board
534 (W : 12 pin) 536 (W : 6 pin)
3 (N.C.) 5 (N.C.) 539 (W : 22 pin)
524 (W : 7 pin) 518 (W : 15 pin) 569 (B : 4 pin) 513 (W : 6 pin)
548 (W : 6 pin)
507 (W : 6 pin)
527 (W : 15 pin)
1 (N.C.)
503 (W : 34 pin)
510 (W : 11 pin)
8050fs6036
VI DIAGRAMS
6-40
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 E. DC power unit/1
102 (W : 4 pin) 103 (W : 6 pin) 108 (W : 4 pin) 101 (W : 3 pin) 106 (W : 8 pin) 107 (W : 7 pin) 104 (W : 10 pin) 105 (W : 6 pin)
8050fs6037
F.
DC power unit/2
111 (W : 12 pin) 110 (W : 4 pin) 112 (W : 6 pin) 113 (W : 4 pin) 114 (W : 9 pin) 115 (W : 8 pin)
8050fs6038
G. DC power unit/3
109 (W : 6 pin)
8050fs6100
6-41
VI DIAGRAMS
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING H. Drum drive board /Y, /M, /C, /K
316,323,330,337 (W : 3 pin)
313,320,327,334 (W : 6 pin)
312,319,326,333 (W : 2 pin)
311,318,325,332 (W : 9 pin)
8050fs6039
I.
Fixing heater control board
158 (W : 4 pin)
8050fs6040
J.
High voltage unit/1
731 (W : 8 pin)
732 (W : 8 pin)
735 (W : 3 pin)
733 (W : 8 pin)
734 (W : 8 pin)
8050fs6041
VI DIAGRAMS
6-42
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 K. High voltage unit/2
737 (W : 12 pin) 739 (W : 3 pin) 738 (W : 10 pin) 740 (N.C.)

8050fs6042
L.
Image processing board
271 (W : 6 pin)
270 (BK : 60 pin) 260 (W : 68 pin)
253 (BK : 100 pin)
272 (W : 34 pin)
220 (W : 120 pin)
254 (BK : 120 pin)
280 (B : 34 pin)
9 (N.C.) 8 (N.C.)
8050fs6043
6-43
VI DIAGRAMS
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING M. Index sensor /Y, /M, /C, /K
274,278,282,286 (GY : 5 pin)
8050fs6044
N. L1 inverter board
606 (W : 3 pin)
?? (W : 4 pin)
8050fs6045
O. Laser drive board /Y, /M, /C, /K
275,279,283,287 (W : 12 pin)
8050fs6046
P.
Memory board
141 (W : 40 pin)
142 (W : 20 pin)
8050fs6047
VI DIAGRAMS
6-44
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Q. Overall control board
250 (W : 18 pin)
217 (BN : 50 pin)
258 (N.C.)
13 (N.C.) 251 (W : 16 pin) 270 (W : 60 pin) 12 (N.C.) 252 (W : 4 pin) 9 (N.C.)
257 (BK : 9 pin)
253 (W : 100 pin)
10 (N.C.)
256 (BK : 36 pin)
259 (BK : 4 pin) 254 (W : 120 pin) 11 (N.C.) 6 (N.C.) 7 (N.C.) 255 (BK : 8 pin)
5 (N.C.)
14 (N.C.)
8 (N.C.)
8050fs6048
R. OB inverter board
166 (W : 4 pin)
165 (W : 3 pin)
8050fs6049
6-45
VI DIAGRAMS
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING S. Operation board /1
176 (W : 6 pin)
173 (W : 6 pin)
172 (W : 12 pin)
175 (W : 4 pin) 174 (W : 14 pin)
8050fs6050
T.
Operation board /2
162 (W : 3 pin)
8050fs6051
U. Operation board /3
158 (W : 3 pin)
8050fs6101
VI DIAGRAMS
6-46
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 V. Scanner drive board
607 (W : 3 pin) 609 (W : 14 pin)
1 (N.C.)
601 (W : 20 pin) 603 (W : 3 pin)
602 (W : 4 pin) 605 (W : 3 pin)
8050fs6052
W. Temperature detection board
670 (W : 3 pin)
8050fs6053
X. Toner supply drive board
704 (W : 6 pin)
724 (W : 18 pin)
705 (W : 7 pin)
708 (W : 11 pin)
8050fs6054
Y.
Gamma sensor
8050fs6055
6-47
VI DIAGRAMS
558 (W : 5 pin)
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING Z. Color registration board /F, /R

8050fs6056
VI DIAGRAMS
6-48
2.2
DF-319/AFR-20 connector layout drawing
A. DF drive board
14 (W : 9 pin)
13 (W : 15 pin)
3 (W : 7 pin) 12 (W : 5 pin) 1 (N.C.) 5 (W : 5 pin) 8 (N.C.) 2 (W : 6 pin)
4 (W : 6 pin)
7 (W : 9 pin)
10 (W : 8 pin)
6 (W : 2 pin)
8050fs6102
6-49
VI DIAGRAMS
2.3
LT-211/C-208 connector layout drawing

802 (W : 10 pin) 807 (W : 14 pin)
5 (N.C.) 804 (W : 12 pin) 4 (N.C.)
805 (W : 11 pin)
800 (W : 6 pin) 808 (W : 2 pin) 803 (W : 6 pin) 3 (N.C.) 801 (W : 11 pin)
806 (W : 15 pin)
2 (N.C.) 1 (N.C.)
8050fs6103
VI DIAGRAMS
6-50
2.4
FS-115/FS-215/FN-120/FN-9/FS-513/FS-606 connector layout drawing
A. FNS control board
61 (W : 2 pin) 51 (W : 32 pin)
33 (W : 38 pin)
12 (W : 24 pin) 1 (W : 18 pin) 10 (W : 4 pin) 11 (W : 9 pin) 7 (W: 6 pin) 5 (W : 22 pin) 6 (W : 5 pin) 62 (W : 40 pin) 8 (W : 8 pin) 52 (W : 6 pin)
43 (W : 8 pin) FS-215/FN-9/FS-606 only 42 (W : 5 pin) FS-215/FN-9/FS-606 only 41 (GY : 30 pin) FS-215/FN-9/FS-606 only 9 (W : 28 pin) FS-215/FN-9/FS-606 only 4 (W : 40 pin) 2 (W : 5 pin) 3 (W : 11 pin)
8050fs6104e
B. Relay board
6 (W : 30 pin)
5 (W : 30 pin)
10 (W : 8 pin) 4 (W : 24 pin) FS-215/FN-9/FS-606 only 1 (W : 40 pin) 7 (W : 28 pin) FS-215/FN-9/FS-606 only 8 (W : 34 pin) 9 (W : 2 pin) FS-215/FN-9/FS-606 only
2 (W : 22 pin) 3 (W : 28 pin) FS-215/FN-9/FS-606 only
8050fs6105e
6-51
VI DIAGRAMS
2.5
TU-109/TMG-3 connector layout drawing

402 (GY : 28 pin) 404 (GY : 18 pin) 406 (GY : 20 pin)
403 (W : 5 pin) 401 (GY : 40 pin) 405 (W : 4 pin) 408 (W : 3 pin) 407 (W : 2 pin)
409 (W : 4 pin)
8050fs6106
2.6
PK-120/PK-5/PK-507 connector layout drawing
A. Punch control board
69 (W : 6 pin)
70 (W : 15 pin)
68 (W : 8 pin)
64 (W : 2 pin) 65 (W : 5pin)
66 (GY : 9 pin) 63 (GY : 38 pin)

8050fs6120
67 (W : 3 pin)
B. Paper edge sensor
25 (W : 7 pin)
8050fs6121
VI DIAGRAMS
6-52
3.1
Item
Time (sec)
Paper feed motor (M41) Pick up solenoid /1 (SD7) Paper feed clutch /1 (MC7) Pre-registration clutch /1 (MC8)
Pre-registration sensor /1 (PS29) Intermediate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27) Intermediate conveyance sensor /2 (PS28) Registration sensor (PS22)
Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 (MC13) Intermediate conveyance clutch /2 (MC4) Intermediate conveyance clutch /3 (MC5)
3. TIMING CHART
V_TOP
Loop roller motor (M31) Register out roller motor (M30) F Fixing motor (M29) R
Fixing paper exit sensor (PS17) Paper exit sensor (PS13) Reverse/exit sensor (PS19) ADU reverse sensor (PS21) ADU conveyance (PS20) ADU pre-registration sensor (PS23)
ument of 2 copies, paper feed tray /1 paper feed
8050/CF5001/C500/8150 timing chart
6-53
1st transfer pressure/release motor (M19) 2nd transfer pressure/release motor(M34) Reverse/exit motor (M33) F R ADU reverse motor (M32) F R
A. Full color, life size, ADF single sided original document of 2 sheets, double sided original doc-
Reverse/exit solenoid (SD4) ADU conveyance clutch /1 (MC2) ADU conveyance clutch /2 (MC1) ADU pre-registration clutch (MC3)
Drum motor /Y (M14) Drum motor /M (M15) Drum motor /C (M16) Drum motor /K (M17) Transfer belt motor (M18)
Charging /Y Charging /M Charging /C Charging /K Developer bias DC /Y Developer bias DC /M Developer bias DC /C Developer bias DC /K
Developer bias AC /Y Developer bias AC /M Developer bias AC /C Developer bias AC /K 1st transfer /Y 1st transfer /M 1st transfer /C 1st transfer /K
8050fs6324
2nd transfer Separation AC/DC Transfer Drum separation claw solenoid (SD1)
TIMING CHART
VI DIAGRAMS
VI DIAGRAMS
TIMING CHART
3.2
No paper sensor PS304
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
Registration sensor PS301
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
Registration clutch MC301
OFF ON
Paper feed motor M301
CW 300 mm/s
CW 67 mm/s
Stop
CCW 300 mm/s
CCW 710 mm/s
Timing sensor PS302
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
DF-319/AFR-20 timing chart
Conveyance motor M302
CW 710 mm/s
Stop
6-54
CCW 138 mm/s
CCW 300 mm/s CCW 710 mm/s
Reverse sensor PS305
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
Reverse/exit motor M303
CW 710 mm/s
CW 400 mm/s
A. A4, life size, single-sided original document, original document of 3 sheets (1/3)
CW 350 mm/s
CW 150 mm/s
Stop
CCW 710 mm/s
CCW 900 mm/s
Paper exit sensor PS306
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
Reverse solenoid SD302
8050fs6310
Paper exit solenoid SD301
OFF ON OFF ON
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
OFF ON
CW 300 mm/s
CW 67 mm/s
Stop
CCW 300 mm/s
CCW 710 mm/s
Timing sensor PS302
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
CW 710 mm/s
Stop
6-55
CCW 138 mm/s
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
A. A4, life size, single sided original document, original document of 3 sheets (2/3)
CW 710 mm/s
CW 400 mm/s
CW 350 mm/s
CW 150 mm/s
Stop
CCW 150 mm/s
CCW 400 mm/s
CCW 710 mm/s
CCW 900 mm/s
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
TIMING CHART
VI DIAGRAMS
8050fs6311
OFF ON OFF ON
VI DIAGRAMS
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
TIMING CHART
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
OFF ON
CW 300 mm/s
CW 67 mm/s
Stop
CCW 300 mm/s
CCW 710 mm/s
Timing sensor PS302
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
CW 710 mm/s
Stop
6-56
CCW 138 mm/s
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
CW 710 mm/s
CW 400 mm/s
A. A4, life size, single sided original document, original document of 3 sheets (3/3)
CW 350 mm/s
CW 150 mm/s
Stop
CCW 150 mm/s
CCW 400 mm/s
CCW 710 mm/s
CCW 900 mm/s
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
8050fs6312
OFF ON OFF ON
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
OFF ON
CW 300 mm/s
CW 67 mm/s
Stop
CCW 300 mm/s
CCW 710 mm/s
Timing sensor PS302
Paper unloaded Paper loaded
CW 710 mm/s
Stop
6-57
CCW 138 mm/s
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
CW 710 mm/s
B. A4, life size, double sided original document, original document of 3 sheets (1/4)
CW 400 mm/s
CW 350 mm/s
CW 150 mm/s
Stop
CCW 150 mm/s
CCW 400 mm/s
CCW 710 mm/s
CCW 900 mm/s
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
TIMING CHART
VI DIAGRAMS
8050fs6313
OFF ON OFF ON
VI DIAGRAMS
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
TIMING CHART
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
OFF ON
CW 300 mm/s
CW 67 mm/s
Stop
Timing sensor PS302
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
CW 710 mm/s
Stop
6-58
CCW 138 mm/s
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
CW 710 mm/s
CW 400 mm/s
CW 350 mm/s
CW 150 mm/s
Stop
CCW 150 mm/s
CCW 400 mm/s
CCW 710 mm/s
CCW 900 mm/s
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
8050fs6314
OFF ON OFF ON
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
OFF ON
CW 300 mm/s
CW 67 mm/s
Stop
Timing sensor PS302
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
CW 710 mm/s
Stop
6-59
CCW 138 mm/s
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
CW 710 mm/s
B. A4, life size, double sided original document, original documents of 3 sheets (3/4)
CW 400mm/s
CW 350mm/s
CW 150mm/s
Stop
CCW 150mm/s
CCW 400 mm/s
CCW 710 mm/s
CCW 900 mm/s
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
TIMING CHART
VI DIAGRAMS
8050fs6315
OFF ON OFF ON
VI DIAGRAMS
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
TIMING CHART
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
OFF ON
CW 300 mm/s
CW 67 mm/s
Stop
Timing sensor PS302
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
CW 710 mm/s
Stop
6-60
CCW 138 mm/s
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
CW 710 mm/s
CW 400 mm/s
CW 350 mm/s
CW 150 mm/s
Stop
CCW 150 mm/s
CCW 400 mm/s
CCW 710 mm/s
CCW 900 mm/s
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
8050fs6316
OFF ON OFF ON
3.3
Time (sec) Item Paper feed motor (M101)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Paper feed clutch (MC101)
A. A4, single sided, 2-sheet paper feed
LT-211/C-208 timing chart
Paper feed solenoid (SD100)
Pre-registration clutch (MC102)
6-61
Paper feed sensor (PS107)
Feed sensor (PS106)
Intermediate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27)
8050fs6317
Start button ON
TIMING CHART
VI DIAGRAMS
VI DIAGRAMS
TIMING CHART
3.4
Item
Time (sec)
1 2 3 4
Code
FNS Entrance sensor
PS704
FNS Conveyance motor
670 mm/s
400 mm/s
M701
M702
A
PS718
Shift motor Shift HP sensor Paper exit opening solenoid
SD704
Paper exit roller motor
253 mm/s
M707
400 mm/s
Main tray paper exit sensor PS706 Tray upper limit sensor PS702 UP M703 Tray up/down motor DOWN
Copy 1 Page 1 Copy 1 Page 2 Copy 2 Page 1
FNS operation start signal ON
A. Sort, A4, document of 2 sheets, 3-copy setting, single sided
FS-115/215/FN-120/9/FS-513/606 timing chart
6-62
6 7 8 9
Item
670 mm/s 400 mm/s
Time (sec) FNS Entrance sensor
Code
PS704

253 mm/s 400 mm/s Copy 3 Page 1 Copy 3 Page 2
FNS Conveyance motor M701

M702 PS718 SD704
Shift motor Shift HP sensor Paper exit opening solenoid Paper exit roller motor
M707
Main tray paper exit sensor PS706 Tray upper limit sensor PS702 UP Tray up/down motor M703 DOWN
8050fs6318
Copy 2 Page 2
Code PS704 M701 SD705 PS705 M713 M722 SD702

2 3 4 5 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
M705
M711
A
M714, M715
Time (sec) Item FNS Entrance sensor FNS Conveyance drive motor 670 mm/s Bypass gate solenoid Stacker entrance sensor Stacker entrance motor Stack drive motor Stack drive solenoid Close Alignment motor /U Open Stapler movement motor Stapler, clincher motor /F Stapler, clincher motor /R Paper exit belt HP sensor Main tray paper exit sensor Paper exit opening solenoid
M709, M710
PS709 PS706 SD704
Paper exit roller motor
950 mm/s 660 mm/s M707 280 mm/s
Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor
PS707 UP M703 Tray up/down motor DOWN

Copy 1 Page 1
26 27 28 29
6-63
Copy 1 Page 2 Copy 1 Page 3 Copy 1 Page 9 Copy 1 Page 10
30
FNS operation start signal ON
Copy 1 Page 11
Copy 2 Page 1 Copy 2 Page 2

31 32
Copy 2 Page 3 Time (sec)

670 mm/s
Copy 2 Page 4 Item
FNS Entrance sensor

FNS conveyance drive motor
B. Flat stapling at 2 points, A4, document of 11 sheets, 2-copy setting

A
Code PS704 M701 SD705 PS705 M713 M722 SD702 Bypass gate solenoid Stacker entrance sensor Stacker entrance motor Stack drive motor Stack drive solenoid Close Alignment motor /U Open M705
Stapler movement motor M711
M714, M715 Stapler, clincher motor /F M709, M710 Stapler, clincher motor /R Paper exit belt HP sensor PS709 Main tray paper exit sensor PS706 Paper exit opening solenoid SD704 950 mm/s 660 mm/s Paper exit roller motor 280 mm/s Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor
M707 PS707 UP Tray up/down motor DOWN

Copy 2 Page 9 Copy 2 Page 10 Copy 2 Page 11
TIMING CHART
VI DIAGRAMS
8050fs6319
M703
VI DIAGRAMS
TIMING CHART
Item
Time (sec)
1 6 8 2 3 4 5 7 9
Code FNS Entrance sensor PS704 FNS Conveyance drive motor M701 Stacker Entrance sensor PS705 Stacker 670 mm/s entrance motor 500 mm/s M713 Alignment HP sensor /U PS708 Alignment Close motor /U Open M705 Alignment HP sensor /L PS724 Alignment motor /L Close M716 Open Stapler motor,clincher motor /F M714, M715 Stapler motor,clincher motor /R M709, M710 PS723 Stopper HP sensor Stopper motor Down M718 Up Folding con670 mm/s veyance motor 500 mm/s M720 Folding conveyance sensor PS725 Folding knife motor M719 Folding knife HP sensor PS722 Folding passage sensor PS726 Paper exit opening HP sensor PS712 Paper exit opening motor M706
A
6-64
Copy 1 Page 1
12 13 14 15 16
FNS Operation Open start signal ON

11
Copy 1 Page 2
Copy 1 Page 3
17
C. Stitch and fold, A4R, original document of 3 sheets, 2-copy setting, single sided

Copy 2 Page 2 Copy 2 Page 3
10
Time (sec) Item Code FNS Entrance sensor PS704 FNS Conveyance motor M701 Stacker Entrance sensor PS705 670 mm/s Stacker entrance motor M713 500 mm/s Alignment HP sensor /U PS708 Close Alignment motor /U M705 Open Alignment HP sensor /L PS724 Close Alignment motor /L M716 Open Stapler motor,clincher motor /F M714, M715 Stapler motor,clincher motor /R M709, M710 Stopper HP sensor PS723 Down Stopper motor M718 Up 400 mm/s Folding Conveyance motor M720 800 mm/s
Folding conveyance sensor PS72 Folding knife motor M719 Folding knife HP sensor PS722 Folding passage sensor PS726 Paper exit opening HP sensor PS712 Paper exit opening HP sensor M708
8050fs6320
Copy 2 Page 1
Item
Time (sec)
0 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 14
Code
M707 PS709 PS704 M712
M705
Paper exit roller motor Paper exit belt HP sensor FNS Entrance sensor Gate drive motor Close Alignment motor /U Open Close Alignment motor /L Open Stacker Entrance sensor
A
M716
PS705
Stacker entrance motor
670 mm/s 500 mm/s
M713
PS726 M719 PS722 M701
M718
Folding passage sensor Folding knife motor Folding knife HP sensor FNS Conveyance motor Down Stopper motor Up Three-folding gate solenoid Folding Conveyance motor Folding exit sensor
SD706 M720 PS725
6-65 FNS operation start signal ON

16 17 18 19 20
Time (sec)
Code M707 PS709 PS704 M712 M705 M716 PS705

670 mm/s 500 mm/s
D. Three-folding, A4R, original document of 3 sheets, 2-copy setting, single sided

A
Item Paper exit roller motor Paper exit belt HP sensor FNS Entrance sensor Gate drive motor Close Alignment motor /U Open Close Alignment motor /L Open Stacker Entrance sensor Stacker entrance motor
M713 PS726 M719 PS722 M701 M718 SD706 M720 PS725 Folding passage sensor Folding knife motor Folding knife HP sensor FNS Conveyance motor Down Stopper motor Up Three-folding gate solenoid Folding Conveyance motor Folding exit sensor
TIMING CHART
VI DIAGRAMS
8050fs6321
VI DIAGRAMS
TIMING CHART
3.5
Time (sec)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89
Code
Item
-52
-51
90
91
92
93
A. Cutting mode, A3, 16 sheets, 2 copies
TU-109/TMG-3 timing chart
Folding Conveyance motor M720 (FNS)
Conveyance motor M101 Entrance sensor PS101 Stopper motor M103 Conveyance sensor PS102
6-66 Copy 2
Press motor M105 Cutter motor M102 Stopper clear motor M104
Holder motor M106 Pressure motor M107
Copy 1
8050fs6322
B. Through mode, A3, 16 sheets, 2 copies
Time (sec) Code Item Folding Conveyance motor M720 (FNS) Conveyance motor M101 Entrance sensor PS101
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 82 83 84 85 86 87
-52
-51
88
89
90
91
92
93
6-67 Copy 1
Stopper motor M103 Conveyance sensor PS102 Press motor M105 Cutter motor M102
Stopper clear motor M104 Holder motor M106 Pressure motor M107 Paper exit sensor PS108
Copy 2
TIMING CHART
VI DIAGRAMS
8050fs6323
VI DIAGRAMS
TIMING CHART
3.6
Time (sec) Symbol Items PS37 Paper exit PS M712 Gate drive motor PS PS704 FNS entrance PS Paper edge sensor F M802 Punch shift motor R M801 Punch motor PS801 Punch HP PS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10
PK-120/PK-5/PK-507 timing chart
M701
FNS conveyance motor
6-68
A. Punch, 2-staple flat stapling, A4, 2 sheets, 3 copies set, single sided
SD705 Bypass gate SD PS705 Stacker entrance PS M713 Stacker entrance motor M705 Alignment motor /U CLOSE OPEN M714 Stapler, clincher motor /F M715 M709 Stapler, clincher motor /R M710 M707 Paper exit roller motor PS709 Paper exit belt HP PS
PS706 Main tray paper exit PS
SD704 Paper exit SD
Start signal for FNS ON
8050fs6122
OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
4. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM

4.1 DF-319/AFR-20 Overall Wiring Diagram
1 A
PAPER FEED COVER SENSOR
4
DFCB
9 A
M301 PS303
PAPER FEED MOTOR
NO PAPER SENSOR
PS304
M302
CONVEYANCE MOTOR
REGISTRATION SENSOR
PS301
TIMING SENSOR
PS302
TRAY OPEN/CLOSE SENSOR
M303
REVERSE/EXIT MOTOR
PS308
SIZE SENSOR BOARD
D
SIZE SENSOR/L
D
SD302
REVERSE SOLENOID
SSB PS310
SIZE SENSOR/S
PS309 SD301
PAPER EXIT SOLENOID
SIZE VR
VR301 MC301
REGISTRATION CLUTCH
F
REVERSE SENSOR
F
PS305
PAPER EXIT SENSOR
PS306
G
PAPER EXIT COVER SENSOR
G
PS307
Symbol
I 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6-69
Connector Faston Crimp Relay connector
9
2
Symbol DFCB M301 M302 M303 MC301 PS301 PS302 PS303 PS304 PS305 PS306 PS307 PS308 PS309 PS310 SD301 SD302 SSB VR301 RADF control board Paper feed motor Conveyance motor Reverse/exit motor Registration clutch Registration sensor Timing sensor
Part name 4-A 7-A 7-B 7-C 7-F 1-B 1-C 1-A 1-B 1-F 1-G 1-G 1-D 1-E 1-D 7-E 7-D 2-D 1-E
Location
Paper feed cover sensor No paper sensor Reverse sensor Paper exit sensor Paper exit cover sensor Tray open/close sensor Size sensor /S Size sensor /L Paper exit solenoid Reverse solenoid Size sensor board Size VR
6-70
4.2
LT-211/C-208 Overall Wiring Diagram

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
FRONT DOOR UPPER COVER PREOPEN/CLOSE OPEN/CLOSE REGISTSENSOR TRAY DOWN SENSOR PAPER FEED RATION SWITCH CLUTCH CLUTCH
8
PAPER FEED MOTOR
9 A
PAPER MIS-CENTERING SENSOR
PS120 SW100
810-5 810-7 810-10 810-1 810-2 810-3 810-4 810-6 810-8 810-9
PS115
832-1 832-2 832-3
PS100
CONT 833-1 833-2 833-3
M101
CLK CW/CCW S.G. P.G. P.G. 24V 815-10 24V 815-11 H/L
MC101 MC102
5V 815-1 815-2
815-3
815-4
815-5
815-6
815-7
815-8
826-2-1
826-1-2
830-2-1
834-1 834-2 835-1 835-2
HTR100 HTR101
830-1-2
813-1
813-2
815-9
B
MAIN BODY
LD
B
MS102 MS101
839-1-5
839-2-4
839-3-3
839-4-2
836-1 836-2
839-5-1
817-2 817-1 816-2 816-1
HTR102
C
ACDB DCPS2
153-3 24VAC(H) 153-4 24VAC(N) 111-10 PGND 111-7 24V2 466-8 466-7 466-6 466-5
802-5 SGND
802-6 SI
802-7 SGND
802-1 VIDEO
802-2 SGND
802-8 CLOCK
802-9 LED
802-10 24V2
802-3 5V2
802-4 -5V
804-1 DW_SW
804-9 24V2
804-10 CONT
804-11 24V2
804-2 SGND
804-12 CONT
805-6 LCTM_EM
805-3 LCTMCONT
805-7 LCTMGAIN
805-2 SGND
805-8 PGND
805-4 LCTM_CLOCK
805-5 LCTM_F/R
805-9 PGND
805-1 5V2
805-10 24V2
804-5 SGND
800-6 PGND 800-3 24V2
D
DCPS1
804-8 SGND
805-11 24V2
804-3 5V2
804-4 PS
804-6 5V2
804-7 PS
106-8 SGND 106-7 12V 106-6 SGND 106-3 5V2
466-4 466-3 466-2 466-1
800-5 SGND 800-2 12V 800-4 SGND 800-1 5V2
E
PRCB
464-1 LTNP_SIG 464-2 LTRP_SIG 464-3 LTSO_SIG 464-4 SGND 464-5 LTCCL 464-6 LTSSD 464-7 LTRCL 464-8 LTSCL 464-9 SGND
465-1 465-2 465-3 465-4 465-5 465-6 465-7 465-8 465-9 465-10 465-11
801-11 LTNP_SIG 801-10 LTRP_SIG 801-9 LTSO_SIG 801-8 SGND 801-7 LTCCL 801-6 LTSSD 808-1 DRIVE1 808-2 DRIVE2 807-14 SGND 806-13 SGND 806-10 SGND 807-11 SGND 807-6 SGND 806-7 SGND 806-4 SGND 806-1 SGND 807-3 SGND 801-5 LTRCL 801-4 LTSCL 801-3 SGND 801-2 SIN(RXD) 801-1 SOUT(TXD) 803-4 DRIVE 803-1 DRIVE 803-6 PGND 803-3 PGND 803-5 LOCK 803-2 LOCK 807-2 CONT 806-15 5V2 806-12 5V2 807-12 5V2
LTDB
806-9 5V2
806-6 5V2
806-3 5V2
807-9 5V2
807-8 5V2
807-5 5V2
806-14 PS
806-11 PS
807-13 PS
807-10 PS
807-1 24V
806-8 PS
806-5 PS
806-2 PS
807-7 PS
807-4 PS
464-10 SOUT(TXD) 464-11 SIN(RXD)
837-6-1
837-5-2
837-4-3
837-3-4
837-2-5
837-1-6
841-14-1
841-13-2
841-12-3
841-11-4
841-10-5
841-5-10
841-4-11
841-3-12
841-2-13
G
812-3-1 812-2-2 812-1-3 811-3-1 811-2-2 811-1-3
841-1-14
841-9-6
841-8-7
841-7-8
841-6-9
829-2-1
M100
PS101
PS102
PS103
PS104
PS105
M136
M137
PS106
FEED SENSOR
PS107
PS108
PS109
SD100
I 1 2 3
Faston Connector Crimp Relay connector
UP/DOWN MOTOR
LOWER LIMIT REMAINING REMAINING REMAINING REMAINING SENSOR PAPER PAPER PAPER PAPER SENSOR/1 SENSOR/2 SENSOR/3 SENSOR/4
PAPER FEED PAPER FEED ASSIST FAN/F ASSIST FAN/R
PAPER NO PAPER UPPER PAPER FEED SENSOR LIMIT FEED SENSOR SENSOR SOLENOID
829-1-2
814-1
814-2
818-1
818-2
818-3
819-1
819-2
819-3
820-1
820-2
820-3
821-1
821-2
821-3
822-1
822-2
822-3
823-1
823-2
823-3
824-1
824-2
824-3
825-1
825-2
825-3
831-1
831-2
831-3
Symbol
I 5 6 7 8 9

6-71
2
Symbol LT211 M101 M100 M136 M137 MC101 MC102 MS101 MS102 PS120 PS100 PS101 PS102 PS103 PS104 PS105 PS106 PS107 PS108 PS109 PS115 SD100 SW100 HTR100 HTR101 HTR102 LTDB LT211 Paper feed motor Up/down motor
Part name 4-D 8-A 5-H 7-H 7-H 7-B 7-B 9-C 9-C 6-A 7-A 5-H 5-H 6-H 6-H 6-H 7-H 8-H 8-H 8-H 7-A 8-H 6-B 5-B 5-B 5-C 4-D
Location
Paper feed assist fan/F Paper feed assist fan/R Paper feed clutch Pre-registration clutch Front door interlock switch Upper cover interlock switch Paper mis-centering sensor Upper cover open/close sensor Lower limit sensor Remaining paper sensor /1 Remaining paper sensor /2 Remaining paper sensor /3 Remaining paper sensor /4 Feed sensor Paper feed sensor No paper sensor Upper limit sensor Front door open/close sensor Paper feed solenoid Tray down switch Heater/1 Heater/2 Heater/3 LT drive board
6-72
4.3
I 1 1
ALIGNMENT MOTOR/L
M716 PS724
12-A2 5V 12-A8 PS 12-B5 GND
1 2 3 121-1 121-2 121-3 172-1 172-2 172-3 191-4 191-5 191-6
150-1 150-2 150-3 150-4 150-5 150-6
7-A1 24V 7-A2 24V 7-A3 A 7-A4 A 7-A5 B 7-A6 B 8-1 24V 8-2 24V 8-3 A 8-4 A 8-5 B 8-6 B
100-2 100-5 100-1 100-3 100-4 100-6
M701
FNS CONVEYANCE MOTOR
ALIGNMENT HP SENSOR/L
4-A9 5V 4-A8 PS 4-A7 GND
142 3 2 1
PS704
FNS ENTRANCE SENSOR
FOLDING STOPPER MOTOR
M718
151-2 151-5 151-4 151-6 151-3 151-1
7-A7 24V 7-A8 24V 7-A9 A 7-A10 A 7-A11 B 7-A12 B

190-1 190-2 190-3
FOLDING STOPPER HP SENSOR
PS723 M719
153-1 152-1 152-2
171-1 171-2 171-3
4-A6 5V 4-A5 PS 4-A4 GND 7-A13 24V 7-A14 DRIVE 12-A4 5V 12-A10 PS 12-B3 GND
FOLDING KNIFE MOTOR
12-B12 B 12-B11 B 12-B10 A 12-B9 A 12-B8 24V 12-B7 24V
4 2 3 1 6 5
105 3 5 4 6 1 2
M712
GATE DRIVE MOTOR
123-1 123-2 123-3
FS-215/FN-9/FS-606 ONLY
FS-115/215/FN-120/9/FS-513/606 Overall Wiring Diagram
2
FOLDING KNIFE HP SENSOR
2
GATE HP SENSOR
PS716
PS722
170-1 170-2 170-3
4-A3 5V 4-A2 PS 4-A1 GND
FOLDING CONVEYANCE MOTOR
M720
153-1 153-7 153-3 153-4 153-6 153-5 153-10 153-11 153-8 153-9 153-2
7-B1 5V 7-B2 BRAKE 7-B3 CONT 7-B4 CLOCK 7-B5 PLL 7-B6 F/R 7-B7 24V 7-B8 24V 7-B9 PGND 7-B10 PGND 7-B11 SGND 7-B13 24V 7-B14 CONT
10-1 24V 10-2 DRIVE
102-1 102-2
M702
127-1 127-2 127-3
SHIFT MOTOR
THREE-FOLDING GATE SOLENOID
SD706
160-1 160-2
11-3 5V 11-6 PS 11-9 GND
PS718
SHIFT HP SENSOR
FOLDING EXIT SENSOR
PS725 PS726
175-1 194-2 174-1 174-2 174-3 193-1 193-2 193-3
173-1 173-2 173-3 191-1 191-2 191-3
4-A12 5V 4-A11 PS 4-A10 GND 4-B3 5V 4-B2 PS 4-B1 GND 4-B6 5V 4-B4 GND
3
FOLDING PASSAGE SENSOR FOLDING FULL LED
1-A1 5V
LED729
175-3 194-1 176-1
FOLDING FULL SENSOR
PS729
176-3
9-2 GND 9-1 PS
1-A3 P/S 1-A4 CLOCK 1-A5 F/R 1-A6 LOCK 1-A7 H/L 1-A8 PGND 1-A9 PGND 1-B2 24V 1-B1 24V 8-8 DRIVE 8-7 24V 12-A3 5V 12-A9 PS 12-B4 GND
110
104-1 104-2 NC 104-3 104-4 104-5 104-6 104-7 NC 104-8 104-9 104-10 104-11 101-1 101-2
M707
PAPER EXIT ROLLER MOTOR
CLINCHER MOTOR/R
M710 PS732 M715 PS733

SGND PS 5V DRIVE2 DRIVE2 SGND PS 5V
DRIVE2 DRIVE2
CLINCHER HP SENSOR/R
179-4 179-3 179-2 179-1 179-5 179-6 179-7
5-B12 24V 5-B13 24V 5-B14 M710 DRIVE2 5-B15 M710 DRIVE2 5-B4 SGND 5-B5 PS732 5-B6 5V
1-A1 1-A2 1-A3 1-A4 1-A5 1-A6 1-A7 1-A8 1-A9 1-A10 1-A11 1-A12 1-A13 1-A14 1-A15 1-A16 1-A17 1-A18 1-A19 1-A20 1-B1 1-B2 1-B3 1-B4 1-B5 1-B6 1-B7 1-B8 1-B9 1-B10 1-B11 1-B12 1-B13 1-B14 1-B15 1-B16 1-B17 1-B18 1-B19 1-B20 2-A1 2-A2 2-A3 2-A4 2-A5 2-A6 2-A7 2-A8 2-A9 2-A10 2-A11 2-B1 2-B2 2-B3 2-B4 2-B5 2-B6 2-B7 2-B8 2-B9 2-B10 2-B11 4-A1 24V 4-A2 24V 4-A3 24V 4-A4 24V 4-A5 NC 4-A6 PGND 4-A7 PGND 4-A8 PGND 4-A9 PGND 4-A10 M713 CLOCK 4-A11 M713 RESET 4-A12 M713 CONT 4-A13 M704 A 4-A14 M704 A 4-A15 M704 B 4-A16 M704 B 4-A17 M705 A 4-A18 M705 A 4-A19 M705 B 4-A20 M705 B 4-B1 SG 4-B1 SG 4-B3 SG 4-B4 5V 4-B5 5V 4-B6 5V 4-B7 M711 A 4-B8 M711 A 4-B9 M711 B 4-B10 M711 B 4-B11 M706 A 4-B12 M706 A 4-B13 M706 B 4-B14 M706 B 4-B15 M709 CONT 4-B16 M709 F/R 4-B17 M710 CONT 4-B18 M714 CONT 4-B19 M714 F/R 4-B20 M715 CONT 5-A1 PS705 5-A2 PS708 5-A3 PS709 5-A4 PS711 5-A5 PS713 5-A6 PS714 5-A7 PS720 5-A8 F_CHP 5-A9 R_CHP 5-A10 5-A11 5-B1 5-B2 F_LS 5-B3 F_DHP 5-B4 F_CS 5-B5 F_LST 5-B6 F_CD 5-B7 R_LS 5-B8 R_DHP 5-B9 R_CS 5-B10 R_LST 5-B11 R_CD
M708
122-1 122-2 122-3
PAPER EXIT OPENING MOTOR
PS712
10-3 24V 10-4 DRIVE
PAPER EXIT OPENING HP SENSOR
4
CLINCHER MOTOR/F CLINCHER HP SENSOR/F CLINCHER ROTATION MOTOR
178-4 178-3 178-2 178-1 178-5 178-6 178-7
5-B8 24V 5-B9 24V 5-B10 M715 DRIVE2 5-B11 M715 DRIVE2 5-B1 SGND 5-B2 PS733 5-B3 5V
SD704
PAPER EXIT OPENING SOLENOID
M704
154-1 154-2 154-5 154-6 154-3 154-4
5-A1 24V 5-A2 24V 5-A3 A 5-A4 A 5-A5 B 5-A6 B
11-1 5V 11-4 PS 11-7 GND
125-1 125-2 125-3
PS706
MAIN TRAY PAPER EXIT SENSOR
CLINCHER ROTATION HP SENSOR
PS714
177-3 177-2 177-1
5-A15 5V 5-A14 IN 5-A13 SGND
FS-215/FN-9/FS-606 ONLY
STAPLER MOTOR/R
M709 PS730 SW701 SW702 M714 PS731 SW703 SW704
3-A1 NC 3-A2 3-A3 3-A4 3-A5 3-A6 3-A7 3-A8 3-A9 3-A10 SGND 3-A11 3-A12 3-A13 3-A14 3-B1 3-B2 3-B3 NC 3-B4 3-B5 3-B6 3-B7 3-B8 3-B9 3-B10 3-B11 3-B12 3-B13 3-B14
9-A1 SUBIN5PI 9-A2 SD706 CONT 9-A3 PS722 9-A4 PS723 9-A5 PS724 9-A6 PS725 9-A7 PS726 9-A8 PS729 9-A9 PS730 9-A10 BMSET 9-A11 M716 A 9-A12 M716 A 9-A13 M716 B 9-A14 M716 B 9-B1 M719 DRIVE1 9-B2 M719 DRIVE2 9-B3 SUBOUT1 9-B4 M718 MODE 9-B5 M718 CLOCK 9-B6 M718 RESET 9-B7 M718 F/R 9-B8 M718 CONT1 9-B9 M718 CONT2 9-B10 M720 BRAKE 9-B11 M720 CONT 9-B12 M720 CLOCK 9-B13 M720 PLL 9-B14 M720 F/R
STAPLER HP SENSOR/R CARTRIDGE SWITCH/R STAPLE SWITCH/R
DRIVE1 DRIVE1 DRIVE2 DRIVE2 SGND PS 5V R_CST 5V R_LS 5V
180-11 180-12 180-8 180-9 180-6 180-3 180-5 180-2 180-4 180-1 180-7
8-A1 M709 DRIVE1 8-A2 M709 DRIVE1 8-A3 M709 DRIVE2 8-A4 M709 DRIVE2 8-A5 5V 8-A6 R_LS 8-A7 PS730 8-A8 R_CS 8-A9 R_CST-IN 8-A10 R_CD 8-A11 SGND
2-1 DRIVE-F 2-2 DRIVE-R
106-1 106-2
M703
TRAY UP/DOWN MOTOR
5
STAPLER MOTOR/F STAPLER HP SENSOR/F CARTRIDGE SWITCH/F STAPLE SWITCH/F
DRIVE1 DRIVE1 DRIVE2 DRIVE2 SGND PS 5V F_CST 5V F_LS 5V
2-3 5V 2-4 PS 2-5 GND
130-1 130-2 130-3
PS703
3-1 5V 3-4 PS 3-7 GND
131-1 131-2 131-3
TRAY LOWER LIMIT SENSOR
PS702
3-2 5V 3-5 PS 3-8 GND 3-3 5V 3-6 PS 3-9 GND
132-1 132-2 132-3
TRAY UPPER LIMIT SENSOR
181-11 181-12 181-8 181-9 181-6 181-3 181-5 181-2 181-4 181-1 181-7
8-B1 M714 DRIVE1 8-B2 M714 DRIVE1 8-B3 M714 DRIVE2 8-B4 M714 DRIVE2 8-B5 5V 8-B6 F_LS 8-B7 PS731 8-B8 F_CS 8-B9 F_CST-IN 8-B10 F_CD 8-B11 SGND
PS707
133-1 133-2 133-3
STAPLER PAPER EXIT UPPER LIMIT SENSOR

STAPLER ROTATION MOTOR
PS715 M706
156-1 156-2 156-5 156-6 156-3 156-4
COUNTER RESET SENSOR

8-A12 24V 8-A13 24V 8-A14 A 8-A15 A 8-A16 B 8-A17 B 3-10 24V 3-11 DRIVE
111-1 111-2
SD705
STAPLER ROTATION HP SENSOR
BY-PASS GATE SOLENOID
6
PS713
182-3 182-2 182-1
8-B17 GND 8-B16 PS 8-B15 5V
STAPLER MOVEMENT MOTOR
M711
155-1 155-2 155-5 155-6 155-3 155-4
5-A7 24V 5-A8 24V 5-A9 A 5-A10 A 5-A11 B 5-A12 B
FNS CB
STAPLER MOVEMENT HP SENSOR
PS711
ALIGNMENT MOTOR/U
187-1 187-2 187-3
199-3 199-2 199-1
1 2 3
6-B6 5V 6-B5 PS 6-B4 GND
1-B8 B 1-B7 B 1-B6 A 1-B5 A 1-B4 24V 1-B3 24V
103-4 104-3 104-6 104-5 104-2 104-1
M721
SUB-TRAY PAPER EXIT MOTOR
RB
M705
157-1 157-2 157-3 157-4 157-5 157-6
6-A1 24V 6-A2 24V 6-A3 A 6-A4 A 6-A5 B 6-A6 B
12-A1 5V 12-A7 PS 12-B6 GND
1 2 3
141 4 3 2
120-1 120-2 120-3
PS701
SUB-TRAY PAPER EXIT SENSOR
ALIGNMENT HP SENSOR/U
PS708
STACKER ENTRANCE MOTOR
183-1 183-2 183-3
195-6 195-5 195-4
4 5 6
6-A9 5V 6-A8 PS 6-A7 GND
12-A5 5V 12-A11 PS 12-B2 GND
1 2 3
140 3 2 1
124-1 124-2 124-3
PS719 M713
158-1 158-6 158-3 158-4 158-5 158-6
6-B10 24V 6-B11 24V 6-B12 A 6-B13 A 6-B14 B 6-B15 B
SUB-TRAY FULL SENSOR
6-73
STACKER ENTRANCE SENSOR PAPER EXIT BELT HP SENSOR STACKER NO PAPER SENSOR
PS705 PS709 PS720
186-1 186-2 186-3
198-3 198-2 198-1
1 2 3
6-B3 5V 6-B2 PS 6-B1 GND

184-1 184-2 184-3 185-1 185-2 185-3 195-9 195-8 195-7 195-3 195-2 195-1 1 2 3 7 8 9 29-2
6-A12 5V 6-A11 PS 6-A10 GND 10-1 24V 10-2 N.C. 10-3 DRIVE 10-4 N.C. 10-5 N.C. 10-6 N.C. 10-7 24V 10-8 CONT 6-A15 5V 6-A14 PS 6-A13 GND
6-1 24V-PS
29-1
MS701
FNS INTERLOCK SWITCH
8
113-1 113-2 111-2 111-1
6-2 5V 6-3 SGND 6-4 PGND 6-5 PGND
753-1 753-2 753-3 753-4 753-5 753-6
1-1 24V 1-2 5V 1-3 SGND 1-4 PGND 1-5 PGND 1-6 FGND
MAIN BODY
Symbol
7-1 SRXD 7-2 SGND 7-3 SRTS 7-4 STXD 7-5 SGND 7-6 SCTS
752-1 752-2 752-3 752-4 752-5 752-6
752-6 752-5 752-4 752-3 752-2 752-1
106-1 MTXD 106-2 SGND 106-3 MCTS 106-4 MRXD 106-5 SGND 106-6 MRTS1
M722 SD702
STACKING ASSIST MOTOR
STACKING ASSIST SOLENOID
Symbol FNSCB M701 M702 M703 M704 M705 M706 M707 M708 M709 M710 M711 M712 M713 M714 M715 M716 M718 M719 M720 M721 M722 SD702 SD704 SD705 SD706 MS701 PS701 PS702 PS703 PS704 PS705 PS706 PS707 PS708 PS709 PS711 PS712 PS713 PS714 PS715 PS716 FNS control board
Part name 1-C 1-A 3-A 5-B 4-H 7-H 6-H 3-A 4-A 5-H 4-H 6-H 2-B 7-H 5-H 4-H 1-H 2-H 2-H 2-H 7-A 9-E 9-E 4-B 6-B 3-H 8-A 7-A 5-B 5-B 1-A 7-H 4-B 6-B 7-H 8-H 7-H 4-A 6-H 5-H 6-B 2-A FNS conveyance motor Shift motor Tray up/down motor Clincher rotation motor Alignment motor/U Stapler rotation motor Paper exit roller motor Paper exit opening motor Stapler motor/R Clincher motor/R Stapler movement motor Gate drive motor Stacker entrance motor Stapler motor/F Clincher motor/F Alignment motor/L Folding stopper motor Folding knife motor Folding conveyance motor Sub-tray paper exit motor Stacking assist motor Stacking assist solenoid Paper exit opening solenoid Bypass gate solenoid Three-folding gate solenoid FNS interlock switch Sub-tray paper exit sensor Tray upper limit sensor Tray lower limit sensor FNS entrance sensor Stacker entrance sensor Main tray paper exit sensor Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor Alignment HP sensor/U Paper exit belt HP sensor Stapler movement HP sensor Paper exit opening HP sensor Stapler rotation HP sensor Clincher rotation HP sensor Counter reset sensor Gate HP sensor
Location PS718 PS719 PS720 PS722 PS723 PS724 PS725 PS726 PS729 PS730 PS731 PS732 PS733 LED729 SW701 SW702 SW703 SW704
Symbol Shift HP sensor Sub-tray full sensor
Part name 3-B 7-A 8-H 2-H 2-H 1-H 3-H 3-H 3-H 5-H 5-H 4-H 4-H 3-H 5-H 5-H 6-H 6-H
Location
Stacker no paper sensor Folding knife HP sensor Folding stopper HP sensor Alignment HP sensor/L Folding exit sensor Folding passage sensor Folding full sensor Stapler HP sensor/R Stapler HP sensor/F Clincher HP sensor/R Clincher HP sensor/F Folding full LED Cartridge switch/R Staple switch/R Cartridge switch/F Staple switch/F
6-74
4.4
TU-109/TMG-3 Overall Wiring Diagram

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A
Symbol
I 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Faston Connector Crimp Relay connector
6-75
Symbol CBR Coil DCPS LED101 M101 M102 M103 M104 M105 M106 M107 M108 MS2 MS3 MS4 PS101 PS102 PS103 PS104 PS105 PS106 PS107 PS108 PS109 PS110 PS111 PS112 PS113 PS114 RL1 RL2 TUDB Circuit breaker Coil
Part name 2-H 4-H 5-H 2-D 1-D 3-D 3-C 3-C 5-D 7-B 7-B 1-C 3-H 6-D 7-D 2-D 4-D 4-D 4-D 5-D 3-D 2-D 6-D 2-D 6-D 6-D 6-D 5-C 5-C 2-H 2-H 1-E
Location
DC power supply unit Scraps full LED Conveyance motor Trimmer motor Stopper motor Stopper release motor Press motor Holder motor Pusher motor Scraps removal motor Front door MS Stacker MS3 Stacker MS4 Entrance PS Conveyance PS Stopper HP PS Stopper release HP PS Press HP PS Trimmer HP PS Scraps box detection PS Exit PS Scraps full PS Upper limit PS Lower limit PS Pusher PS Stacker full PS Stacker door PS Relay 1 Relay 2 TU drive board

6-76
4.5
I 1 1 2
CN551-1 CN551-2
M801
PUNCH MOTOR
PK-120/PK-5/PK-507 Overall Wiring Diagram
FNS CB
4
CN61-1 24V CN61-2 PG CN64-1 24V CN64-2 PG L L L L L
CN501-1 CN501-2 CN501-3
PS801
PUNCH HP SENSOR
CN62-A 1 5V CN62-A 2 5V CN62-A 3 CN62-A 4 CN62-A 5 CN62-A 6 CN62-A 7 CN62-A 8 CN62-A 9 CN62-A10 CN62-A11 CN62-A12 CN62-A13 N.C. CN62-A14 CN62-A15 N.C. CN62-A16 N.C. CN62-A17 CN62-A18 CN62-A19 N.C. CN62-A20 N.C. CN62-B 1 N.C. CN62-B 2 N.C. CN62-B 3 PKSET2 CN62-B 4 PKSET P CN62-B 5 SIG_1 P CN62-B 6 SIG_2 P CN62-B 7 SIG_3 P CN62-B 8 SIG_4 P CN62-B 9 SIG_5 P CN62-B10 SIG_6 P CN62-B11 SIG_7 P CN62-B12 SIG_8 P CN62-B13 SIG_9 P CN62-B14 SIG_10 CN62-B15 M801CONT CN62-B16 M801F/R CN62-B17 N.C. CN62-B18 N.C. CN62-B19 SG CN62-B20 SG CN63-A 1 5V CN63-A 2 5V CN63-A 3 OUT-1 P CN63-A 4 OUT-2 P CN63-A 5 OUT-3 P CN63-A 6 OUT-4 P CN63-A 7 OUT-5 P CN65-1 M801 DRV1 CN63-A 8 OUT-6 P CN65-2 M801 DRV2 CN63-A 9 OUT-7 P CN63-A10 OUT-8 P CN63-A11 OUT-9 P CN63-A12 OUT-10 P CN63-A13 N.C. CN63-A14 PS801 L CN63-A15 N.C. CN63-A16 N.C. CN63-A17 PS802 IN H CN63-A18 PS804 IN H CN63-A19 N.C. CN63-A20 N.C. CN63-B 1 N.C. CN63-B 2 N.C. CN63-B 3 PKSET2 L CN63-B 4 PKSET L CN63-B 5 CN63-B 6 CN65-3 PS801 5V CN63-B 7 H CN65-4 PS801 IN CN63-B 8 CN65-5 PS801 SG CN63-B 9 CN63-B10 CN63-B11 CN63-B12 CN63-B13 CN63-B14 CN63-B15 CN63-B16 CN63-B17 N.C. CN63-B18 N.C. CN63-B19 SG CN63-B20 SG
CN68-1 5V CN68-2 IN1 CN68-3 IN2 CN68-4 IN3 CN68-5 IN4 CN68-6 IN5 CN68-7 SG CN68-8 N.C.
CN504-1 CN504-2 CN504-3 CN504-4 CN504-5 CN504-6 CN504-7
PAPER EDGE SENSOR
5
CN66-2 PS804 5V H CN66-5 PS804 IN CN66-8 PS804 SG CN504-1 CN504-2 CN504-3
PS804
PUNCH SCRAPS BOX SET SENSOR
CN66-3 5V NC CN66-6 IN NC CN66-9 SG NC CN66-1 PS802 5V H CN66-4 PS802 IN CN66-7 PS802 SG
CN531-3 CN531-2 CN531-1
CN531-1 CN531-2 CN531-3
CN502-1 CN502-2 CN502-3
PS802
PUNCH SCRAPS FULL SENSOR
PKDB
6 7
6 7
P P P P
CN69-1 24V CN69-2 24V CN69-3 M802 DRVA CN69-4 M802 DRVA CN69-5 M802 DRVB CN69-6 M802 DRVB
CN158-3 CN158-9 CN158-1 CN158-5 CN158-7 CN158-11
M802
PUNCH SHIFT MOTOR
6-77
CN67-1 PS803 5V H CN67-2 PS803 IN CN67-3 PS803 SG CN505-1 CN505-2 CN505-3
PS803
PUNCH SHIFT HP SENSOR
8
Symbol Faston Connector Crimp Relay connector
Symbol PKDB FNS CB M801 PS801 PS804 PS802 M802 PS803 Punch drive board FNS control board Punch motor Punch HP PS Paper edge sensor
Part name 2-D 2-H 3-B 4-B 5-B 5-B 6-B 7-A 8-B
Location
Paper scraps box set PS Paper scraps full PS Punch shift motor Punch shift HP PS
6-78
5.1
I
F/G F/G
623-1-1 623-1B-8B 24V
5. APPENDIX
8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Overall Wiring Diagram (1/8)
1
623-2B-7B 24V PGND PGND 5V 5V SGND SGND DTXD SGND CTS DRXD SGND 623-3B-6B 623-4B-5B 622-3-3 622-4-4 622-1-1 622-2-2 621-7-1 621-6-2 621-5-3 621-4-4 621-3-5 621-2-6 621-1-7 623-3A-7A 623-2A-8A 623-1A-9A 623-4A-6A 623-5A-5A 623-6A-4A 623-7A-3A 623-8A-2A 623-9A-1A 623-8B-1B 623-7B-2B 623-6B-3B 623-5B-4B
15 ADF (OPTION) 16 114 115 134 135 136 137 138 139
RTS DSET
2
140 141
601-20 601-19 601-18 601-17 603-2 V 603-3 W 617-9-1 605-1 24V4 605-2 CONT 605-3 PGND 617-8-2 617-7-3 606-1 606-2 606-3 603-1 U
604-7
142 143 144 145

601-16 601-15 601-14 601-13
M1
604-2 604-1
604-6 604-5 604-4 604-3
SCANNER MOTOR
146 147 148 149

601-12 601-11 601-10 601-9
L1
L1 INVB
150 151
EXPOSURE LAMP
3
152 153
601-8 601-7 601-6 601-5
154
274-5 273-17 - 1 272-17A IDXYJTB
609-7 5V2 609-8 PS
617-6-4 617-5-5 609-9 SGND 617-4-6
615-6-1 615-5-2 615-4-3
612-3 612-2 612-1
155
PS3
274-4
273-16 - 2
156
272-16A SGND
157
274-3 273-15 - 3 272-15A LDYIDX
601-4 601-3 601-2 601-1
APS SENSOR/S
617-3-7 609-10 5V2 609-11 PS 609-12 SGND 602-1 5V2 602-2 SGND 602-3 24V2 602-4 PGND 609-1 SGND 609-2 PS 617-2-8 617-1-9 615-3-4 615-2-5 615-1-6 613-3 613-2 613-1
158
INDEX SB Y
274-2 272-14A SGND 273-14 - 4
159
MU-412 (OPTION)
274-1
273-13 - 5
160
272-13A LD5V 272-12A LDYJTB
PS4
SCDB
275-12 273-12 - 6 273-11 - 7 272-11A MPCYLD 272-10A MPCYDI 272-9A MPCYCK 272-8A /ALMYRST 272-7A /LDYALM 272-6A PWMY272-5A PWMY+ 272-4A /LDYENB 272-3A /S/H_Y 272-2A SGND 272-1A LD5V 273-10 - 8 273- 9 - 9 273- 8 - 10 273- 7 - 11 273- 6 - 12 273- 5 - 13 273- 4 - 14 273- 3 - 15 273- 2 - 16 273- 1 - 17 275-11 275-10 275-9 275-8
APS SENSOR/L
11 12 13 14
614-3-1 614-2-2 609-3 5V2 609-4 SGND 609-5 PS 609-6 5V2 609-13 SIG 609-14 SGND 608-3-1 607-1 CONT 608-2-2 607-2 EM 608-1-3 607-3 PGND 614-1-3
610-3
PS1
610-2 610-1 611-3
SCANNER HP SENSOR
LDB Y
4
275-7 275-6 275-5 275-4 275-3 275-2 275-1 278-5 277-17 - 1 272-17B IDXMJTB 272-16B SGND 272-15B LDMIDX 272-14B SGND 272-13B LD5 272-12B LDMJTB 272-11B MPCMLD 272-10B MPCMDI 272-9B MPCMCK 272-8B /ALMMRST 272-7B /LDMALM 272-6B PWMM272-5B PWMM+ 277- 4 - 14 277- 3 - 15 277- 2 - 16 279-2 279-1 277- 1 - 17 272-4B /LDMENB 272-3B /S/H_Y 272-2B SGND 272-1B LD5V 277-16 - 2 277-15 - 3 277-14 - 4 277-13 - 5 277-12 - 6 277-11 - 7 277-10 - 8 277- 9 - 9 277- 8 - 10 277- 7 - 11 277- 6 - 12 277- 5 - 13 278-4 278-3 278-2 278-1 279-12 279-11 279-10 279-9 279-8 279-7 279-6 279-5 279-4 279-3
PS2
611-2 611-1 616-2 616-1
APS TIMING SENSOR
RS1 M2
RESET SWITCH
SCANNER COOLING FAN
INDEX SB M
5
LDB M
HDD IFB
CN220(PCi B to B)
HD-106 (OPTION)
HD -106
IPB 1/2
SCANNER UNIT 1/2
6
INDEX SB C LDB C
269-1 282-5 282-4 282-3 282-2 282-1 283-12 283-11 283-10 283-9 283-8 281-17 - 1 281-16 - 2 281-15 - 3 281-14 - 4 281-13 - 5 281-12 - 6 281-11 - 7 281-10 - 8 281- 9 - 9 281- 8 - 10 280-17A IDXCJTB 280-16A SGND 280-15A LDCIDX 280-14A SGND 280-13A LD5V 280-12A LDCJTB 269-5 280-11A MPCCLD 280-10A MPCCDI 280-9A MPCCCK 280-8A /ALMCRST 269-6 269-7 269-8 269-2 269-3 269-4
266-1 12V 266-2 SGND 266-3 SGND 266-4 5V2
131 132 133 130 136 137 135 134
267-1 12V 267-2 SGND 267-3 SGND 267-4 5V2
HDD
7
Appendix-1
283-7 283-6 283-5 283-4 283-3 283-2 283-1
281- 7 - 11 281- 6 - 12 281- 5 - 13 281- 4 - 14 281- 3 - 15 281- 2 - 16 281- 1 - 17
280-7A /LDCALM 280-6A PWMC280-5A PWMC+ 280-4A /LDCENB 280-3A /S/H_C 280-2A SGND 280-1A LD5V
138 141 139 140
280-1 SGND 280-2 SGND 280-3 5V3 280-4 5V3
286-5 286-4 286-3 286-2
285-17 - 1 285-16 - 2 285-15 - 3 285-14 - 4
280-17B IDXKJTB 280-16B SGND 280-15B LDKIDX 280-14B SGND
INDEX SB K
IP-921 (OPTION) 1/2
IP-901(OPTION) 1/2
8 9
2
286-1 287-12 287-11 287-10 287-9 287-8 287-7 287-6 287-5 287-4 287-3 287-2 287-1
285-13 - 5 285-12 - 6 285-11 - 7 285-10 - 8 285- 9 - 9 285- 8 - 10 285- 7 - 11 285- 6 - 12 285- 5 - 13 285- 4 - 14 285- 3 - 15 285- 2 - 16 285- 1 - 17
280-13B LD5V 280-12B LDKJTB 280-11B MPCKLD 280-10B MPCKDI 280-9B MPCKCK 280-8B /ALMKRST 280-7B /LDKALM 280-6B PWMK280-5B PWMK+ 280-4B /LDKENB 280-3B /S/H_K 280-2B SGND 280-1B LD5V
LDB K
260-B34 GND 260-B33 N.C 260-B32 WAKEUP260-B31 CPRDY+ 260-B30 CTS260-B29 RXD+ 260-B28 ONLINE260-B27 AC_DOWN+ 260-B26 ENG_SLP260-B25 ENG_SET+ 260-B24 RTS260-B23 TXD+ 260-B22 PSIG0260-B21 GND 260-B20 PSIG1260-B19 PSIG2260-B18 GND 260-B17 PCLK260-B16 PSIG3260-B15 GND 260-B14 PSIG4260-B13 PSIG5260-B12 GND 260-B11 PSIG6260-B10 PSIG7260-B8 SSIG3+ 260-B7 SCLK+ 260-B5 SSIG2+ 260-B4 SSIG1+ 260-B3 GND 260-B2 SSIG0+ 260-B1 GND 260-A34 GND 260-A33 N.C 260-A32 WAKEUP+ 260-A31 CPRDY260-A30 CTS+ 260-A29 RXD260-A28 ONLINE+ 260-A27 AC_DOWN260-A26 ENG_SLP+ 260-A25 ENG_SET260-A24 RTS+ 260-A23 TXD260-A22 PSIG0+
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
Symbol ADF HD-106 HDD HDD IFB INDX SB Y INDX SB M INDX SB C INDX SB K IP-901 IP-921 L1 LDB Y LDB M LDB C LDB K M1 M2 MU-412 PS1 PS2 PS3 PS4 RS1 L1INVB IPB SCDB
Part name ADF (option) HD-106 (option) HDD (IP-921) HDD I/F board INDEX sensor board /Y INDEX sensor board /M INDEX sensor board /C INDEX sensor board /K IP-901 (option) IP-921 (option) Exposure lamp Laser drive board /Y Laser drive board /M Laser drive board /C Laser drive board /K Scanner motor Scanner cooling fan MU-412 (option) Scanner HP sensor APS timing sensor APS sensor /S APS sensor /L DF Reset switch L1 inverter Image processing board Scanner drive board 1-A 6-D 7-D 5-D 3-I 5-I 6-I 8-I 7-D 7-D 3-A 4-I 5-I 7-I 8-I 2-A 5-A 3-F 4-A 4-A 3-A 4-A 4-A 3-B 3-F 2-C
Location

Appendix-2
2
5.2
I 1 1
271-1 12V 271-2 SGND 271-3 5V2 271-4 SGND 271-5 3.5V 271-6 SGND
7 10 5 6 8 9
IP-921 (OPTION) 2/2
IP-901(OPTION) 2/2
IPB 2/2
SCANNER UNIT 2/2
2
161
250-1 250-2 250-3 250-4
260-A21 GND 260-A20 PSIG1+ 260-A19 PSIG2+ 260-A18 GND 260-A17 PCLK+ 260-A16 PSIG3+ 260-A15 GND 260-A14 PSIG4+ 260-A13 PSIG5+ 260-A12 GND 260-A11 PSIG6+ 260-A10 PSIG7+ 260-A9 GND 260-A8 SSIG3260-A7 SCLK260-A6 GND 260-A5 SSIG2260-A4 SSIG1260-A3 GND 260-A2 SSIG0260-A1 GND
CCDB
162 163 164 165

250-5 250-6 250-7 250-8
166
3
167 168 169
250-9 250-10 250-11 250-12
170 171 172 173

250-13 250-14 250-15 250-16
174 175 176 177

250-17 250-18
178
4
OACB
217-50 GND 217-49 AD_12V 217-48 AD_12V 217-47 GND 217-46 AD_5V 217-45 AD_5V 217-44 AD_5V 217-43 AD_5V 217-42 AD_5V 217-41 ADRST 217-40 LVDSCK1+ 217-39 LVDSCK1217-38 GND 217-37 AD_D4+ 217-36 AD_D4217-35 GND 217-34 AD_D3+ 217-33 AD_D3217-32 GND 217-31 LVDSCK0+ 217-30 LVDSCK0217-29 GND 217-28 AD_D2+ 217-27 AD_D2217-26 GND 217-25 AD_D1+ 217-24 AD_D1217-23 GND 217-22 AD_D0+ 217-21 AD_D0217-20 GND 217-19 SDO 217-18 SDI 217-17 /SEN 217-16 SCK 217-15 GND 217-14 LVDSCK217-13 LVDSCK+ 217-12 GND 217-11 RCK217-10 RCK+ 217-9 GND 217-8 TCK217-7 TCK+ 217-6 GND 217-5 BCLAMP 217-4 ACLAMP 217-3 CLAMP 217-2 TG 217-1 GND
551-50 551-49 551-48 551-47 551-46 551-45 551-44 551-43 551-42 551-41 551-40 551-39 551-38 551-37 551-36 551-35 551-34 551-33 551-32 551-31 551-30 551-29 551-28 551-27 551-26 551-25 551-24 551-23 551-22 551-21 551-20 551-19 551-18 551-17 551-16 551-15 551-14 551-13 551-12 551-11 551-10 551-9 551-8 551-7 551-6 551-5 551-4 551-3 551-2 551-1
5
252-1 5V1 252-2 SGND 252-3 REM/1 252-4 AC_OFF
171-1-6 173-1 5V2 171-2-5 173-2 5V2 171-3-4 173-3 SGND 171-4-3 173-4 SGND 171-5-2 173-5 12V 171-6-1 173-6
175-4 175-3 175-2 175-1
Y1CONT X1CONT Y2CONT X2CONT
3 1 2 4
TOUCH PANEL BOARD
4PIN CT6PIN
75 78 77 79 76
174-14
LCD_ADJ
MB
LCDB
LCD_24V 251-1 DATA_M 251-2 DATA_OP 251-3 ACK_M 251-4 ACK_OP 251-5 REQ_M 251-6 REQ_OP 170-12-1 170-11-2 170-10-3 170-9-4 170-8-5 170-7-6 172-12 172-11 174-11 172-10 174-10 172-9 172-8 172-7 170-6-7 251-7 CARDIN 251-8 CARD_RXD 251-9 CARD_TXD 251-10 WT_LED 251-11 ST_LED 251-12 ST_SIG 251-13 SW_SIG 170-5-8 170-4-9 170-3-10 170-2-11 170-1-12 174- 9 174- 8 174- 7 LD1 LD0 LCD_24V GND LD2 174-13 174-12 LD3
6 7
14PIN
USB
172-6 172-5 172-4
CT12PIN
259-1 VBUS 259-2 D259-3 D+ 259-4 GND
174- 6 174- 5 174- 4 172-3 174- 3 172-2 174- 2 172-1 174- 1 251-14 SGND 251-15 5V 251-16 SGND 161-3-2 161-2-3 161-4-1 161-1-4
5V CP LP FLM NC DSP_OFF
Amphenol 36pin
176-1 176-2 176-3 FT-31 FT-32
165-3 5V 165-2 GND 165-1 PWM 176-4 176-5 162-3 162-2 162-1 176-6 158-3 SGND 158-2 LCD_ADJ
OB_INVB
Appendix-3
6PIN
256-1 HT_CLOCK 256-2 CENTD0 256-3 CENTD1 256-4 CENTD2 256-5 CENTD3 256-6 CENTD4 256-7 CENTD5 256-8 CENTD6 256-9 CENTD7 256-10 PR_CLOCK 256-11 PR_BUSY 256-12 ADREQ 256-13 XFLAG 256-14 HT_BUSY 256-15 N.C 256-16 N.C 256-17 N.C 256-18 N.C 256-19 GND 256-20 GND 256-21 GND 256-22 GND 256-23 GND 256-24 GND 256-25 GND 256-26 GND 256-27 GND 256-28 N.C 256-29 N.C 256-30 N.C 256-31 INT_ISWB 256-32 DAVALB 256-33 N.C 256-34 N.C 256-35 N.C 256-36 AC1284
SW2
DB-9
257-1 DCD 257-2 RXD 257-3 TXD 257-4 DTR 257-5 GND 257-6 DSR 257-7 RTS 257-8 CTS 257-9 RI
RJ-45
255-1 TX+ 255-2 TX255-3 RX+ 255-4 GND 255-5 GND 255-6 RX255-7 GND 255-8 GND
158-1 LCD_24V
8 9 I
OB3
OB2
OB1
SUB POWER SWITCH
LAN I/F
KRDS I/F (RS-232)
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
Symbol SW2 OB INVB LCDB CCDB OB1 OB2 OB3 OACB MB
Part name Sub power switch OB inverter board LCD board Touch panel board CCD board Operation board /1 Operation board /2 Operation board /3 Overall control board Memory board 8-D 7-A 6-A 5-A 2-A 5-C 8-E 8-A 3-F 6-G
Location

Appendix-4
1
5.3
PRECHARGING LAMP/Y
24V2 362-1-2 360-1A 24V2 361A-3-8
PCL Y
137
CONT 362-2-1 360-2A PCLCONTY 361A-4-7 620-4 SOUT
I
134
361A-1-10 620-1 SIN
135
361A-2-9
620-2 SGND
136
620-3 RTS
138
24V2
363-1-2 360-3A 24V2
361A-5-6
620-5 SGND
139
1
CONT 363-2-1 360-4A PCLCONTM 361A-6-5 620-6 CTS
PRECHARGING LAMP/M
PCL M
140
620-7 DSET 24V2 CONT 364-2-1 361A-8-3 364-1-2 361A-7-4
141
360-5A 24V2
600-1 L1 CONT
142
PRECHARGING LAMP/C
PCL C
360-6A PCLCONTC 600-2 SGND
143
600-3 PS4 24V2 365-1-2 361A-9-2
144
360-7A 24V2
600-4 PS3
145
PRECHARGING LAMP/K
PCL K
CONT 365-2-1 360-8A PCLCONTK 600-5 PS2 361A-10-1
146
600-6 PS1
147
12V 360-9A 12V
368-1-4 600-7 SGND
361C-1-12
148
TDS_SIG 360-10A TONERY_S 360-11A SGND 360-12A TDSYVREF 600-11 APS2 600-12 APS3 600-13 SCAN_CW 600-14 SCAN_PC 600-15 SGND 600-16 SCANVREF 600-17 SGND 600-18 SCAN_EN 600-19 SGND 600-20 SCAN_CK 360-13A 12V 360-14A TONERM_S 360-15A SGND 360-16A TDSMVREF 360-17A 12V 360-18A TONERC_S 360-19A SGND 360-20A TDSCVREF 360-1B 12V 573-1 5V 573-2 M_TEMP1 573-3 GND 360-2B TONERK_S 360-3B SGND 360-4B TDSKVREF 360-5B 24V2 360-6B SURF_EVY 360-7B SGND 360-8B PGND 600-10 APS1 600-9 M2 CONT SGND TDS_VREF 12V TDS_SIG SGND TDS_VREF 12V TDS_SIG SGND TDS_VREF 12V TDS_SIG SGND TDS_VREF 24V2 SURFY_EV SGND PGND 372-1 366-8-1 361B-8-13 372-2 366-7-2 361B-7-14 372-3 366-6-3 361B-6-15 372-4 366-5-4 361B-5-16 371-4-1 366-4-5 361B-4-17 371-3-2 366-3-6 361B-3-18 371-2-3 366-2-7 361B-2-19 371-1-4 366-1-8 361B-1-20 370-4-1 361C-12-1 370-3-2 361C-11-2 370-2-3 361C-10-3 370-1-4 361C-9-4 369-4-1 361C-8-5 369-3-2 361C-7-6 369-2-3 361C-6-7 369-1-4 361C-5-8 368-4-1 361C-4-9 368-3-2 361C-3-10
368-2-3
361C-2-11
600-8 M2 EM
149
TONER DENSITY SENSOR/Y
TDS Y TDS M TDS C TDS K
150 151 152 153 154
PROCESS UNIT
TONER DENSITY SENSOR/M
155
2
TONER DENSITY SENSOR/C TONER DENSITY SENSOR/K
574-1 5V 574-2 M_TEMP2 574-3 GND
156 157 158 159 160
DRPS Y
DRUM POTENTIAL SENSOR BOARD/Y
DRPSB Y DRPSB M DRPSB C
3
24V2 SURFM_EV SGND PGND 373-1 367-4-9 361B-12-9 373-2 367-3-10 361B-11-10 373-3 367-2-11 360-11B SGND 360-12B PGND 361B-10-11 373-4 360-9B 24V2 360-10B SURF_EVM 367-1-12 361B-9-12
652-1-2
656-1-15
657-1
17 18
650-13A CONT 650-12A CLOCK
652-2-1
656-2-14 656-3-13 656-4-12 656-5-11 650-11A LOCK
657-2
M3
657-3 657-4 657-5 656-6-10
DRPS M
24V2 SURFC_EV SGND PGND 374-1 367-8-5 361B-16-5 374-2 367-7-6 361B-15-6 374-3 367-6-7 361B-14-7 374-4 367-5-8 361B-13-8 360-13B 24V2 360-15B SGND 360-16B PGND
POLYGON MOTOR/Y
DRUM POTENTIAL SENSOR BOARD/M
650-10A TEMP.ERROR 360-14B SURF_EVC 650-9A 5V2 650-8A PS 650-7A SGND 650-6A B 656-7-9 656-8-8 656-9-7 656-10-6
657-6
658-1
PS5
658-2 658-3
659-6 656-11-5 360-17B 24V2 650-5A B 656-12-4 360-18B SURF_EVK 650-4A A 659-5 659-3
DRPS C
DRUM POTENTIAL SENSOR BOARD/C
LASER CORRECTION SENSOR/Y
4
24V2 SURFK_EV SGND PGND 477-1 477-2 477-3 477-4 477-5 477-6 475-2-1 475-1-2 375-1 367-12-1 375-2 367-11-2 375-3 367-10-3 375-4 367-9-4
361B-17-4 361B-18-3 361B-19-2 361B-20-1
656-13-3 360-19B SGND 360-20B PGND 361D-8-11 361D-7-12 361D-6-13 361D-5-14 361D-4-15 361D-3-16 361D-2-17 361D-1-18 476-6 476-5 476-4 476-3 476-2 476-1 564-2 DRIVE 564-1 24V2 650-13B CONT 660-4-12 650-12B CLOCK 660-5-11 650-11B LOCK 660-6-10 650-10B TEMP.ERROR 550-3A A 656-14-2 650-2A 5V2 656-15-1 650-1A 5V2
M7
659-4 659-2 659-1
DRPSB K
DRPS K
LASER CORRECTION MOTOR/Y
DRUM POTENTIAL SENSOR BOARD/K
PRCB 1/2
653-1-2
660-1-15
661-1
19 20
653-2-1
660-2-14 660-3-13
661-2 661-3 661-4 661-5 661-6
POLYGON MOTOR/M
M4
PS6
COLOR REGISTRATION SHUTTER SOLENOID

499-1 499-2 499-3 499-4 498-1 498-2 498-3 498-4
SD1
5
DRUM SEPARATION CLAW SOLENOID
378-2 378-1 379-4 379-3 379-2 379-1
377-1A-11A 377-2A-10A 377-3A-9A 377-4A-8A 377-5A-7A 377-6A-6A
496-1A-11A 496-2A-10A 496-3A-9A 496-4A-8A 496-5A-7A 496-6A-6A
660-7-9 376-1A 24V2 376-2A DRIVE 376-3A CREG1MON 376-4A CREG1LED 376-5A SGND 376-6A 5V2 376-12A N.C 376-13A N.C 650-6B B 660-11-5 650-5B B 660-12-4 650-4B A 660-13-3 550-3B A 660-14-2 663-2 377-1B-11B 496-1B-11B 650-2B 5V2 663-4 663-3 663-5 650-9B 5V2 660-8-8 650-8B PS 660-9-7 650-7B SGND 660-10-6 663-6
662-1 662-2 662-3
LASER CORRECTION SENSOR/M
SD2 CRB/F
PS8 PS9
COLOR REGISTRATION SENSOR/F

383-1 383-2 383-3 383-4
LASER CORRECTION MOTOR/M
M8
381-1 381-2 381-3 381-4
382-4 382-3 382-2 382-1 558-5 558-4 558-3
376-14A N.C 376-1B CREG2MON 377-2B-10B 377-3B-9B 377-4B-8B 377-5B-7B 377-6B-6B 377-7B-5B 496-2B-10B 496-3B-9B 496-4B-8B 496-5B-7B 496-6B-6B 496-7B-5B 376-2B CREG2LED 376-3B SGND 376-4B 5V2 376-5B DS2_VREF 376-6B DS2_CNT
660-15-1 650-1B 5V2
663-1
CRB/R
654-1-2 654-2-1
664-1-15 664-2-14
COLOR REGISTRATION SENSOR/R
665-1
21 22
PS11
GAMMA SENSOR
376-7B SGND 558-2 558-1 306-2 377-8B-4B 377-9B-3B 377-10B-2B 496-8B-4B 496-9B-3B 496-10B-2B 376-8B 12V 376-9B DS2_SIG 651-19 CLOCK 376-10B 24V2 651-18 LOCK 651-20 CONT
665-2
M5
664-3-13 664-4-12 664-5-11
665-3 665-4 665-5
POLYGON MOTOR/C
SD3
GAMMA SHUTTER SOLENOID
IMAGE CORRECTION UNIT
306-1
377-11B-1B
496-11B-1B
664-6-10 376-11B DRIVE 376-12B N.C 376-13B N.C 376-14B N.C 491-1-4 491-2-3 384-1A DRIVE 384-2A EM 651-16 5V2 664-8-8 651-15 PS 664-9-7 651-14 SGND 664-10-6 651-17 TEMP.ERROR 664-7-9
665-6 666-1
PS7
666-2 666-3 667-6
LASER CORRECTION SENSOR/C
M10
FIXING COOLING FAN/1
491-3-2 491-4-1 388-3 483-1-6
651-13 B 384-3A H/L 384-4A SGND 384-5A SGND 388-2 483-2-5 664-11-5 651-12 B 664-12-4 651-11 A 664-13-3 551-10 A 667-4 667-3 667-5
M9
LASER CORRECTION MOTOR/C
PAPER EXIT FULL SENSOR
384-6A PS 388-1 387-3 483-3-4 483-4-3 651-9 5V2 384-7A 5V 651-8 5V2 384-8A SGND 483-5-2
664-14-2 664-15-1
667-2 667-1
PAPER EXIT SENSOR
387-2 387-1 559-1-2
384-9A PS 483-6-1 384-10A 5V 655-1-2 668-1-15 669-1 384-11A TCNT_DRIVE2 655-2-1 668-2-14
PS12 PS13
Appendix-5
23 24
BLACK COUNTER
C(BK)
559-2-1 384-12A SHUT_24V 651-7 CONT 390-1-2 384-13A TCNT_DRIVE1 651-6 CLOCK
669-2
M6
668-3-13 668-4-12
669-3 669-4
TOTAL COUNTER
C(T)
POLYGON MOTOR/K
8 9 I
390-2-1 384-14A SHUT_24V 488-1-3 488-2-2 492-1 492-2 487-4 487-3 384-2B EM 384-15A 384-1B DRIVE 492-3 488-3-1 492-4 487-2 384-3B H/L 487-1 384-4B GND 489-1-4 384-5B DRIVE 489-2-3 384-6B EM
668-5-11 651-5 LOCK 668-6-10 651-4 TEMP.ERROR 668-7-9 651-3 5V2 668-8-8 651-2 KHP_SIG 668-9-7 651-1 SGND 668-10-6 668-11-5
669-5 669-6 670-1
TDB
670-2
M12
DRUM COOLING FAN/1
M13
DRUM COOLING FAN/2
TONER SUPPLY DOOR OPEN/CLOSE SENSOR
M11
TRANSFER BELT COOLING FAN
670-3
TEMP DETECTION BOARD
489-3-2 384-7B H/L 489-4-1 490-1-4 384-9B DRIVE 490-2-3 384-10B EM 490-3-2 384-11B H/L 490-4-1 384-12B SGND 389-3 389-2 389-1 384-13B SGND 384-8B SGND
668-12-4 668-13-3 668-14-2 668-15-1
PS14
384-14B PS 384-15B 5V
APPENDIX
APPENDIX Symbol TDS Y TDS M TDS C TDS K M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M9 M10 M11 M12 M13 PCL Y PCL M PCL C PCL K PS5 PS6 PS7 PS8 PS9 PS11 PS12 PS13 PS14 SD1 SD2 SD3 DRPS Y DRPS M DRPS C DRPS K DRPSB Y DRPSB M DRPSB C DRPSB K TDB PRCB C (T) C (BK) Part name Toner density sensor /Y Toner density sensor /M Toner density sensor /C Toner density sensor /K Polygon motor /Y Polygon motor /M Polygon motor /C Polygon motor /K Laser correction motor /Y Laser correction motor /M Laser correction motor /C Fixing cooling fan /1 Transfer belt cooling fan Drum cooling fan /1
Drum cooling fan /2
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004 Location 2-H 2-H 2-H 3-H 3-A 5-A 6-A 8-A 4-A 6-A 7-A 7-G 8-H 9-G 9-G 1-H 1-H 1-H 1-H 4-A 5-A 7-A 5-I 6-I 6-H 7-G 7-G 9-G 5-H 5-H 7-H 3-I 3-I 4-I 4-I 3-H 3-H 4-H 4-H 8-A 1-D 8-G 8-G Symbol CRB /F CRB /R Part name Color registration board /F Color registration board /R 5-H 6-H Location
Pre-charging lamp /Y Pre-charging lamp /M Pre-charging lamp /C Pre-charging lamp /K Laser correction motor /Y Laser correction motor /M Laser correction motor /C Color registration sensor /F Color registration sensor /R Gamma sensor Paper exit full sensor Paper exit sensor Toner supply unit open/close sensor Drum separation claw solenoid Color Registration shutter solenoid Gamma shutter solenoid Drum potential sensor /Y Drum potential sensor /M Drum potential sensor /C Drum potential sensor /K Drum potential sensor board /Y Drum potential sensor board /M Drum potential sensor board /C Drum potential sensor board /K Temp detection board Printer control board Total counter Black counter
Appendix-6
5.4
1
317-3 316-1 U 316-2 V 316-3 W 311-9 311-8 311-7 311-6 311-5 311-4 311-3 311-2 311-1 309-9A SGND 302-3 24V2 302-4 PGND 302-5 N.C 318-9 318-8 318-7 318-6 318-5 318-4 318-3 318-2 318-1 309-18A SGND 300-15 P_CTS 300-14 SGND 300-13 PY_IDX 300-12 PM_IDX 309-1B CLOCK 309-2B FH 309-3B ENABLE 309-4B H/L1 309-5B H/L2 309-6B ENA1 309-7B ENA2 309-8B 5V2 309-9B SGND 300-11 PC_IDX 300-10 PK_IDX 300-9 SGND 300-8 P_VTOP 300-7 P_PTOP 300-6 SGND 300-5 REM/4 300-4 S_VV 300-3 EE_VV 300-2 AC_OFF 309-10B CLOCK 309-11B FH 309-12B ENABLE 309-13B H/L1 309-14B H/L2 309-15B ENA1 309-16B ENA2 298-8-2 298-9-1 304-3-4 304-2-5 304-1-6 304-6-1 304-5-2 289-2 289-3 356-1 356-2 356-3 356-4 356-5 356-6 356-7 356-8 356-9 356-10 356-11 354-7-1 354-6-2 354-5-3 354-4-4 354-3-5 354-2-6 354-1-7 355-4-1 355-3-2 355-2-3 355-1-4 358-1-6 357-1 A 358-2-5 357-2 A 358-3-4 357-3 B 358-4-3 357-4 B 358-5-2 357-5 24V2 358-6-1 357-6 24V2 359-3 359-2 359-1 349-1 349-2 349-3 349-4 349-5 349-6 349-7 349-8 349-9 349-10 349-11 350-1 341-7-1 341-6-2 341-5-3 341-4-4 341-3-5 341-2-6 341-1-7 345-4-1 345-3-2 345-2-3 345-1-4 342-7-1 291-1-3 291-2-2 357-7 SGND 304-4-3 353-10 SGND 353-9 PS 353-8 5V2 353-7 5V2 353-6 SGND 353-5 CONT 353-4 CLOCK 353-3 CW/CCW 353-2 LOCK 353-1 H/L 37-11 5V2 37-10 GND 37-9 24V 37-8 COPV_ENB 37-7 SGND 37-6 OP_RTS 37-5 OP_DSR 353-13 SGND 353-12 PS 353-11 5V2 35-9 CPF1 35-10 PGND 309-17B 5V2 309-18B SGND 35-5 CV_SIZE2 35-6 CV_SIZE3 35-7 CVUP_SIG 35-8 CPF0 35-2 CVFD_SIG 35-3 CV_SIZE0 35-4 CV_SIZE1 300-1 MRL_OFF 35-1 CVM1_SIG 331-3 330-1 U 330-2 V 330-3 W 325-9 325-8 325-7 325-6 325-5 325-4 325-3 325-2 325-1 338-3 337-1 U 337-2 V 337-3 W 332-9 332-8 332-7 332-6 332-5 332-4 332-3 332-2 332-1 305-1 305-2 305-3 289-1 298-6-4 298-7-3 298-5-5 298-4-6 298-3-7 298-2-8 334-6 SGND 334-5 PS 334-4 5V2 334-3 SGND 334-2 PS 334-1 5V2 298-1-9 333-2 299-1-2 333-1 299-2-1 296-9-1 296-8-2 296-7-3 296-6-4 296-5-5 296-4-6 296-3-7 296-2-8 327-6 SGND 327-5 PS 327-4 5V2 327-3 SGND 327-2 PS 327-1 5V2 296-1-9 326-2 297-1-2 326-1 297-2-1 294-9-1 309-17A 5V2 300-16 P_STS 294-8-2 309-16A ENA2 294-7-3 300-17 P_RTS 309-15A ENA1 294-6-4 300-18 P_CMD 309-14A H/L2 294-5-5 309-13A H/L1 294-4-6 303-2 SGND 309-12A ENABLE 294-3-7 309-11A FH 303-1 5V2 294-2-8 309-10A CLOCK 302-6 N.C 294-1-9 302-2 PGND 324-3 323-1 U 323-2 V 323-3 W 320-6 SGND 320-5 PS 320-4 5V2 320-3 SGND 320-2 PS 320-1 5V2 319-2 295-1-2 319-1 295-2-1 292-9-1 309-8A 5V2 292-8-2 302-1 24V1 309-7A ENA2 292-7-3 309-6A ENA1 292-6-4 301-4 SGND 309-5A H/L2 292-5-5 309-4A H/L1 301-3 SGND 292-4-6 309-3A ENABLE 301-2 12V 292-3-7 309-2A FH 292-2-8 301-1 5V2 309-1A CLOCK 313-6 SGND 313-5 PS 313-4 5V2 313-3 SGND 313-2 PS 313-1 5V2 292-1-9 312-2 293-1-2 312-1
28 32
M14
317-2 317-1 315-1 315-2 315-3 314-1 314-2
DRUM MOTOR/Y
DRDB/Y
ENCODER SENSOR/Y1
53 54 56 57 59 60 55 58
PS60 PS61
DCPS1
314-3
ENCODER SENSOR/Y2
M15
324-2 324-1 322-1 322-2 322-3 321-1 321-2 321-3
DRUM MOTOR/M
I
293-2-1
27 31
2
ENCODER SENSOR/M1
63 64 161
DRDB/M
162
PS62 PS63
26 30
ENCODER SENSOR/M2
163 164 165 166
M16
331-2 331-1 329-1 329-2 329-3 328-1 328-2 328-3
DRUM MOTOR/C
167 168 169
ENCODER SENSOR/C1
DRDB/C
PS64 PS65
3
ENCODER SENSOR/C2
3
170 171 172 173 174 175 176
25 29
M17
338-2 338-1 336-1 336-2 336-3 335-1 335-2 335-3
DRUM MOTOR/K
177 178
DRDB/K
ENCODER SENSOR/K1
PS66 PS67
COIN VENDOR
CV (PARALLEL)
4
ENCODER SENSOR/K2
PS69 PS68
ENCODER SENSOR/BELT1
ENCODER SENSOR/BELT2
CV (SERIAL)
COIN VENDOR
5
TRANSFER BELT MOTOR
1st TRANSFER PRESSURE/RELEASE MOTOR
M18
52 51 50 49
37-4 OP_SIN 37-3 OP_CTS 37-2 OP_DTR 37-1 OP_SOUT 466-8 466-7
PGND 24VAC 466-6 466-5 466-4 466-3 PGND 24V2 SGND
M19
PRCB 2/2
70 69 72 116 73 74 71 117
6
DEVELOPING MOTOR/Y
12V
PS15
1st TRANSFER HP SENSOR
291-3-1
357-8 PS 357-9 5V2 340-14A 5V2 340-13A SGND 340-12A START/STOP 340-11A CLOCK 340-10A CW/CCW 340-9A LOCK 340-8A H/L
466-2 466-1 464-1 LTNPSIG 464-2 LTPR_SIG 464-3 LTSO_SIG 464-4 SGND 464-5 LTCCLCNT 464-6 LTSSDCNT 465-11-1 465-10-2 465-9-3 465-8-4
SGND 5V2
LCT (OPTION)
M20
465-7-5 465-6-6
45 46 47 48
340-7A 5V2
464-7 LTRCLCNT 464-8 LTSCLCNT 464-9 SGND
465-5-7 465-4-8 465-3-9 464-10 SOUT2-2 465-2-10
7
M21
DEVELOPING MOTOR/M
350-2 350-3 350-4 350-5 350-6 350-7 350-8 350-9 350-10 350-11 351-1 351-2 351-3 351-4 351-5
342-6-2 342-5-3 342-4-4 342-3-5 342-2-6 342-1-7 346-4-1 346-3-2 346-2-3 346-1-4 343-7-1 343-6-2 343-5-3 343-4-4 343-3-5
340-6A SGND 340-5A START/STOP 340-4A CLOCK 340-3A CW/CCW 340-2A LOCK 340-1A H/L
464-11 SIN2-2 464-12 DRIVE (24V1) 464-13 STFAN_ER 464-14 H/L
465-1-11 471-9-1 471-8-2 471-7-3 471-6-4 470-4-1 470-3-2 470-2-3
M24
IPB COOLING FAN
41 42 43 44
340-14B 5V2 340-13B SGND 340-12B START/STOP 340-11B CLOCK 340-10B CW/CCW
464-15 PGND
471-5-5 471-4-6 464-16 DRIVE (24V1) 464-17 STFAN_ER 464-18 H/L 464-19 PGND 572-1 N.C 471-3-7 471-2-8 471-1-9
470-1-4 463-4-1 463-3-2 463-2-3 463-1-4
M25
Appendix-7
IP COOLING FAN
M22
8 9 I
351-6
343-2-6
572-2 N.C
DEVELOPING MOTOR/C
351-7 351-8 351-9 351-10 351-11 352-1 352-2 352-3 352-4 352-5 352-6
343-1-7 347-4-1 347-3-2 347-2-3 347-1-4 344-7-1 344-6-2 344-5-3 344-4-4 344-3-5 344-2-6
340-9B LOCK 340-8B H/L
572-3 N.C 572-4 N.C
37 38 39 40
340-7B 5V2 340-6B SGND 340-5B START/STOP 340-4B CLOCK 340-3B CW/CCW 340-2B LOCK 352-7 352-8 352-9 352-10 352-11 344-1-7 348-4-1 348-3-2 348-2-3 348-1-4 340-1B H/L
467-6 RTS 467-5 SGND 467-4 SIN 467-3 CTS 467-2 SGND 467-1 SOUT
468-1-6 468-2-5 468-3-4 468-4-3 468-5-2 468-6-1 469-4 PGND
FNS (OPTION)
M23
DEVELOPING MOTOR/K
469-1 469-3
24V2
67 65 66 68
33 34 35 36
SGND 469-2 469-5 469-6 5V2
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
Symbol PS60 PS61 PS62 PS63 PS64 PS65 PS66 PS67 PS69 PS68 FNS LCT M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20 M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 PS15 CV CV DRDB /Y DRDB /M DRDB /K DRDB /C
Part name Encoder sensor /Y1 Encoder sensor /Y2 Encoder sensor /M1 Encoder sensor /M2 Encoder sensor /C1 Encoder sensor /C2 Encoder sensor /K1 Encoder sensor /K2 Encoder sensor /BELT1 Encoder sensor /BELT2 FNS (option) LCT (option) Drum motor /Y Drum motor /M Drum motor /C Drum motor /K Transfer belt motor 1st transfer pressure/release motor Developing motor /Y Developing motor /M Developing motor /C Developing motor /K IP cooling fan IPB cooling fan 1st transfer HP sensor Coin vendor (parallel) Coin vendor (serial) Drum drive board /Y Drum drive board /M Drum drive board /C Drum drive board /K 1-I 2-I 2-I 2-I 3-I 3-I 4-I 4-I 4-G 5-G 8-A 6-A 1-I 2-I 3-I 4-I 5-G 6-G 7-G 7-G 8-G 9-G 7-A 8-A 6-G 4-A 5-A 1-G 2-G 3-G 4-G
Location
Appendix-8
5.5
I
130-1 - 1
96
POWER PLUG
179
130-2 - 2
FT16 AC_H
180
130-3 - 3 146-1
FT17 AC_N
181
Y/G 130-4 - 4
ACDB
1
FT1 FT2
146-2
FT18 AC_N
182
146-2 FT17 FT18
97
CBR2
CBR1
183
146-1
98
184
99
185
FT4
BT-4 BT-2 BT-3 BT-1
FT3
PRCB
101
186
158-4 158-3 158-2 158-1 157-4 5V2 157-3 L2_CONT 157-2 L3_CONT 157-1 SGND
FT5
FT6
130-A1 - A4 130-A2 - A3 130-A3 - A2 130-A4 - A1 130-B1 - B4 130-B2 - B3 130-B3 - B2 130-B4 - B1
100
FHCB
187
131-2 - 2 131-3 - 3
FT19 AC_N
NF
EUROPE ONLY
2
188 189
131-4 - 4 131-1 - 1
FT7
FT8
FT15
190
107
153-1 24V1 153-2 NC
F/G
AC(H)
191
102 69
153-3 24VAC(H) 153-4 24VAC(N) 120-1 120-2 120-3 120-4 120-5
192
103 70
193
104
PRCB
194
105
AC(N)
3
152-11 PGND
131-A1 - A4 131-A2 - A3 131-A3 - A2 131-A4 - A1 131-B1 - B4 131-B2 - B3 131-B3 - B2 131-B4 - B1
195
106
152-10 PGND 152-9 -24VIN 152-8 152-7 152-6 152-5
FT9
196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203

96
152-4 152-3 152-2 152-1
SW1
MAIN POWER SWITCH
RL1 24V1
109
121A-1
FT10
RL2 24V1
204
97
121A-2
205
98
4
206
99
121A-3 121A-4
207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214

486-1 486-2 486-3 486-4 485-1 485-2 485-3 485-4 484-1 484-2 484-3 484-4 401-1B-16B 402-1-13 403-1
RL3 24V1
FIXING UNIT
100 101 102 103 104 105 106
140-1 142-1 140-2 142-2 140-3 142-3

121B-2
CH12
121B-3 121B-4
140-4 142-4
215
TRANSFORMER/LCT
TRANSFORMER/MAIN BODY
5
216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225
TRNS2
TRNS1
M26 M27 M28
PAPER EXIT FAN/R
156-5
156-4
156-2
156-1
155-5 H1(N)
155-4 H1(H)
155-2 H1(N)
155-1 H1(H)
PAPER EXIT FAN/M

482-1-12 482-2-11 482-3-10 482-4-9 482-5-8 482-6-7 482-7-6 482-8-5 482-9-4 482-10-3 482-11-2 482-12-1
PAPER EXIT FAN/F
143-1 143-2 141-1 141-2 145-1 145-2 144-1 144-2

AC(N)
226 227
101-2 NC
101-1 AC(H)
6
229 230 233 234 237 238
401-2B-15B
402-2-12
403-2
PS29
228 231 232 235 236 239
401-3B-14B 401-4B-13B 401-5B-12B 401-6B-11B 401-7B-10B 401-8B-9B 401-9B-8B 401-10B-7B 401-11B-6B 401-12B-5B 401-13B-4B
402-3-11 402-4-10 402-5-9 402-6-8 402-7-7 402-8-6 402-9-5 402-10-4 402-11-3 402-12-2 402-13-1
403-3 404-1 404-2 404-3 405-1 405-2 405-3 406-1 406-2 407-1 407-2
PREREGISTRATION SENSOR/1
PS30
TRAY UPPER LIMIT SENSOR/1
102-1 5V1
2 3 4
OACB
102-2 SGND 102-3 REM/1
NO PAPER SENSOR/1
102-4 AC_OFF
HTR2
HTR1
103-1 12V
PAPER FEED CLUTCH/1
103-4 SGND
7
IPB
103-2 5V2
PREREGISTRATION CLUTCH/1
103-5 SGND
PS31 MC7 MC8 SD7
7
241 242 245
401-14B-3B
566-1-2
408-1
103-3 3.5V
240 243 244
10
401-15B-2B 401-16B-1B
566-2-1
408-2
PICK UP SOLENOID/1
103-6 SGND
53 54 55
104-1 5V2 104-3 12V 104-6 SGND
401-1A-14A 401-2A-13A 401-3A-12A 401-4A-11A
410-1 410-2 410-3 411-1
56
PRCB
104-7 SGND
57
PS32
TRAY /1
REMAINING PAPER SENSOR/1
104-4 24V1
58
Appendix-9
104-9 PGND
63
104-2 5V2
246 247 248 249
401-5A-10A 401-6A-9A 401-7A-8A
411-2 411-3 412-1
64
PS33
PAPER SIZE/S1
104-8 SGND
123-2 123-3
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
8 9
401-8A-7A
412-2
123-1
PS34
401-9A-6A
412-3
PAPER SIZE/L1 DRDB
123-4
104-5 24V1
DCPS1 1/2
250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265
123-5 401-10A-5A 401-11A-4A 401-12A-3A 401-13A-2A 401-14A-1A 409-1-5 409-2-4 409-3-3 409-4-2 409-5-1 413-3 413-2 413-1 123-6
VR1
417-1 415-1B-16B 415-2B-15B 415-3B-14B 415-4B-13B 415-5B-12B 415-6B-11B 415-7B-10B 415-8B-9B 415-9B-8B 416-1-13 416-2-12 416-3-11 416-4-10 416-5-9 416-6-8 416-7-7 416-8-6 416-9-5 417-2 417-3 418-1 418-2 418-3 419-1 419-2 419-3
PAPER SIZE VR/1
123-7 123-8 123-9
123-10
104-10 PGND
67
DCPS4
PS35 PS36 PS37
105-3 SGND
FNS
105-1 5V2 105-5 24V1 105-6 N.C
68 107
ACDB CVDB
84 85
105-2 5V2
132 133
105-4 SGND
TRAY UPPER LIMIT SENSOR/2
108-1 5V2 108-2 SGND 108-3 24V1
130 131
TRAY /2 1/2
NO PAPER SENSOR/2
268-1 12V 268-2 GND 268-4 5VIN 268-3 5VOUT 268-6 24V 268-5 GND
108-4 SGND
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
Symbol CBR1 CBR2 DCPS1 DCPS4 RL1 RL2 RL3 HTR1 HTR2 M26 M27 M28 MC7 MC8 PS29 PS30 PS31 PS32 PS33 PS34 PS35 PS36 PS37 SD7 SW1 TRNS1 TRNS2 VR1 NF ACDB FHCB
Part name Circuit breaker /1 Circuit breaker /2 DC power suply unit /1 DC power suply unit /4 (HD-106) Main relay DCPS2 relay HTR relay Heater /1 Heater /2 Paper exit fan /R Paper exit fan /M Paper exit fan /F Paper feed clutch /1 Pre-registration clutch /1 Pre-registration sensor /1 Tray upper limit sensor /1 No paper sensor /1 Remaining paper sensor /1 Paper size /S1 Paper size /L1 Pre-registration sensor /2 Tray upper limit sensor /2 No paper sensor /2 Pick up solenoid /1 Main power switch Transformer/main body Transformer/LCT Paper size VR /1 Noise filter Power plug AC drive board Fixing heater control board 1-A 1-B 6-A 9-D 4-D 4-D 4-D 6-E 6-E 5-F 5-F 6-F 7-F 7-F 6-F 6-F 6-F 8-F 8-F 8-F 9-F 9-F 9-F 7-F 3-A 5-C 5-C 8-F 2-A 1-B 1-D 2-F
Location
Appendix-10
5.6
I
415-10B-7B 416-10-4 420-1
266
11
106-2 5V2 106-5 SGND 106-6 SGND 106-3 5V2 106-8 SGND 106-7 12V 106-1 5V2 106-4 SGND 107-3 5V2 107-6 SGND 107-1 5V2 107-4 SGND 107-5 SGND 107-2 5V2 107-7 12V
SCDB
415-11B-6B 416-11-3 420-2
PAPER FEED CLUTCH/2
267
12
415-12B-5B 416-12-2 421-1
73
268
415-13B-4B 416-13-1 421-2
74
269
LCT
MC9 MC10 SD8
DCPS1 2/2
1
116
415-14B-3B 415-15B-2B 415-16B-1B
ADF
567-1-2
422-1
270
117 114
567-2-1 422-2
PICK UP SOLENOID/2
TRAY /2 2/2
271 272
115
86
TSDB
415-1A-14A 424-1
273
87
415-2A-13A 424-2
PS38
274
75
415-3A-12A 424-3
275
76
415-4A-11A 425-1
276
77
OB1
415-5A-10A 425-2 425-3

PAPER SIZE/S2
PS39
277
78
415-6A-9A
278
79
415-7A-8A 426-1 426-2
PAPER SIZE/L2
279
415-8A-7A 415-9A-6A 426-3 423-1-5 427-3 415-10A-5A
2
PS40
280 281 282

VR2
415-11A-4A
PAPER SIZE VR/2
423-2-4 423-3-3 423-4-2 423-5-1 427-1
427-2
283
415-12A-3A 415-13A-2A 415-14A-1A
112-2
112-3
112-1
284 285 286

429-1B-16B 429-2B-15B 429-3B-14B 429-4B-13B 429-5B-12B 429-6B-11B 429-7B-10B 429-8B-9B 429-9B-8B 429-10B-7B 429-11B-6B 429-12B-5B 429-13B-4B 429-14B-3B 429-15B-2B 429-16B-1B 568-2-1 436-2 568-1-2 436-1
PICK UP SOLENOID/3
430-1-13 430-2-12 430-3-11 430-4-10 430-5-9 430-6-8 430-7-7 430-8-6 430-9-5 430-10-4 430-11-3 430-12-2 430-13-1 435-2
431-1 431-2 431-3 432-1 432-2 432-3 433-1 433-2 433-3 434-1 434-2 435-1
PAPER FEED CLUTCH/3 NO PAPER SENSOR/3 TRAY UPPER LIMIT SENSOR/3
138
109-1 SGND
DCPS3
287
PS41
139
109-2 SGND
IP-921
288 289 290

PS42
140
109-3 5V3 109-4 5V3 109-5 5V2
141 134
IP-921 (OPTION)
3
291 292 293
PS43 MC11 MC12 SD9
135 137 136
109-6 SGND 109-7 SGND 109-8 12V
294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302

429-1A-14A 429-2A-13A 429-3A-12A 429-4A-11A 429-5A-10A 429-6A-9A 429-7A-8A 429-8A-7A 429-9A-6A 429-10A-5A 429-11A-4A 429-12A-3A 429-13A-2A 429-14A-1A 437-1-5 437-2-4 437-3-3 437-4-2 437-5-1 438-2 438-3 439-1 439-2 439-3 440-1 440-2 440-3 441-3 438-1
109
110-3 NC
110-2 NC
110-4 AC(N)
110-1 AC(H)
TRAY /3
4
303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320
PS44 PS45 PS46
13
SCDB ADF
111-1 24V2
14 15 16
111-4 PGND 111-2 24V2
111-5 PGND
65
FNS
111-6 PGND
66
111-3 24V2
PAPER SIZE/S2
71
LCT
111-10 PGND
72 88
111-7 24V2 111-8 24V2
PAPER SIZE/L2
89
TSDB
111-9 24V2
90 91
111-11 PGND
VR3
441-2 441-1 444-1 443-1-12 443-2-11 443-3-10 443-4-9 443-5-8 444-2 444-3 445-1 445-2
111-12 PGND
PAPER SIZE VR/3
127-2
17 19
M3 M4
127-3 127-4 127-6
127-1
112-1 24V2
21 23
127-7 127-8
NO PAPER SENSOR/BP
127-5
112-2 24V2
128-2
M5
PS47
18 20
128-3 128-4
128-1
112-3 PGND
VR4
PAPER SIZE VR/BP
128-6
321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340
M6
22 24
443-6-7 443-7-6 443-8-5 443-9-4 443-10-3 443-11-2 443-12-1 449-1 449-2
445-3 446-1 446-2 446-3 447-1 447-2 447-3
128-7 128-8
128-5
112-5 PGND
M38
TRAY UP DRIVE MOTOR/3
BY-PASS TRAY
6 7
PS48 PS49
450-1 450-2
PAPER SIZE/SBP
112-4 N.C 112-6 N.C
PAPER SIZE/LBP
126-2 126-3 126-4 126-5 126-6 126-7 126-8 126-10

113-4 PGND
DCPS2
126-1
113-2 PGND
M39
451-1 451-2 452-1-8 452-2-7 452-3-6 452-4-5 452-5-4 452-6-3 452-7-2 453-1 453-2 454-1 454-2 454-3 455-1 455-2
126-9 125-2 125-3
M20,M21,M22,M23
33 34 37 38 41 42 45 46 35 36 39 40 43 44 47 48
M40 MC13 PS50
125-1 125-4 125-5

INTERMEDIATE CONVEYANCE CLUTCH/1
113-1 24V2
125-6 125-7 125-8

VERTICAL CONVEYANCE SENSOR
125-10 125-9
113-3 24V2
114-1 NC
59
Appendix-11
PRCB
114-2 24V2
PS51
341 342 343
VERTICAL CONVEYANCE DOOR SENSOR
60
452-8-1
455-3
114-6 PGND
92
HV1
114-3 24V2 114-7 PGND
93 110
8
346 349 353
344 345 347 348

110 111 112 113
114-8 PGND
111
M41
114-9 PGND
112 113
114-4 24V2
PAPER FEED MOTOR
M41
114-5 24V2
80 81
115-1 24V2 115-2 24V2
456-1-7 456-2-6 456-3-5 456-4-4 456-5-3 456-6-2 456-7-1 457-1-4 457-2-3 457-3-2 457-4-1 479-1-3
458-1 458-2 458-3 458-4 458-5 458-6 458-7 458-8 458-9 458-10 458-11 460-1
82 83
CVDB
115-3 PGND
350 351 352 354
115-4 PGND
PS52
479-2-2 479-3-1
460-2 460-3 461-1 461-2
WASTE TONER FULL SENSOR
115-6 PGND 115-7 PGND 115-8 PGND
M18
PS53
52 51 95 49 50 94
9
356 357 358 359
WASTE TONER DOOR SENSOR
124-4
121
461-3
124-3
124-1
355
462-1-4 462-2-3 462-3-2 462-4-1
115-5 N.C
124-2 124-6
DCPS COOLING FAN
M42
124-7 124-8
124-5
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
Symbol DCPS2 DCPS3 M38 M39 M40 M41 M42 MC9 MC10 MC11 MC12 MC13 PS38 PS39 PS40 PS41 PS42 PS43 PS44 PS45 PS46 PS47 PS48 PS49 PS50 PS51 PS52 PS53 SD8 SD9 VR2 VR3 VR4
Part name DC power supply unit /2 DC power supply unit /3 (IP-921) Tray up drive motor /3 Tray up drive motor /2 Tray up drive motor /1 Paper feed motor DCPS cooling fan Paper feed clutch /2 Pre-registration clutch /2 Paper feed clutch /3 Pre-registration clutch /3 Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 Remaining paper sensor /2 Paper size /S2 Paper size /L2 Pre-registration sensor /3 Tray upper limit sensor /3 No paper sensor /3 Remaining paper sensor /3 Paper size /S2 Paper size /L2 No paper sensor /BP Paper size /SBP Paper size /LBP Vertical conveyance sensor Vertical conveyance door sensor Waste toner full sensor Waste toner door sensor Pick up solenoid /2 Pick up solenoid /3 Paper size VR /2 Paper size VR /3 Paper size VR /BP 4-A 3-A 7-F 7-F 7-F 8-F 9-F 1-F 1-F 3-F 4-F 7-F 2-F 2-F 2-F 3-F 3-F 3-F 4-F 5-F 5-F 6-F 6-F 6-F 7-F 8-F 9-F 9-F 1-F 4-F 2-F 5-F 6-F
Location
Appendix-12
5.7
I
F/G
528-2-1
179
518-15 24V2 518-14 DRIVE 510-11 5V2
MC1
528-1-2
180
ADU CONVEYANCE CLUTCH/2

510-10 SGND 510-9 START/STOP 518-13 24V2 510-8 CLOCK
FT23
FIXING UPPER HEATER LAMP/1
519-2-1
181
MC2
519-1-2
518-12 DRIVE 510-6 LOCK 510-7 CW/CCW
FT27
FT25
M29
TS1 FIXING UPPER HEATER LAMP/2
L2 L3
FIXING MOTOR
FIXING UNIT
REVERSE/ EXIT ADU REGISTRATION SOLENOID REVERSE/ ADU REVERSE SENSOR EXIT ADU ADU CONVEYANCE SENSOR SENSOR PREADU PRECLUTCH/1 STRATION CONVEYANCE REGISTRATION CLUTCH SENSOR SENSOR
1
FT20
526-1
FT22 FT21
518-11 24V2 510-4 PGND
510-5 H/L
182
SD4
FT26 FT24
526-2
518-10 DRIVE 510-3 PGND 510-2 24V2 518-9 5V2 510-1 24V2 518-8 PS 518-7 SGND 513-6 5V2
FT28
183
520-1 552-3-1 552-2-2 552-1-3 515-1 514-1-6 520-2 520-3
511-1-11 511-2-10 511-3-9 511-4-8 511-5-7 511-6-6 511-7-5 511-8-4 511-9-3 511-10-2 511-11-1 512-1 512-2 512-3 512-4 512-5 512-6 512-7 512-8 512-9 512-10 512-11
184
FIXING TEMPERATURE SENSOR/1
FIXING PRESSURE/ FIXING RELEASE SENSOR EXIT SENSOR
PS19
TH1
132-3-1 132-2-2 132-1-3
185
PS16
522-1 521-6-1
518-6 5V2 518-5 PS 518-4 SGND 513-3 5V2 513-4 SGND 513-5 PS
514-2-5 515-2 515-3 516-1-3 517-1 516-2-2 517-2 517-3 516-3-1 514-3-4 514-4-3 514-5-2 514-6-1
522-2 521-5-2 521-4-3 521-3-4

518-3 5V2 518-2 PS 518-1 SGND 527-17 24V2 569-1 A 513-1 SGND 513-2 PS
PS20
522-3 523-1 523-2 521-2-5 521-1-6 529-2-1 570-4-1 571-4-1 529-1-2
TS2
133-2-1
TH3
186
PS17
FIXING EMPERATURE SENSOR/3
133-1-2
187
PS21
523-3
2
MC3
FT29
527-16 DRIVE 569-2 A 569-3 B 569-4 B
2
188
FIXING LOWER HEATER LAMP
189
FT30
570-3-2 571-3-2 571-2-3 571-1-4 570-2-3 570-1-4
L4
137-1 3191-01P1
M54
533-1 530-3-1
527-15 SGND 527-14 PS 527-13 5V2 527-12 5V2
F/G
190
WEB MOTOR
PS22
533-2 530-2-2 530-1-3 551-3-1 509-1-3 509-2-2 509-3-1 508-4 506-2B 506-1B 508-3 532-3 532-2 532-1 533-3 531-1
191 192
118
531-2 551-2-2
527-11 PS
FRONT DOOR OPEN/CLOSE SENSOR
PS23
119
TH2
134-3-1 134-2-2 134-1-3
193
PS18
531-3 551-1-3
527-10 SGND
120
CVDB
118
527-9 5V2 527-8 PS 527-7 SGND
119 120
135-2-1
194
MS1
FRONT DOOR INTERLOCK SWITCH
3
549-1 554-3-1
527-6 5V2
508-2 508-1
507-1 24V2 507-2 24V2 507-3 PGND 507-4 PGND 507-5 5V2 507-6 SGND
PS24
549-2
527-5 PS 527-4 SGND 527-3 5V2 527-2 PS 527-1 SGND 536-1 24V2 536-2 24V2 536-3 A 536-4 A 536-5 B 536-6 B 534-1 24V2 534-2 24V2 534-3 A 534-4 A 534-5 B 534-6 B 534-7 24V2 534-8 24V2 534-9 A 534-10 A 534-11 B 534-12 B 503-17A DDRV_Txd 503-16A DDRV_Rxd 503-15A SGND 503-14A ADUP_SIG 503-13A ADUH_SIG 503-12A BMAX_SIG 503-11A REG_SIG 503-10A ADUR_SIG 503-9A FEXT_SIG 503-8A FD_OPEN 503-7A HAN1_SIG 503-6A HAN2_SIG 503-5A REV_SIG 503-4A BPNF_SIG 524-1 24V2 524-2 24V2 524-3 A 524-4 A 524-5 B 524-6 B 524-7 N.C 548-6 24V2 548-5 24V2 548-4 A 548-3 A 548-2 B 548-1 B 503-3A FRL_SIG 503-2A 12V 503-1A REG_CONT 503-17B BPSDCONT 503-16B EXSDCONT 503-15B AMC1CONT 503-14B AMC2CONT
554-2-2 554-1-3
506-2A 506-1A
TH4
135-1-2
195
549-3 565-1 565-2 565-3
196
151-1 5V2
80 81
197
151-2 S_GND 151-3 H1_DRIVE
198
PS55 M30
537-2 537-5 537-1 537-3 537-4 537-6
82 83
199
151-4 MRL_DRIVE 151-5 L2_DRIVE
2nd CONVEYANCE TRANSFER LEVER HP SENSOR SENSOR REGISTRATION ROLLER MOTOR
200
84 85 121
500-1A 500-2A 500-3A 500-4A 500-5A 500-6A 500-7A 500-8A 500-9A 500-10A 500-11A 500-12A 500-13A 500-14A 500-15A 500-16A 500-17A 500-1B 500-2B 500-3B 500-4B
201
151-6 L3_DRIVE 151-7 L4_DRIVE 151-8 PWRL_DRIVE (REM/2) 150-6A FUSERSET 150-1A FIXTEMP1 150-2A FIXTEMP1 150-3A FIXTEMP1 150-4A FIXTEMP2 150-5A FIXTEMP2 150-12B FIXTEMP3 150-11B FIXTEMP3 150-10B FIXTEMP3 150-9B FIXTEMP4 150-8B FIXTEMP4 150-7B N.C
202 203 204 205
CONVEYANCE UNIT
M31
LOOP ROLLER MOTOR
4
M32
ADU REVERSE MOTOR
4
206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214
538-2 538-5 538-1 538-3 538-4 538-6 535-3 535-9 535-1 535-5 535-7 535-11 535-2 535-4 535-6 535-8 535-10
215
150-7A PGND 150-8A H/L 150-9A EM 150-10A DRIVE 150-11A PGND 150-12A H/L 150-1B EM 150-2B DRIVE 150-3B PGND 503-13B APCLCONT 503-12B MCL2CONT 503-11B MCL3CONT 503-10B BPCLCONT
5
M33 M34
REVERSE/ EXIT MOTOR
5
216 217 218 219 220
525-2 525-5 525-1 525-3 525-4 525-6
221 222 223
500-5B 500-6B 500-7B 500-8B
224
150-4B H/L 150-5B EM 150-6B DRIVE
225

2nd TRANSFER PRESSURE/RELEASE MOTOR
550-1 550-2 550-3 550-4 550-5 550-6
226
553-1
227
M35
TRAY UP DRIVE MOTOR/BP
6 7
539-B11 2
503-9B START/STOP
500-9B
400-16A 5V2
553-2
228
539-B10 1
503-8B CLOCK 503-7B CW/CCW
500-10B 500-11B
400-15A PS 400-14A SGND
229
546-1
555-6-1
230
539-B9 5V2
503-6B LOCK
500-12B
400-13A 5V2
PRCB(2/2) 1/2
PS25
546-2 546-3 547-1
555-5-2 555-4-3 555-3-4
231
539-B8 PS 539-B7 SGND 539-B6 5V2
503-5B H/L 503-4B TR4_CONT 503-3B TR4_CW
500-13B 500-14B 500-15B
400-12A PS 400-11A SGND 400-10A 5V2
232
505-1 505-2 505-3 505-4 505-5 505-6 505-7 505-8 502-1A-17A 502-2A-16A 502-3A-15A 502-4A-14A 502-5A-13A 502-6A-12A 502-7A-11A 502-8A-10A 502-9A-9A 502-10A-8A 502-11A-7A 502-12A-6A 502-13A-5A 502-14A-4A 502-15A-3A 502-16A-2A 502-17A-1A 502-1B-17B 502-2B-16B 502-3B-15B 502-4B-14B 502-5B-13B 502-6B-12B 502-7B-11B 502-8B-10B 502-9B-9B 502-10B-8B 502-11B-7B 502-12B-6B 502-13B-5B 502-14B-4B 502-15B-3B
504-1 504-2 504-3 504-4 504-5 504-6 504-7 504-8 501-1A-17A 501-2A-16A 501-3A-15A 501-4A-14A 501-5A-13A 501-6A-12A 501-7A-11A 501-8A-10A 501-9A-9A 501-10A-8A 501-11A-7A 501-12A-6A 501-13A-5A 501-14A-4A 501-15A-3A 501-16A-2A 501-17A-1A 501-1B-17B 501-2B-16B 501-3B-15B 501-4B-14B 501-5B-13B 501-6B-12B 501-7B-11B 501-8B-10B 501-9B-9B 501-10B-8B 501-11B-7B 501-12B-6B 501-13B-5B 501-14B-4B 501-15B-3B
233
PS26
547-2 547-3 542-1 542-2 542-3
555-2-5 555-1-6 556-3-1 556-2-2 556-1-3 540-2-1
234
539-B5 PS 539-B4 SGND 539-B3 SGND
503-2B N.C 503-1B N.C
563-2-1 563-1-2
502-16B-2B 502-17B-1B
501-16B-2B 501-17B-1B
500-16B LOCK SD 500-17B 24V
400-9A PS
235
SD6
400-8A SGND 400-7A 24V2
236
237
400-6A DRIVE 539-B2 PS 539-B1 5V2 539-A11 24V2
92
735-1 24V2 735-2 NC 735-3 PGND
ADU LOCK SOLENOID
PS27
238
400-5A 24V2
93
731-1 730-16A CHGYCONT
239
GRID/Y
400-4A DRIVE
MC4 MC5
543-1 543-2 543-3
540-1-2
240
539-A10 DRIVE
731-2 731-3
730-15A CHGYDCV 730-14A GYDCV
400-3A 24V2 400-2A DRIVE
241
CHARGER/Y
541-2-1 541-1-2 557-3-1
539-A9 24V2 539-A8 DRIVE
731-4 731-5 731-6 731-7 539-A7 SGND 731-8
730-13A CHGY_ER 730-12A DEVEDCY 730-11A DEVEACY 730-10A DEVEYDCV 730-9A SGND
242
400-1A N.C 400-16B N.C 400-15B N.C 400-14B 5V2
GRID/M
243
CHARGER/M
PS28
557-2-2 557-1-3 544-2-1
244
539-A6 PS 539-A5 5V2
732-1 732-2 732-3 539-A4 24V2 732-4 732-5
730-8A CHGMCONT 730-7A CHGMDCV 730-6A GMDCV 730-5A CHGM_ER 730-4A DEVEDCM
400-13B PS 400-12B SGND 400-11B 5V2 400-10B PS
245 246
PAPER PICK UP INTERMEDIATE SOLENOID/ FEED CONVEYANC CLUTCH/ BP CLUTCH/2 BP INTERMEDIATE CONVEYANC CLUTCH/3 TRAY BY-PASS INTERMEDIATE UPPER CONVEYANCE CONVEYANCE LIMIT SENSOR INTERMEDIATE SENSOR/2 SENSOR/BP CONVEYANCE SENSOR/1
Appendix-13
247
GRID/C
SD5
544-1-2
539-A3 DRIVE
248
732-6 732-7
730-3A DEVEACM 730-2A DEVEMDCV
400-9B SGND
249
400-8B 5V2
HV1
CHARGER/C
8 9
545-2-1
539-A2 24V2
732-8
730-1A DEVECCLOCK 400-7B PS
250
MC6
545-1-2
539-A1 DRIVE
733-1 733-2 733-3 733-4 733-5 733-6 733-7 733-8
730-16B CHGCCONT 730-15B CHGCDCV 730-14B GCDCV 730-13B CHGC_ER 730-12B DEVEDCC 730-11B DEVEACC 730-10B DEVECDCV 730-9B SGND
251
400-6B SGND
252
GRID/K
400-5B 3.3V 400-4B VR 400-3B SGND 400-2B T1DET(H) 400-1B SGND
253 254 255
DEVELOPING BIAS/Y DEVELOPING BIAS/M DEVELOPING BIAS/C DEVELOPING BIAS/K
CHARGER/K
256
734-1 734-2 734-3 734-4 734-5 734-6 734-7 734-8
730-8B CHGKCONT
257
730-7B CHGKDCV 730-6B GKDCV 730-5B CHGK_ER 730-4B DEVEDCK 730-3B DEVEACK 730-2B DEVEKDCV 730-1B DEVEKCLOCK
414-16A 5V2 414-15A PS 414-14A SGND 414-13A 5V2 414-12A PS 414-11A SGND
258 259 260 261 262
F/G
263
414-10A 5V2 414-9A PS 414-8A SGND
264 265
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
Symbol TS1 TS2 HV1 L2 L3 L4 M29 M30 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M54 MC1 MC2 MC3 MC4 MC5 MC6 PS16 PS17 PS18 PS19 PS20 PS21 PS22 PS23 PS24 PS25 PS26 PS27 PS28 PS55 SD4 SD5 SD6 MS1 TH1 TH2 TH3 TH4 Thermostat /1 Thermostat /2
Part name 1-C 2-C 7-C 1-B 1-B 2-B 1-D 4-H 4-H 4-H 5-H 6-H 6-H 2-D 1-H 1-H 2-I 7-H 7-H 8-H 2-D 2-D 3-D 1-I 2-I 2-I 2-I 3-I 3-I 6-I 7-I 7-I 8-I 3-I 1-H 8-H 7-F 3-D 1-C 3-C 2-C 3-C
Location
Symbol
Part name Developing bias /Y Developing bias /M Developing bias /C Developing bias /K Charger /Y Charger /M Charger /C Charger /K Grid /Y Grid /M Grid /C Grid /K 9-E 9-E 9-E 9-E 7-E 8-E 8-E 8-E 7-E 7-E 8-E 8-E 3-A 1-F
Location
High voltage unit /1 Fixing upper heater lamp /1 Fixing upper heater lamp /2 Fixing lower heater lamp Fixing motor Registration roller motor Loop roller motor ADU reverse motor Reverse/exit motor 2nd transfer pressure/release motor Tray up drive motor /BP Web motor ADU conveyance clutch /2 ADU conveyance clutch /1 ADU Pre-registration clutch Intermediate conveyance clutch /2 Intermediate conveyance clutch /3 Paper feed clutch /BP Fixing pressure/release sensor Fixing exit sensor Front door open/close sensor Reverse/Exit sensor ADU conveyance sensor ADU reverse sensor Registration sensor ADU Pre-registration sensor 2nd Transfer HP sensor Tray upper limit sensor /BP By-pass conveyance sensor Intermediate conveyance sensor /1 Intermediate conveyance sensor /2 Conveyance lever sensor Reverse/Exit solenoid Pick up solenoid /BP ADU lock solenoid Front door interlock switch Fixing temperature sensor /1 Fixing temperature sensor /2 Fixing temperature sensor /3 Fixing temperature sensor /4
PRCB CVDB
Printer control board Conveyance drive board
Appendix-14
5.8
I
266
414-7A 24V2 752-1-3 751-1-6
267
572-1
414-6A DRIVE
(New type only)
M61
752-2-2 751-2-5
268
572-2
414-5A 24V2
PAPER EXIT FAN/1

752-3-1 751-3-4
269
1
572-3 414-4A DRIVE 414-3A 24V2 572-4 414-2A DRIVE 414-1A N.C 414-16B N.C 414-15B N.C 572-7 572-8 572-9 572-10 572-5 572-6 753-1-3 751-4-3 751-5-2 751-6-1
270 271
M62
753-2-2 753-3-1 754-1-3 754-2-2 754-3-1
272
PAPER EXIT FAN/2

414-14B 5V2 414-13B PS 414-12B SGND 414-11B 5V2 414-10B PS 414-9B SGND 414-8B 5V2 414-7B PS 414-6B SGND 736-7A TRANSC 736-8A TRANSCI 736-9A TRANSCER 736-10A TRANSK 736-11A TRANSKI 736-12A TRANSKER 414-2B T2DET(H) 414-1B SGND 738-10 738-9 738-8 738-7 738-6 738-5 736-1B N.C 736-2B N.C 736-3B SGND 736-4B GPCONT 736-5B 2ND_CONT 736-6B 2ND_VI 736-7B 2ND_GAIN 736-8B 2ND_ER 738-4 738-3 738-2 738-1 736-9B SEPA_CNT 736-10B SEPA_ACI 736-11B SEPA_DCI 736-12B SEPA_ER 428-12A PS 428-11A SGND 428-10A 5V2 428-9A PS 428-15A PS 428-14A SGND 428-13A 5V2 414-5B 3.3V 414-4B VR 414-3B SGND
273 274
M63
737-12 736-1A TRANSY 736-2A TRANSYI 736-3A TRANSYER 736-4A TRANSM 736-5A TRANSMI 736-6A TRANSMER 737-11 737-10 737-9 737-8 737-7 737-6
275
PAPER EXIT FAN/3
276 277
1st TRANSFER/Y
278 279
2
1st TRANSFER/M 1st TRANSFER/C
737-4 737-3 737-2 737-1 737-5
2
280 281 282 283 284 285
286
Symbol
1st TRANSFER/K
287
HV2
2nd TRANSFER
428-16A 5V2
288 289 290
3
SEPARATION GUIDE PLATE
3
291 292 293 294
94 95
295
739-1 24V2 739-2 NC 739-3 PGND
F/G
494-4
428-8A SGND
296
493-4
428-7A 24V2 391-8B 24V
297
428-6A DRIVE
C(K)
494-3 494-1 494-2
493-3 493-1 493-2
391-7B KEY_CONT 428-5A 24V2 391-6B PGND 391-5B KEY_SET 391-4B DRIVE 391-3B EM 428-4A DRIVE 428-3A 24V2 428-2A DRIVE 428-1A N.C 391-2B H/L 428-16B N.C 391-1B PGND
298
KEY COUNTER
299 300 301 302
M36
FIXING COOLING FAN/3
4
710-1-2 710-2-1
FIXING COOLING FAN/2 TONER SUPPLY INTERLOCK SWITCH
307-1 307-2 307-3 307-4

392-1 392-2
391-9A DRIVE 391-8A FFAN_ER
428-15B N.C
303
428-14B 5V2
304
M37
392-3 392-4 495-6 495-4 495-3
428-13B PS 391-7A H/L 391-6A PGND 391-9B PGND 391-5A PAT4_DRIVE 391-4A PAT3_DRIVE 428-12B SGND 428-11B 5V2 428-10B PS 428-9B SGND
305 306
MS2
713-1 713-2 716-1 716-2 719-1 719-2 722-1 722-2
307 308
741-8-1
711-8 24V2
309
428-8B 5V2
495-2
391-3A PAT2_DRIVE
310
428-7B PS
741-7-2 741-6-3 741-5-4 741-4-5 741-3-6 741-2-7 741-1-8
495-1
711-7 CONT 711-6 24V2 711-5 CONT 711-4 24V2 724-17 EM 711-3 CONT 711-2 24V2 711-1 CONT 724-16 DRIVE (24V1) 724-15 5V 724-14 TLD_SIG 724-13 SGND 724-12 5V 724-11 TLD_SIG 724-10 SGND 724-9 5V 724-8 TLD_SIG 724-7 SGND 724-6 5V 724-5 TLD_SIG 724-4 SGND 724-3 5V2 724-2 PS 724-1 SGND 706-1 A 706-2 A 706-3 B 706-4 B 706-5 24V2 704-1 5V2 704-2 SGND 704-3 24V2
INDICATOR LAMP
391-2A PAT1_DRIVE
311
495-5
428-6B SGND 391-1A 24V 428-5B 3.3V 428-4B VR 724-18 PGND
312
PRCB(2/2) 2/2
MC14 MC15 MC16 MC17
TONER TONER TONER TONER BOTTLE BOTTLE BOTTLE BOTTLE CLUTCH/Y CLUTCH/M CLUTCH/C CLUTCH/K
5
313
472-1-3
314
428-3B SGND
394-1-4 472-2-2 472-3-1 712-1 712-2 712-3 715-1 715-2 715-3 718-1 718-2 718-3 721-1 721-2 721-3 725-1 725-2 725-3 394-2-3
315
428-2B T3DET(H) 393-1A DRIVE 393-2A EM 428-1B SGND
CHAGER INTAKE FAN
M48
316
M43
393-3A H/L 393-4A PGND 442-17A N.C
394-3-2 394-4-1 395-1-4 395-2-3
317
393-5A DRIVE 393-6A ER
442-16A 5V2 442-15A PS
318
319
442-14A SGND 393-7A H/L
M44
395-3-2 395-4-1 396-1-4 396-2-3
320
442-13A 3.3V3 393-8A PGND 393-9A DRIVE 393-10A EM 442-12A VR 442-11A SGND
321 322
323
442-10A 5V2 393-11A H/L
M45
WRITING WRITING WRITING WRITING DRUM UNIT INTAKE FAN/1 INTAKE FAN/2 EXHAUST FAN/1 EXHAUST FAN/2 FAN
703-1 703-2 703-3
TONER DCPS1 TONER TONER TONER TONER SUPPLY LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL DOOR DETECTION LEVEL DETECTION DETECTION SENSOR/M DETECTION SENSOR/K OPEN/CLOSE 87 86 SENSOR/Y SENSOR/C SENSOR
TLD_Y TLD_M TLD_C TLD_K PS54
TSDB
6
M49
TONER SUPPLY MOTOR/Y
396-3-2 396-4-1 397-1-4 397-2-3
324
442-9A PS 393-12A PGND 393-1B DRIVE 393-2B ER 442-8A SGND 442-7A 5V2
325 326
327
442-6A PS 393-3B H/L
M46 M47
397-3-2 397-4-1 398-1-3 398-2-2 398-3-1
328
442-5A SGND 393-4B PGND 393-5B DRIVE 393-6B EM 393-7B PGND 393-8B TEMP 393-9B SGND 442-2A 24V2 442-1A DRIVE
329
442-4A 24V2 442-3A DRIVE
330 331 332
TEMP /HUM
DCPS2 88 91 90 89
703-4
706-6 24V2 705-1 A 705-2 A 705-3 B 705-4 B 705-5 24V2 705-6 24V2 705-7 N.C 702-4A 726-1 A 726-2 A 726-3 B 726-4 B 726-5 24V2 726-6 24V2 726-7 A 702-8A 702-9A 702-5A 702-6A 702-7A 702-1A 702-2A 702-3A 704-4 24V2 704-5 PGND 704-6 PGND
TEMP/HUMIDITY SENSOR
393-10B HUM
333
442-17B 24V2
703-5 703-6
399-4 399-3 399-2 399-1
393-11B 5V2 393-12B N.C
334
442-16B DRIVE
M50
701-13A-1A 701-12A-2A 701-11A-3A 701-10A-4A 701-9A-5A 701-8A-6A 701-7A-7A 701-6A-8A 701-5A-9A
335
700-13A DRV_ERR 700-12A H/L 700-11A TBY_CLOCK 700-10A TBY_EN 700-9A YBCL_DRIVE 700-8A TBY_SIG 700-7A TBM_CLOCK 700-6A TBM_EN 700-5A MBCL_DRIVE
442-15B 24V2 442-14B DRIVE 442-13B 5V2 442-12B PS 442-11B SGND 442-10B 5V2 442-9B PS 442-8B SGND 442-7B 5V2
336
707-1-6 707-2-5 707-3-4 707-4-3 707-5-2 707-6-1

TONER SUPPLY MOTOR/M
337 338 339 340
Appendix-15
341
M51
727-1-6 727-2-5 727-3-4 727-4-3 727-5-2 727-6-1

TONER SUPPLY MOTOR/C
342 343
TONER SUPPLY MOTOR/K
8 9
344
726-8 A 726-9 B 726-10 B 726-11 24V2 726-12 24V2
702-10A 702-11A 702-12A 702-13A 702-1B 702-2B 708-11 5V2 708-10 SGND 708-9 CONT 708-8 CLOCK 708-7 CW/CCW 708-6 LOCK 708-5 H/L 708-4 PGND 708-3 PGND 708-2 24V2 708-1 24V2 702-11B 702-12B 702-13B 702-8B 702-9B 702-10B 702-5B 702-6B 702-7B 702-3B 702-4B
701-4A-10A 701-3A-11A 701-2A-12A 701-1A-13A 701-13B-1B 701-12B-2B 701-11B-3B 701-10B-4B 701-9B-5B 701-8B-6B
700-4A TBM_SIG 700-3A TB_5V_SIG 700-2A SGND 700-1A TBO_SIG 700-13B CHFAN_ER 700-12B CHFAN_ON 700-11B SGND 700-10B TBC_SIG
442-6B SGND 442-5B CONT 442-4B CLOCK 442-3B CW/CCW 442-2B EM 442-1B H/L
345 346
M52 M53
TONER BOTTLE MOTOR
347
728-1-6 728-2-5 728-3-4 728-4-3 728-5-2 728-6-1
348 349
459-10 5V2 700-9B CBCL_DRIVE 700-8B TBC_EN 459-9 PS
350 351
701-7B-7B 701-6B-8B 701-5B-9B 701-4B-10B 701-3B-11B 701-2B-12B 701-1B-13B
352
459-8 SGND 700-7B TBC_CLOCK 700-6B TBK_SIG 700-5B KBCL_DRIVE 700-4B TBK_EN 700-3B TBK_CLOCK 700-2B DBLT_CNT 700-1B DBLT_CLOCK 459-7 5V2 459-6 PS 459-5 SGND 459-4 PGND 459-3 H/L 459-2 EM 459-1 DRIVE
353 354 355
709-1 709-2 709-3 709-4 709-5 709-6 709-7 709-8 709-9 709-10 709-11
356 357 358 359
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
Symbol C(K) TEMP/HUM HV2 M36 M37 M43 M44 M45 M46 M47 M48 M49 M50 M51 M52 M53 M61 M62 M63 MC14 MC15 MC16 MC17 PS54 TLD Y TLD M TLD C TLD K MS2 Key counter
Part name 3-D 7-D 2-C 4-D 4-E 5-D 6-D 6-D 6-D 7-D 5-E 7-I 7-I 8-I 8-I 9-H 1-D 1-D 1-D 5-I 5-I 5-I 5-I 6-E 5-E 6-E 6-E 6-E 4-I 5-D 3-F 3-F 3-E 2-F 2-F 2-F 2-E 5-F Temp/Humidity sensor High voltage unit /2 Fixing cooling fan /3 Fixing cooling fan /2 Writing intake fan /1 Writing intake fan /2 Writing exhaust fan /1 Writing exhaust fan /2 Drum unit fan Chager intake fan Toner supply motor /Y Toner supply motor /M Toner supply motor /C Toner supply motor /K Toner bottle motor Paper exit fan /1 Paper exit fan /2 Paper exit fan /3 Toner bottle clutch /Y Toner bottle clutch /M Toner bottle clutch /C Toner bottle clutch /K Toner supply door open/close sensor Toner level detection sensor /Y Toner level detection sensor /M Toner level detection sensor /C Toner level detection sensor /K Toner supply interlock switch Indicator lamp Guide plate Separation 2nd transfer 1st transfer /Y 1st transfer /M 1st transfer /C 1st transfer /K
Location
TSDB
Toner supply drive board
Appendix-16

Bizhub C500FieldService

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Bizhub C500FieldService

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

SERVICE MANUAL

8050/CF5001 C500 8150

2004. 12 Ver. 3.0

Confidential for internal use only, do not distribute

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION

Do not touch with wet hand

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

PROHIBITED ACTIONS DANGER

Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between relay contacts)

Making any modification to the copier unless instructed by KMBT

Using parts not specified by KMBT

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE

Connection to Power Supply WARNING

Ground Lead WARNING

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Ground Lead WARNING

Power Plug and Cord WARNING

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Power Plug and Cord WARNING

Prohibited Installation Place WARNING

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

When not using product for a long time WARNING

Inspection before Servicing CAUTION

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Inspection before Servicing CAUTION

Work Performed with the Copier Powered WARNING

Safety Checkpoints WARNING

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Safety Checkpoints WARNING

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS DANGER : HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Overall protection circuit

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

PM count setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

Password setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49

Parts counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40

V ERROR CODE LIST

IV JAM CODE LIST

IMPORTANT INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-10

KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

Telephone number setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49

Image adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-62

Image quality adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82

IV JAM CODE LIST

7.4.4 7.4.5 7.4.6 7.4.7 7.4.8 7.4.9 7.5 7.5.1

V ERROR CODE LIST

7.6 7.7 7.8

7.8.7 7.9 8.1

List output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-112 47 mode/multi mode setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-113 ii

9. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-139